USER GUIDE

Trimble® FmX® Integrated

Display

Version 9.25
1
Revision B
October 2015
Corporate Office Receipt of software Fixes or other enhancements shall not serve to
extend the limited warranty period.
Trimble Navigation Limited For purposes of this warranty the following definitions shall apply: (1)
935 Stewart Drive "Fix(es)' means an error correction or other update created to fix a
Sunnyvale, CA 94085 previous software version that does not substantially conform to its
USA Trimble specifications; (2) "Minor Update" occurs when enhancements
www.trimble.com are made to current features in a software program; and (3) "Major
Agriculture Upgrade" occurs when significant new features are added to software,
or when a new product containing new features replaces the further
10368 Westmoor Drive development of a current product line. Trimble reserves the right to
Westminster, Colorado 80021 determine, in its sole discretion, what constitutes a Fix, Minor Update, or
USA Major Upgrade.
800-361-1249 (toll free in USA) Gson components licensed under the Apache 2.0 License. The source is
+1-937-245-5154 Phone available from http://code.google.com/p/google-gson/. Google
+1-937-233-9441 Fax MVEL components licensed under the Apache 2.0 Llicense. The source is
www.trimble.com available from http://code.google.com/p/mvel.codehause.org. Google
Email: [email protected] Guava components listed under the Apache 2.0 License. The source is
available from http://code.google.com/p/guava-libraries. MapQuest
Legal Notices content licensed under the Open Data Commons Database License
© 2015 Trimble Navigation Limited. All rights reserved. (DbCL). The source is available from http://developer.mapquest.com.
Trimble, the Globe & Triangle logo, EZ-Boom, EZ-Guide, EZ-Pilot, EZ- APACE LICENSE (Version 2.0, January 2004)
Steer, FarmWorks Software, FmX, GreenSeeker, OmniSTAR, Trimble http://www.apache.org/licenses/
Ready, Tru Count Air Clutch, and WM-Drain are trademarks of Trimble TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE,
Navigation Limited, registered in the United States and in other REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
countries. 1. Definitions
Autopilot, AutoSense, CenterPoint, CFX-750, Connected Farm, EZ- "License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and
Remote, Farm Works, Farm Works Mapping, Farm Works Software, distribution as defined by Sections 1 through Section 9 of this document.
Field-IQ, FieldLevel, FM-750, FM-1000, FreeForm, LiquiBlock, ""Licensor " shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the
NextSwath, Rawson, RTX, T3, TMX-2050, TrueGuide, TrueTracker, VRS copyright owner that is granting the License.
Now, VRS, WM-Topo, XCN-2050, xFill, and Zephyr are trademarks of "Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other
Trimble Navigation Limited. entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with
For STL support, the software uses the Moscow Center for SPARC that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the
Technology adaptation of the SGI Standard Template Library. Copyright power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such
© 1994 Hewlett-Packard Company, Copyright © 1996, 97 Silicon entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent
Graphics Computer Systems, Inc., Copyright © 1997 Moscow Center for (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of
SPARC Technology. such entity.
Portions Copyright © 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). "You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising
Portions Copyright © 2003, Bitstream Inc. permissions granted by this License.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. "Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications,
including but not limited to software source code, documentation source,
and configuration files.
Release Notice "Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical
This is the October2015 release (Revision B ) of the FmX integrated transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited
display documentation. It applies to version 9.25 of the display to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to
software. other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object
Legal Notices form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright
The following limited warranties give you specific legal rights. You may notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided
have others, which vary from state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction. in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object
Product Limited Warranty form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the
Trimble warrants that this Trimble product and its internal components editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications
(the 'Product") shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes
and will substantially conform to Trimble's applicable published of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain
specifications for the Product for a period of one (1) year, starting from separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the
the earlier of (i) the date of installation, or (ii) six (6) months from the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
date of original Product shipment from Trimble. This warranty applies "Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original
only to the Product if installed by Trimble or a dealer authorized by version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or
Trimble to perform Product installation services. Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for
inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal
Software Components Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the
All Product software components (sometimes hereinafter also referred purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic,
to as "Software") are licensed solely for use as an integral part of the verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its
Product and are not sold. Any software accompanied by a separate end representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic
user license agreement ("EULA") shall be governed by the terms, mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems
conditions, restrictions and limited warranty terms of such EULA that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of
notwithstanding the preceding paragraph. discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is
During the limited warranty period you will be entitled to receive such conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the
Fixes to the Product software that Trimble releases and makes copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
commercially available and for which it does not charge separately, "Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on
subject to the procedures for delivery to purchasers of Trimble products behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and
generally. If you have purchased the Product from an authorized subsequently incorporated within the Work.
Trimble dealer rather than from Trimble directly, Trimble may, at its 2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this
option, forward the software Fix to the Trimble dealer for final License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide,
distribution to you. Minor Updates, Major Upgrades, new products, or non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to
substantially new software releases, as identified by Trimble, are reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly
expressly excluded from this update process and limited warranty. perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works
in Source or Object form.

2 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Copyright © 2013 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without
import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was conditions:
submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and
a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a either this permission notice or a reference to
Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or http://oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies or
contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to substantial portions of the Software.
You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
litigation is filed. KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON
modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
following conditions: LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
copy of this License; and SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall
that You changed the files; and not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon
distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from Graphics, Inc.
the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain MAPQUEST PLATFORM TERMS OF USE (Last Updated: November 1,
to any part of the Derivative Works; and 2011)
If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then Community Edition License Agreement
any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy INTRODUCTION. MapQuest has been helping people find places and
of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding get maps and directions for over 40 years. We make the MapQuest
those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in APIs, our Open Services (as described at
at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed http://open.mapquestapi.com/), Community Accounts and other
as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or developer services (in short, the "MapQuest Services"), along with the
documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a maps, driving directions and other content delivered through the
display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third- MapQuest Services (the "MapQuest Content"), available without
party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for charge to encourage developers to use these services and content in
informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may developing their applications and websites. We want you to be creative
add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You and build awesome applications and websites that thrill your users. All
distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the we ask is that you comply with the terms that are included in these
Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be Terms of Use.
construed as modifying the License. We will provide the developer community at-large with support in
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and various forms, such as forums, blog posts or FAQs. Since we're providing
may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, the MapQuest Services for free, we don't provide individual technical
reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such support or warranties for the Community Services, but if you want to
Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and receive technical support and warranties, we have a product for you.
distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in Please check out our MapQuest Platform Services Enterprise Edition and
this License. learn more about the services we will provide for reasonable fees.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any If you choose to use any of the MapQuest Services or if you set up a
Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to Community Account, you are agreeing to abide by these Terms of Use
the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, and are forming an agreement between yourself and MapQuest, Inc.
without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, ("MapQuest"). If you do not want to abide by these Terms of Use, then
nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate don't use the MapQuest Services.
license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such LICENSES FROM MAPQUEST TO YOU.
Contributions. 2.1. MapQuest Services License. MapQuest grants you a non-exclusive,
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade non-assignable, non-sublicensable, revocable limited license to use the
names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, MapQuest Services during the Term of these Terms of Use as provided
except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the by MapQuest in the manner permitted in these Terms of Use.
origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file. 2.2. MapQuest Content License. MapQuest grants you a non-exclusive,
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed non-assignable, non-sublicensable, revocable limited license access, use,
to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides publicly perform and publicly display the MapQuest Content as the
its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR MapQuest Content is provided through the MapQuest Services and in
CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without the manner permitted by these Terms of Use.
limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, GENERAL RESTRICTIONS, ADDITIONAL LEGAL NOTICE, RESERVATION
MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are OF RIGHTS.
solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or 3.1. Restrictions. Except as expressly authorized by MapQuest, You
redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your must not:
exercise of permissions under this License. decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, or otherwise attempt to
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether derive any source code from the MapQuest Services or MapQuest
in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by Content, other than the Open Services;
applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed interfere or disrupt MapQuest servers or networks, or disobey any
to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including network access or security requirements, policies, procedures or
any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any regulations of MapQuest (including the enabling of any viruses, Trojan
character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to horses, trap doors, back doors, worms, time bombs, cancelbots, adware,
use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, spyware or other computer programming routines designed or intended
work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other to damage, detrimentally interfere with, surreptitiously intercept or
commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been expropriate any system, data or personal information);
advised of the possibility of such damages. use the MapQuest Services as a means to engage in conduct that
LWGL LICENSE reflects poorly upon, disparages or devalues MapQuest's reputation or
ODC DATABASE CONTENTS LICENSE goodwill, as determined in MapQuest's sole discretion;
SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0, Sept. 18, 2008)

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 3

use the MapQuest Services, other than the Open Services, in MapQuest, the development of which required the expenditure of
conjunction with any commercial application not publicly available substantial time and money. As between MapQuest and You,
without charge (other than mobile applications for which users pay a fee MapQuest retains exclusive ownership of any and all rights, title and
to download/install the application). If your application does not fit this interest (including all intellectual property rights) in the MapQuest
criteria and you would like to discuss additional options for using the Services and MapQuest Content, and you shall not acquire any rights,
MapQuest Services please contact [email protected]; express or implied, in the foregoing by virtue of these Terms of Use other
use the MapQuest Services, other than the Open Services, to process or than otherwise expressly set forth. For purposes of these Terms of Use,
generate data for any third party (other than for end users as expressly the term "Trademarks" means all trademarks, trade names, service
permitted hereunder); marks, logos, domain names, along with any other distinctive brand
use the MapQuest Services with any content or product that falsely features of MapQuest or its suppliers. All use by You of Trademarks
expresses or implies that such content or product is sponsored or shall inure to the benefit of MapQuest. Further, You shall not (a) display
endorsed by MapQuest; a Trademark as the most prominent element on any page of Your
use the MapQuest Services in conjunction with a site or application website, application or paper map; (b) display a Trademark in a manner
which contains or displays adult content or promotes illegal activities, that is misleading, defamatory, infringing, libelous, disparaging, obscene
gambling, or the sale of tobacco or alcohol to persons under twenty-one or otherwise objectionable to MapQuest as determined by MapQuest in
(21) years of age; its sole discretion; or (c) remove, distort or alter any element of a
3.2. Additional Legal Requirements. In addition to the restrictions set Trademark.
forth in Section 3.1, your use of the MapQuest Services and MapQuest DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES. THE MAPQUEST SERVICES AND
Content is subject to the Additional Legal Requirements which are MAPQUEST CONTENT ARE PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" AND "AS
incorporated and made a part of these Terms of Use. Please read the AVAILABLE" BASIS. MAPQUEST DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL
Additional Legal Requirements carefully as they include usage limits and WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
additional restrictions that may impact your plans for development. LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
3.3. Reservation of Rights. MapQuest reserves all rights not expressly PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY OR NON-INFRINGEMENT.
granted in these Terms of Use and you may not use the MapQuest MAPQUEST DOES NOT REPRESENT OR WARRANT THAT THE
Services or MapQuest Content in any manner not expressly authorized MAPQUEST SERVICES OR CONTENT, OR ANY PORTION THEREOF, IS OR
in these Terms of Use. WILL BE FREE OF DEFECTS OR ERRORS (OR THAT ANY SUCH DEFECTS
LICENSE FROM YOU TO MAPQUEST. If you upload any data, feedback, OR ERRORS WILL BE CORRECTED), VIRUS FREE, ABLE TO OPERATE ON
ideas, suggestions, content, points of interest (including any points of AN UNINTERRUPTED BASIS, MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR CAPABLE
interest that include Trademarks) or other material to MapQuest OF BEING INTEGRATED INTO OR WITH YOUR COMPUTER SYSTEM,
(collectively "Your Content"), you hereby grant MapQuest a perpetual, APPLICATIONS OR NETWORK. FURTHER, MAPQUEST DOES NOT
worldwide, non-exclusive, royalty-free license to access, archive, WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR
reproduce, publicly display, translate, modify the format or the display THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE MAPQUEST SERVICES, OR ANY
of, distribute, transmit, stream, cache, overlay, seam, perform, PORTION THEREOF, IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY,
sublicense, and otherwise use Your Content with or without attribution QUALITY, RELIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE. THIS DISCLAIMER
and without financial obligation, in whole or in part, via any method for CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THESE TERMS OF USE. IF THIS
any purpose. MapQuest makes no assertion of ownership over Your EXCLUSION IS HELD UNENFORCEABLE, THEN ALL EXPRESS AND
Content, and you retain all intellectual property rights to Your Content, IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD
subject to the license you grant to MapQuest above. OF FIFTEEN (15) DAYS AFTER THE EFFECTIVE DATE, AND NO
MODIFICATIONS TO THESE TERMS OF USE AND THE SERVICES. WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD.
MapQuest reserves the right to change or modify these Terms of Use, LIMITATION ON LIABILITY. NEITHER MAPQUEST NOR ITS AFFILIATES
the MapQuest Services and/or the MapQuest Content. Please check NOR ANY OF THEIR SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY
these Terms of Use, including the Additional Legal Requirements OTHER THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL
periodically for changes. Your continued use of the MapQuest Services OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE ARISING OUT OF THE
or MapQuest Content following the posting of any changes to the Terms POSSESSION OF, ACCESS TO, USE OF, OR INABILITY TO ACCESS OR
of Use constitutes acceptance of those changes. USE THE MAPQUEST SERVICES OR MAPQUEST CONTENT, OR ANY
TERMINATION. MapQuest may terminate these Terms of Use and/or PORTION, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS, DATA
the provision of the MapQuest Services or MapQuest Content at any LOSS, COST OF PROCUREMENT FOR SUBSTITUTE GOODS, OR
time, for any reason, with or without notice. COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, EVEN IF MAPQUEST HAS
PRIVACY POLICY AND END USER TERMS. BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, AND
7.1. Privacy Policy. MapQuest's collection and use of personally REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM OR LIABILITY IS BASED UPON
identifiable information is governed by the AOL Network Privacy Policy, ANY CONTRACT, TORT, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR OTHER LEGAL OR
available at http://about.aol.com/aolnetwork/aol_pp. EQUITABLE THEORY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MAPQUEST'S TOTAL
7.2. End User Terms. End users shall only be entitled to use the AGGREGATE LIABILITY UNDER THESE TERMS OF USE EXCEED THE
MapQuest Services and MapQuest Content if they accept the then LESSER OF (A) THE TOTAL AMOUNT OF FEES PAID BY YOU TO
current end user Terms of Use located at MAPQUEST UNDER THESE TERMS OF USEFOR THE TWELVE (12)
http://info.mapquest.com/terms-of-use/. MapQuest reserves the right MONTHS PRECEDING THE DATE OF THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO SUCH
to amend and/or replace these terms and the form and manner of CLAIM; OR (B) FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS ($500).
presentation. You must provide a hypertext link at the bottom of each YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE
page in your website or application where the MapQuest Services or PARTICIPATION IN AND USE OF THE MAPQUEST SERVICES AND
MapQuest Content can be viewed or accessed, or within the terms of MAPQUEST CONTENT IS DONE AT YOUR OWN RISK AND THAT YOU
use of your application or website, to the end user terms of use. ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE AND LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGE SUSTAINED
ACCESS AND USAGE DATA. TO YOUR COMPUTER SYSTEM, NETWORK OR DATA RESULTING FROM
8.1. Credentials. MapQuest, at its discretion, may require you to create SUCH PARTICIPATION OR USE.
an account and obtain an access key and other related credentials SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF CERTAIN
(collectively "Credentials") to use the MapQuest Services or certain WARRANTIES OR THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR
aspects of the MapQuest Services. You are responsible for maintaining INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
the confidentiality of your Credentials and for any usage or abuse of the INDEMNITY. You agree to indemnify, defend and hold MapQuest and
MapQuest Services or MapQuest Content by anyone using your its affiliates, and each of their officers, directors, employees, agents, co-
Credentials. branders or other partners (as well as each of their suppliers), successors
8.2. Usage Data. MapQuest's servers record information when you visit and permitted assigns ("Indemnified Parties") harmless from and
MapQuest websites or when applications and/or Credentials call or against any third party claim or action, including any liability, cost, losses,
invoke the MapQuest Services. This information may include, without damages, expenses, and attorney's fees, arising from or in any way
limitation, the URL, IP address, browser type, Credential and access times related to Your access, use or participation in the MapQuest Services
and dates. MapQuest may use this information to promote, operate, (including claims related to Your Content and any use of the MapQuest
and improve MapQuest services, products and properties. Services with software, data, content, systems, or other technology not
PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. You acknowledge and agree the MapQuest provided by MapQuest), any violation of these Terms of Use, or any
Services and MapQuest Content are works for purposes of copyright alleged infringement of a patent, copyright, trademark, trade secret, or
law, and embody valuable, confidential, trade secret information of other intellectual property right. MapQuest shall use good faith efforts

4 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

to provide you with prompt notice of any such claim or action; provided the ODbL is also an agreement in contract for users of this Database to
however, you agree that, upon MapQuest's written request, MapQuest act in certain ways in return for accessing this Database.
shall control the defense or settlement of any such claim or action and Databases can contain a wide variety of types of content (images,
you shall provide reasonable cooperation to MapQuest. You may not audiovisual material, and sounds all in the same database, for example),
settle an indemnifiable claim without obtain MapQuest's prior written and so the ODbL only governs the rights over the Database, and not the
consent. contents of the Database individually. Licensors should use the ODbL
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You agree to comply with all export and import together with another license for the contents, if the contents have a
laws and restrictions and regulations of the United States or any foreign single set of rights that uniformly covers all of the contents. If the
agency or authority, and not to export or re-export MapQuest Services contents have multiple sets of different rights, Licensors should describe
or any direct product thereof in violation of any such restrictions, laws or what rights govern what contents together in the individual record or in
regulations, or without all necessary approvals. some other way that clarifies what rights apply.
NOTICES AND TRANSACTING ELECTRONICALLY. You understand and Sometimes the contents of a database, or the database itself, can be
agree that MapQuest is an online service and that you are transacting covered by other rights not addressed here (such as private contracts,
with MapQuest electronically. MapQuest shall provide electronic trade mark over the name, or privacy rights / data protection rights over
notices by posting them on this website and/or by sending an email to information in the contents), and so you are advised that you may have
any account associated with your Credentials. to consult other documents or clear other rights before doing activities
GENERAL PROVISIONS. not covered by this License.
15.1. Entire Agreement. These Terms of Use constitute the entire The Licensor (as defined below) and You (as defined below) agree as
agreement between MapQuest and You with respect to the subject follows:
matter of these Terms of Use, and supersedes all prior agreements, 1.0 Definitions of Capitalised Words
understandings and communications between MapQuest and You with "Collective Database" – Means this Database in unmodified form as part
respect to such subject matter. No modification or amendment to these of a collection of independent databases in themselves that together are
Terms of Use shall be effective unless in writing by MapQuest. assembled into a collective whole. A work that constitutes a Collective
15.2. Choice of Law; Jurisdiction. These Terms of Use are made under Database will not be considered a Derivative Database.
and shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of "Convey" – As a verb, means Using the Database, a Derivative
the Commonwealth of Virginia (except for its conflicts of laws principles) Database, or the Database as part of a Collective Database in any way
and specifically excluding f the United Nations Convention on Contracts that enables a Person to make or receive copies of the Database or a
for the International Sale of Goods. MapQuest and You expressly agree Derivative Database. Conveying does not include interaction with a user
that exclusive jurisdiction for any claim or dispute relating to or arising through a computer network, or creating and Using a Produced Work,
out of these Terms of Use resides in the state courts in Loudoun County, where no transfer of a copy of the Database or a Derivative Database
Virginia and the federal courts of the Eastern District of Virginia occurs.
(Alexandria Division) and further agree and expressly consent to the "Contents" – The contents of this Database, which includes the
exercise of personal jurisdiction in such state and federal courts of information, independent works, or other material collected into the
Virginia in connection with any such dispute. Database. For example, the contents of the Database could be factual
15.3. Severability; Waiver. If any provision in these Terms of Use should data or works such as images, audiovisual material, text, or sounds.
be held illegal or unenforceable by a court having jurisdiction, such "Database" – A collection of material (the Contents) arranged in a
provision shall be modified to the extent necessary to render it systematic or methodical way and individually accessible by electronic
enforceable without losing its intent, or severed from these Terms of Use or other means offered under the terms of this License.
if no such modification is possible, and other provisions of these Terms of "Database Directive" – Means Directive 96/9/EC of the European
Use shall remain in full force and effect. A waiver by either MapQuest or Parliament and of the Council of 11 March 1996 on the legal protection
You (as applicable) of any term or condition of these Terms of Use or any of databases, as amended or succeeded.
breach thereof, in any one instance, shall not waive such term or "Database Right" – Means rights resulting from the Chapter III
condition or any subsequent breach thereof. ("suigeneris") rights in the Database Directive (as amended and as
15.4. Public Statements. You acknowledge and agree that MapQuest transposed by member states), which includes the Extraction and Re-
may make any public statements regarding the existence of these utilisation of the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents, as well as
Terms of Use or the relationship described herein, without Your consent. any similar rights available in the relevant jurisdiction under Section
15.5. Survival. Any term or condition of these Terms of Use that by its 10.4.
nature would logically survive termination or expiration of these Terms "Derivative Database" – Means a database based upon the Database,
of Use, including but not limited to protections of proprietary rights, and includes any translation, adaptation, arrangement, modification, or
indemnifications, and limitations of liability, shall survive such any other alteration of the Database or of a Substantial part of the
termination or expiration. Contents. This includes, but is not limited to, Extracting or Re-utilising the
15.6. Independent Contractors. The parties to these Terms of Use are whole or a Substantial part of the Contents in a new Database.
independent contractors. Neither party is an agent, representative or "Extraction" – Means the permanent or temporary transfer of all or a
partner of the other party. Neither party shall have any right, power or Substantial part of the Contents to another medium by any means or in
authority to enter into any agreement for or on behalf of, or incur any any form.
obligation or liability of, or otherwise to bind, the other party. "License" – Means this license agreement and is both a license of rights
15.7. Equitable Remedies. You acknowledge and agree that monetary such as copyright and Database Rights and an agreement in contract.
damages may be insufficient to compensate MapQuest for an actual or "Licensor" – Means the Person that offers the Database under the terms
anticipated breach of these Terms of Use by you. You agree that in such of this License.
circumstances MapQuest shall be entitled to seek equitable remedies "Person" – Means a natural or legal person or a body of persons
(including preliminary and permanent injunctions), in addition to any corporate or incorporate.
other remedies available to MapQuest at law or hereunder. "Produced Work" – a work (such as an image, audiovisual material, text,
15.8. Statute of Limitations. You agree that regardless of any statute or or sounds) resulting from using the whole or a Substantial part of the
law to the contrary, any claim or cause of action arising out of or related Contents (via a search or other query) from this Database, a Derivative
to use of the MapQuest Services or these Terms of Use must be filed by Database, or this Database as part of a Collective Database.
you within one (1) year after such claim or cause of action arose or be "Publicly" – means to Persons other than You or under Your control by
forever barred. either more than 50% ownership or by the power to direct their activities
15.9. Consent to Further Contacts. You agree that MapQuest may (such as contracting with an independent consultant).
contact You with respect to these Terms of Use, any other MapQuest "Re-utilisation" – means any form of making available to the public all or
products and services, and in relation to any marketing related- a Substantial part of the Contents by the distribution of copies, by
purposes. renting, by online or other forms of transmission.
ODC Open Database License (ODbL) "Substantial" – Means substantial in terms of quantity or quality or a
The Open Database License (ODbL) is a license agreement intended to combination of both. The repeated and systematic Extraction or Re-
allow users to freely share, modify, and use this Database while utilisation of insubstantial parts of the Contents may amount to the
maintaining this same freedom for others. Many databases are covered Extraction or Re-utilisation of a Substantial part of the Contents.
by copyright, and therefore this document licenses these rights. Some "Use" – As a verb, means doing any act that is restricted by copyrightor
jurisdictions, mainly in the European Union, have specific rights that Database Rights whether in the original medium or any other; and
cover databases, and so the ODbL addresses these rights, too. Finally, includes without limitation distributing, copying, publicly performing,

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 5

publicly displaying, and preparing derivative works of the Database, as to collect such royalties for any exercise by You of the rights granted
well as modifying the Database as may be technically necessary to use under this License; and,
it in a different mode or format. c. Voluntary license schemes. The Licensor waives the right to collect
"You" – Means a Person exercising rights under this License who has not royalties, whether individually or, in the event that the Licensor is a
previously violated the terms of this License with respect to the member of a collecting society that administers voluntary licensing
Database, or who has received express permission from the Licensor to schemes, via that society, from any exercise by You of the rights granted
exercise rights under this License despite a previous violation. under this License.
Words in the singular include the plural and vice versa. 3.3 The right to release the Database under different terms, or to stop
2.0 What this License covers distributing or making available the Database, is reserved. Note that this
2.1. Legal effect of this document. This License is: Database may be multiple-licensed, and so You may have the choice of
a. A license of applicable copyright and neighbouring rights; using alternative licenses for this Database. Subject to Section 10.4, all
b. A license of the Database Right; and other rights not expressly granted by Licensor are reserved.
c. An agreement in contract between You and the Licensor. 4.0 Conditions of Use
2.2 Legal rights covered. This License covers the legal rights in the 4.1 The rights granted in Section 3 above are expressly made subject to
Database, including: Your complying with the following conditions of use. These are
a. Copyright. Any copyright or neighbouring rights in the Database. The important conditions of this License, and if You fail to follow them, You
copyright licensed includes any individual elements of the Database, but will be in material breach of its terms.
does not cover the copyright over the Contents independent of this 4.2 Notices. If You Publicly Convey this Database, any Derivative
Database. See Section 2.4 for details. Copyright law varies between Database, or the Database as part of a Collective Database, then You
jurisdictions, but is likely to cover: the Database model or schema, which must:
is the structure, arrangement, and organization of the Database, and can a. Do so only under the terms of this License or another license
also include the Database tables and table indexes; the data entry and permitted under Section 4.4;
output sheets; and the Field names of Contents stored in the Database; b. Include a copy of this License (or, as applicable, a license permitted
b. Database Rights. Database Rights only extend to the Extraction and under Section 4.4) or its Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) with the
Re-utilisation of the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents. Database or Derivative Database, including both in the Database or
Database Rights can apply even when there is no copyright over the Derivative Database and in any relevant documentation; and
Database. Database Rights can also apply when the Contents are c. Keep intact any copyright or Database Right notices and notices that
removed from the Database and are elected and arranged in a way that refer to this License.
would not infringe any applicable copyright; and d. If it is not possible to put the required notices in a particular file due to
c. Contract. This is an agreement between You and the Licensor for its structure, then You must include the notices in a location (such as a
access to the Database. In return you agree to certain conditions of use relevant directory) where users would be likely to look for it.
on this access as outlined in this License. 4.3 Notice for using output (Contents). Creating and Using a Produced
2.3 Rights not covered. Work does not require the notice in Section 4.2. However, if you Publicly
a. This License does not apply to computer programs used in the making Use a Produced Work, You must include a notice associated with the
or operation of the Database; Produced Work reasonably calculated to make any Person that uses,
b. This License does not cover any patents over the Contents or the views, accesses, interacts with, or is otherwise exposed to the Produced
Database; and Work aware that Content was obtained from the Database, Derivative
c. This License does not cover any trademarks associated with the Database, or the Database as part of a Collective Database, and that it is
Database. available under this License.
2.4 Relationship to Contents in the Database. The individual items of the a. Example notice. The following text will satisfy notice under
Contents contained in this Database may be covered by other rights, Section 4.3: Contains information from DATABASE NAME, which is
including copyright, patent, data protection, privacy, or personality rights, made available here under the Open Database License (ODbL).
and this License does not cover any rights (other than Database Rights DATABASE NAME should be replaced with the name of the Database
or in contract) in individual Contents contained in the Database. For and a hyperlink to the URI of the Database. "Open Database License"
example, if used on a Database of images (the Contents), this License should contain a hyperlink to the URI of the text of this License. If
would not apply to copyright over individual images, which could have hyperlinks are not possible, You should include the plain text of the
their own separate licenses, or one single license covering all of the required URI's with the above notice.
rights over the images. 4.4 Share alike.
3.0 Rights granted a. Any Derivative Database that You Publicly Use must be only under
3.1 Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, the Licensor the terms of:
grants to You a worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive, terminable (but i. This License;
only under Section 9) license to Use the Database for the duration of any ii. A later version of this License similar in spirit to this License; or
applicable copyright and Database Rights. These rights explicitly include iii. A compatible license.
commercial use, and do not exclude any field of endeavour. To the If You license the Derivative Database under one of the licenses
extent possible in the relevant jurisdiction, these rights may be exercised mentioned in (iii), You must comply with the terms of that license.
in all media and formats whether now known or created in the future. b. For the avoidance of doubt, Extraction or Re-utilisation of the whole or
The rights granted cover, for example: a Substantial part of the Contents into a new database is a Derivative
a. Extraction and Re-utilisation of the whole or a Substantial part of the Database and must comply with Section 4.4.
Contents; c. Derivative Databases and Produced Works. A Derivative Database is
b. Creation of Derivative Databases; Publicly Used and so must comply with Section 4.4. if a Produced Work
c. Creation of Collective Databases; created from the Derivative Database is Publicly Used.
d. Creation of temporary or permanent reproductions by any means and d. Share Alike and additional Contents. For the avoidance of doubt, You
in any form, in whole or in part, including of any Derivative Databases or must not add Contents to Derivative Databases under Section 4.4 a that
as a part of Collective Databases; and are incompatible with the rights granted under this License.
e. Distribution, communication, display, lending, making available, or e. Compatible licenses. Licensors may authorise a proxy to determine
performance to the public by any means and in any form, in whole or in compatible licenses under Section 4.4 a iii. If they do so, the authorised
part, including of any Derivative Database or as a part of Collective proxy's public statement of acceptance of a compatible license grants
Databases. You permission to use the compatible license.
3.2 Compulsory license schemes. For the avoidance of doubt: 4.5 Limits of Share Alike. The requirements of Section 4.4 do not apply
a. Non-waivable compulsory license schemes. In those jurisdictions in in the following:
which the right to collect royalties through any statutory or compulsory a. For the avoidance of doubt, You are not required to license Collective
licensing scheme cannot be waived, the Licensor reserves the exclusive Databases under this License if You incorporate this Database or a
right to collect such royalties for any exercise by You of the rights Derivative Database in the collection, but this License still applies to this
granted under this License; Database or a Derivative Database as a part of the Collective Database;
b. Waivable compulsory license schemes. In those jurisdictions in which b. Using this Database, a Derivative Database, or this Database as part
the right to collect royalties through any statutory or compulsory of a Collective Database to create a Produced Work does not create a
licensing scheme can be waived, the Licensor waives the exclusive right Derivative Database for purposes of Section 4.4; and

6 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

c. Use of a Derivative Database internally within an organisation is not to b. Fair dealing, fair use, or any other legally recognised limitation or
the public and therefore does not fall under the requirements of Section exception to infringement of copyright or other applicable laws.
4.4. 6.2 This License does not affect any rights of lawful users to Extract and
4.6 Access to Derivative Databases. If You Publicly Use a Re-utilise insubstantial parts of the Contents, evaluated quantitatively or
DerivativeDatabase or a Produced Work from a Derivative Database, qualitatively, for any purposes whatsoever, including creating a
You must also offer to recipients of the Derivative Database or Produced Derivative Database (subject to other rights over the Contents, see
Work a copy in a machine readable form of: Section 2.4). The repeated and systematic Extraction or Re-utilisation of
a. The entire Derivative Database; or insubstantial parts of the Contents may however amount to the
b. A file containing all of the alterations made to the Database or the Extraction or Re-utilisation of a Substantial part of the Contents.
method of making the alterations to the Database (such as an 7.0 Warranties and Disclaimer7.1 The Database is licensed by the
algorithm), including any additional Contents, that make up all the Licensor "as is" and without any warranty of any kind, either express,
differences between the Database and the Derivative Database. The implied, or arising by statute, custom, course of dealing, or trade usage.
Derivative Database (under a.) or alteration file (under b.) must be Licensor specifically disclaims any and all implied warranties or
available at no more than a reasonable production cost for physical conditions of title, non-infringement, accuracy or completeness, the
distributions and free of charge if distributed over the internet. presence or absence of errors, fitness for a particular purpose,
4.7 Technological measures and additional terms merchantability, or otherwise.
a. This License does not allow You to impose (except subject to Section Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties, so
4.7 b.) any terms or any technological measures on the Database, a this exclusion may not apply to You.
Derivative Database, or the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents 8.0 Limitation of liability
that alter or restrict the terms of this License, or any rights granted under 8.1 Subject to any liability that may not be excluded or limited by law,
it, or have the effect or intent of restricting the ability of any person to the Licensor is not liable for, and expressly excludes, all liability for loss or
exercise those rights. damage however and whenever caused to anyone by any use under
b. Parallel distribution. You may impose terms or technological this License, whether by You or by anyone else, and whether caused by
measures on the Database, a Derivative Database, or the whole or a any fault on the part of the Licensor or not. This exclusion of liability
Substantial part of the Contents (a "Restricted Database") in includes, but is not limited to, any special, incidental, consequential,
contravention of Section 4.74 a. only if You also make a copy of the punitive, or exemplary damages such as loss of revenue, data,
Database or a Derivative Database available to the recipient of the anticipated profits, and lost business. This exclusion applies even if the
Restricted Database: Licensor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
i. That is available without additional fee; 8.2 If liability may not be excluded by law, it is limited to actual and
ii. That is available in a medium that does not alter or restrict the terms direct financial loss to the extent it is caused by proved negligence on the
of this License, or any rights granted under it, or have the effect or intent part of the Licensor.
of restricting the ability of any person to exercise those rights (an 9.0 Termination of Your rights under this License
"Unrestricted Database"); and 9.1 Any breach by You of the terms and conditions of this License
iii. The Unrestricted Database is at least as accessible to the recipient as automatically terminates this License with immediate effect and without
a practical matter as the Restricted Database. notice to You. For the avoidance of doubt, Persons who have received
c. For the avoidance of doubt, You may place this Database or a the Database, the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents, Derivative
Derivative Database in an authenticated environment, behind a Databases, or the Database as part of a Collective Database from You
password, or within a similar access control scheme provided that You do under this License will not have their licenses terminated provided their
not alter or restrict the terms of this License or any rights granted under it use is in full compliance with this License or a license granted under
or have the effect or intent of restricting the ability of any person to Section 4.8 of this License. Sections 1, 2, 7, 8, 9 and 10 will survive any
exercise those rights. termination of this License.
4.8 Licensing of others. You may not sublicense the Database. Each time 9.2 If You are not in breach of the terms of this License, the Licensor will
You communicate the Database, the whole or Substantial part of the not terminate Your rights under it.
Contents, or any Derivative Database to anyone else in any way, the 9.3 Unless terminated under Section 9.1, this License is granted to You
Licensor offers to the recipient a license to the Database on the same for the duration of applicable rights in the Database.
terms and conditions as this License. You are not responsible for 9.4 Reinstatement of rights. If you cease any breach of the terms and
enforcing compliance by third parties with this License, but You may conditions of this License, then your full rights under this License will be
enforce any rights that You have over a Derivative Database. You are reinstated:
solely responsible for any modifications of a Derivative Database made a. Provisionally and subject to permanent termination until the 60th day
by You or another Person at Your direction. You may not impose any after cessation of breach;
further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed b. Permanently on the 60th day after cessation of breach unless
under this License. otherwise reasonably notified by the Licensor; or
5.0 Moral rights c. Permanently if reasonably notified by the Licensor of the violation, this
5.1 Moral rights. This section covers moral rights, including any rights to is the first time You have received notice of violation of this License from
be identified as the author of the Database or to object to treatment that the Licensor, and You cure the violation prior to 30 days after your
would otherwise prejudice the author's honour and reputation, or any receipt of the notice.
other derogatory treatment: Persons subject to permanent termination of rights are not eligible to be
a. For jurisdictions allowing waiver of moral rights, Licensor waives all a recipient and receive a license under Section 4.8.
moral rights that Licensor may have in the Database to the fullest extent 9.5 Notwithstanding the above, Licensor reserves the right to release the
possible by the law of the relevant jurisdiction under Section 10.4; Database under different license terms or to stop distributing or making
b. If waiver of moral rights under Section 5.1 a in the relevant jurisdiction available the Database. Releasing the Database under different license
is not possible, Licensor agrees not to assert any moral rights over the terms or stopping the distribution of the Database will not withdraw this
Database and waives all claims in moral rights to the fullest extent License (or any other license that has been, or is required to be, granted
possible by the law of the relevant jurisdiction under Section 10.4; and under the terms of this License), and this License will continue in full force
c. For jurisdictions not allowing waiver or an agreement not to assert and effect unless terminated as stated above.
moral rights under Section 5.1 a and b, the author may retain their moral 10.0 General
rights over certain aspects of the Database. Please note that some 10.1 If any provision of this License is held to be invalid or
jurisdictions do not allow for the waiver of moral rights, and so moral unenforceable, that must not affect the validity or enforceability of the
rights may still subsist over the Database in some jurisdictions. remainder of the terms and conditions of this License and each
6.0 Fair dealing, Database exceptions, and other rights not affected remaining provision of this License shall be valid and enforced to the
6.1 This License does not affect any rights that You or anyone else may fullest extent permitted by law.
independently have under any applicable law to make any use of this 10.2 This License is the entire agreement between the parties with
Database, including without limitation: respect to the rights granted here over the Database. It replaces any
a. Exceptions to the Database Right including: Extraction of Contents earlier understandings, agreements or representations with respect to
from non-electronic Databases for private purposes, Extraction for the Database.
purposes of illustration for teaching or scientific research, and Extraction 10.3 If You are in breach of the terms of this License, You will not be
or Re-utilisation for public security or an administrative or judicial entitled to rely on the terms of this License or to complain of any breach
procedure. by the Licensor.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 7

10.4 Choice of law. This License takes effect in and will be governed by ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF ANY SUCH LOSS AND REGARDLESS
the laws of the relevant jurisdiction in which the License terms are OF THE COURSE OF DEALING WHICH DEVELOPS OR HAS DEVELOPED
sought to be enforced. If the standard suite of rights granted under BETWEEN YOU AND TRIMBLE. BECAUSE SOME STATES AND
applicable copyright law and Database Rights in the relevant jurisdiction JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
includes additional rights not granted under this License, these additional LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE
rights are granted in this License in order to meet the terms of this ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY OR FULLY APPLY TO YOU.
License. PLEASE NOTE: THE ABOVE TRIMBLE LIMITED WARRANTY
PROVISIONS WILL NOT APPLY TO PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN
Warranty Remedies THOSE JURISDICTIONS (E.G., MEMBER STATES OF THE
Trimble's sole liability and your exclusive remedy under the warranties EUROPEAN ECONOMIC AREA) IN WHICH PRODUCT
set forth above shall be, at Trimble's option, to repair or replace any WARRANTIES ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE LOCAL DEALER
Product that fails to conform to such warranty ('Nonconforming FROM WHOM THE PRODUCTS ARE ACQUIRED. IN SUCH A
Product"), and/or issue a cash refund up to the purchase price paid by
CASE, PLEASE CONTACT YOUR TRIMBLE DEALER FOR
you for any such Nonconforming Product, excluding costs of installation,
upon your return of the Nonconforming Product to Trimble in accordance APPLICABLE WARRANTY INFORMATION.
with Trimble's product return procedures than in effect. Such remedy Official Language
may include reimbursement of the cost of repairs for damage to third-
party equipment onto which the Product is installed, if such damage is THE OFFICIAL LANGUAGE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS IS
found to be directly caused by the Product as reasonably determined by ENGLISH. IN THE EVENT OF A CONFLICT BETWEEN ENGLISH AND
Trimble following a root cause analysis. OTHER LANGUAGE VERSIONS, THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE SHALL
CONTROL.
Warranty Exclusions and Disclaimer
Registration
These warranties shall be applied only in the event and to the extent
that (a) the Products and Software are properly and correctly installed, To receive information regarding updates and new products, please
configured, interfaced, maintained, stored, and operated in accordance contact your local dealer or visit the Trimble website at
with Trimble's relevant operator's manual and specifications, and; (b) www.trimble.com/register. Upon registration you may select the
the Products and Software are not modified or misused. The preceding newsletter, upgrade or new product information you desire.
warranties shall not apply to, and Trimble shall not be responsible for
defects or performance problems resulting from (i) the combination or
Notices
utilization of the Product or Software with hardware or software This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
products, information, data, systems, interfaces or devices not made, a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits
supplied or specified by Trimble; (ii) the operation of the Product or are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
Software under any specification other than, or in addition to, Trimble's interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
standard specifications for its products; (iii) the unauthorized, installation, environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
modification, or use of the Product or Software; (iv) damage caused by frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
accident, lightning or other electrical discharge, fresh or salt water instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
immersion or spray (outside of Product specifications); or (v) normal communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
wear and tear on consumable parts (e.g., batteries). Trimble does not likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be
warrant or guarantee the results obtained through the use of the Product required to correct the interference at his own expense.
or that software components will operate error free. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in
THE WARRANTIES ABOVE STATE TRIMBLE'S ENTIRE LIABILITY, AND order to meet FCC emission limits. TRIMBLE is not responsible for any
YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES, RELATING TO THE PRODUCTS AND radio or television interference caused by using other than
SOFTWARE. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED HEREIN, recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or
THE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE, AND ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications
AND MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND WITHOUT EXPRESS OR could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND BY EITHER TRIMBLE NAVIGATION This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject
LIMITED OR ANYONE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN ITS CREATION, to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
PRODUCTION, INSTALLATION, OR DISTRIBUTION INCLUDING, BUT NOT interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND Party:
NONINFRINGEMENT. THE STATED EXPRESS WARRANTIES ARE IN LIEU Trimble Navigation
OF ALL OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES ON THE PART OF TRIMBLE 935 Stewart Drive
ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY PRODUCTS OR Sunnyvale CA 94085
SOFTWARE. BECAUSE SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT Telephone: 1-408 481 8000
ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON DURATION OR THE EXCLUSION OF AN
IMPLIED WARRANTY, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY OR Canada
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
NOTICE REGARDING PRODUCTS EQUIPPED WITH TECHNOLOGY Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003
CAPABLE OF TRACKING SATELLITE SIGNALS FROM SATELLITE BASED du Canada.
AUGMENTATION SYSTEMS (SBAS) (WAAS/EGNOS, AND MSAS), This apparatus complies with Canadian RSS-GEN.
OMNISTAR, GPS, MODERNIZED GPS OR GLONASS SATELLITES, OR Cet appareil est conforme à la norme CNR-GEN du Canada.
FROM IALA BEACON SOURCES: TRIMBLE IS NOT RESPONSIBLE
FOR THE OPERATION OR FAILURE OF OPERATION OF ANY Europe
SATELLITE BASED POSITIONING SYSTEM OR THE AVAILABILITY The product covered by this guide are intended to be
OF ANY SATELLITE BASED POSITIONING SIGNALS. used in all EU member countries, Norway, and
Switzerland. Products been tested and found to comply
Limitation or Liability with the requirements for a Class B device pursuant to
TRIMBLE'S ENTIRE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION HEREIN SHALL BE European Council Directive 89/336/EEC on EMC, thereby satisfying the
LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE PRODUCT OR requirements for CE Marking and sale within the European Economic
SOFTWARE LICENSE. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY Area (EEA). Contains a Bluetooth radio module. These requirements are
APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL TRIMBLE OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL when the equipment is operated in a residential or commercial
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCE OR LEGAL environment. The 450 MHZ (PMR) bands and 2.4 GHz are non-
THEORY RELATING IN ANY WAY TO THE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE AND harmonized throughout Europe.
ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION AND MATERIALS, (INCLUDING, CE Declaration of Conformity
WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, OR ANY
OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS), REGARDLESS WHETHER TRIMBLE HAS BEEN

8 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

Hereby, Trimble Navigation, declares that the GPS receivers are in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Australia and New Zealand
This product conforms with the regulatory requirements of
the Australian Communications and Media Authority
(ACMA) EMC framework, thus satisfying the requirements
for C-Tick Marking and sale within Australia and New
Zealand.
Restriction of Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical
and Electronic Equipment (RoHS)
Trimble products in this guide comply in all material respects with
DIRECTIVE 2002/95/EC OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE
COUNCIL of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain
hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment (RoHS
Directive) and Amendment 2005/618/EC filed under C(2005) 3143, with
exemptions for lead in solder pursuant to Paragraph 7 of the Annex to
the RoHS Directive applied.
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)
For product recycling instructions and more information, please
go to www.trimble.com/ev.shtml.
Recycling in Europe: To recycle Trimble WEEE (Waste Electrical
and Electronic Equipment, products that run on electrical power.), Call
+31 497 53 24 30, and ask for the “WEEE Associate”. Or, mail a request
for recycling instructions to:
Trimble Europe BV
c/o Menlo Worldwide Logistics
Meerheide 45
5521 DZ Eersel, NL
Unlicensed radios in products
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Licensed radios in products
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the condition that this device may not cause
harmful interference.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 9

 Contents

Contents

1 Introduction 21
About the FmX integrated display 22
Optional features 22
Compatibility 22
Installation 23
Changes to this document 24

2 Display basics 25
Display power on/off 26
Power on 26
Power off 26
Main screens 27
Home screen 28
Configuration Selection screen 29
Field Selection screen 33
Configuration screen 34
Run screen 36
Help screen 38
Passwords 39
Access password 39
Change administration password 39
Optional features/plugins 40
Vehicle guidance 40
Features for application 40
ISOBUS 40
Implement control 41
Connectivity 41
Water Management 41
Harvest 41
Screen shots 42

3 Basic settings 43
Unlocks and upgrades 44
Unlock features / plugins 45
Upgrade FmX integrated display firmware 46
Activate features/plugins for use 47
Basic system settings 48
CAN bus settings 50
Data dictionary 51
Data Files 52
EZ-Remote Joystick 53
Field feature mapping settings 55

10 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

Contents

Guidance settings 56
Language, measurements, keyboard layout 58
Map settings 59
Lightbar settings 63
Power management 66
Restore default settings 67
Signal input module for OEM switch 68
Sounds 69
Status items 70
Time setup 83

4 Data management 85
Managing data 86
Transfer data 86
Data Files screen 87
Display to USB 88
USB to computer 89
Delete data 90
Data storage structure 92
AB Lines folder 92
Archives folder 93
Autopilot folder 93
Data folder 93
Data Dictionary folder 100
Diagnostics folder 100
Prescriptions folder 101
Summaries folder 102
Task Data folder 103
Data Dictionary categories 103
Default data entry categories 103
Edit data entry categories 104
Create / load a data dictionary 105

5 Connectivity settings 107

GPS receiver settings 108
AgRemote Interface 109
Basic correction settings 110
CenterPoint RTK 111
CenterPoint RTX (fs) 113
CenterPoint RTX (sc) 115
CenterPoint RTX (ss) 116
OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2 - VBS 118
OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2 120
OmniSTAR VBS 122

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 11

 Contents

RangePoint RTX 123
Frequencies and baud rate 124
GPS output settings 125
Serial NMEA messages 126
NMEA messages 128
CAN GPS messages 128
Remote Output setup 130
Remote Output settings 131
Calibrate implement lead time 133
Serial Data Input 136
Ag3000 modem 137
Modem activation 137
Modem setup 137
DCM-300 Modem 138
Unlock the modem 138
Service activation 138
Modem setup 139

6 Field feature mapping setup 141

Field feature mapping settings 142
Access Feature Mapping settings 142
Assign feature buttons 143
Create a field feature 143
Edit a field feature 144
Mapping location setting 145
Recording with coverage 146
Field area feature settings 146
Line feature settings 147
Boundary feature settings 148
Point feature settings 150

7 Implement setup 151

Implement setup 152
Create an implement 153
Select an implement 154
Import an implement 154
Edit implement settings 155
Implement Type 155
Measurements 156
Geometry 158
Overlap 159
Extras 160
Delete an implement 162

12 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

Contents

8 Vehicle guidance setup 163

Guidance settings 164
Manual guidance 164
Autopilot system 166
Begin setup 166
Autopilot calibration 171
Row Guidance 188
Save vehicle profile 190
EZ-Pilot assisted steering system 191
Vehicle settings for EZ-Pilot system 191
Steering settings for EZ-Pilot system 192
Engage settings for EZ-Pilot system 193
EZ-Pilot system calibration 195
EZ-Steer assisted steering system 199
Engage settings for EZ-Steer 201
Advanced settings for EZ-Pilot 202
EZ-Steer system calibration 203

9 Field-IQ system setup 207

Field-IQ system functionality 208
General setup information 209
Field-IQ system setup 210
Material setup 210
Alarms tab 211
Operation tab 212
Coefficent tab 213
Control setup 214
Material tab 215
Layout 217
Section Control tab 219
Material linking 219
Automatic Section Control 220
Rate control tab 223
Valve Setup tab 224
Row monitoring 226
Sensor tab 227
Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 229
Air Seeder calibration 229
Anhydrous calibration 230
Planter calibration 232
Sprayer calibration 236
Spreader calibration 237
Upgrade Field-IQ system firmware 242
Upgrade steps 242

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 13

 Contents

10 GreenSeeker setup 243

GreenSeeker functionality 244
Care and maintenance 244
Field preparations for nitrogen application 245
Field setup 246
Field preparations for user defined rate 247
Field calibration 247
Delivery system and liquid control 247
Select a nozzle 248

11 ISOBUS setup 249

ISOBUS settings 250
Virtual Terminal setup 250
Task Controller setup 251
GPS output settings 252
Equipment setup 253

12 Serial Rate Control setup 255

Supported variable rate controllers 256
Variable rate controller setup 257
Amazone Amatron + 258
Bogballe Calibrator 258
Controller setup 258
Flex-Air setup 258
Operation 259
Application width 259
Hardi 5500 and 6500 259
LH5000 260
Raven 260
Configure the controller 261
Rawson and New Leader 262
Using the controller 262
Non-GPS mode 263
Loss of communication 263
Special note on using a Rawson Accu-Rate controller 263
Vaderstad Control Station 264
Additional controller setup 265
Alarms 265
Coverage mapping 265
Prescriptions 265
Target and applied rates 265
Units 266

14 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

Contents

13 TrueGuide setup 267

TrueGuide system 268
Benefits 268
Requirements 269
Implement setup and selection 270
TrueGuide setup 271
System aggressiveness settings 271
TrueGuide calibration 272

14 TrueTracker setup 273

TrueTracker 274
Requirements 275
Setup process 275
Implement controller setup for TrueTracker system 276
Vehicle settings for TrueTracker system 276
Engage settings for TrueTracker system 279
Steering settings for TrueTracker system 280
Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 281
Controller orientation setup 281
Proportional Steering Gain calibration 282
Implement Steering Sensor calibration 284
Implement Automated Deadzone calibration 285
Antenna position and roll offset correction 287
Line Acquisition Aggressiveness calibration 290

15 Vehicle Sync setup 291

Vehicle Sync 292
Requirements 292
Setup steps 292

16 Water Management setup 295

Water Management features 296
Requirements 296
FieldLevel II Survey/Design 297
Benchmarks 297
Rebenching 297
Settings 297
FieldLevel II Leveling 300
Requirements 300
Setup process 300
Leveling models 301
Target height 301
GPS receiver setup 302
FieldLevel II settings 302

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 15

 Contents

Valve module calibration 306

Tandem / dual scraper setup 307
Tandem scraper 307
Dual scraper 307
Set up 307
Implement setup 308
Prepare connections 308
Primary receiver setup 308
Secondary receiver setup 308
Tandem / Dual settings 308
Tandem / dual calibration 310
WM-Drain setup 311
Implement control settings 312
Valve settings 314
Limit and increment settings 314
Relative heights settings 315
Operation settings 315
Calibrate WM-Drain for cantilever plow 317
Calibrate the valve 321

17 Yield Monitoring setup 323

Yield Monitoring functionality 324
Yield Monitoring best practices 325
Installation 325
Tare calibration 325
Flow calibration 326
Pitch/Roll calibration 326
Test weight 327
Calibrating and operating conditions 327
Yield Monitoring settings 328
Before setup 328
Setup steps 328
Operation settings 329
Crop settings 330
Map settings 331
Sensor output settings 331
Options settings 332
Yield sensor / moisture sensor calibration 333
Calibration steps 333
Speed method 334
Cut width method 335
Third-party display instructions 336
Claas Cebis Quantimeter setup 336
Claas Cebis Quantimeter calibration 337

16 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

Contents

Claas Cebis Auto Pilot calibration 338

Greenstar Monitor: Stop Head Height setup 338
Greenstar Monitor calibrations 339
Command Center (70 Series Combines) 340

18 Operations 343
Operations overview 344
Operation basics 344
Main buttons 344
Operational view 347
Feature panels 348
Engage button 351
Coverage button for logging 352
GNSS status 352
On-screen lightbar for vehicle 352
On-screen lightbar for implement 352
Fields 353
Field creation / selection 353
Implement selection 354
Vehicle selection 355
Event summary adjustment 355
Close a field 355
Field feature use 356
Add field features 356
Guidance pattern use 357
Creating patterns 357
Access paths 357
Existing patterns 357
Guidance mapping controls 358
Swaths Management screen 359
Straight guidance pattern 361
Curved pattern 363
Headland pattern 364
Pivot pattern 367
FreeForm pattern 369
Pause recording 371
Access paths 372
Switch to the next pattern 373
Import AB Lines or boundaries 373
Load a pattern 374
Rename a swath 376
Delete a swath 377
Switch to the next pattern 377
Shift a swath 378

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 17

 Contents

Skip a swath 379

Coverage logging 381
Log coverage for varieties 382
Set up variety logging 383
Field-IQ operation 385
Field-IQ panel 386
Field-IQ master switch box functions 390
Field-IQ 12-section switch box (optional) 392
Material assignment 392
Enable sections 393
Enter values manually 393
Prescriptions 394
Manual guidance operation 397
Autopilot system operation 398
Adjust Autopilot guidance 399
Disengage Autopilot system 400
EZ-Pilot system operation 401
Disengage EZ-Pilot system 402
Adjust EZ-Pilot guidance 403
EZ-Steer system operation 404
Disengage EZ-Steer system 405
Adjust EZ-Steer guidance 406
GreenSeeker operation 407
Best practice 407
Variable rate setup 408
Create a custom table 408
Calibrate GreenSeeker 409
ISOBUS operation 412
Task Controller operation 412
Virtual Terminal operation 413
Remote Output operation 414
Distance-based pulse operation 415
Within range limits 415
Outside range limits 416
Crossing a line feature operation 416
Change trigger limits during operation 417
Manually output a pulse 418
Row Guidance operation 419
Use row sensors 420
Shift or skip guidance line 421
Row Guidance adjustments 422
TrueTracker operation 423
TrueTracker controls 423
Engage button 423

18 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

Contents

Implement status 424

Implement on-screen lightbar 425
TrueGuide operation 426
Using TrueGuide 427
Vehicle Sync operation 428
Common uses 428
Benefits 428
Using Vehicle Sync 428
Guidance lines with Vehicle Sync 429
Coverage 429
Water Management functionality 432
Create a survey 432
Design 434
Leveling 436
WM-Drain operation 451
Yield Monitoring operation 470
Yield Monitoring panel 470
Variety tracking 471
Load tracking 472

19 Diagnostics 473
System diagnostics 474
Advanced system diagnostics 474
CAN Bus data 475
Configuration data 475
Network diagnostics 475
Serial Comms 476
Autopilot diagnostics 476
Controls 476
Guidance tab 477
Steering tab 477
Details tab 478
Autopilot Faults screen 478
Warning screen 478
EZ-Pilot diagnostics 479
EZ-Steer diagnostics 480
Field-IQ diagnostics 480
Operations tab 480
Hardware tab 481
Row Monitor tab 481
Field-IQ faults and troubleshooting 482
Anhydrous Rate Control troubleshooting 495
Any Implement Section Control troubleshooting 496
Any Implement Sensor troubleshooting 497

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 19

 Contents

Planter Rate Control troubleshooting 498

Planter Seed Sensor troubleshooting 500
Sprayer/Liquid Strip Till Rate Control troubleshooting 500
Spreader Rate Control troubleshooting 502
FieldLevel II diagnostics valve test 503
GPS status 503
GreenSeeker diagnostics 504
Incorrect data 504
Error conditions 504
Row-Guidance diagnostics 505
Vehicle Sync diagnostics 506
Yield Monitoring diagnostics 507
Status tab 507
Yield Monitor error messages 508
Yield Monitor troubleshooting 510
Yield Monitoring warning messages 511

20 Glossary 515
A 515
B 515
C 516
D 517
E 518
F 518
G 518
H 519
I 519
L 520
M 520
N 520
O 521
P 521
R 522
S 522
T 523
V 524
W 524

20 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 CHAPTER
1
Introduction

In this chapter:
This user guide includes information on
setting up and using the Trimble® FmX ®
About the FmX integrated display 22 integrated display. For installation
Changes to this document 24 information, see FmX Integrated Display
Cabling Guide.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 21

 About the FmX integrated display 1   Introduction

About the FmX integrated display

With the Trimble® FmX® integrated display, you can perform:

l Field definition and mapping

l Feature mapping
l Guidance to predefined field patterns
l Logging of coverage data
l Variable rate control
l Boom/Row switching
l Logging of topographic mapping data
l Output of information for analysis in office-based Geographic Information System (GIS)
software
l Seed, Liquid, Granular, and Anhydrous Ammonia control
l Seed monitoring

Optional features
The FmX integrated display has a number of optional features /plugins you can install to expand its
functionality.
Most of these features require additional hardware. For installation information, see the FmX
Integrated Display Cabling Guide.
Note  – Some configuration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen. To access these
settings, return to the Run screen and then tap the Home button. When prompted to close the field, tap Yes.
Also see Optional features/plugins (page 40), Unlock features / plugins (page 45) and Activate
features/plugins for use (page 47).

Compatibility
The following are compatible with the FmX integrated display:

l Trimble Autopilot™ automated steering system

l Trimble EZ-Steer® assisted steering system
l Trimble EZ-Pilot® steering system
l Trimble TrueTracker™ implement steering system
l Trimble TrueGuide™ implement guidance system
l Trimble FieldLevel™ II

22 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 1   Introduction About the FmX integrated display

l Trimble WM-Drain® farm drainage system

l Trimble Rawson™ drive
l Trimble Field-IQ™ crop input control system
l Trimble RangePoint™ RTX™
l Trimble CenterPoint™ RTX and CenterPoint VRS™
l Trimble VRSNow™
l Trimble Farm Works Software®
l Trimble GreenSeeker®
l Trimble Tru Count Air Clutch®
l Trimble AutoSense™
l Trimble T2™ terrain compensation technology
l Trimble T3™ roll compensation
l OmniSTAR® wide-area differential GPS service

Installation
To install the display and required cabling for your configuration, see the FmX Integrated Display
Cabling Guide.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 23

 Changes to this document 1   Introduction

Changes to this document

The changes for the FmX integrated display firmware version 9.25 are:

l Remote Output: Crossing a Line Feature has been added. See Remote Output settings (page
131) and Remote Output operation (page 414).
l WM Drain: Changes to the Run screen and added features, including clipping/deleting a section
line and adding fixed points during design. See WM-Drain operation (page 451).
l Serial NMEA messages: 10 Hz has been added as an output. See Serial NMEA messages (page
126).
The changes for the user guide for FmX integrated display (version 9.25, revision B) are:

l Correction to the number of PWM drives (from 4 to 6) that can be used for planters using Field-
IQ. See Field-IQ system functionality (page 208).

24 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 CHAPTER
2
Display basics

In this chapter:
The FmX integrated display has five main
screens you use for setup and operations.
Display power on/off 26 You can also access on-screen help.
Main screens 27 Optional features (plugins) are available to
Passwords 39 add to the display.

Optional features/plugins 40
Screen shots 42

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 25

 Display power on/off 2   Display basics

Display power on/off

Note  – The display must be correctly installed before powering on. For more information, see FmX Integrated
Display Cabling Guide.

Power on
Briefly hold down the power button ( for approximately half a second). The display turns on, and
after a pause the Home screen displays.

Power off
1. Close all fields before you power off the system. See Close a field (page 355).
Note  – If you fail to close before rebooting or shutdown, you may experience a loss of data.
2. Either return to the Home screen and tap Shutdown, or turn off the display manually by
holding the power button down for about two seconds.
Note  – Sometimes after you press the power button and tap Shutdown, the display does not
immediately turnoff. This is because the FmX integrated display is saving settings. The display will power
off after all settings are saved.

26 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

2   Display basics Main screens

Main screens
The FmX integrated display has the following main screens:

l Home screen (page 28): The first screen that displays when you open
l Run screen (page 36): For performing operations
l Configuration Selection screen (page 29): For switching and editing selections for system,
vehicle and implement
l Configuration screen (page 34) (and subsequent setup screens): For setting up the system and
features
l Field Selection screen (page 33): For choosing which field to work in

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 27

 Main screens 2   Display basics

Home screen
The Home screen lists the following information about the configuration:

l The display build date, firmware and hardware version

l All optional features/plugins loaded on the application
l The automatic steering system (if applicable)
l The GPS receiver version, correction source and subscription information
l The selected vehicle make and model
The Home screen has three tabs:

l Support tab, containing the buttons:

l Data Files: Tap
to display the Data Files screen where you can transfer files between the
display and a USB drive. See Managing data (page 86).
l Upgrade: Tapto display the Firmware Upgrade screen, where you can upgrade firmware.
See Upgrade FmX integrated display firmware (page 46).
l Unlocks: Tap to display the Advanced Functionality Access screen and unlock enhanced
features / plugins. See Unlock features / plugins (page 45).
l System Information tab, listing about the configuration:
l Display firmware build date, firmware, and hardware version
l Optional features/plugins loaded on the application
l Vehicle and implement automatic steering controller version, date, and serial number (if
applicable)
l GPS receiver version, correction source, and subscription information
l Selected vehicle make and model

28 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 2   Display basics Main screens

Configuration Selection screen

Before you enter the Run screen, the Configuration Selection screen shows the current
configuration selected for the:

l System
l Vehicle
l Implement
Access the Configuration Selection screen from the Home screen.

For each of these you can:

l Switch to another system, vehicle or implement

l Edit settings
The Configuration Selection screen shows the current configuration selected for the:

l System
l Vehicle
l Implement

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 29

Main screens 2   Display basics

System configuration switching

30 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

2   Display basics Main screens

Vehicle configuration switching

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 31

Main screens 2   Display basics

Implement configuration switching

32 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 2   Display basics Main screens

Field Selection screen

1. When you want to go to a field to begin work in the Run screen, tap at the Home screen.
2. If the system, vehicle and implement at the Configuration Screen are what you want to use,
tap OK.
3. At the Field Selection screen, you can:
l Choose existing fields you have created in the system
l Create a new field (as well as the client, farm and event associated with it)
For more information, see Field creation / selection (page 353).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 33

 Main screens 2   Display basics

Configuration screen

You can access the Configuration screen from the Home or Run screen.
Note  – Some configuration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen. To access these

settings, return to the Run screen and then tap . When prompted to close the field, tap Close. Then tap to
access the Configuration screen.
For each item shown in the configuration list on the Configuration screen, you can:

l Change settings
l View diagnostics
l Save the configuration
l Switch the selected configuration
You can also add or remove features/plugins to perform different operations. See Activate
features/plugins for use (page 47).

34 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

2   Display basics Main screens

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 35

Main screens 2   Display basics

Run screen
You access the Run screen from the Home screen.

You can also move between the Run screen and the Configuration screen in some cases.
The Run screen is used during operations and shows your guidance lines and an on-screen
representation of your vehicle in the field. The areas of the Run screen include:

l Operational view (page 347)

l Main buttons (page 344)
l On-screen lightbar for vehicle (page 352)
l Optional features/plugins (page 40)
l Coverage button and information. See Coverage button for logging (page 352).
l Engage button (page 351) , if applicable
You can navigate from the Run screen to the Configuration screen to:

l Change settings
l View diagnostics
l Save configuration (in some cases)

36 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

2   Display basics Main screens

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 37

Main screens 2   Display basics

Help screen
The FmX integrated display has on-screen help that provide details and helpful information about
the current screen.

1. To access help, tap . A Help screen displays.

2. To exit the Help screen and return to the previous screen, tap OK.

38 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 2   Display basics Passwords

Passwords
The access and administration passwords apply to the FmX integrated display.

Access password
Any Setup or Calibrate button marked with a padlock icon is protected by two passwords:
l Administration password: Your password.
l Master password: A backup password in case you lose the Administration password. If you
need the Master password, contact your local reseller.
The password screen displays the first time that you tap a Setup or Calibrate button after you turn on
the FmX integrated display. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the administration password and
then tap OK.
Note  – Passwords are case sensitive.

Change administration password

Note  – To change the Administration password, you need the Master password. If you do not know it,
contact your local reseller.

1. If you have not entered the password during the current session, at the Configuration screen
tap Setup or Calibrate .
2. If you have already entered the password during this session, tap button and then tap Lock
Configuration . On the Configuration screen tap Setup or Calibrate.

3. The Enter Administration Password screen displays.

4. Enter an incorrect password. The Wrong Password screen displays.
5. Tap Enter Master Password .
6. Enter the master password and then tap OK. The Change Administration Password screen
displays.
7. Enter your new administration password in both fields. The new administration password is
now active.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 39

 Optional features/plugins 2   Display basics

Optional features/plugins
The FmX integrated display has a number of optional features (plugins) you can install to expand its
functionality. Most of these features require additional hardware. You must:

1. Purchase the feature.

2. Install any hardware required by the feature.
3. Unlock the feature. See Unlock features / plugins (page 45).
4. Activate the feature for use. See Activate features/plugins for use (page 47).
5. Configure the feature.

Vehicle guidance
l Trimble Autopilot™ automated steering system: See Autopilot system (page 166).
l Trimble EZ-Pilot™ assisted steering system: See EZ-Pilot assisted steering system (page 191).
l Trimble EZ-Steer® assisted steering system: See EZ-Steer assisted steering system (page 199).
l RG-100 Row Guidance system: Works with the Autopilot system to center the combine on the
rows. See Row Guidance (page 188).

Features for application

l Trimble Field-IQ™ crop input control system: Control sections and vary application rates. See
Field-IQ system setup (page 210) and Field-IQ operation (page 385).
l GreenSeeker®: Vary fertilizer rate in real-time using crop vigor measurements. See GreenSeeker
functionality (page 244) and GreenSeeker operation (page 407).
l Serial Rate Controller: Use a non-Trimble variable rate controller. See Additional controller
setup (page 265).

ISOBUS
l Virtual Terminal: View and use Virtual Terminal. See Virtual Terminal setup (page 250) and
Virtual Terminal operation (page 413).
l Task Controller: Use Task Controller. See Task Controller setup (page 251) and Task Controller
operation (page 412).

40 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

2   Display basics Optional features/plugins

Implement control
l Trimble TrueGuide™ implement guidance system: Use guidance on the implement for greater
accuracy. See TrueGuide system (page 268) and TrueGuide operation (page 426).
l Trimble TrueTracker™ implement steering system: Automatically steer the implement for
greater accuracy. See TrueTracker (page 274) and TrueTracker operation (page 423).

Connectivity
l Ag3000 modem: Receive cellular RTK corrections. See Ag3000 modem (page 137).
l DCM-300 modem: Receive RTK corrections from a Trimble VRS™ network, a third-party RTK
provider or a CORS. See DCM-300 Modem (page 138).
l Vehicle Sync: Transmit data between vehicles. See Vehicle Sync (page 292).
l Serial Data Input: Enable data input from an external serial device. See Serial Data Input (page
136).
l Remote Output: Enable remote data output to an external device. See Remote Output setup
(page 130).
l EZ-Remote™ Joystick: Control a variety of display functions remotely. See EZ-Remote Joystick
(page 53).

Water Management
l Survey and design: Survey a field and then create a design. See Survey the field (page 433) and
Create / save a design (page 435).
l FieldLevel™ II:
l Level the field to a design, install subsurface drainage or surface ditches. See FieldLevel II
Leveling (page 300).
l Control leveling with two GPS receivers, in one of two possible scraper configurations. See
Tandem / dual scraper setup (page 307), Dual scraper controls (page 449), and Tandem
scraper controls (page 450).
l WM-Drain® farm drainage solution: For subsurface drainage. See WM-Drain setup (page 311)
and WM-Drain operation (page 451).

Harvest
l Yield Monitoring: Display yield monitoring data. See Yield Monitoring settings (page 328) and
Yield Monitoring operation (page 470).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 41

 Screen shots 2   Display basics

Screen shots

To save an image in the Run screen, tap .

The image is stored in the folder: AgGPS\Diagnostics\Screenshots.

l In the Data Dictionary under Diagnostics \ Screenshots

42 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 CHAPTER
3
Basic settings

In this chapter:
Basic settings include:
Unlocks and upgrades 44 l Upgrades: Upgrading the system
Activate features/plugins for use 47 firmware or features you have
purchased and activated
Basic system settings 48
l Unlocks: Features you purchase are
included with a passcode so that you
can unlock them on your system.
l Activation for use: After you have
unlocked a feature, you can activate it
for use for your operation. You can also
deactivate features in order to activate
other features for use.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 43

 Unlocks and upgrades 3   Basic settings

Unlocks and upgrades

Unlocks are passcodes you enter to activate a feature or service on the display after you have
purchase it.
Upgrades are firmware updates to the existing firmware or feature that you have already activated.
Note  – If you are using the TMX-2050 display for the first time, you must first obtain a GPS position for
unlocks to become active. If the display was installed indoors, you must move the equipment with the display
outside to gain satellite access.

44 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 3   Basic settings Unlocks and upgrades

Unlock features / plugins

To unlock / activate some plugins, you must enter the activation password (or unlock). If you do not
have an activation password, contact your local reseller. You can activate a plugin using:

l A text file
l The display
Note  – If you are using the TMX-2050 display for the first time, you must first obtain a GPS position for
unlocks to become active. If the display was installed indoors, you must move the equipment with the display
outside to gain satellite access.

Unlock a plugin using a text file

Note  – This method of unlocking a plugin is faster than the manual method.

1. Insert the USB drive from the FmX integrated display into a computer.
2. Rename the text file.
3. Delete the label of the name following the password number. For example:
Password 4850576341 FMX 2DGPSto2GLONASS.TXT
becomes
Password 4850576341.TXT
4. Copy the password text file from the computer into the \AgGPS\Firmware\ folder on the USB drive.
5. Insert the USB drive in the display and turn on the display. The feature/plugin is automatically
unlocked.

Unlock feature/plugin manually

1. Turn on the display.

2. At the Home screen on the Support tab, tap Unlocks. The Advanced Functionality Access screen
displays.
3. Select the feature/plugin and then tap Unlock. The on-screen keyboard displays.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 45

Unlocks and upgrades 3   Basic settings

4. Enter the password that your local reseller provided and then tap OK. If you entered:
a. A correct password, an Enabled message displays. The plugin is now unlocked.
b. An invalid password, an error message displays. Enter the password again. If it still does
not work, contact your local reseller.

Upgrade FmX integrated display firmware

1. Transfer the new firmware file from www.trimble.com to your computer.
2. Connect a USB drive to your computer.
3. Unzip the firmware file. Save it to the root folder of the USB drive.
4. Insert the USB drive into the USB socket on the rear of the FmX integrated display.
5. Press the power button on the rear of the display to turn on the display and then wait for the
Home screen to appear.
6. Tap Upgrade. The Firmware Upgrade screen displays.
7. Select a firmware file from the Firmware list and tap Upgrade.
8. After the upgrade is complete, tap OK. The system restarts.

46 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 3   Basic settings Activate features/plugins for use

Activate features/plugins for use

All features that have been unlocked must be activated (or "added") for use before you can set up
or use them.

1. Open the FmX integrated display if you are not already in it.

2. At the Home screen, tap . 

Note  – To add or remove features/plugins, you must access the Configuration screen only from the
Home screen.
3. At the Configuration screen, tap Add/Remove. The Select Active Plugins screen displays.
4. To use a feature, select it from the Inactive Plugins list and tap Add >.
5. To stop using a feature, select it from the Active Plugins list and tap <Remove.
6. When you are finished with your choices, tap OK. The system returns you to the Configuration
screen.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 47

 Basic system settings 3   Basic settings

Basic system settings

At the Configuration screen, select the System option and then tap Setup . The Display Setup screen
displays.
If required, enter the administrator password. See Passwords (page 39).

1. At the Configuration screen, tap System in the list, then tap Setup .
2. If necessary, enter the administrator password. See Passwords (page 39).
3. The Display Setup screen displays.
At the Display Setup screen, you can navigate to and edit:

l CAN bus settings (page 50)

l Data dictionary (page 51)
l EZ-Remote Joystick (page 53)
l Field feature mapping settings (page 55)
l Guidance settings (page 56)
l Language, measurements, keyboard layout (page 58)
l Lightbar settings (page 63)
l Map settings (page 59)

48 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 3   Basic settings Basic system settings

l Power management (page 66)

l Signal input module for OEM switch (page 68)
l Sounds (page 69)
l Status items (page 70) that display on the Run screen
l Time setup (page 83)
You can also return the display to its default settings. See Restore default settings (page 67).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 49

 Basic system settings 3   Basic settings

CAN bus settings

Note  – These settings are very advanced. Use them only under the direct advice of Technical Support.
At the CAN Bus Settings screen, complete the settings and tap OK.

Setting Explanation
CAN A Termination If the either CAN buses do not have a physical terminator, enable the CAN
CAN B Termination Termination option for that bus.
l Early hardware revisions of the FmX integrated display will terminate
ports A and B.
l Later revisions will terminate B or D.

CAN Driver Enable this setting to control the strength of the edges on the CAN bus.
Strength Note  – It is recommended that you set the CAN driver Strength to Full.

50 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

3   Basic settings Basic system settings

Data dictionary

For information about data management, see:

l Managing data (page 86)

l Data Dictionary categories (page 103)
l Create / load a data dictionary (page 105)

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 51

 Basic system settings 3   Basic settings

Data Files

At the Data Files screen, you can transfer data. See Transfer data (page 86).
You can access the Data Files screen from the Display Setup screen as well as from the Home screen.

52 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 3   Basic settings Basic system settings

EZ-Remote Joystick

For installation information, see the EZ-Remote Joystick Quick Reference Card.
If you use the EZ-Remote joystick, you do not need to tap buttons on the display. This improves
your accuracy when you select buttons, and gives you faster reaction times. You can program the
EZ-Remote joystick to controls the functions of the FmX integrated display.
Note  – The functions available to assign to each button depend on which optional features (plugins) are
activated on the display.

1. Connect the EZ-Remote joystick into into Port B on the back of the display. An EZ-Remote
joystick icon automatically displays on the Configuration screen.
2. At the Configuration screen, select EZ-Remote and then tap Setup . The EZ-Remote Assignment
screen displays.
Configure each key for the function you want to control remotely. You can also adjust the
brightness of the LED joystick buttons.
3. On the EZ-Remote joystick, press the first button you wish to program. The Function
Assignment screen displays.
4. Tap the feature that you want to program into that button on the control joystick.
5. Tap Set and then tap OK. The Keypad Assignment screen displays again.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 53

 Basic system settings 3   Basic settings

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to program more buttons as required.

7. When completed, tap OK.
Note  – You can configure the EZ-Remote control joystick while operating in a field. From the Run screen, tap

and then follow the previous steps.

54 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 3   Basic settings Basic system settings

Field feature mapping settings

A field feature is an item you designate on the display while your in your field to indicate lines (such
as fences), areas (such as areas to exclude) and points (such as rocks).

The field feature mapping settings determine:

l What buttons are available on the Mapping Guidance panel of the Run screen for creating
features in the field
l The reference point for creating field features (center, left or right of the boom)
l If a path should be recorded when you begin logging coverage
l The types of warnings that can trigger when entering a feature or area
l When to restrict remote output
l How a boundary is recorded
For detailed information, see Field feature mapping settings (page 142).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 55

 Basic system settings 3   Basic settings

Guidance settings
Note  – If you are setting up the system for the first time, you should not need to adjust these settings.

Setting Explanation
Limit Field Selection Limits the number of fields that display when you are selecting
a field.
l Yes: Enables Limit Field Selection. The displayed fields are
within the set radius of the vehicle's current location,
based on the vehicle's GPS position.
l No: Disables Limit Field Selection
l Selection Radius: Fields that fall within this radius will display.
To exclude:
l More fields, enter a smaller number
l Fewer fields, enter a larger number

Auto Steering Lockout Disables engagement of an automated guidance system until

you enable guidance in the Run screen.

56 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

3   Basic settings Basic system settings

Setting Explanation
l Yes: System functions as normal. Auto Guidance Enabled
on/off is still allowed.
l No: System cannot engage. The Engage button shows as
red.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 57

Basic system settings 3   Basic settings

Language, measurements, keyboard layout

Setting Explanation

Language Can be changed if you have chosen FMX Only for the Language Selection.
If you change the language, a message warns that the display will
turn off so that the change can take effect.

Display Units Select the unit of measure for the display:

l Metric
l Feet and Inches (default)
l Decimal Feet

Keyboard Layout The FmX integrated display uses an on-screen keyboard on the
touchscreen. Options for layout:
l ABCDEF : Letters appear in alphabetical order
l QWERTY: Layout the same as a computer keyboard (default)

58 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

3   Basic settings Basic system settings

Map settings

At the Mapping screen, you can complete settings on these tabs:

l Main
l Track Logging

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 59

 Basic system settings 3   Basic settings

Main tab
Note  – For a new toolbar orientation to take effect, restart the display.

Setting Explanation

Map orientation Controls the direction that the screen follows the position of the
vehicle.
l North Up: When you perform a turn, the field remains stationary
and the vehicle turns.

l Vehicle Up: Whenyou perform a turn, the field rotates but the
vehicle remains pointing up.

Note  – To change the map orientation from the Run screen, tap the north
arrow.

Color scheme l Default mode: For use during the day

l Night-mode: For use at night

The night-mode color theme uses darker color themes to cause
less eye strain in low light conditions.
Save summaries l On: The display creates a saved file for your work.
l Off: The display does not create a saved file for your work.

Track Logging tab

On the Track Logging tab, you can configure the display to record the vehicle track at either a set time
or a set distance. Points along the track are logged at the greater of the two values (either logging
time or logging distance).
To always log a point based on either of the two values, set the other value to zero. To disable track
logging, set both values to zero.

60 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 3   Basic settings Basic system settings

Setting Track logging is...

Distance = 0, Time = 0 Turned off
Distance = 1+, Time = 0 Recorded by distance (m)
Distance = 0, Time = >1+ Recorded by time (s)
Distance = >1+, Time = >1+ Recorded by whichever setting is higher

Track logging files

Track logging files are created whenever you open an event. The track file records points at the rate
set on the Track Logging tab. At each point, a number of attributes are recorded.
Note  – The data stored in the track logging file (Track3D_<date time>.dbf) is in metric units.
The information stored for each point in the track logging file is listed in the following table.

Column Description Units

Along_Line Along line distance from start of meters
swath.
Attribute Not Populated
Ant_HAE Antenna height above ellipsoid. meters
Attribute Not Populated.
Ant_Lat Antenna latitude (WGS-84). DD.dddddddd
Ant_Long Antenna longitude (WGS-84). DD.dddddddd
Appln_Wdth Application width. meters
As_Applied Applied rate. Attribute Not Populated –
Auto_Steer Auto-Steer flag (1=on, 0=off). On or off
Corct_Age DGPS signal correction age. seconds
Field_Name The name of the field. –
GPS_Status GPS status value (NMEA). 1, 2, 5, 4
Ground_HAE Ground height above ellipsoid. meters
Attribute Not Populated
HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision – A –
measure of the quality of positions
based on satellite geometry.
Heading Direction of travel with respect to decimal degrees

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 61

Basic system settings 3   Basic settings

Column Description Units

true North.
Height Mean sea level height of ground. meters
Local_Time Local time. hh:mm:ss.s
Logging_On Coverage logging flag (1=on, 0=off). On or off
Num_Stats Number of GPS satellites. –
Offline Offline distance from swath center meters
line.
Pitch The pitch. Attribute Not Populated –
Relative_Height Height. meters
Roll The roll. Attribute Not Populated –
Speed GPS-derived ground speed. kph
Status_Text GPS status description. –
Swath_Num Current swath/headland number.
Swath_Wdth Swath width. meters
Target The target rate at the current –
position.
Total_Qty Total volume of material as applied –
for the current field. Only supported
for the Aerial Flow Controller, Autocal
Flow controller, and Crophawk Flow
Meter.
Units Units. metric
Attribute Not Populated
UTC_Date Point creation date. YYYYMMDD
UTC_Time UTC time. hh:mm:ss.s
Version Track attribute file version. –
Yaw The yaw. Attribute Not Populated –

62 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 3   Basic settings Basic system settings

Lightbar settings

The display has two lightbar options:

l The on-screen lightbar that displays at the top of the Run screen
l One or more external lightbars

On-screen lightbar
You can edit the default settings for the on-screen (virtual) lightbar.

1. At the Display Setup screen, select Lightbar.

2. Tap Setup . The Lightbar Configuration screen displays.
3. Tap Virtual Lightbar and tap Setup .
4. Complete the settings as appropriate.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 63

Basic system settings 3   Basic settings

Setting Explanation

LED spacing The distance represented by each LED on the lightbar.

a. Tap the appropriate number field.
b. Enter the required values.
Default: 3 cm per LED/1" per LED
Display Mode How the LEDs respond to offline distances. When “Show
error” is selected, the display shows the direction that you
need to move in. When Show correction is selected, the display
shows your current distance offline.
a. From the list, tap the appropriate option.
b. Enter the virtual lightbar settings, then tap OK.
c. At the Lightbars Configuration screen, tap OK.
Default: show error (chase mode)

64 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 3   Basic settings Basic system settings

External lightbar
To set up the external lightbar:

1. Connect the LB25 lightbar to port B on the back of the FmX integrated display.
2. At the Display Setup screen, tap Lightbar.
3. Tap Setup . The Lightbar Configuration screen displays.
4. Tap Lightbar and tap Setup .
5. Complete the settings as appropriate.

Setting Explanation

Name Name and serial number of the lightbar

Orientation Choose the orientation of the lightbar

Brightness Setting for how bright the lightbar displays

LED Spacing The distance represented by each LED on the lightbar.

a. Tap the appropriate number field.
b. Enter the required values.
Default: 3 cm per LED/1" per LED

Lightbar Purpose Choose the purpose of the lightbar

Look ahead time The distance ahead of the vehicle that the lightbar will use
for LED guidance and offline distance.
Default: 0 seconds

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 65

 Basic system settings 3   Basic settings

Power management

To manage power, you can set the display to dim the backlight or turn off the display after a pre-set
period of inactivity.

Setting Explanation

Turn Off Backlight Length of time before the backlight turns off.

Turn Off System Length of time before system turns off.

66 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 3   Basic settings Basic system settings

Restore default settings

You can reset the FmX integrated display to its default values. This can be useful if:

l You made changes to the display settings. The results are poor, but you cannot determine
which setting was the cause.
l You move the display from one vehicle to another.
Note  – If you restore the defaults, the Autopilot vehicle setup information is not reset.
To restore the default settings:

1. At the Configuration screen, select the System option and then tap Setup . The Display Setup
screen displays.
2. Tap Default. A confirmation screen displays.
3. Tap Yes. The default settings are restored.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 67

 Basic system settings 3   Basic settings

Signal input module for OEM switch

The signal input module (SIM) can interface with existing equipment inputs to control on-screen
buttons and features. A SIM must be connected to assign features to the buttons.

1. To assign the buttons, highlight the action in the Actions list.

2. Tap <-- Set to set the action to the specified input.

68 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

3   Basic settings Basic system settings

Sounds
The ways sounds can be produced are:

l Through the internal speaker of the FmX integrated display

l If Autopilot is part of your configration, you can use an exernal Sonalert

1. At the Display Setup screen, select Sounds and tap setup.

2. Complete the settings and tap OK.

Setting Explanation

Alarm Off, External Speaker, AP Sonalert.

Note  – Sonalert works only with Autopilot.

Warning Off, External Speaker, AP Sonalert.

Note  – Sonalert works only with Autopilot.

Track Logging Off, External Speaker

Touch Screen Both high, Off, External low

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 69

 Basic system settings 3   Basic settings

Status items

The status items are features you have activated for use. See Activate features/plugins for use (page
47). If a feature is deactivated, the status items associated with it are no longer available.
The Select Status Items screen has two tabs where you can configure various display options for the
status text items.

Run screen slide-out status

On the Run Screen tab, you can set what items display on the Run screen in the status slide-out panel
when you tap the edge of the panel. The status text items appropriate for the features/plugins you
are currently using display in the Info Items list.

70 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 3   Basic settings Basic system settings

1. Set the upper left status text item:

a. From the Info Items list, tap the item you want to use.
b. Tap the left ^ Set Item button. The information displays in the upper left field.
2. Set the upper right status text item:
a. From the Info Items list, tap the item you want to use.
b. Tap the right ^ Set Item button. The information displays in the upper right field.
3. From the Timeout list, select a time. This is how long the tab remains on-screen before retracting.
To have the tab extended until you close it manually, select Never.
4. To add status items to the slide-out tab:
a. Tap the position on the tab that you want to fill. For example, to add an item to the first
position on the list, tap at the location shown.
b. From the Info Items list, tap the item you want to use.
c. Tap <- Set Item.
5. To save the configuration, tap OK.

Info screen
On the Info Screen tab, you can determine which items will be displayed on the Info panel when you

tap .
The status text items appropriate for the features/plugins you are currently using display in the Info
Screen list.

1. Set the left Info text items:

a. From the Info Items list, tap the item you want to use.
b. Tap the left ^ Set Item button.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 71

 Basic system settings 3   Basic settings

c. Repeat steps a and b until you have all the items you want, or the list is full. The
information displays in the left field.
2. Set the right Info text items:
a. From the Info Items list, tap the item you want to use.
b. Tap the right ^ Set Item button.
c. Repeat steps a and b until you have all the items you require, or the list is full. The
information displays in the right field.
3. To save the configuration, tap OK.

Status option list

The following list shows the status items you can choose to display on the Run screen. The status
items available depend on the optional features/plugins that are currently activated.
In the Display Setup screen, select Status Items and then tap Setup .

Status Item Explanation

(blank) Status text item is not shown

Along Track Error

Altitude Current height of the vehicle
Applied Rate Current application rate
Area to Empty Area that can still be applied before the tank is empty
Auxiliary Valve Current status of the auxiliary valve
Available Memory Amount of free space on the display's internal memory
Average Population Average rate across all rows
Avg Seed Spacing Average distance between seeds based on the average sample size
Blade Height Current height of the blade
Boot Depth Depth of the boot when installing tiles or the depth of the blade
when cleaning surface ditches (used with the Autoslope leveling
model)
CH1 - CH4 Product Level Current level of the products that are in channels 1-4
Client Name Name of the current client
CMR Percent Percentage of radio CMR packets received over the last 100 seconds
Control Speed Speed reported to the multi-application controller

72 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

3   Basic settings Basic system settings

Status Item Explanation

Correction Age Length of time since the last correction was received
Correction Type Correction type that is being used
Coverage Percent Percentage of the field area that is covered area
Current Flow Current flow of material
Cut/Fill Difference between the Blade Height and the Target Height:
l When Cut is shown, the current ground height is above the
target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red
down arrow, which means that the blade needs to move down
to reach the Target Height.
l When Fill is shown, the current ground height is below the
target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red up
arrow, which means that the blade needs to move up to reach
the Target Height.
Design Height Height the blade will attempt to reach. This is the Design Height ±
the Offset. When the blade reaches the Target Height, the arrows
turn green.
Design Slope When using the Autoslope leveling model, this displays the design
slope with respect to the current location along the section line.
Dist to Feature Distance to the nearest feature
Dist to Pause Distance to the pause position
East Distance that the vehicle is to the east of the field origin point (a
negative number means the vehicle is to the west of the field origin
point)
Engaged Time Length of time that the system has been engaged
Event Coverage Area Area that has been logged during the current event
Event Coverage Distance Distance covered while logging during the current event
Event Coverage Time Length of time that coverage logging has been engaged during the
current event
Event Name Name of the current event
Farm Name Name of the current farm
Field Area Field area within a pivot or headland boundary

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 73

Basic system settings 3   Basic settings

Status Item Explanation

Field Name Name of the current field
Free External Storage Amount of free space on the USB drive
Free Internal Storage Amount of free space on the display's internal memory
GMT Time Current Greenwich Mean Time
GPS Position Spacing
GPS Status GPS correction type that the GPS receiver is currently using
H Error Horizontal error:An estimation of the level of precision of the GPS
position in 2 dimensions
Heading Current heading of the vehicle, in degrees, from direct north
Heading to Feature Vehicle location relative to the nearest feature (feature is directly
ahead = 0°; directly behind = 180°)
Heading to Pause Direction vehicle is facing relative to the paused vehicle position
(directly ahead = 0°; directly behind = 180°)
Impl. Altitude Current height of the implement
Impl. CMR Percent Percentage of radio CMR packets received by the implement GPS
receiver over the last 100 seconds
Impl. Correction Age Age of the corrections used by the implement receiver
Impl. Correction Type Correction type used by the implement receiver
Impl. East Distance that the implement is to the east of the field origin point (a
negative number means the implement is to the west of the field
origin point)
Impl. Engaged Time Time that the implement has been engaged
Impl. GPS Status The status of the GPS correction used for the implement
Impl. H Error Implement horizontal error: An estimation of the level of precision
of the implement GPS position in 2 dimensions
Impl. HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision of the implement receiver: A
measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the
sky.
If the satellites are near each other in the sky, the HDOP is higher
(lower is better).
Impl. Heading Current heading of the implement, in degrees, from direct north

74 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

3   Basic settings Basic system settings

Status Item Explanation

Impl. Latitude Implement's current latitude
Impl. Long-Term XTE Implement Cross Track Error (XTE) when passes occur more than
one hour apart
Impl. Longitude Implement's current longitude
Impl. Network ID RTK network ID of the implement receiver's corrections
Impl. North Distance that the implement is to the north of the field origin point
(a negative number means the implement is to the south of the
field origin point)
Impl. Nudge/Trim Amount of nudge or trim currently applied to the implement
position
Impl. Offline Dist Distance away from the guidance line
Impl. Satellites Number of satellites the implement receiver is reading
Impl. Short-term XTE Implement pass-to-pass Cross Track Error (XTE) when passes occur
within less than 15 minutes
Impl. Speed Current implement speed
Impl. Steering Angle Steering angle of the implement
Impl. Up Vertical height of the implement relative to the field origin point (a
negative number means the implement is lower than the field origin
point)
Impl. Vehicle Model Implement profile name
Implement Name of the current implement
Implement F/B Offset Distance of front to back offset
Implement L/R Offset Distance of left to right offset
Implement Width Width of the implement
Latitude Vehicle's current latitude
Line Feature Length Length of the current line feature
Local Time Current local time
Long-term XTE Vehicle Cross Track Error (XTE) when passes occur more than one
hour apart.
Longitude Vehicle's current longitude

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 75

Basic system settings 3   Basic settings

Status Item Explanation

Longitude Vehicle's current longitude
NDVI Normalized Difference Vegetation Index
Nearest Point Name Bame of the nearest point feature
Network ID RTK network ID of the GPS receiver's corrections
Network Status Current status of the wireless cellular network
North Distance that the vehicle is to the north of the field origin point (a
negative number means the vehicle is to the south of the field origin
point)
Nudge Amount of nudge currently applied
Nudge/Trim Amount of nudge or trim currently applied
Offline Dist. Distance away from the guidance line
Offset X Relative Position X offset from the master benchmark
Offset Y Relative Position Y offset from the master benchmark
P Altitude Current height of the vehicle as reported by the primary blade GPS
receiver
P Blade Height Current height of the primary blade
P Boot Depth Depth of the boot when installing tiles or the depth of the blade
when cleaning surface ditches (used with the Autoslope leveling
model)
P CMR Percent Percentage of radio CMR packets received over the last 100 seconds
by the primary blade GPS receiver
P Correction Age Time since the GPS corrections were last received from the primary
FieldLevel™ GPS receiver
P Correction Type Correction type used by the primary blade receiver
P Cut/Fill Difference between the Primary Blade Height and the Primary
Target Height:
l When Cut is shown, the current ground height is above the
target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red
down arrow, which means that the blade needs to move down
to reach the Target Height.
l When fill is shown, the current ground height is below the
target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red up

76 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

3   Basic settings Basic system settings

Status Item Explanation

arrow, which means that the blade needs to move up to reach
the Target Height.
P Design Height Height the primary blade will attempt to reach. This is the Design
Height ± the Offset. When the blade reaches the Target Height, the
arrows turn green.
P Design Slope When using the Autoslope leveling model, this displays the design
slope with respect to the current location along the section line.
P Distance Traveled Distance traveled since Auto mode was enabled. (For use with
FieldLevel II Point to Slope mode). The d
P East Distance that the primary blade receiver is to the east of the field
origin point (a negative number means the receiver is to the west of
the field origin point)
P GPS Status GPS correction type that the primary blade GPS receiver is currently
using
P H Error (Horizontal error) An estimation of the level of precision of the
primary blade GPS position in 2 dimensions
P HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision of the primary blade receiver: A
measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the
sky. If the satellites are near each other in the sky, the HDOP is
higher (lower is better).
P Heading Current heading of the primary blade, in degrees, from direct north
P Latitude Primary blade's current latitude
P Longitude Primary blade's current longitude
P Network ID RTK network ID of the primary blade receiver's corrections
P North Distance that the primary blade receiver is to the north of the field
origin point (a negative number means the receiver is to the south
of the field origin point)
P Offset Separate plane that is parallel to the design plane. The offset if
defined by a single measurement, which is the height that the offset
plane is from the design plane.
P Offset X Relative Position X offset from the master benchmark
P Offset Y Relative Position Y offset from the master benchmark
P Satellites Number of satellites the system is currently being received by the
FieldLevel II GPS receiver

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 77

Basic system settings 3   Basic settings

Status Item Explanation

P Section Line Number Line number of the primary blade
P Speed Speed of the vehicle as reported by the primary blade GPS receiver
P Target Height Height the primary blade will attempt to reach. This is the Design
Height ± the Offset. When the blade reaches the Target Height, the
arrows turn green.
P Up Height of the primary blade receiver relative to the field origin point
(a negative number means the blade is lower than the field origin
point)
P VDOP Vertical Dilution of Precision of the FieldLevel II GPS receiver: A
measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the
sky. If the satellites are near each other in the sky, the VDOP is
higher (lower is better).
P Vertical Error Estimate Current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel II
GPS receiver
Pressure Current pressure as reported by the primary pressure sensor
Productive Area Area of Area Features that are designated as "productive"
Radio Signal Strength DCM-300 wireless signal strength
S Altitude Current height of the vehicle as reported by the secondary blade
GPS receiver
S Blade Height Current height of the secondary blade
S CMR Percent Percentage of radio CMR packets received over the last 100 seconds
by the secondary blade GPS receiver
S Correction Age Time since the GPS corrections were last received from the
secondary FieldLEvel GPS receiver
S Correction Type Correction type used by the secondary blade receiver
S Cut/Fill Difference between the Secondary Blade Height and the Secondary
Target Height:
l When Cut is shown, the current ground height is above the
target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red
down arrow, which means that the blade needs to move down
to reach the Target Height.
l When Fill is shown, the current ground height is below the
target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red up
arrow, which means that the blade needs to move up to reach

78 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

3   Basic settings Basic system settings

Status Item Explanation

the Target Height.
S Design Height Height the secondary blade will attempt to reach. This is the Design
Height ± the Offset. When the blade reaches the Target Height, the
arrows turn green.
S Distance Traveled Distance traveled since Auto mode was enabled (for use with
FieldLevel II Point to Slope mode)
S East Distance that the secondary blade receiver is to the east of the field
origin point (a negative number means the receiver is to the west of
the field origin point)
S GPS Status GPS correction type that the secondary blade GPS receiver is
currently using
S H Error (Horizontal error) Estimation of the level of precision of the
secondary blade GPS position in 2 dimensions
S HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision of the secondary blade receiver: A
measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the
sky. If the satellites are near each other in the sky, the HDOP is
higher (lower is better).
S Heading Current heading of the secondary blade, in degrees, from direct
north
S Latitude Secondary blade's current latitude
S Longitude Secondary blade's current longitude
S Network ID RTK network ID of the secondary blade receiver's corrections
S North Distance that the secondary blade receiver is to the north of the
field origin point (a negative number means the receiver is to the
south of the field origin point)
S Offset Separate plane that is parallel to the design plane. The offset if
defined by a single measurement, which is the height that the offset
plane is from the design plane.
S Offset X Relative Position X offset from the master benchmark
S Offset Y Relative Position Y offset from the master benchmark
S Satellites Number of satellites the system is currently being received by the
FieldLevel II GPS receiver
S Section Line Number Line number of the secondary blade

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 79

Basic system settings 3   Basic settings

Status Item Explanation

S Speed Speed of the vehicle as reported by the secondary blade GPS
receiver
S Target Height Height the secondary blade will attempt to reach. This is the Design
Height ± the Offset. When the blade reaches the Target Height, the
arrows turn green.
S Up Height of the secondary blade receiver relative to the field origin
point (a negative number means the blade is lower than the field
origin point)
S VDOP Vertical Dilution of Precision of the FieldLevel II GPS receiver: A
measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the
sky. If the satellites are near each other in the sky, the VDOP is
higher (lower is better).
S Vertical Error Estimate Current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel II
GPS receiver
Satellites Number of satellites the system is currently receiving
Secondary Pressure Current pressure, as reported by the secondary pressure sensor
Section Line Number Number of the current section line
Seed Mults % Percentage of time an more than one seed is placed for every
intended drop
Seed Population Amount of seed planted per acre/hectare
Seed Singulation Percentage of time an individual seed is placed for every intended
drop
Seed Skips % Percentage of seed that has not been planted
Seed Spacing Percentage of seed that has been applied in the specified spacing
Session Coverage Area Area that has been logged during the current session
Session Coverage Dist Distance covered while logging during the current session
Session Coverage Time Length of time that coverage logging has been engaged during the
current session
Session Time Length of the current field session
Short-term XTE Vehicle pass-to-pass Cross Track Error (XTE) when passes occur
within less than 15 minutes
Speed Current vehicle speed

80 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

3   Basic settings Basic system settings

Status Item Explanation

Steering Angle Angle reported by the rotary potentiomenter or the AutoSense™
device
Survey Area Total area of the current survey
Survey Cut/Fill Difference between the Blade Height and the Target Height:
l When Cut is shown, the current ground height is above the
target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red
down arrow, which means that the blade needs to move down
to reach the Target Height.
l When Fill is shown, the current ground height is below the
target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red up
arrow, which means that the blade needs to move up to reach
the Target Height.
Survey Points Number of survey points that have been created
Swath Length Length of the current guidance line
Note  – FreeForm™ curves are made up of line segments, so the Swath
Length value is not appropriate for FreeForm curves.

Swath Number Swath number (L = left, R = right)

Note  – FreeForm curves are made up of line segments, so the Swath
Number value is not appropriate for FreeForm curves.

Swath Points The number of points that define the current line.
Tank Level Current level of the tank
Tank Level N Level of nitrogen currently in the tank
Tank Level NH3 Level of anhydrous ammonia currently in the tank
Tank/Bin Level Current level of the tank or bin
Target Rate Application target rate
Total Boundaries Area Total area between the current boundaries
Total Seed Rate Total seed rate that is currently being applied
Total Vol Applied Total volume of material applied
Total Vol Applied N Total volume of nitrogen applied
Total Vol Applied NH3 Total volume of anhydrous ammonia applied
Transfer Status Connected Farm™ transfer activity

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 81

Basic system settings 3   Basic settings

Status Item Explanation

TrueGuide Roll Roll corrections in degrees that are applied
TrueGuide Trim Distance from the guidance line that the vehicle has been shifted
Up Vertical height of the vehicle relative to the field origin point (a
negative number means the vehicle is lower than the field origin
point)
VDOP Vertical Dilution of Precision of the FieldLevel II GPS receiver: A
measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the
sky.
If the satellites are near each other in the sky, the VDOP is higher
(lower is better).
Vehicle Model Model of vehicle that is configured
Vehicle Type Type of vehicle that is configured
Vertical Error Estimate Current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel II
GPS receiver

82 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 3   Basic settings Basic system settings

Time setup

Note  – When you configure the time zone, multiple warning messages may display. Do not be concerned by
this.
To synchronize the system time to the GPS signals:

1. From the Display Setup screen, tap Timezone.

2. Tap Setup . If the time is not correct, tap the - or + button to change the time by 1-hour
increments.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 83

Basic system settings 3   Basic settings

84 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 CHAPTER
4
Data management

In this chapter:
This chapter explains:
Managing data 86 l How to transfer data between a USB
Transfer data 86 drive and the display

Delete data 90 l The structure of data on the USB and

computer
Data storage structure 92
l The Data Dictionary
Data Dictionary categories 103

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 85

 Managing data 4   Data management

Managing data
As part of data management, you can:

l Transfer files. See Transfer data (page 86).

l Delete files. See Delete data (page 90).
l Edit and add to the data entry categories by editing the data dictionary. See Data Dictionary
categories (page 103).
l Create or load a data dictionary. See Create / load a data dictionary (page 105).
l View a PDF file of an event summary. See Event subfolder (page 96).
l Import an AB line or boundary. See Import AB Lines or boundaries (page 373).
l Save an Autopilot system vehicle configuration file (.vdb). See Save vehicle profile (page 190).
Files generated by the FmX integrated display are saved in a specific structure on the USB drive. See
Data storage structure (page 92).

Transfer data
At the Data Files screen, you can:

l Transfer data between a USB drive and the display's internal storage. See Display to USB (page
88) or Transfer from USB (page 89).
l Transfer data between a USB drive and a computer. See USB to computer (page 89).
l Delete data from a USB drive or the display's internal storage. See Delete data (page 90).

86 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 4   Data management Transfer data

Data Files screen

You can access the Data Files screen from either:

l The Home screen: Tap Data Files.

l The Configuration screen:

a. At the Home screen, tap .

b. At the Configuration screen, tap System and then tap Setup .

c. If necessary, enter the administration password and then tap OK.
d. Select Data Files from the list and then tap Manage. The Data Files screen displays.

Data File categories

The categories available on the Data Files screen are:

Category Subcategories and data

Summary Files PDF summary files listed under client name

Diagnostics Screen shots: Folder containing screen captures

System logs

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 87

Transfer data 4   Data management

Category Subcategories and data

Configuration Features:
Implements:
System Archive:
Varieties:
Vehicle Archive:

Data Dictionary Data dictionary. See Data Dictionary categories (page 103).

Field Data Data for all activities in the field. Data is structured as:
Client / Farm / Field / Event

Display to USB
CAUTION – Do not remove the USB drive from the socket while the application is copying data. This will corrupt
the data.

CAUTION – POTENTIAL LOSS OF DATA!
If you copy files from:
- An to another or to an FmX integrated display.
- An physical FmX integrated display to another or to an FmX integrated display
First make sure you have created a subfolder labeled with the display serial number for your files. Transfer your
files to this subfolder. Otherwise, you will overwrite files when you copy and you will corrupt your data.

1. At the Data Files screen from the display's Internal Storage list, tap the item to copy. You can:
l Select all files in the category: Select the entire category by tapping the category name.

l Select individual files: See files within a category by tapping . The arrow changes to a
down arrow and shows the files stored under the category. Then select the file or files
you want.
l Select all files: Select Everything.

2. Tap Copy >. The item is copied to the USB list.

88 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 4   Data management Transfer data

Transfer from USB

CAUTION – Do not remove the USB drive from the socket while the application is copying data. This will corrupt
the data.

CAUTION – POTENTIAL LOSS OF DATA!
If you copy files from:
- An to another or to an FmX integrated display.
- An physical FmX integrated display to another or to an FmX integrated display
First make sure you have created a subfolder labeled with the display serial number for your files. Transfer your
files to this subfolder. Otherwise, you will overwrite files when you copy and you will corrupt your data.

1. At the Data Files screen from the USB list, tap the item to copy. You can:
l Select all files in the category: Select the entire category by tapping the category name.

l Select individual files: See files within a category by tapping . The arrow changes to a
down arrow and shows the files stored under the category. Then select the file or files
you want.
l Select all files: Select Everything.

2. Tap Copy >. The item is copied to the Internal Storage list.

USB to computer
After you have transferred data from the display to the USB:

1. Remove the USB drive from the display.

2. Insert the USB drive into your computer.
If you place the files in a series of folders, the combined filename and folder path may become
too long and the operating system may not allow you to open the files. To avoid this, it is
recommended that you place data in your computer’s C:\ folder.
3. Copy the appropriate folder to the office computer using an application such as Windows®
Explorer. This copies all the sub-folders and files in the folder.
Note  – When you copy or move files using Windows Explorer, you must keep all the shape-files (.dbf,
.shp, and .shx) together so that office software can open the theme file. To ensure that the files stay
together, always copy the entire folder rather than just the individual files.
4. If you create a new event in a field, and you already have the\Field\ folder containing any
previous events on the office computer, you should still copy the \Field\ folder so that the new
EventHistory information is copied.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 89

 Delete data 4   Data management

Delete data
CAUTION – Deleting data is permanent. You cannot undo the deletion or restore the data.

If you need to create more space, you can use the FmX integrated display to delete from the
internal memory or the USB drive:

l Clients
l Farms
l Fields
l Events
Note  – You cannot undo data deletion or restore the data.

1. At the Data Files screen, tap Delete Data. The Delete Data Storage screen displays.
2. If you want to delete from:

l The internal memory of the display: Tap the Internal tab.

l The USB drive: Tap the USB Drive tab.

90 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

4   Data management Delete data

3. To delete a specific item:

a. In the lists for Client, Farm, Field or Event, tap the item you want to delete.
b. Tap Delete.
c. To exit the Delete Data Storage screen, tap OK.
4. To delete all materials:
5. To delete all events:
a. Tap Delete All Events.
b. Enter the administration password.
6. To delete all files on the display:
a. Tap Delete EVERYTHING.
b. Enter the administration password.
7. The system displays a message asking you to confirm the deletion. If you want to proceed, tap
Yes.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 91

 Data storage structure 4   Data management

Data storage structure

The FmX integrated display stores client, farm, field, and event data in a specific structure on the
computer and USB drive. The first level folder is AgGPS.
Depending on your system configuration and the operations you perform, the top level folders of
the structure are:

l AB Lines folder (page 92)

l Archives folder (page 93)
l Autopilot folder (page 93)
l Data folder (page 93)
l Data Dictionary folder (page 100)
l Diagnostics folder (page 100)
l Prescriptions folder (page 101)
l Summaries folder (page 102)
l Task Data folder (page 103)

AB Lines folder
There is one set of boundary and AB Line shapes for each field:

l Boundary.* - Fields with boundaries include a boundary polygon stored in the boundary.shp
file. Fields without boundaries do not contain a boundary file.
l Swath.* - For fields with boundaries, AB polylines are stored in the swath.shp file.
Note  – Units are always metric in files created by the display.
The following is stored in the boundary and AB line attribute files.

Column Field Description Format

Area Field area (Boundary area) ha
Date Date the field was created YYYYMMDD
Dist1

Dist2

ID AB Line number ID
Length Length of the AB Line meters

92 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 4   Data management Data storage structure

Column Field Description Format

Name Name assigned to the AB Line
Perimeter Field perimeter distance meters
(Boundary only)

The size of the field is not defined unless a field has a boundary. Therefore, the %_Complete in the
EventHistory.dbf file is always zero for fields without boundaries
Note  – If you browse the .dbf files using an Excel spreadsheet, date fields may appear in a different format,
depending on your local settings.Unless a field has a boundary, the size of the field is not defined. Therefore,
for fields without boundaries the %_Complete in the EventHistory.dbf file is always zero.

Archives folder
When the ProgramLog.txt file becomes larger than 1024 KB, it is backed up to a file named
ProgramLog.old and stored in the Archives folder.

Autopilot folder
The Autopilot folder contains the following subfolders:

l Configuration
l Custom Vehicle Configurations
l VDB
l Vehicle Database

Data folder
The data folder contains the client subfolder and all subsequent subfolders related to the client.

Client subfolder
The client is the customer for whom the work is being done. This folder contains at least one Farm
subfolder for each client.

Farm subfolder
A farm is a collection of fields. This folder contains at least one Field subfolder related to each farm.

Field subfolder
You create an on-screen field to represent an actual field, part of an actual field, or a group of more
than one actual fields.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 93

 Data storage structure 4   Data management

This folder contains an Event subfolder for each event performed on the field as well as the following
files:

Data Explanation Files

Field AB Line Boundary and/or AB Line Swaths.shp
polylines Swaths.dbf
Swaths.shx
Field Boundary Polygon (Only available if the Boundary.shp
field is a headland field and Boundary.dbf
therefore has a boundary) Boundary.shx
Coordinates Contains coordinates of the field <Latitude Longitude
boundary file Altitude>.pos
Paused Files Information regarding guidance
being paused
Event history Information about each event EventHistory.dbf
carried out in the field Version / Client / Farm / Field /
Event / Operator / Material /
Date Open / Time Open /
Date Close / Time Close /
Duration / Primary AB / ABLine /
Cover Area / Cover Distance /
Cover Time / Engage Time
Point features Attribute ID and latitude, PointFeature.shp
longitude, and height PointFeature.dbf
PointFeature.shx
Line features Line with attribute ID LineFeature.shp
LineFeature.dbf
LineFeature.shx
Area features Area polygons with attribute ID AreaFeature.shp
AreaFeature.dbf
AreaFeature.shx

Event History file

The EventHistory.dbf file contains information on every event carried out in the field.

94 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 4   Data management Data storage structure

Data Explanation
ABLine Guidance line used
Client Client name
Cover area Area covered
Cover distance Distance covered
Cover time Total time to cover the covered area
Date close Date the field was closed
Date open Date the field was opened
Duration Length of time that the field was open (seconds)
Engage time Time engaged
Event Event name
Farm Farm name
Field Field name
Material Material name
Operator Operator name
PrimaryAB Number of the primary AB Line
Time close Time the field was closed
Time open Time the field was opened
Version FmX integrated display firmware version

Data in features file

One row of data is stored in the <type>.dbf file for each feature of that feature type recorded in the
field.

Data Explanation Format / Notes

Area Field area (Area only) ha

Date Date the feature was created. yyyy/mm/dd

Dist1

Dist2

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 95

 Data storage structure 4   Data management

Data Explanation Format / Notes

ID Feature ID

Length Length of the AB Line. meters

Name Feature name

Perimeter Field perimeter distance (Area only) meters

PrefWeight

SwathsIn

Time Time the feature was recorded. hh:mm:ss.s

Version Features attribute file version.

The following data is only recorded in point features.

Data Explanation Format / Notes

AlarmRad Alarm radius meters

Height Ground mean sea level height at antenna meters

position. If you are mapping on a slope, the
height may be wrong.

Latitude Antenna latitude decimal degrees

Longitude Antenna longitude decimal degrees

Status_Txt GPS status meters

WarningRad Warning radius meters

Event subfolder
An event is a precision agriculture application or activity on a particular field. For example:

l Planting of seed
l Application of fertilizer or lime
l Spraying with fungicide, herbicide, or insecticide

96 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 4   Data management Data storage structure

Files stored in this folder are:

Data Explanation Files

Coverage Graphical files containing Coverage.shp
polygons Coverage.dbf
Coverage.shx
Track Graphical files containing a series Track3D_<date time>.shp
of 3D points with attributes Track3D_<date time>.dbf
Track3D_<date time>.shx
Free Form Guidance Graphical files containing paths Swaths.shp
for free form guidance Swaths.shx
Swaths.dbf

Coverage logging file

The display creates a coverage logging file when any application coverage is recorded. For each
coverage polygon, the following information is saved to the coverage logging file.

Data Field Description

AppType Application type ID
AppliedRate Applied rate reported by the variable rate controller
DateClosed Date the polygon was closed
GPS_Status Numeric GPS status value
Height Height in meters
Speed Average GPS ground speed for the polygon (in meters per
second)
Status_Txt GPS status description
Swath The current swath number when coverage was recorded
TimeClosed Time the polygon was closed
Version Coverage attribute file version
XTE Implement Cross Track Error (in meters)

Track logging file

A track logging file is created whenever the event is opened. At each point, a number of attributes
are recorded.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 97

 Data storage structure 4   Data management

The units stored in the track attribute file (Track3D_<date time>.dbf) are in metric units.
Also see: Map settings (page 59).

Data Field Description Format / Notes

Along_Line Along Line distance from start of swath meters
Ant_HAE Antenna height above ellipsoid meters
Ant_Lat Antenna latitude (WGS-84) DD.dddddddd
Ant_Long Antenna longitude (WGS-84) DD.dddddddd
Appln_Wdth Application width meters
As applied The actual rate applied by the rate control
system when serial rate control, TAC or the
Field-IQ system are used
Auto_Steer Auto-Steer Flag (1=on, 0=off) On or off
Corct_Age DGPS signal correction age seconds
DOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision – a measure of –
the quality of positions based on satellite
geometry
Field_Name Name of the field –
GPS_Status GPS status value 1 to 12
Ground_HAE Ground height above ellipsoid meters
Heading Direction of travel with respect to true North. decimal degrees
Height Mean sea level height of ground meters
Local_Time Local time hh:mm:ss.s
Logging_On Coverage logging Flag (1=on, 0=off) On or off
NDVI The NDVI values recorded when using the
GreenSeeker plugin (not currently
implemented)
Num_Stats Number of GPS satellites –
Offline Offline distance from swath center line meters
Pitch The pitch –
Relative_Height Height meters

98 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 4   Data management Data storage structure

Data Field Description Format / Notes

Roll The roll –
Speed GPS derived ground speed kph
Status_Text GPS status description –
Swath_Num Current swath/headland number
Swath_wdth Swath width meters
Target Target rate at the current position –
Target Target application rate when serial rate control,
TAC or the Field-IQ system are used
Total_Qty Total volume of material as applied for the –
current field
Only supported for the:
l Aerial Flow Controller
l Autocal Flow controller
l Crophawk Flow Meter
TRACK_ID Date and time stamp –
Units Units metric
UTC_Date Point creation date YYYYMMDD
UTC_Time UTC time hh:mm:ss.s
Version Track attribute file version –
Yaw The yaw –

Graphical data formats

The FmX integrated display uses the Environmental Systems Research Institute (ESRI) 3D shape-file
format for storing the layers of graphical information collected in the field (for example, spray
coverage, track logging points, and features). The three files in a shapefile set are:

l <filename>.dbf file: Contains the feature attributes

l <filename>.shp file: Contains position information
l <filename>.shx file: An index file that links the position information with its attributes
The term shapefile is used to refer to these three files collectively.
The display records all latitude, longitude, and height data in decimal degrees.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 99

 Data storage structure 4   Data management

Note  – The display reads and writes ESRI ArcView version 2.0 or 3.1 3D polylines, polygons, and points. The M
and Z entity types introduced in ArcView 3.1 can be generated in the track logging files, but cannot be read by
the display. For more information, visit the ESRI website (www.esri.com).

Graphical file editing

ESRI shape (.shp) and attribute (.dbf) files can be used in many other software packages that can
import or use .shp and .dbf formats.
The Farm Works Software® is recommended. For more information, go to www.farmworks.com.
Data collected by the display can be opened directly into the Farm Works software. You can make
changes to the files and save them on an office computer.
The Microsoft Excel® spreadsheet software and most database software also let you open and view
the data in the attribute (.dbf) file.
The display can load files that you created in office software. Save Shapefile or Agfile (.gdx)
prescriptions to the \AgGPS\Prescriptions\ folder on the USB drive to send rates to a variable rate
controller.

Data Dictionary folder

The Data Dictionary folder contains text files you can add to customize the data dictionary. See Data
Dictionary categories (page 103) and Create / load a data dictionary (page 105).

Diagnostics folder
Diagnostic logs are stored for the FmX integrated display and activities. Logs are useful for Trimble
Support to troubleshoot system operation issues.
The ProgramLog.txt file is saved in the Diagnostics folder and can be useful for troubleshooting. This
file contains data from checks performed by the FmX integrated display:

l When the display is turned on or off

l Periodically, while running
The file can be read with a text editor such as Notepad.
When this file becomes larger than 1024 KB, it is backed up to a file named ProgramLog.old and
stored in the Archives folder. See Archives folder (page 93).
The Diagnostics folder contains the following subfolders:

l Autopilot (if you are using the Autopilot system)

l Preferences: System settings stored in the <Preferences>.xml file
l Screenshots: Screenshot files automatically numbered Screenshot_<num>.png
l gps

100 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 4   Data management Data storage structure

l logs
l Screenshots

Autopilot subfolder
This folder contains Autopilot configuration settings (vehicle.cfg).

Screenshots folder
The Screenshots folder contains screenshots you have captured.

System folder
The system folder contains log files used in troubleshooting.

Program log files

The ProgramLog.txt file can be useful for troubleshooting. This file contains data from checks
performed by the FmX integrated display:

l When the display is turned on or off

l Periodically, while running
When this file becomes larger than 1024 KB, it is backed up to a file named ProgramLog.old and
stored in the Archives folder. See Archives folder (page 93).
The file can be read with a text editor such as Notepad.

Prescriptions folder
For each prescription that you generate, the system stores three prescription files in either of these
formats:

l ESRI shape-file format:

l <prescription_name>.shp

l <prescription_name>.dbf

l <prescription_name>.shx

l .gdx file format:

l <prescription_name>.gdx

Some GIS software packages generate other files and include different contents in the files. If these
files are on the USB drive, they are ignored when you transfer from the USB to the display.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 101

 Data storage structure 4   Data management

Summaries folder
The Summaries folder contains files such as:

l Program log files

l PDF summary file

PDF summary file
When you close a field, the display creates a PDF summary file. This file is saved to the
folder: \AgGPS\Summaries\<client_farm_field_event>\.

The Event Summary PDF file may include the following images of the field:

l Overlap: Coverage and any overlaps

l Height: Vertical height of the GPS position
l Applied rate: Volume at which the spray boom applied solution
l GPS quality
l Average XTE coverage layer: Degree of implement drift
The file also shows information about the:

l Event
l Vehicle setup
To view a summary report on a computer:

1. Remove the USB drive from the display.

2. Insert the USB into an office computer.

102 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 4   Data management Data Dictionary categories

3. Select the folder \AgGPS\Summaries\.

4. Open the file Index.html.
Note  – If you use the Microsoft® Internet Explorer ® Internet browser, you may need to allow ActiveX®
technology to see all of the summary file.

Task Data folder

The TaskData folder contains yield data collected in the ISO11783 BIN format, which is read by Farm
Works and other precision agriculture software.

Data Dictionary categories

The data dictionary editor enables you to edit default data entry categories and add new ones.

Default data entry categories

The following are default categories in the Data Dictionary.

l Application method l Harvest l Soil type

l Client l Harvest year l Stoppage reason
l Crop l Implement l Target pests
l Custom 1, 2, 3 and 4 l Material l Vehicle
l Event l Operator l Wind direction
l Farm l Operator EPA# l Wind gust speed
l Farm location l Sky conditions l Wind speed
l Field l Soil conditions

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 103

Data Dictionary categories 4   Data management

Edit data entry categories

1. At the Display Setup screen, tap Data Dictionary.

2. Tap Setup . The Data Dictionary Setup screen displays.
3. From the data list, select the data item you want to add or change.
l Tap New to create a new item.
l Tap Edit to change an existing item.
4. Define the custom entry by manually entering or updating the name, then tap OK.
5. The new or edited entry displays in the data list on the Data Dictionary Setup screen.

104 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 4   Data management Data Dictionary categories

Create / load a data dictionary

The FmX integrated display can load data dictionaries that enable you to select field entry data (for
example, Client, Farm, Field, and Event) from a list of predefined values. This saves you time from
continually entering commonly used categories.
You can create a data dictionary either through the display or using Farm Works software.
To create a data dictionary on a computer:

1. On a computer, create a text file. The text file can have any name, but the file extension must be
.txt.

2. Enter the text.

3. Copy the .txt file to the \AgGPS\Data Dictionary\ folder on a USB drive.
4. On specific display screens (for example, at the Client screen), the file entries will display.
5. To access the entries in the dictionary:
a. At the Field Setup screen, tap New.
b. Tap any list's down arrow to see the available items in the list.
c. Select the appropriate item from the list.
d. Tap OK.
Note  – You can still enter new information as before, but these entries are not added to the data
dictionary. To add items to the data dictionary, edit the .txt file on an office computer.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 105

Data Dictionary categories 4   Data management

106 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 CHAPTER
5
Connectivity settings

In this chapter: This chapter covers connectivity related to:

l GPS receiver settings, including
GPS receiver settings 108 corrections
GPS output settings 125 l GPS output
Remote Output setup 130 l Serial data input
Serial Data Input 136 l Remote Output setup
Ag3000 modem 137
DCM-300 Modem 138

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 107

 GPS receiver settings 5   Connectivity settings

GPS receiver settings

The FmX integrated display automatically adds a GPS receiver option that controls the internal GPS
receiver, when you install:

l Manual Guidance
l Autopilot
l FieldLevel II
In addition, the system may need second GPS receiver. For example, the TrueTracker system uses a
second receiver that is configured with a separate GPS receiver option.

Note  – GPS receiver settings will show different options, depending on how your system is setup.
Setup of the GPS receiver begins with corrections. These corrections are available:

l Autonomous (no GPS corrections): WAAS and EGNOS

l CenterPoint™ RTK. See CenterPoint RTK (page 111).
l CenterPoint RTX™. See CenterPoint RTX (fs) (page 113).
l CenterPoint RTX (sc) (page 115)
l CenterPoint RTX (ss) (page 116)
l OmniSTAR® wide-area differential GPS service. See OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2 (page 120).
l RangePoint RTX (page 123)

l SBAS: Tracks DGPS correction systems using WAAS

108 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 5   Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings

AgRemote Interface
Note  – Only advanced users should use the AgRemote interface.
The FmX integrated display has an on-screen AgRemote interface for manually adjusting GPS
receiver settings.
To access the on-screen AgRemote interface:

1. At the Configuration screen, tap GPS Receiver and then tap Diagnostics. The GPS Status
screen displays.
2. Tap AgRemote. The on-screen AgRemote interface displays.
For more information on the correct use of the AgRemote interface, refer to the AgRemote Software
Guide for AgGPS Receivers on www.trimble.com.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 109

 GPS receiver settings 5   Connectivity settings

Basic correction settings

For the basic corrections, complete the following steps.

1. At the Configuration screen, tap GPS Receiver , then tap Setup . The GPS Receiver Settings
screen displays.
2. On the Settings tab, from the Corrections list select either:
l Autonomous
l SBAS
3. On the Advanced tab, enter the settings.

Setting Explanation

Elevation Mask

SNR Mask

RTK Base Station Filter Enabled, Disabled

RTK Base Station CMR ID Can be edited if Filter is enabled

Scintillation Filter On or Off

4. On the Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select Record Logs.
5. On the Radar Output tab, enter the settings.

Setting Explanation

Connector None or Connector D

Radar Frequency Rate Enter Hz/mph rate

6. When you have completed the settings, tap OK.

110 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

5   Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings

CenterPoint RTK
Trimble CenterPoint™ RTK is radio-broadcast corrections from a ground-based reference station
using either:

l Single-based line (CenterPoint RTK)

l Internet with a DCM-300 modem (CenterPoint VRS)

1. At the Configuration screen, tap GPS Receiver , then tap Setup . The GPS Receiver Settings
screen displays.
2. On the Settings tab, complete the settings.

Setting Explanation

Antenna Selection Select a supported antenna type

Corrections Choose CenterPoint RTK

Net ID

GPS Output Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send

messages. See GPS output settings (page 125).

3. On the xFill tab, enter the settings.

Setting Explanation

x-Fill™ technology On or Off

During RTK signal interruptions, xFill technology can sustain
RTK operation for up to 20 minutes.

Frequency See Frequencies and baud rate (page 124).

Baud Rate See Frequencies and baud rate (page 124).

Datum Selector Choose the datum that was used when the RTK base
station was surveyed. For more information contact your
local reseller.
Note  – You must select the correct base datum for your location.
If you select an incorrect value, this will result in incorrect xFill
operation.

4. On the SecureRTK tab, enter the key or keys and an optional description.
The base station access code provided by your base station service provider. After you enter
this code, the Status and Expiry values change to show the current status of the security feature.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 111

GPS receiver settings 5   Connectivity settings

SecureRTK is a Trimble proprietary base station security feature that enables a service provider
with a Trimble RTK base station to generate time-based access codes for their supported
rovers. If SecureRTK is enabled on the base station, rovers with authorized access codes can
use corrections from that base.
SecureRTK requires firmware version 1.59, or later, on MS750™ GPS receivers, and firmware
version 4.60 or later on AgRTK, AgGPS 442, and Ag GPS 542 base stations.
Note  – Rovers without a SecureRTK access code are unable to access a secure Trimble RTK base station.
5. On the Advanced tab, only alter the settings if directed by Support.

Setting Explanation

Elevation Mask

SNR Mask

RTK Base Station Filter Enabled, Disabled

RTK Base Station CMR ID Can be edited if Filter is enabled

Scintillation Filter On or Off

6. On the Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select Record Logs.
7. On the Radar Output tab, enter the settings.

Setting Explanation

Connector Select Connector D to enable radar output.

The display can convert GPS speed into an analog
frequency that is identical to output from a radar speed
sensor. 

Radar Frequency Rate Enter the required rate.

8. When you have completed the settings, tap OK.

112 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 5   Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings

CenterPoint RTX (fs)

CenterPoint RTX™ (fs - fast satellite) is a satellite-based subscription correction service for the United
States that also requires RTK (advanced) to be unlocked.
Note  – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.

1. At the Configuration screen, tap GPS Receiver , then tap Setup . The GPS Receiver Settings
screen displays.
2. On the Settings tab, complete the settings.

Setting Explanation

Antenna Selection Select a supported antenna type

Corrections Choose CenterPoint RTX (fs)

GPS Output Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send

messages. See GPS output settings (page 125).

3. On the Frequencies tab, enter the settings for Frequency and Baud Rate. See Frequencies and baud
rate (page 124).
4. On the Advanced tab, only alter the settings if directed by Support.

Setting Explanation

Elevation Mask

SNR Mask

RTK Base Station Filter Enabled, Disabled

RTK Base Station CMR ID Can be edited if Filter is enabled

Scintillation Filter On or Off

5. On the Logging tab, enter the settings.

Setting Explanation

Record AgRemote Logs Off or Record Logs

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 113

GPS receiver settings 5   Connectivity settings

6. On the Radar Output tab, enter the settings.

Setting Explanation

Connector Select Connector D to enable radar output.

The display can convert GPS speed into an analog
frequency that is identical to output from a radar speed
sensor. 

Radar Frequency Rate Enter the required rate.

7. When you have completed the settings, tap OK.

114 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 5   Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings

CenterPoint RTX (sc)

CenterPoint RTX (sc - standard cell) is a satellite-based subscription correction service.
Note  – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.

1. At the Configuration screen, tap GPS Receiver , then tap Setup . The GPS Receiver Settings
screen displays.
2. On the Settings tab, complete the settings.

Setting Explanation

Antenna Selection Select a supported antenna type

Corrections Choose CenterPoint RTX (ss)

FastRestart On or off
FastRestart technology greatly reduces the time needed for
OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2/VBS and CenterPoint RTX
convergence. After the satellite signal has initially
converged, you can turn off the receiver. When you turn
the receiver on again, accuracy levels will be similar to those
experienced before shutdown.

Convergence Threshold Disabled

GPS Output Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send

messages. See GPS output settings (page 125).

3. On the Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select Record Logs.
4. On the Radar Output tab, enter the settings.

Setting Explanation

Connector Select Connector D to enable radar output.

The display can convert GPS speed into an analog
frequency that is identical to output from a radar speed
sensor. 

Radar Frequency Rate Enter the required rate.

5. When you have completed the settings, tap OK.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 115

 GPS receiver settings 5   Connectivity settings

CenterPoint RTX (ss)

CenterPoint RTX (ss - standard satellite) is a satellite-based subscription correction service that
requires a subscription to OmniSTAR intermediate.
Note  – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.

1. At the Configuration screen, tap GPS Receiver , then tap Setup . The GPS Receiver Settings
screen displays.
2. On the Settings tab, complete the settings.

Setting Explanation

Antenna Selection Select a supported antenna type

Corrections Choose CenterPoint RTX (ss)

FastRestart On or off
FastRestart technology greatly reduces the time needed for
OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2/VBS and CenterPoint RTX
convergence. After the satellite signal has initially
converged, you can turn off the receiver. When you turn
the receiver on again, accuracy levels will be similar to those
experienced before shutdown.
Note  – Do not move the vehicle from the point of system shut
down. Otherwise this feature will not work.

Convergence Threshold Disabled

GPS Output Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send

messages. See GPS output settings (page 125).

3. On the Frequencies tab, enter the settings for Frequency and Baud Rate. See Frequencies and baud
rate (page 124).
4. On the Advanced tab, only alter the settings if directed by Support.

Setting Explanation

Elevation Mask

SNR Mask

RTK Base Station Filter Enabled, Disabled

RTK Base Station CMR ID Can be edited if Filter is enabled

Scintillation Filter On or Off

116 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

5   Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings

5. On the Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select Record Logs.
6. On the Radar Output tab, enter the settings.

Setting Explanation

Connector Select Connector D to enable radar output.

The display can convert GPS speed into an analog
frequency that is identical to output from a radar speed
sensor. 

Radar Frequency Rate Enter the required rate.

7. When you have completed the settings, tap OK.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 117

 GPS receiver settings 5   Connectivity settings

OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2 - VBS

OmniSTAR VBS is a satellite-based subscription correction service delivered either by:

l Satellite
l Internet using a DCM-300 modem with <1.5" (3.8 cm) accuracy and GLONASS compatibility
Note  – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.

1. At the Configuration screen, tap GPS Receiver , then tap Setup . The GPS Receiver Settings
screen displays.
2. On the Settings tab, complete the settings.

Setting Explanation

Antenna Selection Select a supported antenna type

Corrections Choose OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2 - VBS

FastRestart On or off
FastRestart technology greatly reduces the time needed for
convergence. After the satellite signal has initially
converged, you can turn off the receiver. When you turn
the receiver on again, accuracy levels will be similar to those
experienced before shutdown.
Note  – Do not move the vehicle from the point of system shut
down. Otherwise this feature will not work.

Convergence Threshold Disabled

GPS Output Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send

messages. See GPS output settings (page 125).

3. On the Advanced tab, only alter the settings if directed by Support.

Setting Explanation

Elevation Mask

SNR Mask

4. On the Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select Record Logs.

118 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

5   Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings

5. On the Radar Output tab, enter the settings.

Setting Explanation

Connector Select Connector D to enable radar output.

The display can convert GPS speed into an analog
frequency that is identical to output from a radar speed
sensor. 

Radar Frequency Rate Enter the required rate.

6. When you have completed the settings, tap OK.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 119

 GPS receiver settings 5   Connectivity settings

OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2
OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2 is a high-accuracy, satellite-based subscription correction service. The
accuracy for each type is:

l HP: 2-4" (5-10 cm) accuracy

l XP: 3-4" (8-10 cm) accuracy
l GP: 2-4" (8-10 cm) accuracy (compatible with GLONASS)
Note  – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.

1. At the Configuration screen, tap GPS Receiver , then tap Setup . The GPS Receiver Settings
screen displays.
2. On the Settings tab, complete the settings.

Setting Explanation

Antenna Selection Select a supported antenna type

Corrections Choose OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2

FastRestart On or off
FastRestart technology greatly reduces the time needed for
convergence. After the satellite signal has initially
converged, you can turn off the receiver. When you turn
the receiver on again, accuracy levels will be similar to those
experienced before shutdown.

Convergence Threshold The required accuracy of the correction service before the
signal will converge and the automatic steering system will
engage.

GPS Output Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send

messages. See GPS output settings (page 125).

3. On the Advanced tab, only alter the settings if directed by Support.

Setting Explanation

Elevation Mask

SNR Mask

4. On the Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select Record Logs.

120 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

5   Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings

5. On the Radar Output tab, enter the settings.

Setting Explanation

Connector Select Connector D to enable radar output.

The display can convert GPS speed into an analog
frequency that is identical to output from a radar speed
sensor. 

Radar Frequency Rate Enter the required rate.

6. When you have completed the settings, tap OK.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 121

 GPS receiver settings 5   Connectivity settings

OmniSTAR VBS
OmniSTAR VBS is a satellite-based subscription correction service with 6-8" (15-20 cm) accuracy.
Note  – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.

1. At the Configuration screen, tap GPS Receiver , then tap Setup . The GPS Receiver Settings
screen displays.
2. On the Settings tab, complete the settings.

Setting Explanation

Antenna Selection Select a supported antenna type

Corrections Choose OmniSTAR VBS

GPS Output Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send

messages. See GPS output settings (page 125).

3. On the Advanced tab, only alter the settings if directed by Support.

Setting Explanation

Elevation Mask

SNR Mask

4. On the Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select Record Logs.
5. On the Radar Output tab, enter the settings.

Setting Explanation

Connector Select Connector D to enable radar output.

The display can convert GPS speed into an analog
frequency that is identical to output from a radar speed
sensor. 

Radar Frequency Rate Enter the required rate.

6. When you have completed the settings, tap OK.

122 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 5   Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings

RangePoint RTX
Trimble RangePoint™ RTX is a satellite-based subscription correction service with pass-to-pass <6"
(15 cm) accuracy and GLONASS compatibility.
Note  – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.

1. At the Configuration screen, tap GPS Receiver , then tap Setup . The GPS Receiver Settings
screen displays.
2. On the Settings tab, complete the settings.

Setting Explanation

Antenna Selection Select a supported antenna type

Corrections Choose RangePoint RTX

GPS Output Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send

messages. See GPS output settings (page 125).

3. On the Frequencies tab, enter the settings for Frequency and Baud Rate. See Frequencies and baud
rate (page 124).
4. On the Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select Record Logs.
5. On the Radar Output tab, enter the settings.

Setting Explanation

Connector Select Connector D to enable radar output.

The display can convert GPS speed into an analog
frequency that is identical to output from a radar speed
sensor. 

Radar Frequency Rate Enter the required rate.

6. When you have completed the settings, tap OK.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 123

 GPS receiver settings 5   Connectivity settings

Frequencies and baud rate

When you receive satellite signals, you must select the frequency and baud rate based on your
specific region.

Region Baud Rate

Western North America (RTX WN) 1557.8615 MHz at 600 baud

Central North America (RTX CN) 1557.8150 MHz at 2400 baud

Eastern North America (RTX EN) 1557.8590 MHz at 600 baud

South/Central America (RTX SA) 1539.8325 MHz at 600 baud

Europe/Africa (RTX EA) 1539.9525 MHz at 600 baud

Europe (RTX EU) 1529.7250 MHz at 2400 baud

Asia Pacific (RTX AP) 1539.8325 MHz at 600 baud

Note  – These frequencies do change occasionally. If you experience issues with the satellite signal, contact
your reseller for updated satellite information.

124 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

5   Connectivity settings GPS output settings

GPS output settings
To access the GPS Output Settings screen:

1. At the Configuration screen, tap GPS Receiver , then tap Setup . The GPS Receiver Settings
screen displays.
2. On the Settings tab, tap GPS Output. The GPS Output Settings screen displays. There are three
tabs available:
l CAN GPS messages (page 128)
l NMEA messages (page 128)
l Serial NMEA messages (page 126)

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 125

 GPS output settings 5   Connectivity settings

Serial NMEA messages

Note  – Depending on your configuration, NMEA message output may require: Part number 67091, FmX to
DE9, RS232 cable (Port A or B), Part number 59043, DB9(F) to DB9(F) modem cable.
Some GPS receivers can output serial NMEA messages to an external device. For example, if you
have an external device connected to the Autopilot controller, you can have the receiver
send GPS position information to the device. The messages are output through the NavController
harness laptop connector.
Note  – To enable NMEA output from another receiver for an optional feature, make sure the feature has
been selected from the feature list.
At the Serial NMEA Messages tab on the GPS Output Settings screen, complete the settings and tap OK.

Setting Explanation

Message Rate How often the message is sent. Options are:

l Off
l 1 min
l 30 sec
l 10 sec
l 1 Hz
l 3 Hz
l 5 Hz
l 10 Hz

Output Port What port the message should be sent from. Options are:
l A (ext GPS)
l B (ext GPS)
l C (int GPS)
l D (int GPS)
l Autopilot

Baud Rate Baud rate. Options are:

l 2400
l 4800
l 9600
l 19200
l 38400

126 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

5   Connectivity settings GPS output settings

Setting Explanation
l 57600

Maximum CGA Quality How high the quality of the message should be

Lat / Lon Precision Options are 1 through 10

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 127

 GPS output settings 5   Connectivity settings

NMEA messages
Some GPS receivers can output NMEA GGA type messages to an external device. For example, if you
have an external device connected to the Autopilot controller, you can have the receiver
send GPS position information to the device. The messages are output through the NavController
harness laptop connector.
Note  – To enable NMEA output from another receiver for an optional feature (for example, the GPS receiver
connected to an TrueTracker system controller), make sure the feature has been selected from the feature list.
At the NMEA tab on the GPS Output Settings screen, complete the settings and tap OK.

Setting Explanation

Message Rate How often you want the message sent

Baud Rate Baud rate

Messages Enabled On: Send NMEA message. Off: Do not send NMEA message.
Message types supported are:
l CGA
l VTG
l GSA
l GST
l RMC
l ZDA

CAN GPS messages
You can set up specific messages to be sent from the GPS receiver from a CAN port. If you are using
an ISO-certified implement, use this setting to send information to the implement (such as speed).
At the CAN GPS tab on the GPS Output Settings screen, complete the settings and tap OK.

Section Setting Explanation

Output Port The port you want the GPS speed to be

sent from

Rate How often you want the message to be

sent

Simulated Speeds Wheel Speed Port The port you want the wheel speed to be
sent from

128 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

5   Connectivity settings GPS output settings

Section Setting Explanation

Wheel Speed Rate Off or On

Radar / Ground Speed The port you want the radar/ground

Port speed to be sent from

Radar / Ground Speed Off or On

Rate

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 129

Remote Output setup 5   Connectivity settings

Remote Output setup

When remote output is activated, the FmX integrated display sends pulses to an external device.
For example, you can use a remote output signal to control a tree planter.
To set up Remote Output: 

1. Install Remote Output. See Activate features/plugins for use (page 47).
2. Set up Remote Output. See Remote Output settings (page 131).
3. Calibrate the lead time. See Calibrate implement lead time (page 133).

130 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

5   Connectivity settings Remote Output setup

Remote Output settings

To enable pulse remote output:

1. At the Configuration screen, select Remote Output and then tap Setup .
2. The Remote Output screen displays. Complete the settings and tap OK.
3. For Remote Output Connector:
Select Connector B.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 131

Remote Output setup 5   Connectivity settings

4. For Remote Output Type, choose the type:

a. For Time Based Pulse, enter:

Setting Explanation

Time The pulse interval in seconds

Duration The pulse duration in milliseconds

b. For Distance Based Pulse, enter:

Setting Explanation

Lead Time See Calibrate implement lead time (page 133).

Distance The distance in meters/decimal feet/feet and inches. The

pulse occurs at each increment of this distance. The first
pulse occurs at the A point. Pulse remote output is not
recommended for Headland patterns.

Duration The duration of the pulse in milliseconds (ms)

Within Line Distance The pulse occurs only when the vehicle is within this
distance of being online. If the vehicle is more than this
distance offline, no pulse occurs

Design Trigger Color The color of the pulse indicator that will display on the
screen when the system automatically outputs a pulse

Manual Trigger Color The color of the pulse indicator that will display on the
screen when you press the manual trigger button

Trigger Limits If you select None, the pulses triggered by the system are
unlimited. If you select Edit, enter the maximum number
of pulses (per swath) that will be triggered after you pass
the A point.

Note  – This option works with straight AB and A+ lines.

For using remote output using distance based pulses, see Distance-based pulse operation
(page 415).
c. For When Within Area Feature, enter the Lead Time. Calibrate the Lead Time setting to match
your implement. See Calibrate implement lead time (page 133). The pulse occurs only
when Remote Output is enabled. You must also enable Remote Output for each area
feature individually in the Mapping setup. See Field feature use (page 356).
d. For When Engaged, there are no options to set. Remote output occurs when the system is
engaged.

132 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 5   Connectivity settings Remote Output setup

e. For When Crossing a Line Feature, enter:

Setting Explanation

Lead Time See Calibrate implement lead time (page 133).

Distance The distance in meters/decimal feet/feet and inches. The

pulse occurs at each increment of this distance. The first
pulse occurs at the A point.
Note  – Pulse remote output is not recommended for
Headland patterns.

Duration The duration of the pulse in milliseconds (ms)

Within Line Distance The pulse occurs only when the vehicle is within this
distance of being online. If the vehicle is more than this
distance offline, no pulse occurs

Design Trigger Color The color of the pulse indicator that will display on the
screen when the system automatically outputs a pulse

Manual Trigger Color The color of the pulse indicator that will display on the
screen when you press the manual trigger button

Be sure to edit the line feature to enable remote output and the trigger warning. See Line
feature settings (page 147). Complete the settings and tap OK.
Note  – This option works with straight AB and A+ lines, pivots and curves.
For using remote output using when crossing a line feature, see Crossing a line feature
operation (page 416).
5. Tap OK when your are finished.

Calibrate implement lead time

There is usually a gap between the time when the system generates a pulse and the time when that
pulse triggers an action on the implement. To compensate for this system delay, you can set a lead
time to trigger the pulse slightly early so that the action occurs at the correct location.
For this calibration, drive the vehicle along a line and back, using Remote Output to mark points on
the ground. If the remote output is correctly calibrated, the points that you create when driving in
both directions will be close together.
To calibrate implement lead time:

1. Set front/back offset (page 134).

2. Calibrate front/back offset (page 134).
3. Set lead time (page 134).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 133

 Remote Output setup 5   Connectivity settings

Set front/back offset

Configure the correct front/back offset.
1. Accurately measure either of these as appropriate:
l Autopilot systems: The distance between the fixed axle of the vehicle and the part of the
implement where the trigger marks will be applied on the ground.
l Manual guidance systems: The distance between the antenna center-point and the part of
the implement where the trigger marks will be applied on the ground.
2. At the Configuration screen, tap Implement Setup.
3. Enter the measurement as the F/B Offset distance on the Implement Boom Setup screen.

Calibrate front/back offset

1. Create a straight AB Line.
2. At the Remote Output screen, set the Lead Time to 0.
3. Drive as slowly as possible down the AB Line from point A to point B, marking points on the
ground where the remote output triggers.
4. At the end of the line, turn the vehicle around.
5. Drive back down the line from point B to point A, marking another set of trigger points.
6. Measure the distance between the points from the first run and the points from the second
run.
7. Divide the distance by two.
8. Adjust your Front/Back Offset value by this amount.
9. If the return points are nearer where you originally started than the first set of points, increase
the F/B offset.
10. If the return points are further from where you originally started than the first set of points,
lower the F/B offset.

Set lead time

1. Drive at your intended application speed down the AB Line from point A to point B, marking
points on the ground where the remote output triggers. Ensure that your speed remains
constant.
2. At the end of the line, turn the vehicle around.
3. Drive back down the line from point B to point A, marking the trigger points.
4. Measure any offset distance between the points from the first run and the points from the
second run.

134 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 5   Connectivity settings Remote Output setup

5. Divide the distance by two.

6. Convert your speed from mph to inches/second.
Inches/second = mph x 17.6.
7. To calculate the lead time setting (in seconds), divide the distance between the points (in
inches) from Step 5 by the vehicle speed (in inches/second).
Lead Time = Half the distance between points (inches) divided by speed (inches per second)
8. Enter the lead time at the Remote Output screen.
For example, if a 4 mph pass creates a 14" distance between each set of points:
l Divide the distance between the points by 2. (In this example, 14" / 2 = 7")
l Convert the speed from mph to inches/second. (4 mph = (4 x 17.6) = 70.4 inches/second)
l Divide the halved distance between the points by the speeds
7" divided by 70.4" per second = 0.999 Lead time in seconds
9. Drive along the AB line and then back at your application speed while you create trigger points.
10. Ensure that the trigger points are sufficiently close to one another.
11. If the gap between the points is unacceptable, repeat the calibrations.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 135

 Serial Data Input 5   Connectivity settings

Serial Data Input

Serial Data Input is an optional feature/plugin. When it is activated, the FmX integrated display can
receive and log NMEA messages from an external device (for example, an infra-red sensor).

1. Install Serial Data Input. See Activate features/plugins for use (page 47).
2. At the Configuration screen, select Serial Data Input and tap Setup . The Serial Data Input screen
displays.
3. Complete the settings and tap OK.

Setting Explanation

Port The port the device is connected to. This is usually P5 Serial I/O. The
settings for the port display on the right of the screen.

Baud rate The rate information is transferred. Enter the appropriate rate for
your region. See Frequencies and baud rate (page 124).

Parity

Data bits

Stop bits

Prefix The start point of the data you want to collect.

l To log data from the start of the line, leave this field empty.
l To drop introductory characters, enter them. For example, if
you receive data that begins with "$GPGGA...", enter "\24GP" in
this field. The data will then begin with "GGA...". ("\24" is the
ASCII code for "$".)

Suffix The end point of the data you want to collect.

To log to the end of the line, keep the default field ("\0D\0A").

Log Interval How regularly the data is written to the file.

136 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 5   Connectivity settings Ag3000 modem

Ag3000 modem
The Ag3000 modem enables the FmX integrated display to receive RTK corrections from a:

l Trimble VRS network

l Third-party RTK provider
l Continuously Operating Reference Station (CORS)

Modem activation
In the USA, the Ag3000 is bundled with a Trimble-installed AT&T card, which is tied to your Ag3000
unit and cannot be separated. You cannot use any other SIM cards with this device.
Additionally, the Ag3000 modem does not work in a CDMA network.
Outside of the USA, you must contact your local VRS Now™ or third-party cell provider for a SIM
card.

Modem setup
Activate VRS for use. See Activate features/plugins for use (page 47).

1. At the Configuration screen, select VRS and then tap Setup .

2. The VRS Configuration screen displays.
3. Select the VRS Server Setup tab. Enter the required settings, as provided by your Trimble VRS
Now™ or Network RTK operator.

Setting Explanation

Server Name / Address RTK/VRS/CORS base station broadcast name

Server Port Number Base station port number

Mount Point Base station mount point
User Name Assigned username
Password Assigned password

4. If you are inside the USA, tap OK. The Configuration screen displays. The Ag3000 modem is now
configured.
5. If you are outside the USA, select the SIM Card Setup tab. Enter the details of the SIM card from
the card provider, then tap OK.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 137

 DCM-300 Modem 5   Connectivity settings

DCM-300 Modem
The DCM-300 modem is a rugged and sealed 3G communications solution for customers who need
reliable communications for their farming operations. This modem enables the FmX integrated
display to receive RTK corrections from a:

l Trimble VRS network

l Third-party RTK provider
l Continuously Operating Reference Station (CORS)
The benefits of using the DCM-300 modem include:

l More acres of RTK accuracy from Trimble VRS Now delivered to the display.
l Easy interface and configuration with the display.
l Roof-mounted high-gain cellular antenna for enhanced signal reception to minimize cell phone
signal related drop outs.
l On-screen wireless status and diagnostics.
l Vehicle Sync
l Office Sync
The DCM-300 modem is available:

l With a HSDPA modem for use with GSM wireless networks globally
l An EVDO modem for use with the Verizon wireless network in the USA

Unlock the modem

The DCM-300 modem is available at different prices for Asset Tracking and VRS/File Transfer. The
VRS/File Transfer functionality in the DCM-300 modem must be unlocked to use VRS or data
transfer.
To unlock the DCM-300 with a passcode, you must connect the modem to the display and then turn
it on. The Unlock screen shows the DCM-300 when connected.
Enter the passcode in the FmX integrated display and then tap OK to send it to the modem. When
the modem is successfully unlocked, a message displays to reboot the modem.

Service activation
Services for the DCM-300 modem can be purchased from a Trimble store. Services include:

l VRS Now Ag correction service

l Sync data transfer

138 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 5   Connectivity settings DCM-300 Modem

l Dispatch asset tracking

l Wireless data plans (USA only)

Modem setup
Activate VRS for use. See Activate features/plugins for use (page 47).
To use VRS corrections, the GPS Setup tab must be configured with a Correction type of Trimble VRS.
Note  – The display must be unlocked for RTK to use the Trimble VRS correction type.

1. At the Configuration screen, select VRS and then tap Setup . The VRS Configuration screen
displays.
2. From the Device list, select the type of modem that is connected. The default is DCM-300.
3. Select the VRS Server Setup tab. Enter the required settings, as provided by your Trimble VRS Now
or Network RTK operator.

Setting Explanation

Server Name / Address RTK/VRS/CORS base station broadcast name

Server Port Number Base station port number

Mount Point Base station mount point
User Name Assigned username
Password Assigned password

4. If you are inside the USA and:

l Subscribe to the Trimble AT&T or Verizon data plans and have a DCM-300G modem, tap
OK. The Configuration screen displays.

l Supply your own SIM card and have a DCM-300G modem, enter the details of the
SIM card from the card provider, then tap OK.
Note  – The DCM-300C modem for Verizon does not use the SIM card setup tab.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 139

DCM-300 Modem 5   Connectivity settings

140 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 CHAPTER
6
Field feature mapping setup

In this chapter:
You can place features on the screen that
represent points, areas and lines in your field.
Field feature mapping settings 142
Mapping location setting 145
Recording with coverage 146
Field area feature settings 146
Line feature settings 147
Boundary feature settings 148
Point feature settings 150

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 141

 Field feature mapping settings 6   Field feature mapping setup

Field feature mapping settings

You can place field features in the field while driving to define on the screen points of interest or
areas to avoid. There are three types of field feature:

l Point: A single point in the field, such as a tree

l Line: A straight or curved line in a field, such as a fence
l Area: An area of land, such as a pond
You can customize:

l Which features display on the Mapping Guidance panel at the Run screen
l The settings of each feature

Access Feature Mapping settings

1. At the Home screen tap . The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select System and tap Setup . The Display Setup screen displays.
3. Select Feature Mapping and tap Setup . The Feature Mapping screen displays.

142 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 6   Field feature mapping setup Field feature mapping settings

Assign feature buttons

To assign the feature buttons that will be available on the Mapping Guidance panel in the Run
screenn:

1. At the Feature Mapping screen, tap one of the four buttons under the Selected Features section.
The Select Feature screen displays.
2. At the top left-hand list, choose the type of feature: Area, Line or Point. The options available to
you for that feature type are listed below.
3. Select the feature option you want and tap OK.

Create a field feature

To create a feature in your field:

1. At the Feature Mapping screen, tap one of the four buttons under the Selected Features section.
The Select Feature screen displays.
2. At the top left-hand list, choose the type of feature: Area, Line or Point.
3. Tap New. The Edit Area/Line/Point Feature screen displays.
4. Tap in the entry box for the name of the feature. The Enter Area/Line/Point Feature Name
screen displays.
5. Enter the name of the feature and tap OK. You are returned to the Edit Area/Line/Point Feature
screen.
6. Complete the settings for the feature you have added. For specifics, see:
l Field area feature settings (page 146)
l Line feature settings (page 147)
l Point feature settings (page 150)
7. Tap OK. The Feature Mapping screen displays again, showing the button of the feature you
just created.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 143

 Field feature mapping settings 6   Field feature mapping setup

Edit a field feature

To edit a feature you have placed in your on-screen field:

1. At the Feature Mapping screen, tap one of the four buttons under the Selected Features section.
The Select Feature screen displays.
2. At the top left-hand list, choose the type of feature: Area, Line or Point.
3. Tap Edit . The Edit Area/Line/Point Feature screen displays.
4. To edit the name:
a. Tap in the entry box for the name of the feature. The Enter Area/Line/Point Feature Name
screen displays.
b. Enter the name of the feature and tap OK. You are returned to the Edit Area/Line/Point
Feature screen.
5. Edit the settings for the feature you have added. For specifics, see:
l Field area feature settings (page 146)
l Line feature settings (page 147)
l Point feature settings (page 150)
6. Tap OK. The Feature Mapping screen displays again, showing the button of the feature you
just edited.

144 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 6   Field feature mapping setup Mapping location setting

Mapping location setting

As you place features in your on-screen field, they are placed in relation to the:

l Center of the boom

l Right of the boom
l Left of the boom
Access these settings at the Feature Mapping screen.

1. At the Home screen tap . The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select System and tap Setup . The Display Setup screen displays.
3. Select Feature Mapping and tap Setup . The Feature Mapping screen displays.
4. Complete the settings for the Mapping Location section and tap OK.

Setting Explanation

Point Features Point features should be placed in your on-screen field

relation to:
l Boom Center: The center of the boom
l Boom Right: To the right of the boom
l Boom Left: To the left of the boom

Line / Area Features Line and area features should be placed in your on-screen
field relation to:
l Boom Center: The center of the boom
l Boom Right: To the right of the boom
l Boom Left: To the left of the boom

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 145

 Recording with coverage 6   Field feature mapping setup

Recording with coverage

You can choose to have line features be recorded when you have enabled coverage.

1. At the Home screen tap . The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select System and tap Setup . The Display Setup screen displays.
3. Select Feature Mapping and tap Setup . The Feature Mapping screen displays.
4. From the Record Line with Coverage list, choose:
l None: The line will not automatically record when you begin logging coverage.
l As Applied: 

l Fence:

5. Tap OK.

Field area feature settings

You can use area features to define areas of land as productive or unproductive. If the sprayer
passes into an area that is defined as unproductive, the boom sections turns off. This can be useful
for setting exclusion zones that you do not want to spray (such as waterways).

Setting Explanation

Name Name of the feature

Color Select the feature appearance color

Area Type Productive: Choose this option if the area feature will be a section of
land that can be included in area calculations.
Non-productive: Chose this option if the area is unproductive land.

Trigger Warning No Warning: No warning displays.

Entering Area: A warning displayswhile you are inside the area.
Leaving Area: A warning displays while you are outside the area.

Remote Output Set to Enabled if a signal pin is attached to the system. This enables
you to trigger a pulse to an external device when you enter or exit
this area.
See Remote Output setup (page 130) and Remote Output operation
(page 414).

Expand by Options are:

146 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

6   Field feature mapping setup Line feature settings

Setting Explanation
l 1/2 swath width
l 1 swath width

Line feature settings

1. At the Feature Mapping screen, tap one of the four buttons under the Selected Features section.
The Select Feature screen displays.
2. At the top left-hand list, choose the Line feature.
3. Tap New. The Edit Area/Line/Point Feature screen displays.
4. Tap in the entry box for the name of the feature. The Enter Area/Line/Point Feature Name
screen displays.
5. Enter the name of the line and tap OK. You are returned to the Edit Area/Line/Point Feature
screen.
6. Complete the settings for the line:

Setting Explanation

Color Select the feature appearance color

Trigger Warning Enabled: Warning is enabled

Disabled: No warning will be issued

Remote Output Set to Enabled if a signal pin is attached to the system. This
enables you to trigger a pulse to an external device when you
enter or exit this area.
See Remote Output setup (page 130) and Remote Output
operation (page 414).

7. Tap OK. The Feature Mapping screen displays again, showing the button of the feature you
just created.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 147

 Boundary feature settings 6   Field feature mapping setup

Boundary feature settings

The FmX integrated display includes the field boundary feature that enables you to map multiple-
bounded areas within a field.
Field boundaries create a separate boundary file that can be used to calculate area and control
automatic section switching at the edge of the field.

1. At the Feature Mapping screen, tap one of the Selected Features buttons. The Select Feature
screen displays.
2. From the feature list, select Area and then tap New.
3. From the list of features, select Boundary and then tap Edit . The Edit Area Feature screen
displays.
4. Set one or more of the following the attributes for the boundary features.

Setting Explanation
Name Custom name that displays on the Feature Mapping tab.
Color Color of the boundary outline and also the infill color, if selected.
Draw as Outlined or Filled
Trigger Warning Visual and audible warning when entering or leaving the
boundary edge.
Remote Output Enabled: Restrictsremote output pulses from being triggered
while outside the boundary.
Disabled: Does not restrict remote output.
See Remote Output setup (page 130).
Expand By How the boundary is actually recorded:
l Nothing: Maps the boundary exactly at the recorded
position.
l ½ Swath Width: Expandsthe recorded boundary location by ½
the swath width after the boundary is closed.
l 1 Swath Width: Expands
the recorded boundary location by 1
additional swath width after the boundary is closed.

148 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

6   Field feature mapping setup Boundary feature settings

Setting Explanation

5. Tap OK. The Select Feature screen displays.

6. Tap OK. The Feature Mapping screen displays.
7. Tap OK. The Display Setup screen displays.
8. Tap OK.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 149

Point feature settings 6   Field feature mapping setup

Point feature settings

1. At the Feature Mapping screen, tap one of the four buttons under the Selected Features section.
The Select Feature screen displays.
2. At the top left-hand list, choose the Point feature.
3. Tap New. The Edit Area/Line/Point Feature screen displays.
4. Tap in the entry box for the name of the feature. The Enter Area/Line/Point Feature Name
screen displays.
5. Enter the name of the line and tap OK. You are returned to the Edit Area/Line/Point Feature
screen.
6. Complete the settings for the point:

Setting Explanation
Alarm Radius l Displays as a solid red block when the vehicle comes within
this radius of the feature
l More serious than the warning radius. Set it to a shorter
distance.
Warning Radius l Distance around the feature that causes a warning message
to appear
l Displays on the screen as an orange line
Average Position Improves the quality of the point feature position
l Yes: The displaycalculates the average position of the
feature over 30 seconds.
l No: The display places the feature at the coordinates that
the vehicle is at when you tap the button.

150 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 CHAPTER
7
Implement setup

In this chapter:
Before you can begin operations, you must
select an implement that has been created
Implement setup 152 and set up in the system.
Create an implement 153
Select an implement 154
Import an implement 154
Edit implement settings 155
Delete an implement 162

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 151

 Implement setup 7   Implement setup

Implement setup
Settings for an implement vary depending on the implement type and the operation it will be
performing.
Implement setup ensures the system can tell:

l Which type of implement is attached

l How much area it covers
l How far offset the implement is from the guidance line or pattern
Note  – Some configuration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen. To access these
settings, return to the Run screen and then tap the Home button. When prompted to close the field, tap Close.

152 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

7   Implement setup Create an implement

Create an implement

1. At the Home screen, tap .

2. At the Configuration Selection screen, tap Switch next to the implement.
3. If necessary, enter the administrative password. See Passwords (page 39).
4. At the Implement Configuration screen, tap New.
5. The New Configuration Name screen displays with an on-screen keyboard.
6. Enter a name for the new implement and tap OK. The Select Active Plugins screen displays.
7. Select the optional features/plugins that will be used with this implement and then tap OK.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 153

 Select an implement 7   Implement setup

8. The Implement Setup wizard displays. See Edit implement settings (page 155) to complete the
settings.
Note  – The information needed for implement setup depends on the plugins that you selected in the
previous step.
9. Tap OK. Your current configuration now displays in the Configuration screen.
To edit an implement, see Edit implement settings (page 155).

Select an implement
To select an implement that has been configured:

1. At the Home screen, tap .

2. At the Configuration Selection screen, tap Switch next to the implement.
3. If necessary, enter the administrative password. See Passwords (page 39).
1. At the Implement Configuration screen, select the implement you want to switch to and then
tap OK.
Note  – If there is only one available implement, it is selected by default.
2. The currently selected implement is displayed in the Configuration Selection screen.

Import an implement
To import an implement:

1. Copy the implement file into the AgGPS folder on the USB drive.
2. Insert the USB drive into the FmX integrated display and then turn on the display.

3. At the Home screen, tap .

4. At the Current Configurations screen, tap Setup .
5. If necessary, enter the Administration password. See Passwords (page 39).

6. At the Configuration screen, select System and then tap Setup .

7. Select Data Files and then tap Manage.
8. Select Implement from the list on the left of the screen and then tap Copy.
The implements from the FieldManager screen now display in the Implement Configuration screen.

154 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 7   Implement setup Edit implement settings

Edit implement settings

At the Implement Setup screen, you can change:

l Implement Type: Primary task for the current implement

l Measurements: Basic information required for guidance using an automatic steering system
l Geometry: More detailed implement dimensions required both with and without a GPS
receiver on the implement
l Overlap: Values required to apply or avoid overlap
l Extras: Settings for variety setup and remote log switches

Implement Type
In the Implement Type tab, choose the type of implement you want to set up.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 155

 Edit implement settings 7   Implement setup

1. Navigate to the Implement Setup screen.

2. On the Implement Type tab:
a. From the Operations list, choose the operation.
b. Tap Edit . The Select Implement Layout screen displays.
c. Tap the appropriate layout and then tap OK.

Operations Layouts

Spreading Pull-type spreader

Self-propelled spreader

Spraying Self-propelled, front boom

Self-propelled, rear boom
Pull-type sprayer

Planting Standard
Front split
Rear split
Center offset

Seeder None

Tillage None

Other None

Measurements
The measurements you enter affect the accuracy of your position in relation to GPS and steering,
whether automatic or manual. In this tab, you will enter this information:

l The width of your implement, vehicle or header: The swath width.

l The width of the tool or boom: The application width recorded by coverage logging.
Note  – The screen is scaled to the swath or application width, whichever is larger. If any offset is greater than
this, the tractor image may pass the edge of the screen.

Measurement Explanation

Swath Width How wide you want the swath to be. If you want to overlap
coverage, measure the application width and add the
appropriate amount for overlap.

Application Width The application width of the tool or boom.

Affects the width of the coverage logging and mapping.

156 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

7   Implement setup Edit implement settings

Measurement Explanation

Application Offset The distance between the vehicle's fixed axle and the
application point. For example the application point:
l On a sprayer is the nozzles
l On a planter is where the seeds are dropped
The fixed axle varies depending on vehicle type:
l Rear axle on front steering tractor and self-propelled
sprayer.
l Front axle on a harvester and 4x4 tractor
l Center of tracks on a tracked tractor

Rows Number of rows that are covered by the implement.

Note  – This setting is used for navigation. At the Run screen, when
you tap Skip to adjust the guidance line, the guidance line moves to
the current location of the vehicle or can be moved by a user entered
distance or number of rows. Row width is defined by the swath width
divided by the number of rows.

Left/Right Offset Measure from the center of the vehicle to the center of the
implement or header. If your implement is not centered on the
vehicle's center line, this measurement adjusts the tractor
path so the implement is centered on the guidance line.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 157

Edit implement settings 7   Implement setup

Geometry
Setting Explanation
Type Select the type of connection to the implement.
Hitch to Ground Contact Point For True Guide: Measure from the tractor hitch pin to the
point the implement touches the soil (the implement
pivot point). For planters this is typically the seeding units
or the midpoint of several rows of tools on the
implement.
Note  – If NOT using the TrueGuide system (page 268),
shortening this setting causes the implement to come onto the
guidance line more quickly while lengthening the setting causes
the implement to come onto the guidance line more slowly.

158 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

7   Implement setup Edit implement settings

Overlap
Setting Explanation

Start overlap Enter the amount of overlap (distance) you want when

beginning application of material. When you are in a
previously covered area driving toward an noncovered area,
the system will begin turning sections on at this distance
before reaching the non-covered area.

Allowable Side-to-Side Coverage Move the slider to indicate how much of a section's width can
Overlap be in a previously covered area before the system switches the
section off.
If the slider is all the way to the right, this is the maximum
overlapped area before the section is turned off.

Allowable Boundary Overlap Move the slider to indicate how much of a section's width
must be past a boundary before the system switches the
section off. If the slider is all the way to the right, this is the
maximum overlapped area before the section is turned off.

End Overlap Enter the amount of overlap (distance) you want when
stopping application of material. When you are applying
material and driving toward a previously covered area, the
system will keep sections on until they are this far into the
previously covered area.

Infill Boundary When you map a headland, you create an inner boundary and
an outer boundary.
l Select Inner to shut off sections when the implement
reaches the inner boundary.
l Select Outer to shut off sections when the implement
reaches the outer boundary.
Apply Latency to Boundary l Yes: The system takes into account a potential delay
Note  – For use with boundaries or between reaching the boundary and beginning the
exclusion zones. application of material. The system will calculate when
application should occur (or stop) upon reaching the
boundary or exclusion zone.
l No: The system waits to start or stop application when
the boundary or exclusion zone is reached, without taking
into account potential delay in starting or stopping
mechanical equipment. Such mechanical delay could
leave a gap between the boundary and where the product

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 159

 Edit implement settings 7   Implement setup

Setting Explanation
is applied or stopped. When GPS accuracy is low, this is
the preferred selection.

Extras
If you have varieties:

1. At the Extras tab, tap Variety Setup . The Variety Setup screen displays.
2. Tap Add to add a variety. At the on-screen keyboard, enter the name for the variety and tap OK.
3. Select the variety you have just created and tap Edit. The Material Attributes screen displays.
Enter the appropriate settings and tap OK.

Setting Explanation

Coverage Color Choose a color to show on the screen for this variety.

Seed Variety / EPA Code

Seed Rate

Seed Rate Units

Fertilizer Type

Fertilizer Rate

Fertilizer Rate Units

Product Density / Test

Weight

Seeds per Weight

Bushel Weight

Chemical 1 - 4 Type

Chemical 1 - 4 Rate

Chemical 1 - 4 EPA Code

Chemical 1 - 4 Carrier

User Defined 1 - 10

4. To assign the variety, select it from the list on Variety Setup screen and tap Assign . The Set Row
Range for Variety (Name of variety) screen displays.

160 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 7   Implement setup Edit implement settings

5. At Start Row, choose the row this variety starts.

6. At End Row, choose the row this variety ends.
For a remote log switch, complete the settings as appropriate.

Setting Explanation

Remote Log Switch l Disabled: No remote log switch is enabled.

l Connector A:
l Connector B:

Logging When l High

l Low

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 161

Delete an implement 7   Implement setup

Delete an implement
To delete an implement:

1. At the Configuration Selection screen, tap Switch next to the implement.

2. At the Implement Configuration screen, select the appropriate implement from the list.
3. Tap Delete.
4. When prompted, tap Yes to confirm the deletion.

162 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 CHAPTER
8
Vehicle guidance setup

In this chapter: Setup for vehicle guidance includes choosing

the type of guidance system that your vehicle
is configured for.
Guidance settings 164
Manual guidance 164
Autopilot system 166
EZ-Pilot assisted steering system 191
EZ-Steer assisted steering system 199

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 163

 Guidance settings 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Guidance settings
l Manual guidance (page 164): For systems without any automatic steering system
l Autopilot system (page 166)
l EZ-Pilot assisted steering system (page 191)
l EZ-Steer assisted steering system (page 199)
All guidance systems require GPS. See GPS receiver settings (page 108).
For operational information, see:

l Autopilot system operation (page 398)

l EZ-Pilot system operation (page 401)
l EZ-Steer system operation (page 404)

Manual guidance
To set up manual guidance, complete the settings and complete the GPS receiver settings (page
108).

1. At the Home screen, tap . The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select Manual Guidance and then tap Setup . The Manual Guidance Settings screen displays.

164 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

8   Vehicle guidance setup Manual guidance

3. In the Vehicle tab, complete the settings and tap OK.

Setting Explanation

Vehicle Type Type of vehicle

Axle to Antenna Offset The horizontal distance between the axle and the antenna.
Measure the distance accurately (within 3 inches). An
incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance.
Note  – Measure the offset distance as accurately as possible
(within 3"); an incorrect offset may cause poor steering
performance.
l If the antenna is in front of the axle, enter a forward
distance.
l If the antenna is behind the axle, enter a back distance.

Antenna Height Measure the antenna height vertically, from the ground to
the base of the antenna.

Wheelbase The horizontal distance between the center of the front

wheel and the center of the back wheel.

Note  – Any changes you make to the vehicle settings remain, even if you replace the Manual Guidance
option with the Autopilot option.
4. Complete the GPS receiver settings (page 108).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 165

 Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Autopilot system
Note  – Autopilot system setup is typically done when the system is professionally installed.
For cabling information, see the FmX Integrated Display Cabling Guide.
For operational information, see Autopilot system operation (page 398).
The sequence of setting up the Autopilot system is:

1. Complete the GPS receiver settings (page 108) if you have not already done so.
2. Complete the settings for the Autopilot system.
3. Calibrate the Autopilot automated steering system for your vehicle. See Autopilot calibration
(page 171).
Note  – The subsequent configuration steps are usually done when the system is professionally installed.

Begin setup

1. At the Home screen, tap . The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select Autopilot (Vehicle) and tap Setup . The Vehicle Controller Setup screen displays.

166 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

Vehicle settings for Autopilot system

Complete the settings in the Vehicle tab.

Setting Explanation

Connector Select the port on the display that the Autopilot system controller is
connected to.

Current Selection Displays the current vehicle profile (.vdb) that is loaded.
To change this setting, see Select a vehicle (page 168).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 167

Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Select a vehicle

1. At the Home screen, tap . The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select Autopilot (Vehicle) and tap Setup . The Vehicle Controller Setup screen displays.
3. Tap Edit . The Edit Vehicle screen displays.
4. From the Vehicle Profile Location list, select the source of the pre-configured vehicle profile you
want:
l Autopilot Trimble equipment database: The majority of vehicle profiles are stored on the
Autopilot controller.
l Vehicle profile database file: As additional profiles become available or are updated, they
are added to a vehicle profile database. You can download the database and load profiles
from it.
l Saved file: You can install an individual vehicle profile that you configured previously and
saved. See Save vehicle profile (page 190).

For Vehicle Profile Location, Then...

if you choose...

Trimble Equipment Database a. Tap the vehicle type and then tap Select.
b. Tap the vehicle make and then tap Select.
c. Tap the vehicle series and then tap Select.
d. Tap the vehicle model and then tap Select.
e. Tap options and then tap Select.
f. Tap OK.
g. Tap Use Vehicle.

From Database (new) a. Tap Browse.

b. Select the .vdb file you want.
c. Tap OK.
d. Tap Use Vehicle.

From Saved File (existing) a. Tap Browse.

b. Select the file you want.
c. Tap OK.
d. Select Save Vehicle to save the new settings.

168 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

For Vehicle Profile Location, Then...

if you choose...
e. When a message displays that the profile you
selected on the NavController, tap OK.
Note  – If you select a vehicle make and model but
do not upload that configuration to the Autopilot
controller, that make and model may not be loaded.
f. Tap OK when another message displays
explaining the NavController will be
reinitialized.

Engage settings for Autopilot system

At the Engage tab, complete settings related to the engagement of the Autopilot system.

Setting Explanation

Operator Timeout The amount of time of inactivity before an operator timeout

message displays.

Coverage Log How coverage logging occurs:

l Manual: Coverage logging only occurs when you tap .

l When Engaged: Coverage logging occurs when Autopilot steering

is engaged, by tapping (yellow). See Engage button (page

351).

Steering settings for Autopilot system

At the Steering tab, complete the settings related to steering on the guidance line.

Setting Explanation

Nudge Increment The distance the Nudge buttons in the Run screen move to for the
vehicle to line up with the guidance line.

End of Row Warning Dist The distance the vehicle is from the end of a row to trigger the end-
of-row warning.

End of Row Warning Time Number of seconds before the end of row warning occurs. This
setting is based on the current speed the vehicle is traveling.

AutoSense On or off.
Note  – Most recent Autopilot systems use an AutoSense device require this

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 169

 Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Setting Explanation
setting to be On.

Valve on Speed l Normal: Speedthreshold >0.4 m/s (1.3 ft/s). For normal
operating speeds.
l Low: Speed threshold >0.1 m/s (0.3 ft/s). For vehicles operating
and very slow speeds.
l Ultra Low: Speed
threshold >0.02 m/s (0.07 ft/s). For vehicles
operating and very slow speeds.
Note  – The NavController must have firmware version 5.10 or higher to
support low and ultralow settings.

Legacy Sensors For older Autopilot systems that use the electrical system to
measure vehicle status.
l None
l Wheel Speed Only
l Gear Level Only
l Wheel and Gear
This list is only available when AutoSense is set to Off.

Advanced settings for Autopilot system

Advanced settings are located in the Advanced tab. For more information regarding the Advanced tab
settings, contact your local reseller.

170 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

Autopilot calibration
After you configure the vehicle make and model, calibrate the system for your vehicle. The
calibration process records additional details about your vehicle which helps the system to steer the
vehicle more accurately. For high accuracy systems, all settings must be correct.

All vehicle types

Four calibration items are required for all types of vehicles:

l Controller orientation (page 172): Correctly associates the outputs of the Autopilot controller
sensors with the direction of the vehicle.
l Manual Override Sensitivity calibration (page 173): Required for platforms that employ a
pressure transducer for the manual override function. Change the default only if the operation
of the manual override function is acceptable.
l Roll / antenna compensation calibration (page 181): Compensates for antenna height and static
roll caused by minor variations in the Autopilot controller and the GPS receiver mounting.
l Line acquisition aggressiveness calibration (page 185): How aggressively the vehicle approaches
the guidance line

Articulated and front-wheel-steered types

For articulated and front-wheel-steered vehicle types, additional calibrations are required:

l Steering angle sensor calibration (page 175): Converts the sensor output into commands for
steering full left, full right and any position in between.
l AutoSense calibration (page 174): Orients Autosense.
l Automated Deadzone calibration (page 176): Required to learn the vehicle's steering deadzone.
l Proportional steering gain calibration (page 179): Required only if system steering performance
is not satisfactory.

Tracked tractors
For tracked tractors, there are several calibrations required. See Tracked tractor calibrations (page
185).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 171

Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Begin calibration

1. At the Home screen, tap .

2. At theConfigurations screen, tap Setup next to the vehicle.

3. Select Autopilot (Vehicle) and tap Calibrate. The Vehicle Calibration screen displays.
4. Select a calibration and tap OK.

Controller orientation
1. At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select Controller Orientation and tap OK. The Autopilot Controller
Orientation screen displays. A graphic of the controller represents the current mounting
orientation of the controller.
The image is shown as though:
l You are looking down on the vehicle from above.
l The top of the screen points to the nose of the vehicle.
2. Use the buttons to select the orientation of the controller.
If the controller is set at a sloped angle, the vehicle profile will set the NavController orientation.
Note  – Install the NavController as described in the vehicle install instructions. If custom angles are used,
the on-screen image of the controller does not display.
3. Tap OK to accept the new orientation or tap Cancel to exit.

172 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

Manual Override Sensitivity calibration

WARNING – Incorrect adjustment of the Manual Override Sensitivity calibration setting could cause this critical
safety feature to fall, resulting in personal injury or damage to the vehicle. Any adjustment to this setting must
be made only by an authorized dealer.

Note  – Manual Override Sensitivity calibration is valid only for platforms that employ a pressure transducer
for the manual override function. The software automatically detects whether or not the vehicle configuration
includes this type of sensor and provides this option if required.
Manual override is one method of disengaging the Autopilot system by turning the steering wheel.
When you turn the steering wheel, there is a voltage spike that then tapers off. This spike and
decline occurs at different levels for different models of tractor.
The manual override sensitivity is the level that the voltage must spike to before the override occurs
and the system disengages. The voltage must also taper below that level before automated steering
can be engaged again. If you set a:

l High level of sensitivity, the system will disengage more quickly and you will have to wait longer
before you can re-engage.
l Low level of sensitivity, the system will take longer to disengage and you will be able to re-
engage more quickly.
Incorrect adjustment of the Manual Override Sensitivity calibration setting could cause this critical
safety feature to fail, resulting in personal injury or damage to the vehicle. Any adjustment to this
setting must be made only by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you perform this calibration only if the default sensitivity is
unacceptable under all conditions. Do not to choose a sensitivity setting that is either too
sensitive or not sensitive enough. In either case, manual override may cease to function correctly.
On some platforms, you could set the sensitivity so low that the manual override function will not
detect any steering wheel motion. It is vital that you avoid this.

Calibration steps
1. At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select Manual Override and tap OK. The Autopilot Manual
Override Calibration screen displays.
2. Test the current manual override setting. Turn the steering wheel. The Override Inactive button
changes color when the Override becomes active. With the system active, assess whether the
manual override feature is at an acceptable level of sensitivity for:
l Speed of steering wheel turn
l Distance of steering wheel turn
3. To adjust the manual override sensitivity setting, move the slider bar.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 173

Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Slider Bar Direction Sensitivity is... Manual Override is

triggered...

Left Increased More easily

Right Decreased Less easily

The value above the slider bar on the right is the current setting. The total range of the slider
bar is 0.5 to 2.5 (where 0.5 is the most sensitive setting and 2.5 is the least sensitive).
4. To try the new setting, tap OK. The Vehicle Calibration screen displays.
5. Select Manual Override again. The Autopilot Manual Override Calibration screen displays again.
6. Repeat steps 1 through 4 to test each new setting.
Note  – You can also evaluate the performance of the manual override feature under conditions of
loading and/or activities which may affect the pressure of the hydraulic system. For example, you can
turn on the auxiliary hydraulics while you evaluate the manual override sensitivity.
7. Tap OK to accept the new setting or tap Cancel to exit.

AutoSense calibration
1. At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select Autosense Calibration and tap OK. The Autopilot AutoSense
Calibration screen displays.
2. From the Location list, select the AutoSense position.
3. From the Orientation list, select the AutoSense orientation.
4. Tap OK to confirm selections.

174 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

Steering angle sensor calibration

Note  – Perform the steering sensor calibration only if a rotary potentiometer is installed on the vehicle. If an
AutoSense device is selected as the steering angle sensor, the Steering Sensor screen does not appear.
Steering sensor calibration converts the voltage output of the steering sensor into an equivalent
steering angle measurement.
Note  – Complete this calibration before you attempt to calibrate the steering deadzone or roll correction
procedures.
This calibration requires the vehicle to be in motion. Ensure that you:

l Perform this procedure on a hard, level surface that is free of obstructions.

l Maintain a tractor speed above 1.6 kph (1 mph).
l Watch the Sensor Angle value:
l For a symmetrical angle reading at the steering extremes while you manually steer the
wheels to full right and full left
l To ensure that the angle reading is near zero while you manually steer the wheels straight
ahead

Calibration steps
To run the steering sensor calibration:

1. At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select Manual Override and tap OK. The Autopilot Steering
Sensor Calibration screen displays.
2. Move the tractor forward slowly.
3. Center the steering wheel and then tap Next .
4. Turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then tap Next . If the steering wheel is not
turned completely to the left or if the steering sensor requires adjustment or replacement, an
error message displays.
The value for Volts updates as you turn the steering wheel:
5. Turn the steering wheel completely to the right and then tap Next . If the steering wheel is not
turned to the full right position or if the steering sensor requires adjustment or replacement,
an error message displays.
6. At the next screen, center the steering wheel. While the wheel is at the center position, tap Next .
The value for Volts updates as you turn the steering wheel.
7. Tap OK to accept the calibration.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 175

 Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Automated Deadzone calibration

WARNING – During the Automated Deadzone calibration, the system moves the wheels that steer the vehicle. To
avoid injury, be prepared for sudden vehicle movement and that the area around the vehicle (and implement, if
applicable) are clear.

WARNING – Obstacles in the field can cause collisions, which may injure you and damage the vehicle. If an
obstacle in the field makes it unsafe to continue the Automated Deadzone calibration, stop the vehicle and turn
the steering wheel to disengage the system.
1) Wait until the display prompts you that the phase is ready to begin.
2) Look at the screen to determine whether the next phase will require a left or right turn.
3) Reposition the vehicle so that the turn will use the space that you have available.
4) Tap the button to begin the next phase.

The Automated Deadzone calibration runs a series of tests on the valve and steering hydraulics to
determine the point at which steering movement occurs.
In this test, the system independently opens and closes each side of the steering system while
determining the point at which wheel movement occurs.

l You must complete the Steering Angle procedure before you run this procedure.
l To ensure optimal system performance, the hydraulic fluid must be at normal operating
temperature when you run this procedure. On some vehicles with large reservoirs, it may take
several hours for the fluid to reach operating level, especially if the implement circuit is lightly
loaded. Consult the vehicle documentation to determine if the hydraulic fluid temperature can
be shown on a vehicle console.
l If you perform the calibration while the system is still cold, repeat both the Deadzone and the
Proportional gain calibration procedures after the system is at operating temperature.

Calibration steps
Place the vehicle in a large field that is free of hazards. To minimize the effect of the ground
conditions, the field should have smooth soil that is loose but firm.
At the Vehicle Controller Setup screen, select Automated Steering Deadzone and tap OK. The Autopilot
Automated Deadzone Calibration screen displays.

1. Tap Next .
2. Tap Next in the two screens that display.
3. Follow all instructions. Tap the Test Right and Test Left buttons to perform the Deadzone
calibration.
4. As ground conditions affect the results of this calibration, it is recommended that you perform
the calibration at least three times, or until the average deadzone values change by less than

176 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

about 0.5.
To minimize the total amount of space needed for the complete calibration, you can reposition
the vehicle between the phases of the test. If the available flat, smooth space is extremely
limited, re-align the vehicle after each segment of the calibration.
To reposition the vehicle:
a. Wait until the software prompts you that the next phase is ready to begin.
b. Look at the screen to determine whether the next phase will require a left or right turn.
c. Reposition the vehicle so that the turn will use the space that you have available.
d. Tap the button to begin the next phase.
5. Reposition the vehicle and continue from the current test phase.

Automated Deadzone error messages

Error - .... Explanation

Manual Override Detected Manual override was detected before the calibration cycle
could be completed. Retry.

Vehicle Moving Too Slow The vehicle was moving too slowly for the calibration
cycle to successfully finish. Make sure the vehicle is
moving at least 0.8 kph (0.5 mph) during each calibration
cycle.

Steering Close To End Stops Before the calibration cycle could be completed, the
measured steering angle approached the end stops.
Retry, and if the problem persists, instead of centering
the steering at the start of each cycle, try turning the
steering in the opposite direction to that which is being
tested so that the calibration procedure has a greater
range to test over.

Valve Connectors Could Be Swapped The calibration test sensed the steering turning in the
opposite direction to what was expected. Retry, and if the
problem persists either the valve connectors have been
accidentally swapped or the steering sensor calibration
was performed incorrectly.

No GPS A GPS receiver must be connected and outputting

positions before the software can run the calibration
procedure.

No Steering Response Detected During the calibration cycle, insufficient movement was
sensed for the calibration to complete. If the problem
persists, the hydraulic installation could be faulty.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 177

Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Error - .... Explanation

Unable To Determine DZ: Try Again A problem occurred when trying to compute dead zone.
Retry, and if the problem persists, contact Technical
Support.

Software Problem Detected The software was unable to complete the calibration due
to insufficient movement of the vehicle. If the problem
persists, contact Technical Support.

178 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

Proportional steering gain calibration

WARNING – The wheels can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the Autopilot
system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands. These sudden movements can cause collisions
with nearby obstacles or cause injury to occupants of the vehicle. Be prepared for sudden wheel movements.

Note  – Complete the steering sensor calibration before you perform the proportional gain calibration.
Perform the proportional steering gain calibration only when the Autopilot system performance is less than
satisfactory.
The Proportional Steering Gain (PGain) setting enables a balance between rapid steering response
and stability. When you modify the PGain setting, two steering characteristics are affected:

l Slew Time: The amount of time that the front wheels take to move from the far left to the far
right position and vice versa.
l Overshoot: The percentage by which the front wheels exceed the commanded angle before
they settle on the correct value.
To correct slight variations caused by valve current response, friction, and hydraulic fluid viscosity,
alter the PGain value:

l High PGain value: Decreases the slew time and increase the overshoot. This provides rapid
responses, but can cause the steering to exhibit signs of instability (for example, a tendency to
excessively overshoot).
l Low PGain value: Increases the slew time and decrease the overshoot. This improves the
stability but can introduce significant delays in the steering response and can cause the vehicle
to oscillate from side to side.
Perform the calibration:

l Immediately before you run the PGain calibration, even if the Automatic Deadzone calibration
has been performed in the past.
l On a hard, level surface that is free of obstructions.
l While maintaining a vehicle speed above 1.6 kph (1 mph)
Increase the proportional gain up to the point just before any one of the following occurs:

l Slew times no longer decrease (a low value is required)

l Overshoot exceeds 5 – 8% (depending on the vehicle)
l Wheels noticeably shake near end stops

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 179

Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Calibration steps
1. At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select Steering Gain and tap OK. The Autopilot Steering Gain
Calibration screen displays.
2. Tap Run Slew Test . A warning message displays.
3. Tap Next .

WARNING – The wheels can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the
Autopilot system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands. These sudden movements can
cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury to occupants of the vehicle. Be prepared for sudden
wheel movements.

4. Tap Next in the next two screens that display.

5. Test various gain settings while you monitor the vehicle performance and the values for Slew
Time and Overshoot for the Turn Left phase.

a. Adjust the New Gain (if required).

b. Turn the front wheels completely to the right to begin the test. (The test is for the stop-to-
stop position.)
c. Tap Turn Left . Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew.
Note  – The optimum gain setting has short slew time (short millisecond reading) and low
overshoot percentage (less than 5–8%).
6. Repeat Step 5 with Turn Right. Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew.
7. When you locate the best gain value, either:
l Tap OK to save the value in the Autopilot controller memory.
l Tap Cancel to restart the calibration procedure.

180 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

Roll / antenna compensation calibration

Note  – Antenna offsets are provided when the antenna cannot be placed directly over the working point of
the implement. It is recommended that these offsets are minimized whenever possible.
At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select Roll/Antenna Correction and tap OK. The Autopilot Roll/Antenna
Compensation screen displays.

Precalibration
Before configuring the antenna compensation, make sure that:

l The Autopilot system is completely and correctly set up.

l GPS corrections are set up.
l You read this section carefully.
l If multiple GPS technologies will be used (for example, RTK and SBAS), use the technology with
the highest accuracy when you perform the Roll Correction calibration.

Calibration steps
1. Set the antenna height above the ground.
a. Place the tractor on a flat, level surface.
b. Measure the distance from the ground to the base of the GPS receiver (or antenna).
c. Enter this value for Antenna Height Above Ground.
2. Set the antenna distance from the fixed axle.
a. Place the tractor on a flat, level surface.
b. Measure the distance from the fixed axle to the center of the GPS receiver (or antenna).
c. Enter this value into the Antenna Distance from Fixed Axle entry box. Enter a negative value if the
GPS receiver antenna is to the rear of the fixed axle. The nose of the vehicle is considered
the forward direction.
3. Configure the roll offset correction.
Use one of the following methods to calculate the roll offset and then enter the roll offset
correction to compensate for it:
l Tire track offset method
l Flag offset method
Choose the method which best matches the conditions.
4. Enter the roll offset value for roll offset.
5. Select one of the offline direction options, depending on whether the roll offset distance is to
the right or left.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 181

 Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Tire track offset method for roll offset

Note  – Use a highly repeatable GPS correction mode for roll correction. For best results, use a RTK mode or
OmniSTAR HP signal that has been converged for at least twenty minutes. If you do a roll calibration with less
accurate GPS correction modes, repeat the measurements at least four times to ensure a more consistent
result.

1. Remove any implement from the vehicle.

2. Drive the tractor to a relatively flat field where tire impressions are visible and where you can
complete passes of at least 400 m (1320 ft) in length.
3. Reset the roll offset value to 0 (zero).
4. Create an AB Line.
5. Create a clean set of tire tracks in the field. To do this, start a new pass away from the area
where the AB Line was created. When the system is stable, engage automatic steering mode
and allow the Autopilot system to complete the pass.
6. At the end of the pass, turn the tractor around to return along the same pass from the
opposite direction.
7. Engage automated steering mode and allow the system to complete the pass.
8. In the middle of the return pass, stop the tractor and confirm that the current position is
directly on the AB Line. This ensures there is no cross track error.
9. Park the tractor and exit the cab. Evaluate the tire track pattern between the first and return
paths.
10. Measure the difference between the track passes and record the distance. Also note whether
the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass. Record the results.
Note  – The offset should be consistently to the left or right.
11. Repeat Step 5 through Step 10 two more times, for a total of three test runs.

Test Run Offset distance Offset direction

1

Total =

Total / 3 (average offset value) =

182 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

Flag offset method for roll offset

1. Remove any implement from the vehicle. The vehicle draw-bar must be centered.
2. Drive the vehicle to a relatively flat area where you can complete passes that are at least 400 m
(1320 ft) in length.
3. Reset the Roll Offset value to 0 (zero) on the Roll Correction screen. See Roll / antenna
compensation calibration (page 181).
4. Create an AB Line.
5. Start a new pass. Engage automatic steering mode when the system is stable. Stop the tractor
midway through the pass. Confirm that there is no cross track error: the current vehicle
position should be directly on the AB Line.
6. Park the vehicle and exit the cab. Use the hitch pin hole in the drawbar as a guide to insert a flag
in the ground to mark the vehicle center-line for this pass.

7. Complete the pass. Turn the vehicle around to return along the same pass from the opposite
direction.
8. Engage automatic steering mode. Stop the vehicle midway down the pass with the drawbar pin
location very close to the marker flag. Confirm that there is no cross track error: the current
vehicle position should be directly on the AB Line.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 183

 Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

9. Park the vehicle and exit the cab. Use the hitch pin hole in the drawbar as a guide to insert a
second flag in the ground to mark the tractor centerline for this pass. Note whether the second
pass is to the left or the right of the first pass.
10. Measure the difference between the flags for the two passes and record the distance. Also
record whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass. Record the results.
Note  – The offset should be consistently to the left or right The following graphic shows an example of a
right offset. Measure the distance between the flags.

11. Repeat Steps 5 to 10 two more times for a total of three test runs. Use the following table to
record the offset distance and the left or right direction of offset for each test run.
12. Average the results of the three runs. (Total the offset distances from the three passes and
divide by three). Repeat Step 5 through Step 10 two more times, for a total of three test runs.

Test Run Offset distance Offset direction

1

Total =

Total / 3 (average offset value) =

184 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

Line acquisition aggressiveness calibration

1. At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select Line Acquisition and tap OK.
2. Follow the instructions on each screen.

Tracked tractor calibrations

If you selected a tracked tractor as the make and model, the Track Spacing option displays on the
calibration list. (This option is not shown in the Vehicle Calibration screen.)

Track Spacing value

At the Autopilot Track Spacing Calibration screen, enter the distance between the center of the
tracks. The width of the vehicle tracks is the distance from halfway across the width of the left track
to halfway across the width of the right track.

Hydraulically-steered tracked tractor

If you selected a hydraulically-steered tracked tractor as the make and model, Engine Speed
displays on the calibration list.
This group of vehicles includes the CAT/AGCO Challenger Tracked family.
No calibration is required if the system is installed on a CAT MT 700/800 series equipped with the ISO
option. This also includes John Deere tracked vehicles.

Autopilot RPM Sensor Calibration screen

The Autopilot RPM Sensor Calibration screen enables you to verify that the RPM sensor output is
correct.
If the Engine RPM value is not close to the actual engine RPM, follow the onscreen instructions to
adjust the sensor output.

Autopilot Hydraulic Pump Response Time Calibration screen

The Autopilot Hydraulic Pump Response Time Calibration screen verifies and optimizes the
response of the hydraulic steering pumps. Follow the onscreen instructions to perform the
calibration.

Autopilot Steering Pump Knees Calibration screen

This calibration determines the compensation required for dead-band in the steering pumps.

WARNING – The vehicle needs to move during the Hydraulic Tracked Pump Knees calibration procedure. To avoid
injury, be prepared for vehicle movement.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 185

 Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

The instructions for this calibration test include several screens. Follow the instructions on each
screen.

Tracked vehicle steering wheel calibration

1. Turn off the engine, but keep the ignition key in the run position.
2. At the Autopilot Calibration screen, select Steering Interface Calibration.
3. Keep to the suggested time interval and follow the on screen instructions to turn the steering
wheel right and left, full lock.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions until Calibration Complete displays on screen.

Autopilot system setup

Note  – Autopilot system setup is usually done when the system is professionally installed.
Prior to setup, the Autopilot system must be installed on the FmX integrated display.
There are two stages to set up the Autopilot system:

1. Set up the vehicle. See .

2. Calibrate the Autopilot automated steering system for your vehicle.
Note  – The following configuration steps are usually done when the system is professionally installed.

Vehicle controller setup

1. At the Home screen, tap . The Current Configurations screen displays.

2. Tap Configure.

3. Select Autopilot (Vehicle) and then tap Setup . The Vehicle Calibration screen displays.
4. On the Vehicle tab, complete the settings as appropriate.

Setting Explanation

Connector Select the port on the FmX integrated display that the Autopilot
system controller is connected to.

Current Select The current vehicle (.vdb) profile that is loaded on the display.
To change this setting, see Autopilot system setup (page 186).

5. Tap the Engage tab and complete the appropriate settings.

186 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

Setting Explanation

Operator Timeout

Coverage Log Manual or Engaged

6. Tap the Steering tab and complete the appropriate settings.

Setting Explanation

Nudge Increment Distance the Nudge buttons on the Run screen move the line
back to the correct path

End of Row Warning Dist Distance for the end-of-row warning to display
Note  – Longer vehicles that may take longer to turn require an earlier
warning, which dictates a greater distance.

AutoSense On or Off. Most recent Autopilot systems use an AutoSense™

device that require this setting be set to On.

Valve On Speed Under normal operating speeds this should be set to Normal.
For vehicles operating at very slow speeds, this should be set to
Low or Ultra Low. Speed thresholds for each option are:
l Normal: > 0.4 m/s (1.3 ft/s)
l Low: >0.1 m/s (0.3 ft/s)
l Ultra Low: > 0.02 m/s (0.07 ft/s)
Note  – The Autopilot NavController II must have firmware version
5.10 or later to support the Low and Ultra Low settings.

Legacy Sensors Only available if AutoSense is set to Off.

None, Wheel Speed Only, Gear Lever Only, or Wheel and Gear.

7. Tap the Advanced tab. Tap OK. The Autopilot controller is now configured.
Note  – For more information on how to use the Advanced tab, contact your local reseller.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 187

 Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Row Guidance
Note  – The Autopilot system with a supported vehicle is required for Row Guidance. For the list of supported
vehicles, please refer to the RG-100 Supported platforms list.
When Row Guidance has been activated on the FmX integrated display, the Autopilot system will
follow curved or hillside corn rows that do not exactly match the guidance line.

Row Guidance setup

Before setup, make sure you have activated Row Guidance for use. See Activate features/plugins for
use (page 47).

1. At the Configuration screen, select Row Guidance and then tap Setup .
2. The Row Guidance Configuration screen displays. Complete the settings and tap OK.
Note  – Verify the measurements are accurate for your vehicle. Measurements can differ due to vehicle
variations. Measure distances with the header at the approximate operation height. Inaccurate
measurements will result in a degraded performance.

Setting Explanation

Header Header model attached to your combine.

Feeler to Axle Offset Distance from the pivot point of the feeler to the front
axle. This measurement must be accurate to within an
inch, otherwise the performance will be degraded.

Cutter Bar to Axle Distance Distance from the front of the cutter bar or point
where the crop enters the snapper rollers to the center
of the front axle. This measurement must be accurate,
otherwise the performance will be degraded.

Feeler Left/Right Offset Distance of the center of the row crop feelers to the
centerline of the vehicle.

Engage Delay This delay in seconds (0 - 10) will be used when the
system is engaged. The system will wait the entered
time until inputs are recognized to start row guidance.
Use this setting to keep the system from mistaking
random stalk strikes on headlands as inputs for
steering.

Clear Nudge When Disengaged Yes: Clearsthe AutoPilot nudges when the system is
disengaged.
No: Keep the AutoPilot nudges when the system is

188 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

Setting Explanation
disengaged.

3. At the Configuration screen, tap Row Guidance and then tap Diagnostics.

Item Explanation

Offline Distance

Status Status of the sensor

Enable / Disable Tap to enable or disable sensors

Voltage Voltage for the left and right sensor

Voltage status Status for the left and right sensor

Implement setup for Row Guidance

Before starting the Row Guidance setup, ensure that:

l All cables and components of the system are installed on the vehicle.
l The Autopilot system has been installed and configured with the NavController firmware.
l When setting up Autopilot for use with the RG-100 system, ensure that:
l A vehicle profile that ends in RG-100 is selected at the Vehicle Controller Setup screen
l The XML header file in the latest release of the vehicle database (.vdb) has been added to
the vehicle profiles on the FmX integrated display. Firmware versions after v 6.63 contain
an XML file. For instructions on updating the XML file, refer to the support note Autopilot
System: Installing the VDB File (v6) .
l Row Guidance has been added (activated) for the display.

1. At the Home screen, tap . The Configuration Selection screen displays.

2. Tap Edit next to Implement. The Configuration screen displays.
3. Tap Add/Remove to add Row Guidance to the configuration.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 189

 Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Save vehicle profile

Note  – From Autopilot firmware version 3.0 and later, the vehicle profile location defaults to “From
Database”.
After you configure and calibrate the Autopilot system for your vehicle, you can save that
information for later use. This can be useful if you want to adjust the settings or if you move the
display from one vehicle to another.
To save a vehicle profile:

1. At the Home screen, tap .

2. Select Autopilot and then tap Setup . The Vehicle Controller Setup screen displays.
3. On the Vehicle tab, tap Edit . The Edit Vehicle screen displays.
4. Tap Save Vehicle.
5. At the Save Vehicle Configuration screen, tap in the Filename entry box.
6. At the Enter Save Filename screen, enter a name for the current vehicle profile and tap OK.
7. At the Edit Vehicle screen, tap OK.

190 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 8   Vehicle guidance setup EZ-Pilot assisted steering system

EZ-Pilot assisted steering system

The EZ-Pilot assisted steering system uses GPS to provide automatic vehicle guidance.
For cabling information, see FmX Integrated Display Cabling Guide.
For operational information, see EZ-Pilot system operation (page 401).

To set up the EZ-Pilot system:

1. Complete the GPS receiver settings (page 108).

2. Complete the EZ-Pilot settings.
3. Calibrate the EZ-Pilot system.

Vehicle settings for EZ-Pilot system

1. At the Configuration screen, select EZ-Pilot and tap Setup . The EZ-Pilot Settings screen
displays.
2. On the Vehicle tab complete the settings as appropriate.

Setting Explanation

Vehicle Type Type of vehicle

Axle to Antenna Offset The horizontal distance between the axle and the antenna.
Measure the distance accurately (within 3 inches). An
incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 191

 EZ-Pilot assisted steering system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Setting Explanation
Take the measurement from the antenna to the correct
point of your vehicle:
l From the rear axle for MFWD, Sprayer, Floater, Truck
l From the front axle for 4WD tractor, Combine,
Swathers (For swathers, it is recommended that you
place the antenna directly over or ahead of the front
axle.)
l From the tracked center for tracked vehicles
If the antenna is:
l In front of the axle, enter a forward distance.
l Behind the axle, enter a back distance.

Antenna Height The distance between the ground and the top of the GPS
antenna.

Wheelbase The horizontal distance between the center of the front

wheel and the center of the back wheel.

Steering settings for EZ-Pilot system

On the EZ-Pilot Settings screen at the Steering tab, complete the settings for steering.

Setting Explanation

Nudge Increment The distance the Nudge button on the Run screen moves
when you tap it.

Angle Per Turn The angle the wheels turn during one full rotation of the
steering wheel. If the setting is too:
l Low: The system will turn the wheel too much and the
vehicle will perform S-turns.
l High: The system will turn the wheel too little and the
vehicle will not hold the line.

Freeplay Left Adjust if the vehicle drives consistently to the right of the line.

Freeplay Right Adjust if the vehicle drives consistently to the left of the line.

Motor Speed The maximum rate at which the SAM-200 will operate.

Online Aggressiveness How aggressively the EZ-Pilot system corrects the deviations

192 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 8   Vehicle guidance setup EZ-Pilot assisted steering system

Setting Explanation
from the current guidance line. A setting that is:
l Very high: Will correct deviations quickly, but the vehicle
may steer erratically.
l Very low: Will allow a smoother drive down the swath, but
the vehicle may go further offline before the deviation is
corrected.

Approach Aggressiveness How quickly the EZ-Pilot system steers the vehicle onto the
current guidance line. A setting that is:
l Very high: Steers
the vehicle quickly, but the steering
correction may be too severe.
l Very low: Steers
the vehicle very slowly, but the vehicle may
overshoot and travel too far down the swath before
reaching the guidance line.

Engage settings for EZ-Pilot system

At the EZ-Pilot Settings screen on the Engage tab, you can edit the system’s engage and disengage
behavior if you need to change the settings.

Setting Explanation

Operator Time Out If the steering system is engaged and there has been no
operator interaction with the display for longer than the
operator timeout period, a message displays on the screen. If
you acknowledge the message within 30 seconds, the system
does not disengage. Otherwise, the EZ-Pilot system steering
disengages.

Minimum speed Minimum speed at which the system can engage. If the system
is engaged and the speed drops below this limit, the system
disengages.

Maximum speed Maximum speed at which the system can engage. If the
system is engaged and the speed increases above this limit,
the system disengages.

Maximum angle Maximum angle at which the system can engage. If the vehicle
approaches the swath at an angle greater than this limit, it
cannot be engaged.

Engage offline Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 193

EZ-Pilot assisted steering system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Setting Explanation

engage. If the vehicle approaches the swath at a distance

greater than this limit, it cannot be engaged.

Disengage offline Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can
remain engaged. If the vehicle drives offline greater than this
limit, the system disengages.

Coverage log Displays on the Run screen to show what areas have been
applied.
l Select When Engaged to automatically show coverage
logging when the system is engaged. See Engage button
(page 351).
l Select Manual to show coverage logging only when you tap
.
Override sensitivity Amount the steering wheel must be turned manually before
the system disengages.

194 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 8   Vehicle guidance setup EZ-Pilot assisted steering system

EZ-Pilot system calibration

To calibrate the EZ-Pilot system to work with the FmX integrated display, you must complete the
following:

1. Enter the vehicle settings.

2. Complete calibration for T3™ roll compensation. See T3 roll compensation calibration (page
197).
3. Calibrate the EZ-Pilot system:
l Angle per turn. See SAM-200 calibration (page 195).
l Aggressiveness and Freeplay offset. See Steering performance calibration (page 196).
4. Confirm the calibration settings.
Note  – You may have to perform the EZ-Pilot calibration more than once to achieve optimal results.

SAM-200 calibration
Note  – You must calibrate the IMD-600 before you calibrate the SAM-200.

1. At the Configuration screen, select EZ-Pilot and then tap Calibrate. The EZ-Pilot Steering
Calibration screen displays.
2. Select SAM-200 and tap OK.
3. Ensure that you are operating the vehicle in an open field with ample area for the vehicle to
make right and left turns.
4. For best results, operate the vehicle at between 2 and 4 mph.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 195

 EZ-Pilot assisted steering system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

5. To calibrate the right turn angle:

a. Drive straight forward until (yellow) displays.

b. Tap . Allow the system to operate for 20 seconds until you receive a message that the
calibration is complete.

WARNING – Auto guidance systems cannot avoid items in the field such as obstacles. Make sure you
are adequately trained to operate the auto guidance system.

6. Repeat the steps to calibrate the left turn angle.

Steering performance calibration

To calibrate the EZ-Pilot system and set the correct steering performance parameters, the following
steps must be completed with the vehicle moving forward along an A-B line.

1. At the EZ-Pilot Steering Calibration screen, select Steering Performance. The EZ-Pilot Steering
Performance screen displays.
2. Tap the Override Sensitivity tab.
3. Adjust the force required to manually override EZ-Pilot.
4. Tap the Aggressiveness tab. The aggressiveness setting controls the amount of force that required
to disengage the system and how aggressively the system holds the line. If the setting is:
l Too low, the vehicle will not hold the line
l Too high, the vehicle may over-correct and make S-turns
5. Adjust the Aggressiveness setting to get the vehicle as close to the line as possible without going
into S-turns. To make turns:
l More aggressive: Increase the aggressiveness value.
l Less aggressive: Decrease the aggressiveness value.
6. Tap the Free Play tab.
7. Adjust the freeplay offset if the steering has greater freeplay in one direction than the other,
causing it to drive consistently to one side of the guidance line. To make this adjustment:
a. Engage the on an AB line.
b. If the vehicle is offline to the left, increase the freeplay offset to the right.
c. If the vehicle is offline to the right, increase the freeplay offset to the left.
d. Enter the parameters and then tap OK. The EZ-Pilot Steering Calibration screen displays.
Note  – If you are calibrating a 4WD articulated vehicle, you may need to set the Motor Speed setting to
Auto Low.

196 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

8   Vehicle guidance setup EZ-Pilot assisted steering system

Note  – The Advanced Calibration tab is currently not available. To access these options, select EZ-Pilot
Diagnostics from the main Configuration screen.
8. Tap OK. The Configuration screen displays.

T3 roll compensation calibration

The EZ-Pilot system contains sensors that use T3 terrain compensation technology to provide roll
compensation when the vehicle is on a slope or drives over a bump. For roll compensation to work
correctly, the IMD-600 must be calibrated.

1. At the Configuration screen, select EZ-Pilot and then tap Calibrate. The EZ-Pilot Steering
Calibration screen displays.
2. Select IMD-600 Orientation and tap OK. The EZ-Pilot Roll Calibration screen displays.
Note  – For best accuracy, install the IMD-600 as shown in the installation instructions for the supported
platform in which it is being installed. Make sure the IMD-600 is installed at right angles to the center line
of the vehicle. Non-orthogonal angles will cause performance degradation.
3. From the Orientation list, select the orientation of the IMD-600 module and then tap Next .
4. Park the vehicle, mark the inside position of both sets of wheels and then tap Next .
The display records the roll offset in the first direction. This takes approximately 20 seconds. Do
not move the vehicle while the offset is being read.
5. Turn the vehicle around, ensure the wheels are parked over the marks created in step 4 and
then tap Next .
The display records the roll offset in the second direction. This takes approximately 20 seconds.
Do not move the vehicle while the offset is being read.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 197

EZ-Pilot assisted steering system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

The T3 calibration results display in the Roll Offset section of the screen. The roll offset value
should be between 0° and 4°.
6. Tap OK. The EZ-Pilot Steering Calibration screen displays.

198 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 8   Vehicle guidance setup EZ-Steer assisted steering system

EZ-Steer assisted steering system

The EZ-Steer assisted steering system uses GPS to provide automatic vehicle guidance.
For cabling information, see FmX Integrated Display Cabling Guide.
For operational information, see EZ-Steer system operation (page 404).

To set up the EZ-Steer system:

1. Complete the GPS receiver settings (page 108).

2. At the Configuration screen, select EZ-Steer and tap Setup . The EZ-Steer Settings screen
displays.
3. Complete the settings as appropriate.

Setting Explanation

Vehicle Type Type of vehicle

Axle to Antenna Offset The horizontal distance between the axle and the antenna.
Measure the distance accurately (within 3 inches). An
incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance.
Note  – Measure the offset distance as accurately as possible
(within 3"). An incorrect offset may cause poor steering
performance.
l If the antenna is in front of the axle, enter a forward
distance.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 199

EZ-Steer assisted steering system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Setting Explanation
l If the antenna is behind the axle, enter a back distance.

Antenna Height Measure the antenna height vertically, from the ground to
the base of the antenna.

Wheelbase The horizontal distance between the center of the front

wheel and the center of the back wheel.

Note  – The Engage, Steering, and Advanced tabs on this screen are completed automatically with
starting values, based on the vehicle type selected.
4. Tap OK. The Configuration screen displays.

200 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 8   Vehicle guidance setup EZ-Steer assisted steering system

Engage settings for EZ-Steer

To edit the EZ-Steer system engage settings:
1. At the EZ-Steer Settings screen, select the Engage Options tab and complete the settings.

Setting Explanation

Minimum speed Minimum speed at which the system can engage. If the
system is engaged and the speed drops below this limit, the
system engages.
Maximum speed Maximum speed at which the system can engage. If the
system is engaged and the speed increases above this limit,
the system disengages.

Maximum angle Maximum angle at which the system can engage. If the
vehicle approaches the swath at an angle greater than this
limit, it cannot be engaged.

Engage offline Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can
engage. If the vehicle approaches the swath at a distance
greater than this limit, it cannot be engaged.

Disengage offline Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can
remain engaged. If the vehicle drives offline greater than
this limit, the system disengages.

Engage on A-B Set up whether the system can or cannot be engaged on

the master A-B line.

Override sensitivity Amount the steering wheel must be turned manually

before the system disengages.

EZ-Steer external switch Set up the behavior of a seat or foot switch.

2. Tap OK. The Configuration screen displays.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 201

 EZ-Steer assisted steering system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Advanced settings for EZ-Pilot

At the EZ-Pilot Settings screen on the Advanced tab, complete the settings as appropriate.

Setting Explanation

Roll Offset Angle Fine-tunes the roll calibration value after it has been determined in
the initial calibration process.
Note  – This value is in roll degrees, not distance (inches, cm, and so on)
offline.

Estimate Steering Angle For long, straight passes, helps drive the lingering cross track error
Bias due to erroneous steering angle measurements to zero.

Dynamic Approach Angle When enabled:

(Heading)
l Allows for a steeper approach path to the AB line when further
away
l Reduces the path angle as the vehicle approaches the line
Note  – This setting does not increase the angle at which the system can be
engaged from the line, but does increase the approach angle after
engagement.

Steering Slew Limit Controls the maximum sustained rate that the steering will
respond.
l Lower value: Steering is smoother and slower.
Note  – A value that is too low may cause vehicle instability.
l Higher value: Steering is quicker and more responsive.

Steering Acceleration Limit Controls the rate at which the EZ-Pilot system switches from no
steering movement to the full steering slew rate.
l Lower value: Steering is smoother.
Note  – A value that is too low may cause vehicle instability. Set the
value to zero to disable the setting.
l Higher value: Steering is more aggressive.

202 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 8   Vehicle guidance setup EZ-Steer assisted steering system

EZ-Steer system calibration

Before you calibrate the vehicle:

l Ensure that the vehicle’s hydraulic oil is up to operating temperature. Refer to the vehicle
documentation.
l Ensure that the tire pressure is correct.
l Perform initial calibration without an implement or with the booms folded in on a high-
clearance sprayer. After initial calibration is completed, you can fine tune the settings with the
implement or booms folded out.
l Choose a field with the smoothest possible surface and perform calibration at the normal
operating speed for the vehicle.
l Have a straight AB line available. If you do not create an A–B line before you begin the
calibration, the system will prompt you to open a field and create one.
To calibrate the EZ-Steer system:

1. Complete the T2 roll compensation calibration for EZ-Steer system (page 205).
2. Calibrate the EZ-Steer system.
l Angle per Turn calibration for EZ-Steer system (page 204)
l Aggressiveness calibration for EZ-Steer system (page 203)
l Freeplay Offset calibration for EZ-Steer system (page 204)
3. Confirm the calibration settings.
Note  – You may have to perform the EZ-Steer calibration more than once to achieve optimal results.

Aggressiveness calibration for EZ-Steer system

The aggressiveness setting fine-tunes how aggressively the system holds the line. If the setting is too
low, the vehicle will not hold the line. If the setting is too high, the vehicle may over-correct and
make S-turns.
To configure the aggressiveness settings, at the EZ-Steer Steering Performance screen select the Step
2 tab.

Adjust the aggressiveness setting to get the vehicle as close to the line as possible without going
into S-turns. To make:

l More aggressive turns, increase the aggressiveness

l Less aggressive turns, decrease the aggressiveness

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 203

 EZ-Steer assisted steering system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Angle per Turn calibration for EZ-Steer system

Angle per Turn is a course adjustment of the angle that the wheels turn through during one full
rotation of the steering wheel. If the setting is too low, the system may require several attempts to
reach the line.
To calibrate the EZ-Steer system, and set the correct steering performance parameters, complete
the following steps with the vehicle moving forward along the A-B line.
Note  – Use the Cross Track Error history plot on the top right of the page and the Average Offline distance to
optimize EZ-Steer performance for each step in the calibration.

1. At the EZ-Steer Steering Calibration screen, select Steering Performance. The EZ-Steer Steering
Performance screen displays.
2. Select the Step 1 tab.
3. With the vehicle moving forward along the A–B line:
a. Nudge the vehicle left or right 1 m (3') from the A–B line.
b. Engage the EZ-Steer system.
4. Adjust the Angle per Turn value so that when the system is engaged, the vehicle moves close to
the guidance line. To make:
l More aggressive turns, decrease the value for angle per turn
l Less aggressive turns, increase the value for angle per turn

Freeplay Offset calibration for EZ-Steer system

Add a Freeplay Offset if the steering has greater freeplay in one direction than the other, causing it
to drive consistently to one side of the guidance line.
Note  – If you are calibrating a 4WD articulated vehicle, you may need to set the Motor Speed setting to Auto
Low.
Note  – The Advanced Calibration tab is currently not available. To access these options, select the EZ-Steer
Diagnostics from the main Configuration screen.

1. To adjust the Freeplay Offset settings, at the EZ-Steer Steering Performance screen select the
Step 3 tab.

2. Engage the system on the A–B line. If the vehicle is offline:

l To the left, increase the freeplay offset to the right
l To the right, increase the freeplay offset to the left

204 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

8   Vehicle guidance setup EZ-Steer assisted steering system

WARNING – Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause
significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To
avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance
system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

3. Enter the parameters and then tap OK. The EZ-Steer Steering Calibration screen displays.
4. Tap OK. The Configuration screen displays.

T2 roll compensation calibration for EZ-Steer system

The EZ-Steer system contains sensors that use T2™ terrain compensation technology to provide roll
compensation when the vehicle is on a slope or drives over a bump. For roll compensation to work
correctly, the controller must be calibrated.

1. Select EZ-Steer and then tap Calibrate. The EZ-Steer Steering Calibration screen displays.
2. Select Controller Orientation and tap OK. The next step in calibration displays.
3. From the Orientation list, select the orientation of the steering control module and then tap Next .
The next step in calibration displays.
4. Park the vehicle, mark the inside position of both sets of wheels and then tap Next . The display
records the roll offset in the first direction. This takes approximately 20 seconds. Do not move
the vehicle while the offset is being read.
5. Turn the vehicle around, ensure the wheels are parked over the marks created in the previous
step and then tap Next . The next step in calibration displays.
The display records the roll offset in the second direction. This takes approximately 20 seconds.
Do not move the vehicle while the offset is being read.
The T2 calibration results will be listed in the Roll Offset section. The Roll Offset value should be
between 0° and 4°.
6. Tap OK. The EZ-Steer Steering Calibration screen displays.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 205

EZ-Steer assisted steering system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

206 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 CHAPTER
9
Field-IQ system setup

In this chapter:
When the Field-IQ system is installed, the
FmX integrated display can control:
Field-IQ system functionality 208
General setup information 209 l Planters

Field-IQ system setup 210 l Sprayers

Material setup 210 l Air seeders

Control setup 214 l Liquid strip-till tool-bars

Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 229 l Spinner spreaders

Upgrade Field-IQ system firmware 242

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 207

 Field-IQ system functionality 9   Field-IQ system setup

Field-IQ system functionality

The Field-IQ system can perform automatic section control using:

l Tru Count Air Clutch®

l Boom valves
l LiquiBlock™
l Various section control devices
While performing automatic section control it can control rates using a prescription with:

l Rawson™ drives
l Servo valves
l PWM valves
l Various flow control devices
The Field-IQ system can be configured to perform different functions.

Application Main functions

Planter l Seed Section Control of up to 48 individual rows (Field-IQ

system section control module(s) needed) using Tru
Count Air Clutches
l Seed Rate Control using up to 4 Rawson drives to change
seed population
l Seed Rate control using up to 6 PWM drives to change
seed population
l Liquid Fertilizer Control of up to 48 individual liquid
nozzles (Field-IQ section control module(s) needed) using
Tru Count LiquiBlock valves
l Variety tracking
Sprayer l Liquid Rate Control, using either a PWM or Servo control
valve
l Liquid Section Control of up to 48 individual spray nozzles
(Field-IQ Section Control Module(s) needed) using existing
boom shutoff valves or Tru Count LiquiBlock valves
Strip-till (liquid) l Liquid Section Control of up to 48 sections or individual
sections (Field-IQ Section Control Module(s) needed)
using Tru Count LiquiBlock valves

208 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 9   Field-IQ system setup General setup information

Application Main functions

l Liquid Rate Control using up to 2 Rawson drives
connected to fixed displacement pumps, such as CDS-
John Blue piston pumps, to change liquid rate (Field-IQ
Rawson Control Module(s) needed)
l Liquid Rate Control using either a PWM or Servo control
valve and flow meter
Spreading l Spreading Rate Control using a Rawson Drive (Field-IQ
Rawson Control Module(s) needed)
l Spreading Rate Control using either a PWM or Servo
control valve and application rate sensor
Air seeder l Section Control of up to 96 rows of blockage sensors
l Section Control of multiple materials simultaneously with
manual rate or prescription
l Control existing PWM, linear actuators, or servo systems
l Auxiliary sensors can read fan speed, bin level, air
pressure, and implement switches

For installation and cabling information, see FmX Integrated Display Cabling Guide.

General setup information

Before starting the Field-IQ system setup, ensure that:

l All components of the system are installed on the vehicle and implement.
l Field-IQ has been activated for use. See Activate features/plugins for use (page 47).
l The implement has been set up and configured for the appropriate operation, such as planting
or spraying. See Edit implement settings (page 155).
For cabling information, see the FmX Integrated Display Cabling Guide.
For operational information, see Field-IQ operation (page 385).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 209

 Field-IQ system setup 9   Field-IQ system setup

Field-IQ system setup

1. At the Configuration screen, select Field-IQ and then tap Setup .

2. Tap the appropriate button to continue setup.

Button Tap to...

Material Setup Set up a predefined list of materials to use in the Control
Setup or Material Assignment screens.
See Material setup (page 210).
Control Setup Set up control locations and assign Field-IQ system
modules.
See Control setup (page 214).
Material Assignment Assign materials that were set up in the Material Setup
screen to the Locations that were set up in the Control Setup
screen.

Material setup
When you select a material from the Available Materials list, some of its specific settings appear on the
right-hand side of the screen. This allows you to check some of the settings needing to view the
material.

Add or edit a material

Enter information about the material.

1. At the Material Setup screen, tap Add . The Material Details screen displays.
2. At the Material tab, enter the appropriate settings and tap Next . See Material tab (page 215).
3. At the Alarms tab, enter the alarm information and tap Next . See Alarms tab (page 211).
4. At the Operation tab, complete the settings and tap Next . See Operation tab (page 212).
5. At the Coefficient tab, enter the calibration value with the material. The material may have
different calibrations for different locations. This means that you will need to make a different
material for each location and name them in such a way (for example, Wheat Front Bin, Wheat
Rear Bin) that you will know which location to use them in. When you have entered the
coefficient, tap OK.
See Coefficent tab (page 213).

210 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

9   Field-IQ system setup Material setup

Delete a material
1. At the Material Setup screen, tap Delete.
2. To remove the material, tap Remove. A message displays prompting you to tap either:
l Remove to remove the material.
l Cancel to return to the Material Setup screen.

Alarms tab
Setting Alarm triggers when...
High Alarm The rate reaches the selected percentage above the target for
longer than the delay setting
Low Alarm The rate drops the below the target for longer than the delay
setting for the selected percentage
Singulation Low The singulation reaches a percentage lower than 100% for
longer than the delay setting
Seeds When Off This percentage of seeds is detected while the sections are off
for longer than the delay setting
No Seeds When On This percentage of seeds is not detected for longer than the
delay setting
Blockage Sensitivity / Alarm When less than this amount of material is sensed for the
number of seconds given. When no pulses are sensed for this
amount of time the alarm triggers.
Multiples Threshold When two seeds fall within this percentage of seed spacing
(this is considered a double). Lowering this number requires
seeds to be closer together to be reported as a double.
Skips Threshold If two seeds fall outside of this percentage of seed spacing (this
is considered a ). Raising this number requires seeds to be
further apart to be a skip.
Averaging Sample Size The number of seeds used to calculate the average. Increasing
this amount makes the response slower but more stable.
Misplaced Seeds Threshold If a seed falls outside this percentage of seed spacing then it is
considered misplaced and reduces the spacing quality.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 211

Material setup 9   Field-IQ system setup

Operation tab
Setting Explanation
Jump Start Speed The speed to be used when the master switch on the Field-IQ
system master switch box is put in the jump start position.
This manual override option can be used to operate the
system when the vehicle is stationary. Jump start is also used
when GPS has become unavailable.
Jump Start Timeout Time that jumpstart speed will be active. A timeout setting for
the jumpstart speed, which allows you to run the jump start
for a specified amount of time.
Auto control resumes if jumpstart speed is exceeded by
Ground Speed.
Shutoff Speed This setting will shut the control system down when the
vehicle reaches a minimum speed.
Minimum Override Speed Setting used to hold the operating speed at a preset minimum
to prevent the control system from operating out of a
controllable range. Maintains the application rate when the
implement's actual speed drops below the value entered. It is
used to ensure consistent material flow during slow speeds.
Apply Latency to Boundary This setting is also applied when you exit an exclusion zone and
Note  – Only applies to fields that return to the workable area of the field.
have a boundary.
l Yes: The system
starts when needed to begin applying
immediately when crossing a boundary.
l No: The system starts when the boundary is reached and
any mechanical delay could leave a gap between the
boundary and where the product is applied. When GPS
accuracy is low, this is the preferred selection.
Rate Snapping Due to pump constraints, liquid flow generally is inconsistent
with the information on the display. Enabling this setting gives
you a more steady reading of the applied rate. If you are with
in the allowable error, you will see the applied rate just show
your target rate.

212 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 9   Field-IQ system setup Material setup

Coefficent tab
The material may have different calibrations for different locations. This means that you will need to
make a different material for each location and name them in such a way (for example, Wheat Front
Bin, Wheat Rear Bin) that you will know which location to use them in.

1. Enter the coefficient.

2. Tap OK.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 213

 Control setup 9   Field-IQ system setup

Control setup
The first time you tap Control Setup , the Control Setup screen is blank and you can only add a
location.
After you have added a location, you can select it from the Location list on the right-hand side of the
screen to see the assigned modules.

Button Tap to...

Add Add and set up a new control location. This opens the Control Details
screen, which contains the following tabs:
l Material tab (page 215)
l Layout (page 217)
l Section Control tab (page 219)
l Rate Control tab, 1
l Row monitoring (page 226)
l Sensor tab (page 227)
Edit View or edit the details of an existing control location.
Delete Delete an existing location.
A message displays prompting you to tap either:
l Remove to remove the material
l Cancel to return to the Control Setup screen

214 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

9   Field-IQ system setup Control setup

Material tab
1. On the Material tab at the Available Materials list, select the material that will be set up in this
location.

Setting Explanation
Material Type Select the type of material being applied:
l Row Crop Seed
l Liquid
l Granular Seed
l Granular Fertilizer
l Anhydrous

Material Name Name of the material

Material Units Units to use with the selected material

Seeds Per Pound Number of seeds per pound

Target Rate 1 Preset volume that the implement supplies when the rate

switch is in position 1.
Note  – For liquid, granular fertilizer, NH3, and Granular seed,
enter the desired amount of material that you would like to apply.
For Row Crop seed, the target rate for row crop seed is entered as
Ks/a. 1 Ks/a equals 1000 seeds per acre. When entering a target
rate of 25500 into the display, type it as 25.5.

Target Rate 2 Present volume that the implement supplies when the rate

switch is in position 2.
Note  – For liquid, granular fertilizer, NH3, and Granular seed,
enter the desired amount of material that you would like to apply.
For Row Crop seed, the target rate for row crop seed is entered as
Ks/a. 1 Ks/a equals 1000 seeds per acre. When entering a target
rate of 25500 into the display, type it as 25.5.

Rate Increment This setting adjusts the increment that the target rate will
adjust by when in rate 1 or 2.

Manual Rate Increment Controls the aggressiveness of the rate adjustment switch
when in manual rate.
l If the valve is over active when in manual rate you

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 215

Control setup 9   Field-IQ system setup

Setting Explanation
need to lower the manual rate increment.
l If the valve is slow to respond when in manual rate you
need to increase the manual rate increment.

Minimum Rate Sets the minimum rate increment.

Maximum Rate Sets the maximum rate increment.

Note  – If you don’t want the system to be capable of applying
more than 100 units, set the maximum rate to 100 units.

2. If no materials are listed, create a material that you can assign. See Material setup (page 210).
Note  – You can also assign the correct material later using the Material Assignment option, see Material
assignment (page 392).
3. Tap Next to go to the Layout (page 217).

216 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 9   Field-IQ system setup Control setup

Layout
At the Layout tab, enter information about the implement that will be used to apply the material.

Setting Explanation
Location Name Add a name to the Control Location, for example, Hoppers, Front
Bin, Rear Bin, Left Saddle Tanks.
Bin / Tank Setup The system tracks how much material is left in the bin/tank,
and provides a warning when the bin/tank needs to be refilled.
Adjust the settings for:
l Status:

l On: The system tracks the bin/tank level and provide

warnings.
l Off: The system
will not track the bin/tank level or
provide warnings.
l Density: (Granular and
granulated material only.) Used in
system setup and calibration to ensure accuracy in
applying product. When changing material this setting
must be updated.
l Capacity Units: Select Default Units
or Bushels. Default units
will vary according to the type of material that is being
applied.
l Bin Capacity: The amount the tank/bin holds when full.
Note  – Markings on tank/bin may not be accurate.

l Current Volume: Current volume of the product in the tank.

l Partial Refill: The amount of material that will be added to
the bin/tank during a partial refill.
l Warning Level: Setting that triggers
a low bin warning. The
level at which a warning displays on the screen when your
bin/tank reaches a set threshold.
l Spinner Pulses Per Revolution: Enter the number of magnetic
pick up points per revolution of the spinner.
l Refill Tank/Bin: Refills the tank/bin to capacity.
l Partial Refill Tank/Bin: Refills the tank/bin to the Partial Refill
amount.

Row Offset Setup Provides additional tuning by detailing where the material will
be applied in relation to the vehicle. Increase coverage

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 217

Control setup 9   Field-IQ system setup

Setting Explanation
accuracy by selecting one or two offsets.
Row offsets are measured from the Application Offset value
entered in the Measurements tab of the Implement
Configuration wizard.
l Number of row offsets: Use 1 row offset when
coverage is
applied at a single location. Use two row offsets when
planting singulated seed with staggered implements.
l Row Offset (1 row offset) : Enter the distance between the
Application Offset and the row.
l Rear Row Offset (2 row offset) : Enter the distance between the
Application Offset and the rear row.
l Front Row Offset (2 row offset) : Enter the distance between the
Application Offset and the front row.
Material Controlled By You are controlling the material with:
l Switch Boxes
l On Screen

218 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 9   Field-IQ system setup Control setup

Section Control tab

With section control, you can avoid double coverage and eliminating wasted inputs using automatic
or manual section control. Section control:

l Automatically control up to 48 rows individually

l Enables you to see where you have been and what you have done with overlap detection
l Eliminates overlap by adding Tru Count Air Clutches® and Tru Count LiquiBlock™ valves
At the Section Control tab, you can set up section control as:

l Rate as Section: To use rate control drives as section shutoffs

l Material linking: To link primary and secondary materials
l Automatic Section Control: Automatic section control with various section control devices

Rate as Section
The Field-IQ system can use the rate control drives as section shutoffs. For example, when going
into a nonproductive or covered area the rate control drives will be commanded to zero rate.
1. To set up rate as sections, at the Section Control tab, complete these settings.

Setting Explanation

Section Control Select Rate as Section.

Section Control Tap Setup to adjust latency and overlap values.

2. Select the Rate Control tab and then set up rate control.

Material linking
The Field-IQ system can link primary and secondary materials, where the secondary material uses
the output of the primary material. For example, LiquiBlock valves can be linked to use the output
of Tru Count Air Clutch systems.
When planting, seeding, or strip-tilling, you can link the following together:

l Liquid
l Granular seed
l Granular fertilizer
Note  – Anhydrous cannot be linked.
When the system is in diagnostics mode:

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 219

Control setup 9   Field-IQ system setup

l The secondary material is not functional.

l You can only operate a linked material when you also open the sections of the primary
material.
1. To link materials, at the Section Control tab, complete these settings.

Setting Explanation

Section Control Select Link to Material.

Linked Material Select the primary material you want to link to.

2. Select the Rate Control tab and then set up rate control.
For more information, see the sections for each type below.

Automatic Section Control
The Field-IQ system can perform automatic section control using:

l Air clutch (such as Tru Count Air Clutch) or electric clutch: Used for TC and John Deere row
command clutches that require inverted switching. (Signal to shut row off)
l Boom valves: Used for 3 wire boom valves and 2 wire solenoid valves that require a 12v signal
to open.
l LiquiBlock valves (such as Tru Count LiquiBlock valves): Used for Liquiblock valves that require
inverted switching.
l Various section control devices

1. At the Field-IQ Setup screen on the Section Control tab, for:

a. Section Control: Select On.

b. Section Control Module Location: Tap Setup . The Section Control Module Setup screen displays.
2. Complete the settings for:
l Number of Modules: The total number of modules that will be used on the current control
location.
l Module: Assign the serial numbers of the modules to their location on the current control
location.
Note  – Sections start from left to right in their numbering. This means that Section 1 is on the far
left and numbers increase to the right.
l Number of Sections: The number of sections physically wired into the selected module serial
number.
3. If you have a row crop, tap Section Grouping. Otherwise tap Section Widths.

220 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

9   Field-IQ system setup Control setup

4. Set up the section widths.

Note  – Both of these setups allow you to set the section widths. Section Grouping does it by grouping
rows together in a section and Sections Widths allows you to enter an actual measurement.
a. For section grouping, at the Section Grouping screen: Complete each row from the left and
to right in sequence until all the rows are grouped correctly and then tap OK.

For section width, at the Section Widths screen: Enter the section width for each section
from left to right in sequence.

b. When you are finished, tap OK.

5. At the Section Control Module Setup screen, tap Advanced Wire Assignment.
Note  – This button is only available for specific cases, so may not be visible.
Assign the rows to the correct module and wire location. To assign a wire ID to a row, tap the
module icon, select the number of the wire you want to assign from the drop-down list. and
then tap on the row to assign that module and wire. It is recommended that you work from left
to right:

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 221

Control setup 9   Field-IQ system setup

Latency
Setting Explanation

On Latency By default, this is set to 0.0 seconds. Use this setting unless
you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or
valve (this can happen on larger systems). In this case, increase
the On Latency value to compensate the delay, and the
system will turn on in advance.

Off Latency By default, this is set to 0.0 seconds. Use this setting unless
you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or
valve (this can happen on larger systems). In this case, increase
the Off Latency value to compensate for the delay, and the
system will turn off after the set number of seconds.

Overlap
Setting Explanation

Start Overlap Distance of intentional swath overlap when entering a

previously applied area. The higher the number, the greater
the overlapped area.

End Overlap Distance of intentional swath overlap when exiting a previously

applied area. The higher the number, the greater the
overlapped area.

Coverage Switching Overlap Percentage of the section width for intentional swath overlap.
The higher the number, the greater the overlapped area
before the section is turned off.

Boundary Switching Overlap Percentage of the section width for intentional overlap of a
boundary. The higher the number, the greater the overlapped
area into the boundary area.

222 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 9   Field-IQ system setup Control setup

Rate control tab

At the Rate Control tab, complete the settings.

Setting Explanation

Rate Control Select ON to have the Field-IQ system operate a rate control
component. The system sets the target rate.
Select OFF for no rate control. Section switching only.

Rate Control Module Location Tap Setup to configure the rate control module(s), their
location on the implement, and the width they will control.

Drive Setup Tap to set up the drive. Complete the settings on these tabs:
l Valve Setup tab (page 224)
l Feedback setup tab
l Advanced

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 223

Control setup 9   Field-IQ system setup

Valve Setup tab

Setting Option Available with Valve Explanation
Types:
Valve Type N/A Servo: 2-wire standard servo valve
that turns a ball or butterfly valve to
adjust product flow
Fast Servo: 4-wire servo valve motor
that turns a ball or butterfly valve to
adjust product flow
PWM: 2-wire PWM valve. An electric
solenoid valve that adjust hydraulic
flow to a motor. The valve adjusts
application rate indirectly.
Pump Servo: An electric solenoid valve
that adjust hydraulic flow to a motor.
The valve adjusts application rate
indirectly.
Linear Actuator : A valve that creates a
linear motion (as opposed to a rotary
motion)
Electric over Hydraulic: A valve that uses
electric current to control the
hydraulic valve output
Hardi % Bypass: Specific system type for
Hardi control systems which has a
boom line leak back to tank.
Plumbing Servo Inline: Valve is
in the solution line going
Fast Servo to the boom. The valve opens to
Pump Servo increase the application rate.
Hardi % Bypass Bypass: Valve is in the return-to-tank
line. The valve closes to increase the
application rate.

Valve Behavior When All Close: When all sections are off, the
Sections Closed control valve returns to the closed
position.

All Lock in Last Position: When

all sections
are off, the control valve remains in
the last position. This setting allows
the system to return to the target
rate faster. The valve will remain

224 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

9   Field-IQ system setup Control setup

Setting Option Available with Valve Explanation

Types:

locked in the position it was in when

the boom sections were closed.
PWM Lock in Minimum: The valve will lock into
a minimum position that is
configured in setup. With this option,
enter the Minimum Preset Position.
Servo Lock in Standby Pressure: Used
for
Fast Servo maintaining a minimum operational
Pump Servo pressure which enables a quicker
response when activating sections.
PWM
When sections are closed, this option
Hardi % Bypass
can be used.
If you choose this option, enter the
Standby Pressure later.

Auxiliary Valve All Master : Valve closes when the system

is turned off.
Dump: Valve opens to dump flow-to-
return line when the system is turned
off.
Disable: Auxiliary valve not used or
disabled.
Pump Disarming All Enable: Select if youhave a pump
Switch disarming switch installed.
Disable: Select you do not have a
pump disarming switch installed.

Minimum Preset PWM Only available if you have chosen

Position PWM for the valve type and Lock in Last
Position for Valve Behavior on Sections Closed.

Standby Pressure Servo Enter the psi. When you exit a

Fast Servo boundary, nonproductive exclusion
Pump Servo zone or previously covered area, the
system will hold the desired pressure.
PWM
When you enter a productive area
Hardi % Bypass
again that you want to spray, there
will be adequate pressure to keep a
good nozzle spray pattern.
Required if you selected Lock in Standby
for Valve Behavior on Sections Closed.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 225

Control setup 9   Field-IQ system setup

Feedback Setup tab

Setting Explanation

Shaft Encoder Pulses per revolution.

Constant

Gear Ratio Actual ratio of the application rate sensor to the seed meter shaft RPM.
This is the number of revolutions the application rate sensor turns for
each revolution of the seed meter.
The Gear ratio allows the system to properly figure the meter RPM.
l Calculate the gear ratio from the encoder to the metering point of
the material.
l Rawson gear ratio should be calculated from the motor to the
metering point of the material
If the gear ratio is calculated incorrectly, the system may over or under
apply even though it is showing the correct rate on the screen. You may
also have issues in the Drive Calibration screen.

Gear Ratio Use the calculator (tap Gear Ratio Calculator) to determine your gear ratio.

Seeds Per Disk The number of seed openings per disk plate.

Row monitoring
Setting Explanation

Row Monitoring l Disabled: Row monitoring is turned off.

l Blockage: Select when using an air seeder or when applying
granular material.
l Seed Count: Select for precision seeding.

Setup l Row Sensor Enable: Turn individual row sensors on or off.

l Row Sensor Wiring: Select which wire each row sensor is wired
to.

226 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 9   Field-IQ system setup Control setup

Sensor tab
At the Sensor tab, you can add alarm functionality to a sensor. You can also access the Sensor Setup
screen, where you can add, edit, or delete sensors.

Setting Explanation

Sensor Type The required sensor for which you want to create an alarm.

Name Displays after you have selected the sensor type. You can enter a name
for the sensor.

Alarm Enabled: Alarm is enabled

Disabled: There is no alarm

Warn if below If less than this threshold and longer than the delay time, the alarm will
display.

Warn if above If more than this threshold and longer than the delay time, the alarm will
display.

Warn after Delay time for the threshold values:

l Warn if below
l Warn if above
Sensor Setup Tap to access the Sensor Setup screen.

Sensor Setup screen

At the Sensor Setup screen, you can add, edit or remove a sensor.
When adding or editing a sensor, enter the following information.

Setting Explanation

Sensor Type l Air pressure/vacuum

l Liquid pressure
l NH3 pressure
l Bin level
l RPM
l Gate Height

Name Enter a name for the sensor

Sensor Setup Field-IQ module: The Field-IQ system module that is controlling this sensor.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 227

Control setup 9   Field-IQ system setup

Setting Explanation
Input location: Which wire is controlling the sensor. (Not required for gate
height.)

Alarm Alarm settings

228 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 9   Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ

Equipment calibration for Field-IQ

Calibrate the equipment for your setup:

l Anhydrous calibration (page 230)

l Air Seeder calibration (page 229)
l Planter calibration (page 232)
l Sprayer calibration (page 236)
l Spreader calibration (page 237)

Air Seeder calibration

WARNING – Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.

To calibrate an air seeder calibrate the implement lift switch, then the modules.
For a spreader or seeder: Minimum and maximum motor RPM are used to keep the motor within
the manufactures recommended operating range. Rawson specs are 150 and 500 RPM.

Implement lift switch calibration

1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select Implement Lift.
2. Raise the implement and then tap Next .
3. Lower the implement and then tap Next .
4. Tap OK to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.

Modules calibration
Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require.
Note  – If you have an implement lift switch, calibrate it first.
The Field-system Calibrate option only displays on the Configuration screen if you have at least one
Field-IQ system Rawson control module or Rate control module set up to control the rate.

1. At the Configuration screen, select Field-IQ and then tap Calibrate.

2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select the operation listed under the module that you want
to calibrate. The message Not calibrated displays at the end of the modules that need calibration.
Note  – Calibration screens will vary slightly if you are using a linear actuator.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 229

 Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9   Field-IQ system setup

Note  – Before priming the system, the Automatic / Manual Switch on the master switch box must be in
the manual position.
3. Tap Drive Calibration and then tap OK. The Drive Calibration screen displays. Enter the
appropriate settings.

Tab Explanation
Drive Limits Enter the minimum and maximum flow values.
Auto-Tuning Moving parts during this operation. Ensure that the
implement is safe to operate.
Follow the on-screen instructions to auto-tune the system.
Do not perform the auto-tuning function if you have loaded
a preset configuration file. Use the predefined configuration
settings appropriate for your vehicle.
Drive Settings Turn the master switch on and vary the rates. Adjust values
if needed.
Info Shows the results and drive limits of your calibration.

4. Select Flow Calibration and then tap OK. The Flow Calibration screen displays.

Anhydrous calibration
WARNING – NH3 is an irritant and corrosive to the skin, eyes, respiratory tract and mucous membranes, and is
dangerous if not handled properly. It may cause severe burns to the eyes, lungs, and skin. Skin, and respiratory-
related diseases could be aggravated by exposure. It is recommended that protective gloves, boots, slicker and/or
pants and jacket, and chemical-splash goggles that are impervious to anhydrous ammonia are worn at all times.

WARNING – Anhydrous valve and flow calibrations require the vehicle and implement to be moving and the
implement must be in the ground (the implement lift switch must be down). Take all necessary precautions to
ensure user safety. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.

To calibrate anhydrous, first calibrate the implement lift switch. Then calibrate the modules to
ensure your system performs at the level you require.

Implement lift switch calibration

1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select Implement Lift.
2. Raise the implement and then tap Next .
3. Lower the implement and then tap Next .
4. Tap OK to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.

230 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 9   Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ

Module drive calibration

The anhydrous valve calibration requires the vehicle and implement to be moving and the
implement must be in the ground (the implement lift switch must be down). Take all necessary
precautions to ensure user safety. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.
The Field-IQ system Calibrate option only displays on the Configuration screen if you have at least
one Field-IQ system Rawson control module or Rate control module set up to control the rate.

1. At the Configuration screen, select Field-IQ and tap Calibrate.

2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select the operation under the Module that you would like
to calibrate. The message "Not calibrated" displays at the end of the modules that need
calibration.
Note  – If you have an implement lift switch, calibrate it first.
3. Select Drive Calibration and tap OK. The Drive Calibration screen displays.
4. At the Drive Limits tab, enter the minimum and maximum flow valves and tap Next.
5. At the Drive Settings tab, turn the master switch on and vary the rates. Adjust the values if
needed. Enter the values for:
l Allowable Error
l Integral Gain
l Minimum Response
6. Tap Next and enter the following values for:
l Allowable Error
l Gain
l Minimum Response
Note  – For information about the appropriate values for your sprayer, refer to the support note Field-IQ
crop Input Control System: For Sprayers and Spreaders.

Module flow calibration

1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select Flow Calibration and tap OK.
2. At the Rate and Section Control Flow Calibration screen, enter values for:
l Flow Meter type
l Flow Meter Calibration
l Minimum Flow
3. Tap Run Calibration and follow the on-screen instructions.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 231

 Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9   Field-IQ system setup

Planter calibration
The calibration process for a planter includes:

l Implement lift switch calibration (page 232)

l Rawson modules calibration (page 232)
l Hydraulic test (page 233)
l PWM valves calibration (page 234)

Implement lift switch calibration

WARNING – Moving parts during this operation. Make sure that the implement is safe to operate.

1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select Implement Lift.

2. Raise the implement and then tap Next .
3. Lower the implement and then tap Next .
4. Tap OK to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.

Rawson modules calibration

Note  – If you have an implement lift switch, calibrate it first.
Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require.
Note  – You must have at least one Field-IQ system Rawson control module or Rate control module set up to
control the rate before the Field-IQ Calibrate button will display on the Configuration screen.

1. At the Configuration screen, select Field-IQ and tap Calibrate. The Field-IQ Calibration
screen displays.
2. Select the first module that you want to calibrate. The Planter Calibration screen displays.
Note  – If a Rawson module was configured, the correct calibration is selected automatically.
3. Complete the settings.

Setting Explanation

Seeds Per Disk The number of seed openings per disk plate

Gear Ratio Tap Calculate to determine the gear ratio.

Allows the system to properly figure the meter RPM. The
number of revolutions that the application rate sensor
turns for each revolution of the seed meter.

232 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 9   Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ

Setting Explanation
Calculate the gear ratio from the encoder to the metering
point of the material.
Calculate the Rawson gear ratio from the motor to the
metering point of the material.
Note  – If the gear ratio is figured incorrectly, the system may
over or under apply, even if it is showing the correct rate on the
screen. You may also have issues in the drive calibration screen.

Calibration Constant A calculated value the system determines during

calibration. To begin, leave the value at 1.000. After the
calibration test, the system may adjust this value.

4. Place a clean, empty container under the rows that contain seeds to capture the seeds
dispensed during the calibration.

WARNING – Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.

5. Tap Test .
6. The system asks if you would like to prime the system. Tap Yes. To to ensure that the seed disk
is full, the system turns the seed disks one revolution.
7. Turn on the master switch to prime the system and then when prompted on-screen, turn off
the master switch.
8. For Number of Seed Meter Revolutions, enter a value and tap Start . The higher the number of
revolutions the more accurate the calibration. Five to 10 revolutions is recommended.
9. Follow the on-screen prompts of operating the master switch. After the system turns the
specified number of revolutions, enter the number of seeds dispensed per row and then tap
Continue.

10. The next screen shows the minimum and maximum speeds for the target rate specified. Tap OK
and then either press Test to repeat the calibration or tap OK to continue.
11. Select the Limits tab to view a listing of the limits that are set.
12. Tap OK.
13. Repeat the previous steps for other Rawson Control Modules that need calibration.

Hydraulic test
The purpose of this test is to exercise the hydraulics to establish whether there is sufficient oil flow
to run the system. The Rawson hydraulic test is used to make sure the drive will turn. After entering
a desired RPM the master switch is turned on and the drive should begin to turn.
If the drive does not turn, check all electrical connections. If the motor is plugged in properly, it will
make a hissing or whining noise.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 233

Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9   Field-IQ system setup

1. Check that there is hydraulic flow to the Rawson.

2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, tap Hydraulic Test .

WARNING – Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.

3. Tap Next .
4. Enter the initial motor RPM. The default setting is 300. It is recommended that you test the
motor RPM at 100 to ensure that the drive runs smoothly at slow speeds.
5. Tap Start . The next screen provides the status of each motor:
l No Error : The test was successful.
l Motor Stalled: The motors
did not have sufficient oil flow. Ensure the correct orifice size is
installed for each motor. For more information, refer to the Rawson System Installation
Instructions.
l Disconnected: The Rawson Control Module cannot communicate with the motor.
6. Tap Stop to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.

PWM valves calibration

Drive Calibration
1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select Drive Calibration. The Field-IQ Drive Calibration screen
displays.
2. On the Drive Limits tab, enter the values for:
l Minimum Seed Disk RPM
l Maximum Seed Disk RPM
Tap Next .
3. On the Auto Tuning tab, follow the instructions to auto tune the system.
Note  – Do not perform the auto tuning function if you have loaded a preset configuration file. Use the
predefined configuration settings appropriate for your vehicle.

WARNING – Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.

During the auto tuning process the system tries to control the drive with in the specified RPM
limits.
If the calibration fails, the drive may have not been able to meet the limits you entered on the
Drive Limits tab.
For a liquid system, it may be helpful to remove all orifices or nozzles to let the system flow
freely.

234 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 9   Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ

4. When the auto tuning is finished, tap Next .

5. On the Drive Settings tab, turn the master switch on and vary the rates. Then adjust the values on
this tab, if necessary.
6. Tap Next . On the Info tab, the results and drive limits of the calibration are listed. This screen is
used to show the applicators operating range. If the speeds that are displayed are not logical,
there is a setting issue. You may also need to perform a catch test for these numbers to be
accurate.

Flow Calibration

WARNING – During flow calibration, the machine will become operational. Take all necessary precautions to
ensure user safety. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.

Flow calibration is used to check the accuracy of the:

l Gear ratio (if applicable)

l Gate settings (if applicable)
l App rate sensor

WARNING – Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.

This is done by performing a catch test.

1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select Flow Calibration under the valve you want to caibrate.
The Planter Calibration screen displays.
2. On the Calibrate tab, complete the settings.

Setting Explanation

Seeds Per Disk The number of seed openings per disk plate.

Shaft Encoder Constant Pulses per revolution.

Calibration Constant A calculated value that the system determines during

calibration. This field allows you to adjust for
inconsistencies in the seed meters. To start out, leave the
value at 1.000. After the calibration test, the system may
adjust this number.

3. Tap Test and follow the instructions to test the settings you entered.
4. On the Limits tab, you can view an overview of the limits that are set.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 235

 Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9   Field-IQ system setup

Sprayer calibration
WARNING – Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.

To calibrate a sprayer calibrate the implement lift switch, then the modules.

Implement lift switch calibration

1. From the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select Implement Lift.
2. Raise the implement and then tap Next .
3. Lower the implement and then tap Next .
4. Tap OK to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.

Spraying modules calibration

Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require.
The option to calibrate the Field-IQ system only displays on the Configuration screen if you have at
least one Field-IQ system Rate and Section control module installed.

1. At the Configuration screen, select Field-IQ and then tap Calibrate.

2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select the Rate and Section Control module you want to
calibrate.
Note  – If you have an implement lift switch, calibrate it first.

Settings Explanation

Enter the test speed to use during calibration. The system will
apply material at the rate required to reach the Target Rate if
the vehicle travels at this speed.

Display only.

Display only.

Master Switch

Base PWM Frequency Change only if requested by support.

Dither Frequency Change only if requested by support.

Dither Amplitude Change only if requested by support.

236 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 9   Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ

Settings Explanation

Dither Control Change only if requested by support.

PWM Upper Limit Change only if requested by support.

PWM Lower Limit Change only if requested by support.

Spreader calibration
To calibrate a spreader, first calibrate the implement lift switch. Then calibrate the modules to
ensure your system performs at the level you require.

1. Implement lift switch calibration

2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select the Implement Lift option.
3. Raise the implement and then tap Next .
4. Lower the implement and then tap Next .
5. Tap OK to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.

Rawson modules calibration

The Field-IQ system Calibrate option only displays on the Configuration screen if you have at least
one Field-IQ system Rawson control module or rate control module set up to control the rate.
Note  – If you have an implement lift switch, calibrate it first.

1. At the Configuration screen, select Field-IQ and then tap Calibrate.

2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select the module you want to calibrate.
3. Select the first module to calibrate. The Planter Calibration screen displays.
Note  – If a Rawson module was configured, the correct calibration is selected automatically.

Setting Explanation
Gear Ratio Specifies the actual ratio from the application rate sensor to
the seed meter shaft RPM. This is the number of
revolutions the application rate sensor turns for each
revolution of the seed meter.
Gear Ratio Calculator Use the calculator to determine your gear ratio.
Calibration Constant A calculated value that the system determines during
calibration. This field allows you to adjust for
inconsistencies in the seed meters. To start out, leave the
value at 1.000. After the calibration test, the system may

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 237

 Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9   Field-IQ system setup

Setting Explanation
adjust this number.

4. Place a clean empty container under the rows that contain seeds to capture the seeds
dispensed during the calibration.

WARNING – Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.

5. Tap Test .
6. The system asks if you would like to prime the system. Tap Yes. To to ensure that the seed disk
is full, the system turns the seed disks one revolution.
7. Turn on the master switch to prime the system and then when prompted on-screen, turn off
the master switch.
8. In the Number of Seed Meter Revolutions entry box, enter a value and then tap Start . The higher the
number of revolutions the more accurate the calibration. Five to 10 revolutions is
recommended.
9. Follow the on-screen prompts of operating the master switch. After the system turns the
specified number of revolutions, enter the number of seeds dispensed per row and then tap
Continue.

10. The next screen shows the minimum and maximum speeds for the target rate specified. Tap OK
and then either press Test to repeat the calibration or tap OK to continue.
11. Tap the Limits tab to show an overview of the limits that are set for Target Rate 1, Target Rate 2 and
Jump Start.

12. Tap OK.

13. Repeat steps 1 through 10 for other Rawson Control Modules that need calibration.

Hydraulics test
The purpose of the hydraulics test is to exercise the hydraulics to establish whether there is
sufficient oil flow to run the system.
1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen tap Hydraulic Test .

WARNING – Moving parts during this operation. Make sure that the implement is safe to operate.

2. Tap Next .
3. Enter the initial motor RPM. The default setting is 300. It is recommended that you test the
motor RPM at 100 to ensure that the drive runs smoothly at slow speeds.

238 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 9   Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ

4. Tap Start . The next screen provides the status of each motor.

Status Explanation

No Error The test was successful.

Motor Stalled The motors did not have sufficient oil flow; ensure the
correct orifice size is installed for each motor. For more
information, refer to the Rawson System Installation
Instructions.

Disconnected The Rawson Control Module cannot communicate with the

motor.

5. Tap Stop to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.

PWM valves calibration

Drive calibration
From the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select Drive Calibration under the valve you want to calibrate.
Enter the appropriate settings on each tab.

Tab Explanation

Drive Limits Enter the minimum and maximum flow values.

Auto-Tuning Moving parts during this operation. Ensure that the

implement is safe to operate.
Follow the on-screen instructions to auto-tune the system.
Do not perform the auto-tuning function if you have loaded a
preset configuration file. Use the predefined configuration
settings appropriate for your vehicle.

Drive Settings Turn the master switch on and vary the rates. Adjust values if
needed.

Info Shows the results and drive limits of your calibration.

Flow calibration

WARNING – During flow calibration, the machine will become operational. Take all necessary precautions to
ensure user safety. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.

The Field-IQ system Calibration option only displays on the Configuration screen if you have at least
one Field-IQ system Rate and Section control module installed.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 239

Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9   Field-IQ system setup

1. At the Configuration screen, select Field-IQ and then tap Calibrate.

2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select the Rate and Section Control Module to be calibrated.
(The message Not calibrated displays at the end of the modules that need calibration.) The Field-IQ
Calibration screen displays that includes the serial number of the rate and section control
module you just selected.
3. Select Flow Calibration. The Rate and Section Controller Valve Calibration screen displays.
4. Select the Control tab and complete the settings for:
l Allowable Error
l Gain
l Minimum Response
Note  – For information about the appropriate values for your sprayer, see the Support Note - Field-IQ
Crop Input Control System: For Sprayers and Spreaders.
5. Tap OK to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.
6. Select Flow Calibration. The Granular Calibration screen displays.
7. At the Calibrate tab, complete the settings.

Setting Explanation

Gate Height Setting Current height of the gate opening.

If you entered a gate height measurement during setup,
you must enter a measurement here.

Staff Encoder Constant

8. Tap Calculate to calibrate the constant. The Calibration Constant Calculator screen displays.
9. Complete the settings.

Setting Explanation

Gate Width Width of the gate opening

Drag Chain Distance Per Rev The length of the drag chain per turn of the drag shaft.
To figure the drag chain length, you can either:
l Multiply the diameter of the drag shaft by 3.14.
l Mark the belt and measure the distance the mark
moved after one revolution of the drag shaft.
If these numbers are not correct, you will have issues
calibrating the spreader. If any of these settings physically
change in the implement, they need to be adjusted in the
FmX integrated display to maintain accuracy.

240 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 9   Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ

The system calculates the calibration constant. This value represents the liters of material
dispensed from the spreader per revolution of the drag shaft assuming the gate height is 1
meter. The actual gate height is factored in later. The FmX integrated display will automatically
come up with this value.
10. Tap OK to return to the Granular Calibration screen.
11. Place a clean empty container under the spreader to capture the material dispensed during the
calibration, and then tap Calibrate. The Granular Calibration screen displays.

WARNING – Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.

12. Complete the settings.

Setting Explanation

Amount of Material to be The amount to be dispensed during the calibration.

Dispensed

Target Rate

Target Calibration

13. To begin calibration, tap Start and follow the on-screen instructions.
14. Select the Info tab to view the system’s operational limits (based on the RPM limits, target rates,
and application width).
15. Tap OK.

Gate height calibration

Note  – As part of calibrating the gate height, you will enter the current height of the gate, then change the
gate height and enter that height.

1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, tap the gate height you want to calibrate. The Gate Height
Calibration screen displays
2. At the Enabled list, select Yes and tap Next .
3. In the Actual Gate Height entry box, enter the actual height of the gate.
4. Adjust the gate to a different height and tap Next .
5. In the Actual Gate Height entry box, enter the actual height of the gate that you adjusted it to. Tap
Next . The system returns you to the Field-IQ  Calibration screen.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 241

Upgrade Field-IQ system firmware 9   Field-IQ system setup

Upgrade Field-IQ system firmware

You can use the display to upgrade the Field-IQ system firmware components:

l Master Switch Box

l 12 Section Switch Box
l Rate and Section Control Module
l Seed Monitoring Module
l Section Control Module
l Rate Control Module
l Rawson Control Module

Upgrade steps
To upgrade a component’s firmware:

1. Transfer the new firmware file from www.trimble.com to your office computer.
2. Connect a USB drive to your office computer.
3. Copy the firmware upgrade file to the Firmware folder on the USB drive.
4. Insert the USB drive into a USB socket on the display.
5. Press the power button on the rear of the display to turn on the display. Wait for the Home
screen to display.
6. Tap Upgrade. The Firmware Upgrade screen displays.
7. Tap the appropriate hardware on the Hardware list.
8. Tap the appropriate feature from the Firmware list. Any available firmware upgrade files display
in the upper right list.
9. Tap the appropriate firmware file. The display shows the upgrade progress.
10. After the upgrade is complete, tap OK. The system restarts. The component’s firmware is now
updated.

242 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 CHAPTER
10
GreenSeeker setup

In this chapter:
GreenSeeker sensors shines a calibrated light
wave spectrum to measure the returned
GreenSeeker functionality 244 reflective light spectrum from plants, and
Care and maintenance 244 analyzes the data to determine the plants'
needs for nitrogen
Field preparations for nitrogen
application 245
Field setup 246
Field preparations for user defined rate 247
Delivery system and liquid control 247

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 243

 GreenSeeker functionality 10   GreenSeeker setup

GreenSeeker functionality
As you travel the field, in real-time the GreenSeeker RT200 system:

l Sensors emit light at two specific wavelengths to measure the light reflected by plants.
l Analyzes the reflected light and determines the nitrogen level (NDVI - normalized difference
vegetation index) of the plants below
l Sends the data to the FmX integrated display
The display sends the correct application rates to either:

l The applicator's rate controller (using Serial Rate Control)

l The Field-IQ system
The required amount of fertilizer is applied as you pass over the crop.
As materials are applied, the system logs the:

l NDVI
l Target rate
l Applied rate
Note  – Some rate controllers connected via serial cable to the display do not respond with an 'As Applied'
value.
For operational information, see GreenSeeker operation (page 407).

Care and maintenance

To maintain the high performance of your GreenSeeker RT200 variable rate application and mapping
system:

l Each day or during applicator re-fill, check the GreenSeeker sensor detector and light source
windows for dust and dirt, and wipe clean with a soft rag.
l Do not leave the GreenSeeker system outdoors during extreme weather conditions. Wide
temperature variations are hard on electronics and fluid seals, and may reduce the operating
life of the system.
l DO NOT store a GreenSeeker system with the sensors facing upward. Doing so may allow water
to collect around the windows and gaskets, causing seal failures in those areas. Also direct
sunlight can in some cases focus enough energy into the sensor to damage the detector.
Note  – There are no field serviceable components of the electronic system. Do not attempt any field repair of
a malfunctioning interface module or sensors. If you experience operating problems, contact your local dealer
or Trimble representative.

244 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 10   GreenSeeker setup Field preparations for nitrogen application

Field preparations for nitrogen application

Note  – The following instructions apply to the most common nitrogen applications. Check algorithms for
specific instructions. For updated specific algorithm instructions, visit www.GreenSeeker.com.
Before you can use the GreenSeeker applicator to apply nitrogen across a field, before or shortly
after planting you must establish a nitrogen rich reference strip (NRS) or "calibration" area. The rest
of the field is referred to as the Non-Reference (Non-Ref) portion (or as the N-limited area or farmer
practice region).
The NRS reference strip is used to determine the:

l Amount of nitrogen being made available to the plant by the environment (such as
mineralization)
l Current year's expected maximum yield potential and response to additional nitrogen
An ideal NRS runs the length of the field, but must be at least 400 feet long.
1. Establish the NRS in a representative reference portion of the field (in other words, not in high
spot or low spot). Use a permanent land marker or temporary marker to ensure that the NRS
can easily be found later in the season. You may also want to establish the location of the NRS
by noting it as an A-B line or flag on the screen.
The rate of nitrogen necessary to establish a NRS:
l Is crop and region dependent
l Should be the highest rate necessary to satisfy crop needs throughout the growing season
2. Use the sensor mounted booms of the RT200 system with RT Commander or the GreenSeeker
Hand Held sensor.
If past practice was a 100% pre-plant application of nitrogen, decrease pre-plant nitrogen
application rate of the field to a level at least half of previous total nitrogen applied during non-
GreenSeeker management practice.

Crop Explanation

Spring or winter If application rate has historically been 100 lbs N/acre, decrease the
wheat rate to 50 lbs nitrogen per acre.
Note  – Sandy soil type or heavy rainfall may require additional N
application to maintain the NRS as a non-limiting reference area.

Corn If application rates have historically been 200 lbs nitrogen per acre
decrease to 75 to 125 lbs N/acre.
Note  – Sandy soil type or heavy rainfall may require additional N
application to maintain the NRS as a non-limiting reference area.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 245

 Field setup 10   GreenSeeker setup

For best results, use the RT200 to "read" the NRS and apply N at growth stages dependent
upon the crop algorithm used. For most supplied algorithms this is typically:
l Wheat: Feekes growth stage 4-6
l Corn: V8-V12
For updated specific algorithm instructions, see www.GreenSeeker.com. Plant coverage should
be at least 50% for the sensors to accurately determine NDVI for topdressing (or sidedressing).
To collect sensor readings, pass the boom mounted sensor (or handheld sensor) over the crop
at 32 -– 48" above the canopy. Sense a large area of the NRS and nonreference portion of the
field to accurately determine their respective NDVI values.
3. Apply an applicators width swath of N. The rate of N applied should be high enough to satisfy
crop N needs in a good year.
4. Enter the values into GreenSeeker on the FmX integrated display:
l Automatically with the boom mounted sensors
l Manually with the GreenSeeker handheld
5. If the response is variable across the field, select an area where the difference between the
reference and the non-reference areas are most apparent. This assures that the algorithm will
determine a rate that utilizes the highest yield potential prediction and maximum response to
N for that year.
To estimate yield potential, most algorithms utilize an environmental factor (Growing Degree
Days or Days From Planting), which takes into account the weather and length of time that has
passed since planting.
Different GDD variations are used for different crops. You must know the planting date and
sensing date to obtain the GDD value.

Field setup
To prepare a reference area, do the following:
1. Make certain to use a permanent land marker or temporary marker to ensure that the NRS can
easily be found later in the season. You may also want to establish the location of the NRS by
noting it as an A-B line or flag on the FmX integrated display.
The ideal NRS would run the length of the field, but it should at least be 400 feet long.
2. At appropriate crop growth stage, take readings of the NRS and an adjacent part of the field yet
to be fertilized. For most supplied algorithms the following is typical:
l Wheat: Feekes growth stage 4-6
l Corn: V8-V12.
3. Find the area where the nitrogen rich strip is most apparent in comparison to the rest of the
field (this indicates greatest potential for the crop).

246 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 10   GreenSeeker setup Field preparations for user defined rate

4. Take sensor readings with RT200 or Hand Held sensor for input to your selected Crop
Algorithm.
5. Be sure to match nozzles and/or rate control system to maximize response time and
performance for each field's requirements.
For more information, see Field preparations for nitrogen application (page 245) for more details,
and be sure to consult your application equipment and rate control systems manuals as applicable.

Field preparations for user defined rate

The RT200 system can be used to apply other materials than nitrogen. GreenSeeker permits a
custom algorithm to be entered (which is a table of product values) instead of the NDVI value. These
values are entered into the Custom Formula Application table. See Create a custom table (page
408).
Note  – The grower/consultant must develop these rates. Also be aware of the rate range ability of your
specific rate controller and nozzles used to achieve these results.

Field calibration
You can use a GreenSeeker hand-held to measure the NDVI of a crop if you know the approximate
desired rate for the crop.
Note  – You can also measure NDVI using the GreenSeeker RT200 by observing NDVI values on the
GreenSeeker panel or by using the calibration function.

Delivery system and liquid control

As with any variable rate system, the minimum and maximum rates obtainable are dependent upon
the delivery system. The RT200 interface module is capable of "requesting" any rate, but the actual
rates delivered are dependent upon the rate controller and its components. Most liquid rate control
systems control or "throttle" the pressure of the system to affect flow and application rate.
When using the RT200 with a typical liquid delivery system, match nozzle sizes to expected delivery
rates. After the appropriate reference strip readings, GDD, and selection of crop type are input into
RT Commander, the application graph can be accessed to show the prescription rates at various
sensor NDVI readings. Depending upon what delivery system is used, there will be actual minimum
and maximum rates obtainable. These rates depend on components such as the pump, control
valve, nozzles, and boom plumbing sizes.
GreenSeeker has features that allow for minimum and maximum rates to be set, regardless of the
crop algorithm prescription. After a nozzle set is chosen, the minimum should be set at the lowest
rate the nozzles will still give adequate pattern/performance. Maximum rates may be limited by
rates that lessen atomization or drift.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 247

 Delivery system and liquid control 10   GreenSeeker setup

Select a nozzle
It is usually best to match nozzles to the lower mid-range of the typical rates shown on the
application graph. Ultimately, it is up to the grower or crop consultant to determine the minimum
or maximum rates and nozzles which are most appropriate.
If most of your NDVI readings (in the area of the field, not in the NRS) are around 0.53, and your
review the application graph shows at 0.53 NDVI you should be applying 15GPA, then you should
choose a nozzle that will have the ability to change rates above and below this NDVI reading.
You might choose a nozzle that puts out 12.5GPA at its lowest pressure (such as 20psi) and 21GPA at
its highest pressure (such as 60psi). Since the penalty to under-fertilize (harm yield) is usually greater
than to over-fertilize (waste fertilizer), it may be best to choose a strategy similar to the one shown
here. You will need to modify your values to fit your circumstances and meet the local field and
delivery system conditions.

248 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 CHAPTER
11
ISOBUS setup

In this chapter:
ISOBUS is a global set of software and
hardware standards that makes possible the
ISOBUS settings 250 communication between equipment made
Virtual Terminal setup 250 by different manufacturers.
Task Controller setup 251
GPS output settings 252
Equipment setup 253

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 249

 ISOBUS settings 11   ISOBUS setup

ISOBUS settings
To set up ISOBUS features:

1. Connect the CAN bus to the FmX integrated display.

2. Activate the feature/plugin you want to use. See Optional features/plugins (page 40).
3. If you are using Task Controller, unlock the feature.
4. Set up the feature you are using. See Virtual Terminal setup (page 250) or Task Controller setup
(page 251).
5. Set up GPS speed output. See GPS output settings (page 252).
6. Set up the specific virtual terminal for your equipment. See Equipment setup (page 253).
For operational information, see ISOBUS operation (page 412).

Virtual Terminal setup

1. At the Home screen, tap .
2. At the Configuration screen, select Virtual Terminal and tap Setup .
3. At the Virtual Terminal Dialog screen, select the port the CAN bus is plugged into .
4. Tap OK to return to the Configuration screen.
5. Tap OK to return to the Home screen.
For operational information, see Virtual Terminal operation (page 413).

250 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 11   ISOBUS setup Task Controller setup

Task Controller setup

Make sure you have:

l Connected the CAN bus to the display

l Unlocked the ISOBUS Task Controller functionality
l Activated Task Controller

1. On the Home screen, tap . The Configuration screen displays.

2. At the Configuration screen, select Task Controller and then tap Setup .
3. At the Task Control Setup screen in the Rates tab, enter the settings.

Setting Explanation
Target Rate 1 The first target rate for the volume supplied by the
implement
Target Rate 2 The second target rate for the volume supplied by the
implement
Rate Increment When you increment / decrement Rate 1 or Rate 2 on the Run
screen, the current application rate increases or decreases
by this amount.
Minimum Rate Minimum rate to be applied
Maximum Rate Maximum rate to be applied

4. In the Boom tab, enter the Valve On Latency and Valve Off Latency. These values are the measured
times that it takes the implement to start coverage after the command is given.
5. Tap OK to return to the Configuration screen.
6. Tap OK to return to the Home screen.
For operational information, see Task Controller operation (page 412).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 251

GPS output settings 11   ISOBUS setup

GPS output settings

1. At the Home screen, tap . The Configuration screen displays.
2. Select GPS Receiver and then tap Setup .
3. On the Settings tab, tap GPS Output.
4. On the CAN GPS tab, set:
a. The Message Rate to 5 Hz
b. The Output Port to be the CAN attached to the ISOBUS for the implement
5. Tap OK until you are back at the Home screen.

252 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

11   ISOBUS setup Equipment setup

Equipment setup
Make sure that you have set up the Virtual Terminal and/or Task Controller before completing the
rest of this procedure.
For cabling information, see FmX Integrated Display Cabling Guide.

1. At the Home screen, tap . The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select Virtual Terminal then tap Diagnostics. The Virtual Terminal for the equipment you have
connected displays.
For Kinze:

Type Models Set... VT TC

Planter 3110, 3140, Current Ground Speed Source x x
3200, 3500, to GPS Speed.
3600, 3660,
Population Option to x
3700, 3800
Prescription.

For Kuhn:

Type Models Set... VT TC

Seed Drill Moduliner (HR Simulated Speed to
the x x
6004 ML) speed you will drive.
Spreader AXIS-H-EMC Task Control to On. x
(40.1 & 50.1)
GPS Control to On. x x
Set VariSpread to On. x
Set Change Disc Speed to On. x
Spreader AXIS-W (40.1 & Manual Speed to the speed x x
50.1) you will drive.
GPSC to On. x

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 253

Equipment setup 11   ISOBUS setup

For Kverneland:

Type Models Set... VT TC

Spreader Exacta TL Driving Speed Signal to GPS x x
GEOspread J1939.

Task Controller to On. x

Drill Accord Optima Driving Speed to GPS J1939. x x
Precision Drill
Task Controller to On. x

Drill Monopill SE Driving Speed Signal to GPS x x

J1939.

Task Controller to On. x

For Rauch:

Type Models Set... Virtual Task

Terminal Controller
Spreader AXIS-H-EMC Task Control to On. x
(40.1 & 50.1)
GPS Control to On. x x
VariSpread to On. x
Change Disc Speed to On. x

Spreader AXIS-W (40.1 & Manual Speed to the speed x x

50.1) you will drive
GPSC to On. x

For Vicon:

Type Models Set... Virtual Task

Terminal Controller
Spreader RO-EDW Driving Speed Signal to GPS x x
GEOspread J1939.

Task Controller to On. x

3. Refer to the equipment manufacturer's operating instructions for how to change the settings.
4. If you are using the Task Controller, verify that the equipment recognizes it. For more
information, refer to the equipment manufacturer's operating instructions .

254 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 CHAPTER
12
Serial Rate Control setup

In this chapter:
By using a serial connection, serial rate
control enables you to use the FmX
Supported variable rate controllers 256 integrated display with non-Trimble variable
Variable rate controller setup 257 rate controllers. A simple variable rate serial
cable provides a link between your display
Amazone Amatron + 258
and variable rate application controller.
Bogballe Calibrator 258
Flex-Air setup 258
Hardi 5500 and 6500 259
LH5000 260
Raven 260
Rawson and New Leader 262
Vaderstad Control Station 264
Additional controller setup 265

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 255

 Supported variable rate controllers 12   Serial Rate Control setup

Supported variable rate controllers

The FmX integrated display can send control signals to vary only one channel at a time.

Variable rate controller Supported Models

Amazone Amatron + (page 258) Amatron+
Bogballe Calibrator (page 258) Calibrator Zurf
Hardi 5500 and 6500 (page 259) 5500, 6500
LH Agro LH5000
See LH5000 (page 260).
New Leader Mark III and Mark IV
See Rawson and New Leader (page 262).
Raven (page 260) SCS 440, 440DB, 450, 450DB, 460, 660, 661, 700,
710, 750, 760
Rawson Accu-Plant and Accu-Rate
See Rawson and New Leader (page 262).
Tyler Flex-Air
See Flex-Air setup (page 258).
Vaderstad Control Station (page 264) Control Station

256 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 12   Serial Rate Control setup Variable rate controller setup

Variable rate controller setup

1. At the Configuration screen, select Serial Rate Control and then tap Setup . The Edit Variable
Rate Controller settings screen displays.
2. At the Comm tab, complete the settings.
Note  – The fields that appear on the screen depend on which controller you selected.

Setting Explanation

Controller The make of the controller.

Port The display port the controller is connected to.

Active Channel If displayed, enter the channel name.

Send Rate as Unit of measure.

3. Select the Rates tab and enter the settings.

Setting Explanation

Default Rate

Step Size The increment for adjustment

Rate Snapping Enabled, disabled

4. Select the Sections tab.

5. Enter the number of sections. Then tap OK.
After you have selected a type of variable rate controller, the FmX integrated display initiates
communications with the controller each time you open a field. Communications are terminated
when you close the field.
If the display cannot communicate with the controller:

l A message displays identifying the problem. If the controller type you chose has a configurable
baud rate, the error message includes details of the baud rate that required.
l The applied rate does not display on the Run screen.
l Variable rate logging is suspended while the controller is disconnected.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 257

 Amazone Amatron + 12   Serial Rate Control setup

Amazone Amatron +
1. Connect the FmX integrated display to the Amazone Amatron +:
a. Connect the special adapter cable (Trimble P/N 59043) to the display cable (P/N 67091).
2. Set up the controller:
a. Press Shift + Page / Setup / Page 2.
b. Set RS232 to 57600 baud.

Bogballe Calibrator
To use the Bogballe Calibrator, you need a special adapter cable (Trimble P/N 59043) to connect to
the cable P/N 67091. Cable P/N 6709 will be connected to Port A or B on the display . Optionally, you
can use an extension (straight through) serial cable.
Note  – The standoff nuts on the Bogballe rate controller may prevent the pins in the cable connector from
making a connection. In this case, remove the standoff nuts.

Controller setup
To set up the controller to operate correctly with the FmX integrated display, tap:
1. Return

2. Return

3. Fertil.-Distrib

4. Select Type

5. Bogballe E/EX

6. Accept

Flex-Air setup
The FmX integrated display can send rates to the Tyler Flex-Air variable rate controller. The
controller can have four channels

l Main
l Liquid
l Co-applicator
l Supplemental

258 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 12   Serial Rate Control setup Hardi 5500 and 6500

Rates from all channels are recorded in the variable rate logging .dbf file, but the display can send
rates to only one channel at a time: the active channel.
The Tyler Flex-Air controller uses the GPS speed sent by the display.

Operation
Statistics for the active channel are recorded in:

l The Total_Qty value in the variable rate logging .dbf file

l The Avg_Rate field in the EventHistory .dbf file
If you want to use these statistics, start a new event before you change the active channel.

Application width
You can individually configure the widths of the boom sections on the controller. The display draws
coverage logging at the width of the sum of all the boom sections. If you turn boom sections off, the
display varies the width of the coverage polygons according to which boom sections are on.

Hardi 5500 and 6500

1. To connect the Hardi 5500 or 6500 controller, you need a special adapter cable (Trimble P/N
59043) to connect to the cable P/N 67091. Cable P/N 6709 will be connected to Port A or B on
the display . Optionally, you can use an extension (straight through) serial cable.
a. Connect the cable to serial port 1 on the Hardi controller.
b. On the Hardi 6500, use terminal version 1.55 or later and Jobcom version 1.55 or later.
c. Set the Hardi 6500 to metric units.
2. Set up the controller:
a. Turn on the controller while holding the ESC button.
b. In the extended menu, use the arrow keys to select the E.4 Data Exchange menu.
c. Enter the COM 1 setup and complete the settings.

Setting Enter...

Equipment type VRA/remote

Protocol Hardi VRA

Baud Rate 9600

3. Turn off the controller and turn it on again.

4. Go to Menu 2.3 and select VRA/Remote Control Enable.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 259

 LH5000 12   Serial Rate Control setup

LH5000
To use the LH 5000 controller, you need a special adapter cable (LH Agro P/N 198-701) to connect to
the cable P/N 67091.

1. Connect the FmX integrated display to the LH5000 by either:

a. Connecting the special adapter cable (LH Agro P/N 198-701) to connect to the display cable
(P/N 67091). Cable P/N 6709 will be connected to Port A or B on the display .
b. Connecting the display to the controller with an extension (straight through) serial cable.
2. Set up the controller, press:
a. Return
b. Return

c. Fertil.-Distrib

d. Select Type

e. LH5000

f. Accept

Raven
To use a Raven controller with the FmX integrated display, the controller must:

l Be GPS-ready
l Use Raven’s latest communications protocol (which was introduced in 1996).
If your controller is not GPS-ready or does not use the latest protocol, contact Raven for an upgrade
pack.
Cable P/N 6709 will be connected to Port A or B on the display . Cable P/N 6709 will be connected to
Port A or B on the display .

260 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

12   Serial Rate Control setup Raven

Configure the controller

Data menu
Settings Additional Information
l BAUD: 9600 Some Raven controllers may lose the settings if power is
l GPS: Inac disconnected. You must then reconfigure the controller.

l DLOG: ON
l TRIG: 1
l UNIT: Sec

Implement Boom Setup

Settings Additional Information
Application width: The display varies the width of the coverage polygons
according to the number of boom sections, but it does
l First boom section width must not know the absolute width of each boom section. It
be greater than 0, otherwise the only knows the relative width of each boom section with
display will not communicate respect to the total boom section width.
with the controller. When recording coverage polygons, each section is
l Total boom section width must considered to be a percentage of the application width
match the Application Width setting set in the Implement Boom Setup screen. For example, if
in the Implement Boom Setup you create an intentional overlap to avoid gaps in the
screen. application coverage by making the application width
greater than the swath width. This proportionally
changes the recorded width of each boom section.

Channel Setting
Settings Additional Information
To allow rates sent by the display to If the controller is set to Rate 2 or Manual, the controller
be used by the Raven controller, set ignores the rates being sent, but the display still records
channel to either: the applied rates.
l Rate 1 (SCS4XX, SCS6XX)
l Product X Auto (SCS7XX)

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 261

 Rawson and New Leader 12   Serial Rate Control setup

Baud Rate
Settings Additional Information

9600 Some older controllers are only capable of 1200 baud.

Such controllers must be upgraded.

CAUTION – Some Raven controllers do not support zero rates.

If the target rate is zero, and spray is still being applied, you
must turn off the boom sections manually.

Rawson and New Leader

The Rawson and New Leader controllers use a nominal flow rate (Yield) and a step size to describe
rates.
If you have a dual-channel Rawson Accu-Rate controller, see Rawson and New Leader (page 262).
1. At the Edit Variable Rate Controller settings screen, set the default rate to match the yield
value (or nominal flow rate) in the Rawson controller.
Any non-zero rate will be adjusted to the nearest value that the controller can select. A rate of
zero turns off the hydraulic drive.
Note  – For best result when creating prescriptions, use rates in 2%, 4%, or 6 2/3% increments of the
default rate. Select the percentage used on the FmX integrated display.
2. Put the controller into GPS mode. This allows the display to change the rates on the controller.
(Without GPS mode, the display will log only the rates being used.)
a. Turn on the controller.
b. Tap the MODE button twice.
c. Tap the SET button to switch the controller between GPS and non-GPS.
3. Set up communication between the FmX integrated display and the controller:
a. Connect the display to the controller with Rawson cable (P/N 69730) and Trimble cable
(P/N 67091).
b. Set the controller baud rate to 9600.

Using the controller

When in GPS mode, the hydraulic drive operates only when both the switch and the display allow
the drive to be on. Set the hydraulic drive switch on the controller to the ON position. If you need to
quickly turn off the hydraulic drive, use the switch on the controller.

262 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 12   Serial Rate Control setup Rawson and New Leader

Non-GPS mode
The FmX integrated display sends commands to the controller. If communication cannot be
established, it may be because the controller is set to Non GPS mode. A message displays and gives
you the option to continue in Non GPS mode.
If the controller is set to Non GPS mode, the display still shows and records as-applied rates. If a
prescription is loaded, target rates appear for reference, but these are not used by the controller. In
this mode, you must vary rates manually on the controller.

Loss of communication
In GPS mode, if communication with a Rawson controller is lost, the display does not report an error
until you cross into a region of the prescription that specifies a different rate.
In Non GPS mode, the display has no way of knowing when communication with a Rawson
controller is lost.

Special note on using a Rawson Accu-Rate controller

The display can send rates and record coverage for the Rawson Accu-Rate controller for only one
drive at a time: Drive A or Drive B.
To correctly send rates to the controller and log coverage based on the drive master switch:

1. To operate both drives, set the drive that is not being controlled by the display to Non GPS mode.
2. Connect the display Variable Rate cable to the COM port that matches the drive:
l To control Drive A, connect to COM A.
l To control Drive B, connect to COM B. When you use Drive B, set the COM port to COM B.
Drive A does not have a configuration for this and will always use COM A.
3. Set Bit 7 mode to off. Bit 7 mode sends two prescriptions and is not supported by the display.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 263

Vaderstad Control Station 12   Serial Rate Control setup

Vaderstad Control Station

1. Connect the FmX integrated display to the Vaderstad Control Station:
a. Connect the special adapter cable (Trimble P/N DCA6219) with a crossover serial cable (null
modem) to the Vaderstad program cable (Vaderstad P/N 428017).
b. Plug the Vaderstad cable into the GPS port on the back of the Control Station controller.
2. Set up the controller:
a. Press the ? button and hold it down while turning on the controller.
Note  – Pressing ? and selecting Info will not work if the unit is communicating with the display.
b. In the Setup screen, scroll to GPS and then select No.

264 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 12   Serial Rate Control setup Additional controller setup

Additional controller setup

You can also set additional features on variable rate controllers, including:

l Coverage mapping (page 265)

l Target and applied rates (page 265)
l Units (page 266)
l Alarms (page 265)

Alarms
If you want low limit and target rate alarms, set these on the variable rate controller. You can also
set a default rate to be used if you go off the prescription or do not have a prescription. For more
information, refer to the documentation provided with your variable rate controller.

Coverage mapping
The FmX integrated display receives the applied rate and can also receive the number of active
boom sections from a variable rate controller. It does not receive any information about the swath
or application width.
To accurately record coverage maps, if your controller does not send the number of active boom
sections, set the application width to match the agricultural equipment that you are using (for
example, the width of the spray boom).

Prescriptions
You can define variable rate controller setup data, and load prescription files that define the rates to
be applied in different areas of the field. This information is used to send target rates to the variable
rate controller. Applied rates are received from the controller, and both target and applied rates are
shown on the screen. In addition, data relating to the variable rate application may be logged to the
card.
The information describing prescriptions for the Field-IQ system also applies to non-Trimble variable
rate controllers.

Target and applied rates

The FmX integrated display can control only a single channel at any one time. This active channel is
specified in the Edit Variable Rate Controller settings screen. The target and applied rates shown on
the Run screen are specific to this active channel.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 265

 Additional controller setup 12   Serial Rate Control setup

Units
Most controllers can be configured to use either US Imperial or metric units of measurement. Each
channel can be configured to use different types of units (for example, lb/ac, oz/ac, or gal/ac.).
When constructing prescription maps, make sure that the maps use the same units that the
controller is configured for.

266 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 CHAPTER
13
TrueGuide setup

In this chapter:
The TrueGuide implement guidance system
works with the Autopilot system.
TrueGuide system 268
TrueGuide employs passive implement
Implement setup and selection 270 control and uses the second GPS antenna on
TrueGuide setup 271 the implemen to achieve implement location
accuracy.
TrueGuide calibration 272 TrueGuide setup includes:
l Implement setup
l TrueGuide system setup
l Implement guidance calibration

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 267

 TrueGuide system 13   TrueGuide setup

TrueGuide system
The working implement behind the tractor is where precision counts, and the only way to directly
influence the implement is to measure where it is and control it.
While you steer the vehicle, TrueGuide passively controls the implement to steer itself to the
guidance line.
The TrueGuide™ implement guidance system:

l Is used in conjunction with the Autopilot system

l Measures the position of the implement with a second GPS receiver placed on the implement.
The Autopilot system can then adjust the position of the tractor to pull the implement on the
guidance line.

TrueGuide works with towed implements for front-steered, tracked, and articulated tractors.
For operation information, see TrueGuide operation (page 426).

Benefits
With TrueGuide, you can:

l Reduce the uncontrolled drift of the implement.

l Control large implements and minimize the effects of draft (due to varying soil conditions and
ground moisture) with no additional steering hardware.
l Guide the implement to the line, even in the most difficult field patterns.
l Tow your implement online when its natural tendency is to pull through curves.
l Prevent unpredictable implement movements caused by rolling terrain by adjusting on the go.
l Minimize the effect of downdraft on severe hillsides by having the Autopilot system pull the
implement up the hill and hold the line.

268 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 13   TrueGuide setup TrueGuide system

To achieve the highest performance from TrueGuide implement guidance, the Autopilot system on
the tractor must have a good calibration. An Autopilot system that is calibrated very aggressively
may need to be set up with a more neutral calibration when used with TrueGuide implement
guidance.

Requirements
To set up and operate, TrueGuide system must have:

l The Autopilot automated steering system installed and configured. See Autopilot system (page
166).
l Stable implements. (Implements that are unstable, such as sprayers with large flotation tires,
will cause rocking in the antenna that will be greater than the performance improvements on
the ground.)
l Both Autopilot and TrueGuide activated for use. See Activate features/plugins for use (page 47).
l An additional GPS receiver on the implement.
For cabling information, see FmX Integrated Display Cabling Guide.
For operational information, see TrueGuide operation (page 426).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 269

Implement setup and selection 13   TrueGuide setup

Implement setup and selection

Before you use the FmX integrated display with the TrueGuide system, set up and select a new or
existing implement. Update appropriate existing (saved) implements with implement geometry to
support TrueGuide guidance.

Geometry tab for implement setup

When configuring an implement for the TrueGuide system, the following antenna offsets are
required in the set up of the implement. Antenna offsets are provided when the antenna cannot be
placed directly over the working point of the implement. These offsets should be minimized
whenever possible.

Offset Explanation

Antenna Front / Back The offset from for a GPS antenna mounted on the implement.
Offset Measure from the point the implement touches the soil
(implement's working point) to the center of the GPS antenna.
This setting ensures your position in relation to GPS is accurate.
Note  – For the TrueGuide system (page 268), if an offset is required, enter
the left/right offset first. The front offset should not exceed 1m (40").
TrueGuide does not allow back offsets.

Antenna Left/Right Offset The offset for a GPS antenna mounted on the implement. Measure
from the center of the implement to the center of the GPS antenna.
This setting ensures your position in relation to GPS is accurate.
Note  – For the TrueGuide system (page 268), if an offset is required, enter
the left/right offset first. Set to a forward distance of 2m (80") or less.

Antenna Height The height of the GPS antenna from the ground.
This setting ensures your position in relation to GPS is accurate.

270 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

13   TrueGuide setup TrueGuide setup

TrueGuide setup
1. At the Configuration screen, select TrueGuide and then tap Setup . The TrueGuide Setup
screen displays.
2. Enter the required settings.

Setting Explanation
Roll compensation l On: Applies roll corrections from the tractor.
l Off: Applies no roll corrections.
CurveGuide l Off: The system does not anticipate curves.
l TrueGuide only: Enables the system to anticipate
curves to make corrections for TrueGuide guidance
only.
l Always On: Keeps CurveGuide on at all times.
TrueGuide Aggressiveness The default aggressiveness. The recommended
aggressiveness is 100%. See System aggressiveness settings.

3. Tap OK. The Configuration screen displays.

System aggressiveness settings

Aggressiveness affects the response of the implement to move to the guidance line. When
aggressiveness is:

l Increased: The response to move the implement back to the guidance line is increased.
l Decreased: The response to the implement moving offline is smoothed.

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the TrueGuide panel.

2. Use + or - to increase or decrease the aggressiveness.

For... Use the default setting...

Steep slopes (10% - +30%) 150%

Slow speed operations 125%

Normal operation 100%

High speed applications (> 8 mph or 12.8 kilometers per hour) 33%

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 271

 TrueGuide calibration 13   TrueGuide setup

TrueGuide calibration
WARNING – Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause
significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid
possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take
manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

To calibrate the TrueGuide system, you must have a field open in the Run screen with an AB line
configured. See Fields (page 353) and Guidance pattern use (page 357).
At the Run screen:

1. Tap . Without closing the field, the Configuration screen displays.

2. Select TrueGuide and tap Calibrate. The TrueGuide Calibration screen displays.
3. Tap Next and follow the on-screen instructions.
4. Complete the test at least four times and tap OK.
5. At the Calibration screen, tap OK to return to the open field.

272 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 CHAPTER
14
TrueTracker setup

In this chapter:
The TrueTracker feature/plugin works with
the Autopilot system. TrueTracker uses active
TrueTracker 274 implement control, enabling the vehicle as
Setup process 275 well as the implement to guide to the line.
This improves accuracy and product
Implement calibration for TrueTracker
placement.
system 281

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 273

TrueTracker 14   TrueTracker setup

TrueTracker
The TrueTracker implement steering system is an optional upgrade for the Autopilot automated
steering system. When the TrueTracker system is added to the Autopilot system, the implement
receives separate guidance and steering to increase accuracy.

Implement steering actively steers the implement being towed by the vehicle. This prevents the
implement from pulling to one side (called implement draft):

l On extremely sloped ground

l In variable soil conditions
l On curved guidance patterns
TrueTracker supports:

l Steering in reverse
l Straight and curved guidance patterns
l Independent implement offset
l Independent aggressiveness control for the implement
l Zero steering to center the coulters
The system has two parts:

l Additional hardware installed on the implement (which requires professional installation)

l Additional FmX integrated display software provided by TrueTracker
For operation information, see TrueTracker operation (page 423).

274 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

14   TrueTracker setup Setup process

Requirements
TrueTracker requires:

l An Autopilot system
l An unlock code
l AG-815 integrated radio with secondary receiver
l Second antenna
l Platform kit for the implement actuation type
l Implement NavController and cabling

For information on TrueTracker cabling, see FmX Integrated Display Cabling Guide.
For operation information, see TrueTracker operation (page 423).

Setup process
To set up the TrueTracker system:

1. Activate TrueTracker. See Activate features/plugins for use (page 47).

2. Complete the implement controller settings. See Implement controller setup for TrueTracker
system (page 276).
3. Set up the implement so that the system can tell:
l Which type of implement is attached
l How much area it covers
l How far it is offset
Make sure you are measuring the offsets from the antenna to the ground working point of the
implement. See Implement setup (page 152).
Note  – When you enter the number of implement sections, if the implement does not have sections,
enter 1.
4. If necessary, edit the vehicle profile. See Vehicle settings for Autopilot system (page 167).
5. Calibrate the implement. See Implement calibration for TrueTracker system (page 281).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 275

 Setup process 14   TrueTracker setup

Implement controller setup for TrueTracker system

1. At the Home screen, tap . The Configuration Selection screen displays.

2. Tap Edit next to the implement.

3. At the Configuration screen, select TrueTracker and tap Setup . The Implement Controller
Setup screen displays.
4. Complete the:
l Vehicle settings for TrueTracker system (page 276)
l Engage settings for TrueTracker system (page 279)
l Steering settings for TrueTracker system (page 280)

Vehicle settings for TrueTracker system

Note  – Your vehicle make and model were selected when your TrueTracker system was installed. If your
vehicle data is correct, there is no need to edit the vehicle settings. If your vehicle data is not correct, edit the
implement controller.
At the Implement Controller Setup screen's Vehicle tab, complete the settings.

Setting Explanation
Connector Which port on the FmX integrated display the TrueTracker
NavController is communicating with.
TrueTracker on the FmX integrated display only supports port C or
port D on the internal GNSS receivers. Communications for
TrueTracker are serial.
l Port C uses Internal Receiver 1
l Port D uses Internal Receiver 2
The common practice for the Autopilot/TrueTracker combination is
to use Port C for the vehicle and Port D for the implement.

Current Selection Tap Edit if you need to change the:

l Vehicle profile
l Implement model
When you tap Edit , the Edit Implement Controller screen displays.

276 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 14   TrueTracker setup Setup process

Edit vehicle profile

At the Edit Implement Controller screen, change the settings as appropriate.

Choose new vehicle make/model

To select a new make and model from a database of vehicles (.vdb) on the display:

Setting Explanation

Vehicle Profile Location Select From Database (new).

Model 1. Tap Browse and select the required .vdb file.

2. Tap OK.
After calibrating a TrueTracker implement NavController, it is
recommended to save the configuration:
1. Tap Edit and then Save Implement to file.
2. Enter the file name and tap OK.
Note  – This is the only method by which to save an implement
TrueTracker NavController configuration.

Choose existing vehicle

To select an existing vehicle from a previously saved file on the display:

Setting Explanation

Vehicle Profile Location Select From Saved file (existing) .

Model 1. Tap Browse and select the required .vdb file.

2. Tap Open.
3. Tap Change/Restore Implement. The following message displays:
The specified implement model will now be selected on the Autopilot controller.
This will cause the Autopilot controller to be reset. Do you want to continue?

4. Tap OK to load the new configuration. A message displays

information you the Autopilot controller will now be
reinitialized.
5. Tap OK. Read the warnings and tap OK. The file is now loaded.

Change or restore implement

The Change or Restore Implement button is only active when you have selected either a new .vdb or a
saved configuration. Until then it is not available for use.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 277

Setup process 14   TrueTracker setup

The button is used to acknowledge and apply/load the desired .vdb or .config.

278 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 14   TrueTracker setup Setup process

Engage settings for TrueTracker system

At the Implement Controller Setup screen's Engage tab, complete the settings as appropriate.

Setting Explanation

Operator Timeout Amount of time allowed before the operator receives an alert
for lack of activity. If the operator fails to respond to the alert,
the vehicle begins to drive in a tight loop.

Coverage Log Manual: Coverage logging starts only after you tap .
When Engaged: Coverage is logged when the Autopilot system is
engaged if no other system is controlling logging (such as Field-
IQ or Yield Monitoring). This setting can be edited in both the
vehicle and implement setup. A change in one setup location
will show up in the other setup location.

Two State Engage Off: The Engage button engages with one tap:
l First tap: Engages implement and vehicle steering
l Second tap: Disengages both implement and vehicle
steering
Implement First: The Engage button engages with one tap:
l First tap: Engages the implement steering
l Second tap: Engages the vehicle steering
l Third tap: Disengages both implement and vehicle
steering
Vehicle First: The Engage button engages with one tap:
l First tap: Engages the vehicle steering
l Second tap: Engages the implement steering
l Third tap: Disengages both implement and vehicle
steering

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 279

 Setup process 14   TrueTracker setup

Steering settings for TrueTracker system

At the Implement Controller Setup screen's Steering tab, complete the settings.

Setting Explanation
Nudge Increment or Trim Set the amount by which the Nudge or Trim buttons move the
Increment line back to the correct path, or by which the Trim buttons
move the vehicle position.
The guidance line can move off target (requiring Nudge) as a
result of:
l GPS position drift when you return to the field for
guidance, for example after you pause or turn off the
system
l GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field
The vehicle can steer offline (requiring Trim) as a result of:
l Uneven drag on a vehicle from an unbalanced implement.
l Uneven drag on a vehicle from soil conditions.

End of Row Warning Distance Distance before the end of row warning occurs.
Note  – Longer vehicles that take longer to turn need an earlier
warning and a greater distance.

Autosense On or Off

Valve on Speed For vehicles operating at speeds that are:

l Normal: Select Normal > 0.4 m/s (1.3 ft/s) . Additional settings
are supported only with NavController firmware versions
5.10 and later.
l Slow: Select Low > 0.1 m/s (0.3 ft/s) or Ultra low > 0.02 m/s (0.07 ft/s) .

280 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

14   TrueTracker setup Implement calibration for TrueTracker system

Implement calibration for TrueTracker system

The auto steering system must be calibrated for the implement you are using.

1. At the Configuration screen, select TrueTracker and then tap Calibrate. The Implement
Controller Calibration screen displays with a list of items to calibrate.
2. Select each item and tap OK.
3. Complete the calibration.

Controller orientation setup

1. At the Implement Controller Calibration screen, select Controller Orientation and tap OK. The
Autopilot Controller Orientation screen displays with a graphic that represents how the
controller is oriented in the cab. (If the controller is in an orthogonal orientation, a graphic of it
displays. If it is not in this orientation, no graphic will be displayed.)
The graphic of the controller is shown as though:
l You are looking down on the vehicle from above.
l The top of the screen points to the front of the vehicle.
2. Tap the buttons to select the orientation of the controller. The graphic of the controller will
change as you tap the buttons.
3. If the controller is set at a sloped angle, tap the Direct Entry tab. Then enter the yaw, pitch, and
roll angles of the controller.
Note  – If you use direct entry to enter custom angles, the on-screen image of the controller does not
display.
4. Tap OK to accept the new orientation or tap Cancel to exit.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 281

 Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 14   TrueTracker setup

Proportional Steering Gain calibration

WARNING – The wheels can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the Autopilot
system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands. These sudden movements can cause collisions
with nearby obstacles or cause injury to occupants of the vehicle. Be prepared for sudden wheel movements.

Note  – Complete this calibration only :

- When the TrueTracker system's performance is less than acceptable
- After you complete Implement Steering Sensor calibration (page 284)
The proportional steering gain (PGain) setting enables you to reach a compromise between rapid
steering response and stability. Modifications to the PGain setting affect two steering
characteristics:

l Slew Time: The amount of time the steering coulters take to move from the far left to the far
right position and from the far right to the far left position.
l Overshoot: The percentage by which the steering coulters exceed the commanded angle before
they settle on the correct value.
Prior to completing this calibration:

l Complete the steering sensor calibration before you perform the proportional gain calibration.
l Perform the Automatic Deadzone calibration immediately before you run the PGain calibration,
even if the Automatic Deadzone calibration has been performed in the past.
l Perform this calibration on a level surface, that is free of obstructions.
l Run the engine at full throttle.
l Raise the implement.
To correct slight variations caused by valve current response, friction, and hydraulic fluid viscosity,
alter the PGain values:

l High PGain values: Decrease the slew time and increase the overshoot. This provides rapid
responses, but can cause the steering to exhibit signs of instability (for example, a tendency to
excessively overshoot).
l Low PGain values: Increase the slew time and decrease the overshoot. This improves the
stability but can introduce significant delays in the steering response and can cause the vehicle
to oscillate from side to side.
Increase the proportional gain up to the point just before any one of the following occurs:

l Slew times no longer decrease (a low value is required)

l Overshoot exceeds 10% (depending on the Tracker unit)
l Steering coulters noticeably shake near end stops

282 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 14   TrueTracker setup Implement calibration for TrueTracker system

Calibration steps
1. At the Implement Controller Setup screen, select Steering Gain and tap OK. The Autopilot Steering
Gain Calibration screen displays.
2. Tap Next to continue. The second Autopilot Automated Deadzone Calibration screen displays.
3. Tap Next for the next two screens that display.
4. Follow the instructions. The system will automatically move the coulter wheels in both
directions several times.

WARNING – The steering coulters can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while
the TrueTracker system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands. These sudden movements
can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury. Be prepared for sudden steering coulter
movements.

5. Tap Start . The system engages and performs the calibration.

6. Tap Run Slew Test . A warning message displays.
7. Tap Next .
8. Tap Next in the two screens that display next.
9. Test various gain settings while you monitor the implement steering performance and the
values for Slew Time and Overshoot during the Turn Left phase.
10. Adjust the New Gain value (if required).
11. Tap Turn Left . Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew.
Note  – The optimum gain setting has short slew time (short millisecond reading) and overshoot
percentage less than 10%.
12. Repeat the previous step with Turn Right. Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels
slew.
13. When you reach the best gain value, tap OK to save the value in the Autopilot controller
memory.
14. If you want to restart the calibration procedure, tap Cancel.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 283

 Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 14   TrueTracker setup

Implement Steering Sensor calibration

Note  – Complete this calibration before you calibrate the Automated Steering Deadzone or Antenna Roll
Correction.
This calibration converts the voltage output of the steering sensor into an equivalent steering angle
measurement.
Note  – This calibration is only available for implements that have a steering sensor providing feedback for the
steering mechanism location. Sideshift hitches do not use this calibration.
Make sure that you:

l Perform this procedure on a level surface that is free of obstructions.

l Follow the instructions on each page.
l Run the engine at full throttle.
l Raise the implement.

Calibration steps
1. At the Implement Controller Calibration screen, select Implement Steering Sensor Calibration. The
Implement Steering Sensor Calibration screen displays.
2. For vehicles with coulters, make sure they are raised out of the ground. For other articulation
methods, make sure the vehicle is slowly moving forward in a wide open space to allow free
movement of the steering mechanism.
3. Tap Start .
4. Perform the calibration. The system will automatically steer to the right and to the left. The
value for Volts updates as the wheels are steered.

284 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 14   TrueTracker setup Implement calibration for TrueTracker system

Implement Automated Deadzone calibration

The Automated Deadzone calibration for the implement runs a series of tests on the valve and
steering hydraulics to determine the point at which steering movement occurs. In this test, the
system independently opens and closes each side of the steering system while determining the
point at which wheel movement occurs.

WARNING – During the Implement Automatic Deadzone calibration, the system moves the wheels that steer the
implement. To avoid injury, make sure that the area around the vehicle and implement is clear.

Before you begin calibration:

l Complete the Implement Steering Sensor calibration (page 284).

l Make sure the hydraulic fluid is at normal operating temperature when you run this procedure
(to ensure optimal system performance). On some vehicles with large reservoirs, it may take
several hours for the fluid to reach operating level, especially if the implement circuit is lightly
loaded. Consult the vehicle documentation to determine if the hydraulic fluid temperature can
be shown on a vehicle console.
If you perform the calibration while the system is still cold, repeat both the Deadzone and the
Proportional gain calibration procedures after the system is at operating temperature.

Calibration steps
1. Place the vehicle in an area that is free of hazards.
2. Raise the implement.
3. At the Implement Controller Setup screen, select Implement Automatic Deadzone and tap OK. The
Autopilot Automated Deadzone Calibration screen displays.
Note  – Read the onscreen instructions on each page.
4. Tap Next to continue. The second Autopilot Automated Deadzone Calibration screen displays.
5. Tap Next in the two screens that display next.
6. Follow the instructions. The system will automatically move the coulter wheels, steering wheels
or other mechanism in both directions several times.
7. Tap Start . The system engages and performs the calibration.

Automated Deadzone error messages

If a calibration cycle is unable to complete successfully, an error message will display.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 285

Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 14   TrueTracker setup

Message: Error - ..... Explanation

Steering Close To End Stops Before the calibration cycle could be completed, the
measured steering angle approached the end stops.
Retry, and if the problem persists, instead of centering
the steering at the start of each cycle, try turning the
steering in the opposite direction to that which is being
tested so that the calibration procedure has a greater
range to test over.

Valve Connectors Could Be Swapped The calibration test sensed the steering turning in the
opposite direction to what was expected. Retry, and if the
problem persists either the valve connectors have been
accidentally swapped or the steering sensor calibration
was performed incorrectly.

No GPS A GPS receiver must be connected and outputting

positions before the software can run the calibration
procedure.

No Steering Response Detected During the calibration cycle, insufficient movement was
sensed in order for the calibration to complete. If the
problem persists, the hydraulic installation could be
faulty.

Unable To Determine DZ: Try Again A problem occurred when trying to compute dead zone.
Retry, and if the problem persists, contact Technical
Support.

286 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

14   TrueTracker setup Implement calibration for TrueTracker system

Antenna position and roll offset correction

Before configuring the antenna compensation, make sure that:

l TrueTracker is completely set up.

l The Autopilot system is properly configured. See Autopilot system (page 166).
l The correct GPS corrections are enabled. See GPS receiver settings (page 108).

1. At the Implement Controller Setup screen, select Roll/Antenna Compensation and tap OK. The
Autopilot Roll/Antenna Compensation screen displays.
2. Enter the appropriate settings and tap OK. Make sure the value entered for antenna height and
distance from centerline match those entered under Implement Geometry.

Setting Explanation

Antenna Height Above Ground a. Place the tractor and implement on a flat, level surface.
b. Measure the distance from the ground to the base of
the GPS receiver (or antenna).
c. Enter this value in the Antenna Height Above Ground entry
box.

Antenna Distance from a. Place the tractor and implement on a flat, level surface.
centerline b. Measure the distance from the centerline of the
implement to the center of the GPS receiver (or
antenna).
c. Enter this value into the Antenna Distance from centerline
entry box and indicate whether it is left or right of the
centerline.
Note  – Values to the left of the centerline are displayed as
negative numbers. The nose of the vehicle is considered the
forward direction.

Roll Offset a. Choose the method that best matches the conditions
to calculate the roll offset: Coulter wheel track offset
method (page 288) or Flag offset method (page 289).
b. Enter the average offset value in the Roll Offset entry
box.

Implement Position Select the offline direction, depending on whether the roll
offset distance is to the left or right.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 287

Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 14   TrueTracker setup

Coulter wheel track offset method

WARNING – The steering coulters can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the
TrueTracker system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands. These sudden movements can cause
collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury. Be prepared for sudden steering coulter movements.

1. Drive the tractor to a relatively flat field where tire impressions are visible and where you can
complete passes of at least 400 m (1320 ft) in length.
2. Reset the roll offset value to 0 (zero).
3. Start a new field.
4. Create a straight AB Line.
5. Create a clean set of tire tracks in the field. To do this, start a new pass away from the area
where the AB Line was created. When the system is stable, engage automatic steering mode
and allow the Autopilot and TrueTracker systems to complete the pass.
6. At the end of the pass, turn the tractor around to return along the same pass from the
opposite direction.
7. Engage automated steering mode and allow the system to complete the pass.
8. In the middle of the return pass, stop the tractor and confirm that the current position is
directly on the AB Line. This ensures there is no cross track error.
9. Park the tractor and exit the cab. Evaluate the coulter wheel track pattern between the first and
return paths.
10. Measure the difference between the track passes and record the distance. Also note whether
the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass. Record the results.
Note  – The offset should be consistently to the left or right.

Test Run Offset distance Offset direction

1

Total =

Total / 3 (average offset value) =

288 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 14   TrueTracker setup Implement calibration for TrueTracker system

11. Repeat steps 5 through 10 two more times, for a total of three test runs. Average the results of
the three runs. (Total the offset distances from the three passes and divide by three). Use the
table in step 10 to record your results.

Flag offset method

1. Drive the vehicle to a relatively flat area where you can complete passes that are at least 400 m
(1320 ft) in length.
2. Reset the Roll Offset value to 0 (zero) on the Roll Correction screen.
3. Start a new field.
4. Create a straight AB Line.
5. Start a new pass. Engage automatic steering mode when the system is stable. Stop the tractor
midway through the pass. Confirm that there is no cross track error: the current vehicle
position should be directly on the AB Line.
6. Park the vehicle and exit the cab. Insert a flag in the ground to mark the implement centerline
for this pass.
7. Complete the pass. Turn the vehicle around to return along the same pass from the opposite
direction.
8. Engage automatic steering mode. Stop the vehicle midway down the pass very close to the
marker flag. Confirm that there is no cross track error. The current vehicle position should be
directly on the AB Line.
9. Park the vehicle and exit the cab. Insert a second flag in the ground to mark the implement
centerline for this pass. Note whether the second pass is to the left or the right of the first pass.
10. Measure the difference between the flags for the two passes and record the distance. Also
record whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass. Record the results.
Note  – The offset should be consistently to the left or right.

Test Run Offset distance Offset direction

1

Total =

Total / 3 (average offset value) =

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 289

 Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 14   TrueTracker setup

11. Repeat steps 5 through 10 two more times, for a total of three test runs. Average the results of
the three runs. (Total the offset distances from the three passes and divide by three). Use the
table in step 10 to record your results.

Line Acquisition Aggressiveness calibration

1. At the Implement Controller Setup screen, select Line Acquisition and tap OK. The Autopilot Line
Acquisition screen displays.
2. Adjust the line acquisition aggressiveness slider.
The slider controls how aggressively the implement approaches the guidance line, using a scale
from 50% to 150%. The optimal value for each profile is not necessarily 100%. It varies for
different implement profiles.

290 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 CHAPTER
15
Vehicle Sync setup

In this chapter: Vehicle Sync integrates with the Field-IQ crop

input control system, Tru Count clutches and
the Yield Monitoring system.
Vehicle Sync 292 Multiple users can share coverage maps,
Setup steps 292 providing section control for minimized
overlap and seed savings during planting
season.
In conjunction with the Field-IQ system and
Yield Monitoring, Vehicle Sync can influence
seed placement as well as the header for
increased accuracy.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 291

 Vehicle Sync 15   Vehicle Sync setup

Vehicle Sync
Vehicle Sync supports up to six vehicles within range of approximately 325 yards (300 m) and in
direct line of sight with each other.

Requirements
For Vehicle Sync, you need:

l FmX integrated display

l Vehicle Sync unlock
l DCM-300 Modem (page 138)
l High-gain Wi-Fi antenna kit
For operational information, see Vehicle Sync operation (page 428).

Setup steps
1. At the Home screen, tap . The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select Vehicle Sync and tap Setup . The Vehicle Sync Configuration screen displays.
3. On the Setup tab, enter the appropriate settings.

Setting Explanation

Channel Make sure that the channel that is selected is the same on
all the vehicles that you want to link. You can link up to six
vehicles.

Static IP Must be unique for each vehicle being synced. If two

vehicles have the same IP address, tap Generate New for one
of the displays.

CAUTION – Do not remove power from the display or the DCM-

300 modem for 10 minutes after you tap the Generate New
button.

Display Name Enter a descriptive name that will be easy to recognize and
select when you join the vehicles.
Note  – If you already have Office Sync, this item is populated
with the vehicle name that you set up earlier.

292 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

15   Vehicle Sync setup Setup steps

4. On the Data tab, complete the settings and tap OK.

When there is excessive data transfer, the FmX integrated display may slow down. To help with
this, it may be useful to limit the amount of data sent back and forth between displays .
The Coverage and Comms Strategy settings enable you to limit the amount of data the display
sends out. For this to be effective, it is recommended that you limit the data sent out for all
displays in the group .

Setting Explanation

Coverage l All Layers: This transfers all applied layers for the Field-
IQ system.
l Layer 1 only: This setting limits transfer and receiving of
data to only the first product.

Comms Strategy l Original: All displays always broadcast data. Every

display in the workgroup is talking always and at the
same time. This slows down communication traffic
across the DCM and is used for heavy traffic
workgroups.
l Round-Round Robin: Each display takes turns
communicating information to the rest of the work
group. Displays talk one at a time instead of the
original format.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 293

Setup steps 15   Vehicle Sync setup

294 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 CHAPTER
16
Water Management setup

In this chapter:
Water Management functionality includes
survey, design, leveling and WM-Drain
Water Management features 296 functions.
FieldLevel II Survey/Design 297
FieldLevel II Leveling 300
Tandem / dual scraper setup 307
WM-Drain setup 311

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 295

Water Management features 16   Water Management setup

Water Management features

Water Management includes:
l Survey: Creating surveys of areas. You use a high-accuracy GPS receiver on the water
management implement to create a topographic survey of the layout of your field. The three-
dimensional data shows the surface topography of the land.
Note  – If you are working in a field that has already been leveled, you may not need to perform a survey
and you can go straight to leveling with the FieldLevel II system or installing tile using WM-Drain.
l Design: After you complete the survey, you can use it to design the optimum drainage slope
that can be graded with minimal dirt movement.
l Leveling: After you create a survey of the field and a design for how to modify it, you can use
FieldLevel II to control a land-leveling implement on your vehicle and to adjust the land to an
optimal slope.
l WM-Drain: Surface and subsurface drainage installation
Water Management system enables you to:

l Conserve precious water resources and help control the water table.
l Reduce erosion and conserve topsoil.
l Perform touch-up leveling each year.
l Use technology with a larger operating range than a laser and no vertical limit.
l Work with your existing agriculture guidance products to manage your fields with one collective
system. For example, you can connect the Autopilot system to the FmX integrated display at
the same time as the implement.

Requirements
The Water Management system requires:

l An FmX integrated display, with or without the Autopilot system

l A platform kit to suit your vehicle and valve type (P/N 55045-xx)
l An unlock code for the water management functionality
l A leveling or drainage implement

296 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 16   Water Management setup FieldLevel II Survey/Design

FieldLevel II Survey/Design
Benchmarks
Before you can create a survey, you must set a point at a known location called a benchmark. When
you create a benchmark, the GPS receiver obtains and records location information from the base
station for that specific point in your field.
When you are leveling, you use benchmarks to:

l Return to a point in the field with known coordinates to re-calibrate your exact position. This
may include setting the bucket on the ground or on a solid surface that will not be disturbed
while you perform field leveling.
l Move the design up or down to match the field surface at that point.
The first benchmark you create on a field is the master benchmark and displays as an orange flag
labeled MB . Field coordinates are calculated from this point.
Subsequent benchmarks display as orange flags labeled with their corresponding number .
When you tap a button to create a benchmark, a countdown timer runs for 30 seconds and then
the system creates the benchmark. To stop the averaging during the countdown, tap Bench again.

Rebenching
If you plan to shift the location of the base station each time you use the survey data, you can
configure the system to force a re-bench. The system will not allow you to engage automatic control
until the system has been re-benched.
When you are within the circle around an existing benchmark, a message displays on the Run screen
telling you how close you are to that benchmark.
If you tap the Rebench button when the receiver is within the circular radius of a benchmark, the
receiver is calibrated over the existing benchmark.
When you re-bench, the system automatically selects the benchmark closest to you but allows you
to select the benchmark you want to use.

Settings
1. Activate FieldLevel Survey/Design for use. See Activate features/plugins for use (page 47).
2. At the Configuration screen, select FieldLevel Survey/Design and tap Setup . The Survey Setup
screen displays. Complete the settings.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 297

FieldLevel II Survey/Design 16   Water Management setup

Setting Explanation

Survey Height Offset Represents the difference between the height of the blade when
surveying, and the height of the blade when moving dirt.
To measure this value, park the implement on a flat surface and
raise the blade up to its highest limit and then measure the
distance from the bottom of the blade to the surface of the
ground. The Survey Height Offset will be applied to all surveys to
avoid the need to re-bench between Survey mode and moving
dirt.

Survey Point Density When you create a survey of a field, this setting determines the
distance between the collected survey mapping points. The
approximate distances between points are:
l Coarse: 7.8 m (25 ft)
l Medium: 3 m (10 ft)
l Fine: 1.5 m (5 ft)

Cut/fill Color Range Defines the vertical range in which the colors are spread over the
cut/fill map.
The cut/fill map displays only after you have surveyed the field
and defined a design plane. The range is displayed from the
highest cut value to the highest fill value.
For example: If your highest cut value is 1 foot and your highest
fill value is 1 foot, and you set your Cut/fill color range to 2 feet,
then the colors will be spread evenly across your cut/fill map. If
you change the cut/fill color range to 1 foot, the colors will
become more focused around the neutral area, providing more
detail closer to the grade.

3. Select the Relative Heights tab and complete the settings.

By default, coordinates are recorded relative to the master benchmark. Setting relative
positions establishes the coordinates of the master benchmark when it is set. These
coordinates are then used for field leveling and topographic mapping every time the field is
opened.

298 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 16   Water Management setup FieldLevel II Survey/Design

Setting Explanation

Relative Heights Select Enabled from the list.

By default, coordinates are recorded relative to the master
benchmark. Setting the relative positions establishes the
coordinates of the master benchmark when it is set. These
coordinates are then used for field leveling and topographic
mapping every time the field is opened.

Relative X X-axis coordinate (Relative X)

Relative Y Y-axis coordinate (Relative Y)

Height Offset height (Height Offset)

Force Re-bench Whether the system will force you to re-bench each time that
you reload the field.
Note  – If you choose No, the RTK base station must be placed in
exactly the same position for the field to be correct.

4. Tap OK to return to the Survey Setup screen.

Tip  – To view relative offset values on the Run screen, set the offsets as status text items on the slide-out
tab.

For operational information, see Create / save a design (page 435).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 299

 FieldLevel II Leveling 16   Water Management setup

FieldLevel II Leveling
The FieldLevel II system:

l Uses a high-accuracy GPS receiver with an antenna mounted on the implement blade to
measure and control its elevation
l Defines the three-dimensional height for the field and controls how the implement reshapes
the ground
l Automatically raises and lowers the blade on the implement to match the design height
anywhere in the field
l Includes a color cut/fill map, simple on-screen adjustments, and automatic blade control
makes leveling easy
l Supports tandem or dual scraper implements
l With a tandem system, the second scraper is also controlled by GPS. You can work in areas
requiring cuts and fill two scraper buckets before you have to empty the scrapers.
l With a dual system, an antenna on each side of the scraper controls two independent
cylinders. This creates a more accurate surface by controlling the height of both ends of
the scraper.
l Supports the EZ-Remote joystick or with custom switches controlled by a Signal Input Module
(SIM)

Requirements
The FieldLevel II system requires:

l FmX integrated display, with or without the Autopilot system

l Platform kit to suit your vehicle and valve type (P/N 55045-xx)
l Unlock code for the field leveling functionality
l Leveling or drainage implement

Setup process
Note  – Before you can configure the system, it must be professionally installed. For more information,
contact your local reseller.
FieldLevel II setup and calibration include:

1. Target height (page 301)

2. GPS receiver setup (page 302)

300 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 16   Water Management setup FieldLevel II Leveling

3. FieldLevel II settings (page 302)

4. Valve module calibration (page 306)

Leveling models
The FieldLevel II system has five leveling models:

l Point and Slope: The system levels at a consistent upward or downward slope, regardless of
the vehicle’s direction. This can be useful for installing tile and field drainage.
l Multiplane Design: The FieldLevel II system supports external leveling designs from Multiplane
design software. This software can run a wide range of “what if” scenarios, enabling you to
create complex designs with multiple field sections. You can export these design control files
and then load them into the FieldLevel II system to shape the field surface based on the work in
the office.
l Plane (flat): Use this leveling model to level a field that has previously been measured with a
laser. The FieldLevel II GPS system will correct the design heights to a plane surface to match
your previous laser system.
l Plane (Earth Surface): Use this model to level a field using the FieldLevel II GPS system. No
corrections will be made to a flat plane, so the surface will be curved to match the surface of the
Earth. This is the most accurate model to use so that water sits at an equal depth across a field.
l Contour: The system guides you around a contour and indicates whether to drive up or down
to maintain your current level. This is designed for marking rice levees.
For cabling information, see FmX Integrated Display Cabling Guide.
For operational information, see Leveling (page 436).

Target height
1. At the Home screen, tap .

2. At the Configuration screen, tap FieldLevel II and then tap Diagnostics.

3. At the Field Level Diagnostics screen, use the Height Control options to set the target height.
4. You can test valve functionality at any time at this screen without the need for a GPS position
or an active field design open. See FieldLevel II diagnostics valve test (page 503).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 301

 FieldLevel II Leveling 16   Water Management setup

GPS receiver setup

The FieldLevel II system uses its own GPS receiver to record the exact position of the leveling blade.
To configure this receiver:

1. At the Configuration screen, select the GPS Receiver that is associated with FieldLevel II and
then tap Setup . The WM-Drain GPS Receiver Settings screen displays.
2. From the Receiver list, select the GPS receiver you will use for your FieldLevel system. It is
recommended that you tap Internal Primary when configuring the display as a stand-alone
FieldLevel II system, but you can use an external GPS receiver. If you are also using the
Autopilot system, it is recommended that you use Internal Secondary, as the Autopilot system
will be occupying the Internal Primary receiver.
3. From the Corrections list, select RTK for all FieldLevel II applications.
4. Set the Network ID to the same network ID that is set in the base station receiver.
5. Tap OK.
6. FieldLevel II is now configured and ready to use.

FieldLevel II settings
Complete the FieldLevel II settings:

l Settings tab (page 302)

l Blade Settings tab (page 304)
l Relative Heights tab (page 304)
l Valve Setup tab (page 305)
l Height Filter Tab (page 305)

Settings tab

1. At the Configuration screen, select FieldLevel II and then tap Setup . The FieldLevel II Setup
screen displays.
2. Select the Settings tab and complete the settings.

302 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

16   Water Management setup FieldLevel II Leveling

Setting Explanation

Operation Mode Choose your leveling model.

l Point and Slope: Creates consistently sloped tile or
surface drainage.
l Multiplane design: Uses more complex surface designs
imported from the MultiPlane design software.
l Plane (Flat): Levels the field to a design plane. The
plane can be configured in the on-board software using
benchmarks and slopes, or by creating a plane of best-
fit over a surveyed surface (Autoslope). This leveling
model uses a high-accuracy GPS receiver mounted on
the leveling implement. However, the design heights
are corrected to a plane surface to match your old
laser-leveled fields.
l Plane (Earth Surface): Levels the field to a design plane.
The plane can be configured in the software using
benchmarks and slopes, or by creating a plane of best-
fit over a surveyed surface (Autoslope). It uses a high-
accuracy GPS receiver mounted on the leveling
implement.
l Contour: Uses the FmX integrated display's on-screen
lightbar (or an LB25 external lightbar) to guide the
vehicle along contours to keep the vehicle at the same
elevation. This can be used for levee marking and
applications that require guidance to elevations.

Cut/Fill Range Warning Acceptable warning distance.

When Auto mode is engaged and the blade is outside this
range for more than three seconds, a warning displays.

VDOP Level Vertical Dilution of Precision: A measure of the vertical

accuracy of the GPS signal. If the VDOP reaches this value, a
warning message displays.
A VDOP setting of less than 3 is recommended.

Correction Age Timeout

On Grade Tolerance Tolerance for a cut / fill value being considered on grade.
The On Grade Tolerance is shown as the green color in the Cut
/Fill scale. If a value of 0.5' is used for the on grade
tolerance, any value between 0.5' of cut and 0.5' of fill will
show as green on the Cut / Fill map.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 303

 FieldLevel II Leveling 16   Water Management setup

Blade Settings tab

Setting Explanation
Blade Step The increment that you require the blade to move each time it
is stepped up or down by the plus or minus offset buttons.

Course Blade Step Coarse mode enables you to offset the target height in large
increments with a single tap, such as a 0.2' fill.
The increment you want the blade to move each time it is
stepped up or down in Coarse mode.

Antenna Height Height of the antenna above the lower edge of the blade.

On-grade Limit Distance the blade can move before the green blade height
indicators change to thin red arrows. At twice this distance, the
height indicators become thick red arrows. See Blade Settings
tab (page 304).

Disengage Raise When you disable Auto while scraping a field, you can set a
time value that will automatically raise the blade. For example,
if you set 0.5s, the blade will raise for half a second when you
turn off Auto mode.

Remote Input Auto You can attach a remote for enabling and disabling Auto
mode. This remote is controlled with the Remote Input Auto
setting.

Relative Heights tab

For survey data collection or field leveling, set relative the relative offset height so that the
coordinates are recorded relative to the offsets set for the master benchmark.

Setting Explanation

Relative Heights Enabled: For relative heights from the master benchmark
Disabled: For GPS heights at all times

Relative X The X coordinate that will be applied to the master benchmark if relative
heights are enabled.

Relative Y The Y coordinate that will be applied to the master benchmark if relative
heights are enabled.

Height Offset The height value that will be applied to the master benchmark if relative
heights are enabled.

Force Re-Bench If set to Yes and the field has been closed and opened again, the system

304 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 16   Water Management setup FieldLevel II Leveling

Setting Explanation
will not let you begin work again until you have re-benched. Use this
setting if you are using a different base station setup between work
sessions.
If you have a permanent base station setup that is never moved, select
No. The system will not force you to rebench.

To view relative offset values on the Run screen, set the offsets as status text items on the slide-out
tab. See Status items (page 70).

Valve Setup tab

Setting Explanation

Valve Module Type of valve module that is detected

Valve Type Select the type of valve that is connected.

Valve Inverted Not Inverted: (Default) Keep this setting unless the tank and pressure hoses
have been installed incorrectly on the valve.
Inverted: Select if tank and pressure hoses have not been installed
correctly. This eliminates the need to reverse the hoses.

Height Filter Tab

Choose the filter for height:

Setting Explanation

None This setting (this is the raw GPS data used for height) is recommended.

Average The height will be averaged using the number of positions selected. This
will smooth spikes in height readings but will introduce a latency into the
controls.

Jump Detect This will filter out some jumps in the height readings. When selected, the
following values must be entered:
l Threshold: The change in height value that will trigger the filter
l Decay Time: After the filter is triggered, the amount of time it takes
to gradually resume using the raw GPS height

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 305

 FieldLevel II Leveling 16   Water Management setup

Valve module calibration

Note  – Depending on the make and manufacturer of your vehicle, the tractor computer may need to be put
into a special mode. Refer to the FieldLevel II Installation Guide for your vehicle type.

1. At the Configuration screen, select FieldLevel II and then tap Calibrate. The FieldLevel
II Calibration screen displays.
2. Set the vehicle throttle to 100%.
3. For automatic calibration, tap Start .
The system performs its calibration sequence to test the speed at which the blade raises and
lowers. This process takes approximately 8 – 10 minutes.
4. To manually calibrate the valve, enter values in the three Manual Calibration entry boxes and
then tap OK.
Note  – Stopped DeadBand is the control deadband that is applied when the implement is traveling at less
than 0.1 mph.

306 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 16   Water Management setup Tandem / dual scraper setup

Tandem / dual scraper setup

For improved productivity when leveling a field, the FieldLevel II system supports tandem or dual
scraper implements.
With a tandem system, the second scraper is also controlled by GPS. This means that you can work
in areas requiring cuts, and fill two scraper buckets before you have to empty the scrapers.
With a dual system, an antenna on each side of the scraper controls two independent cylinders.
This creates a more accurate surface by controlling the height of both ends of the scraper.

Tandem scraper
The tandem scraper feature tows two scrapers, one behind the other. This type of leveling provides
increased efficiency as it allows for the blade of each scraper to be controlled independently from
the other. This means more dirt can be cut before you have to drive to a fill area and remove dirt
from the scraper buckets.
For operational information, see Tandem scraper controls (page 450).

Dual scraper
A dual scraper is single scraper with two GPS antennas, one at each end of the blade. This allows for
control of the roll of the blade, giving a more accurate surface. This configuration is ideal for complex
surfaces with high variability slopes.
For operational information, see Dual scraper controls (page 449).
Note  – For the FieldLevel II dual system you must use a scraper with dual hydraulic controls.

Set up
Note  – Before you can configure the system, it must be professionally installed. For more information,
contact your local reseller.

l Implement setup (page 308)

l Prepare connections (page 308)
l Primary receiver setup (page 308)
l Secondary receiver setup (page 308)
l Tandem / Dual settings (page 308)
l Tandem / dual calibration (page 310)

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 307

 Tandem / dual scraper setup 16   Water Management setup

Implement setup
If you have not already configured the implement, see Implement setup (page 308).

Prepare connections
If not already installed on the display, install:

l FieldLevel II
l Tandem/Dual
When installed, the Configuration screen will show:

l FieldLevel II with its associated GPS receiver

l Tandem/Dual with its associated GPS receiver

Primary receiver setup

FieldLevel II controls the primary receiver.

1. At the Configuration screen below Field Level, select the GPS receiver listed and then tap
Setup .

2. From the Receiver list, select Internal Primary.

3. From the Corrections list, select RTK.
4. Set the Network ID field to the same network ID that is set in the base receiver.

Secondary receiver setup

Tandem/Dual controls the secondary receiver.

1. At the Configuration screen below Tandem/Dual, select the GPS receiver listed and then tap
Setup .

2. From the Receiver list, select Internal Secondary.

Tandem / Dual settings

You must set up the FmX integrated display to control either a tandem configuration or a dual
configuration, depending upon the implement being used.
At the Configuration screen, select Tandem/Dual and then tap Setup . The Tandem/Dual Setup screen
displays.

308 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

16   Water Management setup Tandem / dual scraper setup

Setting Explanation

Type Tandem (Back): Default. Select to control two implements, one

towed behind the other.
Dual (Right): Select for a dual setup.

Antenna Height Height of the antenna installed on either the rear implement,
or the antenna installed on the right side of a single
implement. Measure the antenna height vertically from the
ground to the base of the antenna.
Note  – For FieldLevel II, the antenna height value can be altered on
the Blade Settings tab and relates to the antenna installed on either
the front implement, or the antenna installed on the left side of a
single implement.

Disengage Raise Used to control the rear implement or the right side of a single
implement when Auto is disengaged. If you set it to 0.000s
then the blade will not move up when you disengage.
Note  – For FieldLevel II, the disengage raise value can be altered
from the Blade Settings tab and relates to the front implement’s
blade, or the left side of the blade on a single implement.
Note  – For a tandem system, move the blade up when Auto is
disengaged on both the front and back implements as you will be
swapping between the two. For a dual setup with a single implement,
we recommend that you have the left and right Disengage Raise
values set to the same value.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 309

 Tandem / dual scraper setup 16   Water Management setup

Tandem / dual calibration

When working with a tandem/dual configuration, the valve module must be calibrated for both:

l FieldLevel II: Relates to the front implement cylinder in a tandem configuration, or the left side
cylinder of a single implement.
l Tandem/Dual: Relates to the rear implement cylinder in a tandem configuration, or the right
side cylinder of a single implement.
Depending on the make and manufacturer of your vehicle, the tractor computer may need to be
put into a special mode. Please refer to the FieldLevel II Installation Guide for your vehicle type.

1. At the Configuration screen, select Tandem/Dual and then tap Calibrate.

2. Set the vehicle throttle to 100%.
3. Tap Start .
The system performs its calibration sequence to test the speed at which the blade raises and
lowers. This process takes approximately 8 – 10 minutes.
4. To manually calibrate the valve, enter values in the three Manual Calibration entry boxes and then
tap OK.

310 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

16   Water Management setup WM-Drain setup

WM-Drain setup
1. If you have not completed implement setup, complete this before continuing.

2. At the Configuration screen, select WM-Survey and then tap Setup . The WM-Drain Setup
screen displays.
3. Complete the settings on each tab:
l Implement control settings (page 312)
l Limit and increment settings (page 314)
l Relative heights settings (page 315)
l Valve settings (page 314)
l Operation settings (page 315)
4. Tap OK when you have completed all the settings.
5. Calibrate the valve (page 321).
For operational information, see WM-Drain operation (page 451).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 311

 WM-Drain setup 16   Water Management setup

Implement control settings

Implement tab
At the Implement tab, enter the appropriate settings.

Setting Explanation

Control Type Height Control: Select if no IMD-600 slope sensor is installed, or if an

IMD-600 slope sensor is being used for roll corrections only.
Pitch Control: Select to allow the IMD-600 slope sensor to adjust for
roll and pitch corrections.
Height and Pitch: Select to allow the IMD-600 sensor to control pitch
and height.

Height Gain The amount of pitch control used to get to the target height with
Pitch Control or Height and Pitch control types.

l A higher number will more aggressively pitch the plow if it is off

target.
l A lower number will keep the plow closer to the grade and
more slowly approach the target height.
Default value for Pitch Control is 0.2, and for Height and Pitch is 0.0.
Increase this by 0.05 increments and fine tune if the plow is not
pitching enough to achieve the target depth.

Antenna Height The distance from the antenna to the bottom of the boot.

Antenna Selection Select the appropriate antenna from the list.

Survey Height Offset The distance from the tip of the boot to the ground when the plow
is in the survey position (height and pitch cylinders both in full up
position).

Survey Point Density The distance between the collected survey mapping points.

Slope Sensor (IMD-600) Select the serial number of the installed IMD-600 slope sensor that
is used for pitch and roll corrections. It is recommended that the
IMD-600 be installed parallel to the bottom of the boot. See FmX
Integrated Display Cabling Guide.
If the serial number is not in the list, make sure the cabling is
connected to port C or port D of the display.
Click Measurements to open the Tile Plow Measurements screen and
select the appropriate settings.

Slope Transition Distance Distance required to transition the plow to a different slope

312 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 16   Water Management setup WM-Drain setup

Setting Explanation
increment. If you are using the Pitch Control or Height and Pitch control
type, it is recommended to set this measurement to twice the
length of the boot.
If you are on a particularly rough ground, you can increase this
distance to three or four times the boot length for smoother
operation of the pitch cylinder. If you want the plow to follow the
ground contours more closely, reduce this distance to the boot
length.

Tile Plow Measurements

At the Tile Plow Measurements screen (when you are setting up Pitch Control and Height and Pitch
control types), complete the settings and tap OK.

IMD-600 section

Setting Explanation

Label Faces The direction (Up, Down, Left, Right) that the IMD-600 label faces in
relation to the direction the plow travels during installation.

Connector Faces The direction (Left, Right, Forward, Back) that the IMD-600
connector faces in relation to the direction the plow travels during
installation.

Pitch Offset The amount of angle or tilt (up or down) if the sensor is not installed
parallel to the bottom of the boot.
If you adjust the pitch offset, this can help correct the boot pitch if it
is not running level through the ground.

Roll Correction Corrects for static roll caused by minor variations in the sensor
mounting.

Antenna section

Setting Explanation

Horizontal The distance from the leading edge of the boot to the center line of
the antenna. The horizontal distance should be positive if the
antenna is forward from the tip of the boot and negative if it is
backward.

Vertical The distance from the bottom of the boot to the base of the
antenna dome.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 313

 WM-Drain setup 16   Water Management setup

Setting Explanation

Lateral Offset of the antenna from the center line of the pipe.

Boot Length Distance from where the pipe exits, to the back of the boot, to the
leading edge of the boot.

Offset The distance of the GNSS antenna from the approximate center of

vehicle rotation (the fixed rear axle of a towed plow or the center of
the tracks). Forward is the antenna in front of the pivot
point. Backward is the antenna behind the pivot point.

Antenna Selection Select the antenna from the list.

Valve settings
Select the Valve Setup tab and complete the settings for the PWM valve.

Setting Explanation

Valve Module Displays the type of valve module that is detected.

Valve Type Select the type of valve that is connected.

Valve Inverted Leave this value as Not Inverted unless the raise and lower hoses
have been installed incorrectly on the valve.
If this is the case, select Inverted to eliminate the need to reverse
the hoses.

Limit and increment settings

Select the Steps tab and complete the settings.

Setting Explanation

Height Step Fine: You can change height steps in small increments.

Coarse: You can change height steps in large increments.

Pitch Step Fine: You can change height steps in small increments.

Coarse: You can change height steps in large increments.

On-grade Limit This limit sets the distance the blade can move before the
green blade height indicators change to a thin red arrow. At
twice this distance, the height indicators become think red
arrows. See blade position in Blade level indicators (page 446).

Slope Adjust This percentage controls the amount the gradient changes

314 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 16   Water Management setup WM-Drain setup

Setting Explanation
each time you increase or decrease the slope on the Install tab
when in Point and Slope mode.
For example, if the leveling gradient is 3% and the Slope Adjust
value is set to 2%, the leveling gradient changes to 5% if you
decrease the slope.

Relative heights settings

Select the Relative Heights tab and complete the settings.

Setting Explanation

Relative Heights Enabled: Select to use the relative heights from the master
benchmark.
Disabled: Select to use GPS heights at all times.

Relative X If relative heights are enabled, this is the X coordinate that will
be applied to the master benchmark.

Relative Y If relative heights are enabled, this is the Y coordinate that will
be applied to the master benchmark.

Height Offset If relative heights are enabled, this is theheight value that will
be applied to the master benchmark.

Operation settings
Select the Operation tab and enter the settings.

Setting Explanation

Force Rebench Yes: If the field has been closed and then reopened, the
system will not allow you to begin work until you have re-
benched. Use this setting if you are using a different base
station setup between work sessions.
No: Select if you have a permanent base station setup that is
never moved.

VDOP Level Vertical Dilution of Precision measurs the vertical accuracy of

the GPS signal. If the VDOP reaches the value you enter, a
warning will display. A setting of less than 3 is recommended.

As-Built Logging Manual: Logs data if hydraulics are engaged and if you have
begun logging in the Run screen.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 315

WM-Drain setup 16   Water Management setup

Setting Explanation
Engage: Logs data only if Auto is engaged on the plow.

Filter Type None: Raw GPS data is used for height. This setting is
recommended.
Average: The height will be averaged using the number of
positions selected. This will smooth spikes in height readings
but will introduce a latency into the controls.
Jump detect: This will filter out some jumps in the height
readings. When you select this, you must enter the following
values:
l Threshold: The change in height value that will trigger the
value.
l Decay Time: When this filter is triggered, this will be the
amount of time it takes to gradually resume using the raw
GPS height.

316 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 16   Water Management setup WM-Drain setup

Calibrate WM-Drain for cantilever plow

Follow the steps in sequence for consistent calibration results and improved performance. If you
skip steps, you may experience inconsistent results.

Step 1: Select the mode

1. At the Configuration screen, select WM-Drain and then tap Setup . The WM-Drain Setup
screen displays.
2. On the Implement tab, from the Control Type list select Pitch Control.
3. Tap Measurements. The Tile Plow Measurements screen displays.
4. Enter all measurements as accurately as possible to the nearest 0.25 inch (1 cm).
5. Tap OK to return to the WM-Drain Setup screen.
6. On the Implement tab, enter values for Height Gain and Slope Transition.
7. Calibrate the roll offset.

Step 2: Set up the system

In the Implement tab, enter the values for Height Gain and Slope Transition Distance. See Implement
control settings (page 312).

Step 3: Calibrate Roll Offset

1. At the Configuration screen, select WM-Drain and then tap Diagnostics. The Drainage
Diagnostics screen displays.
2. Complete the roll offset calibration using one of two methods.

Method 1
1. Park the system on a known level surface. Ensure the boot is flat on the ground.
2. Note the Roll value on the Drainage Diagnostics screen.
3. At the Tile Measurements screen, for the Roll Correction value enter an offsetting value.
For example:
l Current angle reading = .07°
l IMD-600 Roll reading = -0.2°
l Roll Offset = 0.9°

4. Return to the Drainage Diagnostics screen. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the filtered

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 317

WM-Drain setup 16   Water Management setup

reading to settle on a stable value.

l If the Roll value is ± 0-0.1°, the roll offset calculation has been calibrated correctly.
l If the Roll value is not ± 0-0.1°, note the value and then repeat Step 3 to enter a value that
corrects for any remaining error.
For example:
l Current angle reading = .07°
l IMD-600 Roll reading = 0.5°
l Increase Roll Offset by 0.2°. Roll Offset now = 1.1°

Method 2
1. Park the system on a known level surface. Ensure the boot is flat on the ground.
2. Place a digital angle indication device flat against a smooth surface on the side of the system's
boot shank. Note the roll angle of the boot shank.
3. Note the Roll value that displays on the Drainage Diagnostics screen.
4. At the Tile Measurements screen, for the Roll Correction value enter an offsetting value.
For example:
l Shank angle reading = 4.7°
l IMD-600 Roll reading = 2.5°
l Roll Offset = -2.2°

5. Return to the Drainage Diagnostics screen. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the filtered
reading to settle on a stable value.
l If the Roll value is ± 0-0.1° of the measurement taken in Step 2, the roll offset calculation has
been calibrated correctly.
l If the Roll value is not ± 0-0.1°, note the value and then repeat Step 2 to enter a value that
corrects for any remaining error.
For example:
l Shank angle reading = 4.7°
l IMD-600 Roll reading = 4.5°
l Increase Roll Offset by -0.2°. Roll Offset now = -2.4°

Step 4: Calibrate the valve

Perform an automated valve calibration to provide the best valve drive performance. See Valve
module calibration (page 306).

318 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 16   Water Management setup WM-Drain setup

Step 5: Tune system performance

The system gains may need to be fine tuned to reach the desired level of system performance.

1. Set the tractor hydraulics to ~70% of the maximum flow. This will allow you to fine tune the
hydraulics without adjusting any other calibration settings.
2. Walk beside the system while operating a dry run. This allows you to see the visual cues
necessary for efficient gain adjustment. Pay close attention to the cylinder movement and note
any directional trend.
Excess movement in both directions can indicate the following:
l Hydraulic flow is too high. It is recommended that you drop the flow by 5% and then
recheck.
l Drop both valve gains by 5% and then check for improved performance.
Excess movement in one direction can indicate:
l Valve gain in that direction (raise or lower) is too high. Drop the corresponding valve gain
by 5% and then check for improved performance.
l Valve gain in the opposite direction (raise or lower) is too low. Raise the corresponding
valve gain by 5% and then check for improved performance.

Step 6: Set the height gain

Fine tuning the height gain and the overall valve gains are a crucial step in perfecting the precision
control of a cantilever plow with the WM-Drain system.
In the Implement tab, adjust the Height Gain values:

1. Manually drive the plow to a depth below the optimal depth of the section line that you have
surveyed and designed for this calibration run. The system will default to a Height Gain of 0.2.
2. Move forward at the speed and RPM that you will be running the plow. When the vehicle is
moving, engage the WM-Drain system and note how quickly the system takes to get to the
design depth.
Note  – The system may not go the optimal depth that you have entered at this time because the pitch
offset of this plow has not been determined. In this test, the system should drive to a consistent depth
each time it is engaged.
3. If the system is too lazy/slow to get to depth within a reasonable distance, increase the height
gain setting by a value of 0.05. Continue to raise this value until the plow achieves depth at the
required speed.
Note  – The plow may oscillate while on grade.
4. Split the last two values you entered.
For example:

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 319

 WM-Drain setup 16   Water Management setup

l Height Gain run prior = 0.300

l Height Gain current run = 0.350
l Height Gain to try next run = 0.325
Note  – After you have determined the optimal values for a particular plow series, such as Liebrecht 5'
plow, it is very likely that you can enter the same measurements, offsets, and height gain values for other
plows of the same series. With a good valve calibration for each plow, you should be able to get each
subsequent plow running very quickly.

Determine the pitch offset

Note  – It may take some time to determine the proper pitch offset of a plow accurately.
Without a correct pitch offset, the system will most likely attempt to maintain the design slope and
drive the plow above or below the optimal depth.
All cantilever plows must assume an angle that is slightly tipped up in order to maintain depth
against the immense down-pressure being applied by the soil that is being displaced. If the boot
traveled through the soil with an even attitude the plow would progressively plow deeper as it was
pulled through the soil.
After the pitch offset value has been determined, the value should only change as the tip begins to
show considerable wear.
Note  – Before completing this process, ensure that the system drives to a consistent depth. This depth may not
be the optimal depth, but it will ensure that the hydraulic system is operating well. Once you are certain that
optimal performance has been achieved, you may begin the process of determining the proper pitch offset
with consistent results.

1. Engage the plow on a newly surveyed section line in soil that has been undisturbed.
2. Allow the system to drive the vehicle to a consistent depth and then begin entering a positive
Pitch Offset value in the Implement tab. Enter values in 0.50% increments.
Note  – It may take 1-2 lengths of the boot for the system to fully recognize this offset.
3. Continue the actions in Step 2 until you are within a few hundredths of optimal depth.
4. Allow the system to drive along the entire section line. Ensure that the system continues to be
consistent through any transitions that are found in the current section line.
5. When you believe the system is running with the highest accuracy possible, survey another
new section line. Allow the system to drive the entire line.
6. Repeat Step 2 through Step 4 until the system gives a consistent result. Note the pitch offset
value you came up with and reset the run screen offset back to 0.00%.
7. At the Measurements screen, enter the determined Pitch Offset value.
Note  – Once determined, this value should only change once the tip begins to show signs of
considerable wear

320 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 16   Water Management setup WM-Drain setup

Calibrate the valve

WM-Drain performs its calibration sequence to test the speed at which the blade raises and lowers.
This process takes approximately 8 - 10 minutes for each valve.

1. At the Home screen, tap . The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select WM-Drain and tap Calibrate.

3. Select the appropriate valve (depth or pitch), if applicable.
4. At the Depth Valve Calibration screen, set the vehicle throttle to 100% and tap Start .
Note  – To manually calibrate the valve, enter values for manual calibration and tap OK.
5. When the procedure is complete, tap OK.
6. Repeat this procedure for another valve, if applicable.
Note  – To stop the plow cylinders from working excessively when stopped, you can add a value for Stopped
Deadband.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 321

WM-Drain setup 16   Water Management setup

322 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 CHAPTER
17
Yield Monitoring setup

In this chapter: Yield Monitoring obtains data from mass,

flow, and moisture sensors to gather data
and define high and low productivity areas of
Yield Monitoring functionality 324 a field during harvest.
Yield Monitoring best practices 325
Yield Monitoring settings 328
Operation settings 329
Crop settings 330
Map settings 331
Sensor output settings 331
Options settings 332
Yield sensor / moisture sensor calibration 333
Third-party display instructions 336

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 323

 Yield Monitoring functionality 17   Yield Monitoring setup

Yield Monitoring functionality

Yield Monitoring enables you to accurately view, map, and record crop yield and moisture data in
real-time during harvest to immediately understand how well your crop performed.
Supported yield monitoring types range from EOM sensors (both CAN and Serial) to Trimble's full
Yield Monitoring CAN solution.
Yield Monitoring functions include:

l Variety tracking (page 471): Map and compare the performance of different seed varieties
throughout your field.
l Moisture tracking: Determine if grain needs to be stored or dried based on the in-field moisture
content.
l Load tracking (page 472): Record the amount of grain harvested and loaded onto your trucks.
l Auto-cut width adjustment: Adjust the cut width automatically when traveling over odd-
shaped fields, point rows, or other previously harvested areas to improve the accuracy of yield
calculations.

324 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 17   Yield Monitoring setup Yield Monitoring best practices

Yield Monitoring best practices

There are key practices required to use the Yield Monitoring system to best advantage. Read this
before you start the installation and setup procedures.

Installation
The Yield Monitoring System relies on an appropriate installation of the optical sensors. To ensure
the best results:

l Install the optical sensors in the location described in the Installation Guide.
l If the desired location is not achievable, install the optical sensors as high as possible, but no
more than 6 inches (15 cm) below the top spindle of the elevator.
l Installing the sensors lower than 36 inches (90 cm) above the bottom spindle will give
unacceptable results.
l Interference: Ensure that there is no opportunity for interference between the optical sensors
or the retaining brackets and any moving parts on the combine. Be especially aware of chains,
belts, pulleys, and tensioning rods, and keep in mind that their range of motion may be much
greater during operation than when standing still.
l Alignment: Ensure that the optical sensors will not move out of alignment during operation.
l Paddle support bracket: Ensure that the optical sensors will not sense the paddle support
bracket. Refer to the Installation Guide for more information.

Tare calibration
The quality of the Tare Calibration is critical to getting good accuracy, particularly at low flow rates.
To ensure the best results:

l Check the tare daily.

l When performing the tare calibration, run the system at the same speed as you would
normally use during operation.
l While running the system empty, look at the elevator speed. This number must be correct,
typically between 12–20 Hz.
l Run the tare calibration. The tare value represents the measured thickness of the paddles, and
should be approximately correct. It is more important that the number is consistent than that
is exactly right.
l If the measured value is considerably higher than expected, check the entered values for
paddle spacing, and check that the optical sensors are not being obscured by the support
brackets on the paddles.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 325

 Yield Monitoring best practices 17   Yield Monitoring setup

l If the measured value is considerably lower than expected, recheck the entered paddle spacing
and the elevator speed. If both are correct, low tare should not be a problem.
l Tare Deviation indicates how much variation there is in the measurement of the paddle size.
Normally, this number should be less than ¼ the size of the paddle itself. If this number is
excessively large, check the installation for interference or opportunities for excessive vibration,
like a poorly-tensioned elevator chain.

Flow calibration
Calibrating the Yield Monitoring system across the full range of flows will improve the accuracy of
the system. To get a good calibration, do the following:

l Select calibration loads where the:

l Conditions are consistent
l Crop quality is even
l Ground is as level as possible
l The passes are as long as possible.
Keep the combine speed constant during the entire run.
l Collect loads that are as large as is practical without sacrificing consistency.
l Collect as many different calibration loads as possible, with each load at a different flow rate. To
accomplish this, you can run the system at different speeds, or harvest partial header widths.
l If you still have significant errors in the calibrations, check the noise level during harvesting. If
this figure is above 30%, check for interference with the optical sensors, or opportunities for
excessive vibration. If your paddles are very worn, they may need to be replaced.

Pitch/Roll calibration
The Yield Monitoring system corrects for the pitch and roll of the combine. To benefit from this
feature, perform the pitch/roll calibration as described in the owner's manual.
The system has correction parameters for each tilt direction that you can adjust to improve
performance. Use the following table when you decide how to adjust these parameters.
Note  – The pitch sensitivity adjustment depends on whether your sensor is mounted in front of or behind the
center of the paddle.

Tilt angle Yield reading too high Yield reading too low

Left roll Increase left roll sensitivity Decrease left roll sensitivity

Right roll Increase right roll sensitivity Decrease right roll sensitivity

Backward pitch, sensor Decrease backward pitch Increase backward pitch

326 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 17   Yield Monitoring setup Yield Monitoring best practices

Tilt angle Yield reading too high Yield reading too low

forward of center sensitivity sensitivity

Backward pitch, sensor aft Increase backward pitch Decrease backward pitch
of center sensitivity sensitivity

Forward pitch, sensor Increase forward pitch Decrease forward pitch

forward of center sensitivity sensitivity

Forward pitch, sensor aft of Decrease forward pitch Increase forward pitch
center sensitivity sensitivity

To start, adjust the sensitivity numbers in increments of 0.2.

Test weight
The Yield Monitoring system measures the volume of grain passing through the combine, and
estimates the weight by multiplying the measured volume by the test weight. Therefore, an
accurate measurement of test weight is required in order to achieve an accurate total weight
measurement. To ensure the best results:

l Recheck the test weight whenever the field conditions change significantly, either when
harvesting different varieties, or when the moisture level of the crop changes.
l Take several samples of test weight on calibration loads, and use the average of these samples
when calibrating.

Calibrating and operating conditions

How you operate your combine can affect your accuracy. Consider the following:

l Calibration will be most effective if you operate your combine at the same conditions as you
used during calibration.
l Frequent starts and stops during a load could degrade the overall accuracy of the load.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 327

Yield Monitoring settings 17   Yield Monitoring setup

Yield Monitoring settings

The following yield monitoring systems are supported:

l Trimble Yield Monitoring

l Various supported OEM moisture sensors
l Claas, 670 and 700 series (North America only)
l John Deere, -60 and -70 series
l Serial data input

Before setup
Before setting up Yield Monitoring, make sure:

1. All components are installed on the vehicle. Refer to the Installation Guide that is shipped with
every Yield Monitoring kit.
2. Yield Monitoring has been added to the display's configuration. See Activate features/plugins
for use (page 47).
3. The implement has been set up and configured for the appropriate operation. See Implement
setup (page 152).

Setup steps
To complete the setup for Yield Monitoring:

1. Choose the combine and complete its settings. See Combine settings (page 329).
2. Complete the Operation settings (page 329).
3. Enter the Crop settings (page 330) for your crop.
4. Complete settings for the map legend. See Map settings (page 331).
5. Complete the Sensor output settings (page 331).
6. Complete the Options settings (page 332).

328 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 17   Yield Monitoring setup Operation settings

Combine settings
At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the Setup tab, enter information about the harvester you
are using.

Setting Explanation

Combine Make of harvester

Series Series of combine

Yield Monitor Type Type of Yield Monitoring:

l Trimble YM (Yield Monitoring)
l Claas
l John Deere
l Serial Data Input

Port Connection The port on the back of the FmX integrated display that the
yield monitor is connected to

Moisture Sensor Moisture sensor you are using:

l Trimble
l Case IH
l New Holland
l AGCO
l Ag Leader

Advanced Setup

Operation settings
At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the Operation tab, enter information about the combine you
are using.
Note  – The selections available on the Operation tab may vary depending on the yield monitoring type that
you selected.

Setting Explanation

Header Height Sensor Enabled: The sensor is enabled.

Disabled: The sensor is disabled.
Head Logging Height The height at which yield data logging starts and stops. The Head

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 329

 Crop settings 17   Yield Monitoring setup

Setting Explanation
Note  – Not available for Logging Height is read from the Header Height Sensor.
the Claas 600/700. This If required, tap Current Height to enter values related to your own setup.
is set by the CEBIS.

Grain Flow Delay Time (in seconds) it takes for the grain to reach the yield sensor after it
enters the head
Reset Autocut Controls when the rows are automatically reset
l When head is lifted: Automatically resets the rows at the end of the
row when the head is raised above the logging height
l Never: Disables autocut. Rows must be controlled manually.
Crop Overlap When more than one crop variety is detected in the head, the system
will stop accumulating variety statistics. Use this setting to adjust the
percentage of crop overlap that is allowed before the system stops
accumulating variety statistics.
Select a value between 1% and 25%. For best results, the recommended
setting is 10%.

Crop settings
At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the Crop tab, enter the settings for your crop.

Setting Explanation
Commodity Select the crop that is currently being harvested
Units Select the unit of measure for the crop type:
l Bushels/acre
l Lbs/acre
l Tons/acre
l Hundred Weight/acre (When this is selected, the Bushel
Weight field is automatically set to 100 lbs.)
l Bushels/hectare
l Kgs/hectare
l Tonnes/hectare
Standard Bushel Weight Enter the weight of a single bushel of crop.
Storage Moisture Set the cutoff point between a wet crop and a dry crop. Set

330 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 17   Yield Monitoring setup Map settings

Setting Explanation
these values depending on what you want the map to look
like.

Moisture Upper Limit Range from 5-40%. The working limit of the sensor if a trimble
moisture sensor is attached.

Map settings
At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the Map Legend tab, enter information about the yield and
moisture values to display on the Run screen.

Setting Explanation
High Yield Highest expected yield for the current event
Low Yield Lowest expected yield for the current event
High Moisture Highest expected moisture for the current event
Low Moisture Lowest expected moisture for the current event

Sensor output settings

At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the Serial tab, enter what output you want from the
sensors.

Setting Explanation
Baud Rate Modulation rate of data transmission in seconds
Parity l None: No parity bit sent
l O: Odd parity bit
l Event: Even parity bit
l Mark: Parity bit is set to mark signal condition
l Space: Party bit is set to space signal condition
Data Bits Number of data bits to transmit
Stop Bits Number of bits that represent the stop message. Used to identify the
end of the cropping message when transmitted by the system.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 331

 Options settings 17   Yield Monitoring setup

Options settings
At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the Options tab, select the setting for New/End Load Confirmation.

332 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 17   Yield Monitoring setup Yield sensor / moisture sensor calibration

Yield sensor / moisture sensor calibration

To calibrate the yield sensor and moisture sensor, use either of these:

l Single-Load Calibration
l Multi-Load Calibration
Before starting either procedure, keep the following in mind:

l Use the same load type for both yield and moisture calibration.
l To achieve the highest accuracy, perform the Multi-Load Calibration procedure.

Calibration steps

1. Verify that all Yield Monitoring setup parameters are correct.

2. At the Run screen, tap to open the Yield Monitoring panel.

3. Tap Loads and Calibration . The Loads and Calibration view of the panel displays.
4. Tap either Yield Sensor Calibration or Moisture Sensor Calibration , depending on which calibration
you want to perform.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 333

 Yield sensor / moisture sensor calibration 17   Yield Monitoring setup

5. Calibrate the Header Height.

6. Calibrate the Temperature.
7. Calibrate the Roll Offset.
8. Calibrate the Yield Sensor Tare.
If the Average Tare Deviation is equivalent to or greater than the thickness of the elevator
paddle, the system may encounter a large amount of noise. “Noise” can be introduced into the
system by any of the following factors:
l Paddles contacting the Yield Sensor optical lens
l Yield Sensor optical lens obstructed
l Yield Sensor(s) loose
l Elevator chain with excessive slack or paddles flopping up/down
l Tensioning rod contacting yield sensors
l Excessive paddle wear causing large quantities of grain to fall back down the elevator
between the elevator wall and the outside of the paddles
9. To check the noise percentage of the system, turn the combine separator on at full engine RPM
and then select Yield Monitoring / Diagnostics / Status to see the noise percentage. If this is very high,
check the aspects listed.
Note  – If the frequency deviation is high, you may have an inconsistent Elevator RPM and may need to
inspect the performance of your clean grain elevator pulleys, bearings, chain, and so on.
10. Select either method for calibration:
l Speed method: Uses a consistent speed variable to calibrate for Low, Medium, and High
flows.
l Cut Width method: Uses a consistent cut width variable to calibrate for Low, Medium, and
High flows.

Speed method
1. Conduct a calibration load of 3,000-6,000 lbs. at your normal constant speed.
2. Repeat this procedure for:
l One load at 1 mph less than the normal operating speed
l One load at 2 mph less than the normal operating speed
l One load at 1 mph higher than the normal operating speed
This provides a calibration curve for Low, Medium, and High flow variations throughout the
course of harvest.
An example of calibration loads using this method is as follows:

334 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 17   Yield Monitoring setup Yield sensor / moisture sensor calibration

l Load 1 = 4,547 lbs. @ 4 mph

l Load 2 = 3,834 lbs. @ 3 mph
l Load 3 = 2,764 lbs. @ 2mph
l Load 4 = 5,768 lbs. @ 5 mph

Cut width method

Note  – It is highly recommended that you conduct at least three calibration loads to ensure that the system
provides accurate readings for all low, medium, and high flows throughout harvest. If you conduct only one
single load calibration, this may result in poor accuracy performance when harvesting outside the flow range
at which the system was initially calibrated.

1. Conduct a calibration load of 3,000-6,000 lbs. at your normal constant speed with a 100% cut
width (12 rows at 30 ft).
2. Repeat this procedure for:
l One load at 75% of the normal cut width (8 rows at 20 ft)
l One load at 50% of normal cut width (6 rows at 15 ft)
l One load at 25% of normal cut width (3 rows at 7.5 ft) at the same constant speed
This provides a calibration curve for Low, Medium, and High.
Flows vary throughout the course of Harvest.
An example of calibration loads using this method is as follows:
l Load 1 = 5,768 lbs. @ 4 mph @ 100%
l Load 2 = 4,547 lbs. @ 4 mph @ 75%
l Load 3 = 3,834 lbs. @ 4 mph @ 50%
l Load 4 = 2,764 lbs. @ 4 mph @ 25%
3. At the Yield Sensor Calibration screen for each load:
a. Enter the actual scale weight.
b. Enter the actual test weight (average of a minimum of three test weight measurements).
c. Select each load for which the actual weight and test weight will be calibrated.
d. Tap Update Calibration .
e. Tap Apply Calibration .
4. At the Moisture Sensor Calibration screen for each load:
a. Enter the actual moisture.
b. Select each load for which the actual moisture will be calibrated.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 335

 Third-party display instructions 17   Yield Monitoring setup

5. Tap Update Calibration .

6. Tap Apply Calibration .

Third-party display instructions

Claas Cebis Quantimeter setup
Note  – When using Yield Monitoring with Claas Quantimeter, always set Autopilot Coverage Logging to
manual. See Engage settings for Autopilot system (page 169).

Crop Harvested setting

1. On the Cebis display, tap and then tap .
2. Tap and then select the crop that you are harvesting.

Moisture Measuring setting

1. Tap and then tap .
2. Tap and then adjust the following settings:
l Status
l Moisture correction
l Display of yield with storage moisture
l Adjust storage moisture
l Display of current moisture

Bulk Density setting

1. Turn the HOTKEY dial to the scales icon.

2. Adjust the crop density by rotating the HOTKEY until the correct value displays on the screen.

336 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

17   Yield Monitoring setup Third-party display instructions

Note  – The lbs/bu value must be set before the Weight Measured function can be used.

Zero Yield setting

1. Tap and then tap .
2. Tap and then tap .
3. Tap OK.

Zero Angle setting

1. Tap and then tap .
2. Tap and then tap .
3. Tap OK.

Claas Cebis Quantimeter calibration

1. Tap and then tap .
2. Tap and then scroll to On .
3. Harvest a full grain tank or truck load.
4. After the tank or truck is full, tap and then tap .
5. Tap and then scroll to Off .
6. Weigh the grain tank or truck to get a scale ticket.
7. Tap and then tap .

8. Tap and then tap Crop yield weighted.

9. Scroll to increase or decrease the value until it matches the weight on the scale ticket.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 337

Third-party display instructions 17   Yield Monitoring setup

Claas Cebis Auto Pilot calibration

Activate the AutoPilot system
1. Tap and then tap .
2. Tap and then scroll to On.

Steering angle and steering system setup

1. Tap and then tap .
2. Tap and then tap .
3. Tap Learning sensing system.

Centralizing switch setup

1. Tap and then tap .
2. Tap , scroll left or right to adjust the central position and then select OK.

Steering sensitivity setup

1. Tap and then tap .
2. Tap , scroll left or right to adjust the steering sensitivity and then select OK.

Greenstar Monitor: Stop Head Height setup

1. Tap .
2. Tap for Harvest Monitor.
3. Position the header to 100%.
4. Tap next to Record Stop Height.

Stop Head Height on the Command Center

1. Navigate to Home screen on the Command Center.

2. Tap the Combine icon in the lower right corner of the screen.
3. Tap the third button from the left on the command center to select the Combine tab.

338 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 17   Yield Monitoring setup Third-party display instructions

4. After Combine tab is selected, continue to press the third button from the left until page 3
displays (page numbers are located on the Combine Tab).

5. Position the header to 100%.

6. Press Enter on Stop Head Height screen to record the required stop header height.

Greenstar Monitor calibrations

Original Greenstar Display (60 Series Combines)

Moisture calibration
1. Press .
2. Select .
3. View page 1.
4. Check moisture with a certified tester.
5. Calculate moisture correction (certified tester reading minus the Greenstar reading).
6. Input the moisture difference.

Yield calibration
1. Press .
2. Tap .
3. View page 2.
4. Verify that the combine’s grain tank and the truck/wagon are both empty, and tap Start .

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 339

Third-party display instructions 17   Yield Monitoring setup

5. Harvest about 500 bushels, and hit Stop .

6. Unload the grain harvested during calibration onto truck/wagon.

7. Select button next change to enter the weight of the truck/wagon in wet pounds.

Command Center (70 Series Combines)

Moisture calibration
1. Navigate to Home screen on the Command Center.

2. Tap .
3. Press on the Command Center.
4. Continue to press until page 2 displays (page numbers are shown on the Wrench tab).
5. In the Calibrations list, select Moisture.

6. Follow the steps to perform the calibration.

7. Highlight the arrow and then press the Confirm switch on the armrest.

Yield calibration
Navigate to the Home screen on the Command Center.

340 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

17   Yield Monitoring setup Third-party display instructions

1. Tap .
2. Press on the Command Center.
3. Continue to press until page 2 displays (page numbers are shown on the Wrench tab).
4. In the Calibrations list, select Yield.

5. Follow the steps to perform the calibration.

6. Highlight the arrow and press the Confirm switch on the armrest.

Update the Moisture Sensor (60 Series combines only)

Obtain version 1.20C from Stellar Support

1. Go to www.stellarsupport.com.
2. Tap Support & Downloads in the left column.
3. Tap Greenstar System update from the Software Downloads column.
4. Select the green box labeled Download GSD4 Software.
5. Tap Run in the file download security warning.
6. After the download is complete, choose the preferred language and press OK.
7. Follow the Greenstar Update Wizard to load the firmware to the keycard for the original
Greenstar monitor.

Load version 1.20C to the Moisture Sensor

1. Insert the updated keycard into the mobile processor that is hooked to the Greenstar display
(it does not matter which slot the keycard is inserted in on the mobile processor).
2. Power on the Greenstar monitor.

3. Press .

4. Tap .

5. Tap .

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 341

Third-party display instructions 17   Yield Monitoring setup

6. Tap .

7. Tap .
8. Disconnect the mobile processor after the update is complete.

342 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 CHAPTER
18
Operations

In this chapter:
This chapter covers common user work
operations preformed at the Run screen.
Operations overview 344
Operation basics 344
Fields 353
Field feature use 356
Guidance pattern use 357
Coverage logging 381
Field-IQ operation 385
Manual guidance operation 397
Autopilot system operation 398
EZ-Pilot system operation 401
EZ-Steer system operation 404
GreenSeeker operation 407
ISOBUS operation 412
Remote Output operation 414
Row Guidance operation 419
TrueTracker operation 423
TrueGuide operation 426
Vehicle Sync operation 428
Water Management functionality 432
Yield Monitoring operation 470

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 343

Operations overview 18   Operations

Operations overview
The Run screen is where you perform operations. Depending on the features you are using,
additional feature buttons will display on the right-hand side of the Run screen.
When you begin operations, there are some basic steps you will always perform. If you have already
entered implement and vehicle settings:
1. Select a vehicle and an implement. See Vehicle selection (page 355) and Implement selection
(page 354).
2. Select or create client, farm, field and event. See Fields (page 353).
3. At the Run screen:
a. Select or create guidance patterns and lines.
See Guidance pattern use (page 357).
b. Optionally add field features.
See Field feature use (page 356).
4. Optionally activate coverage logging. See Coverage logging (page 381).
5. When you are finished, close the field. See Close a field (page 355).

Operation basics
The process of beginning operation can include:

1. Create or select a field. See Field creation / selection (page 353).

2. Select a vehicle. See Vehicle selection (page 355).
3. Select an implement. See Implement selection (page 354).
4. Load or create a guidance pattern to use. See Guidance pattern use (page 357).
5. Optionally, create field features on-screen to indicate their location in your field. See Field
feature use (page 356).
6. Optionally, activate coverage logging. See Coverage logging (page 381).
7. Close the field when operations in that field are complete. See Close a field (page 355).
The system saves an event summary of what has been done in the field. If you want the field to
close more quickly, you can change the settings so that you do not save an event summary.
See Event summary adjustment (page 355).

Main buttons
The main buttons on the Run screen enable you to:

344 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

18   Operations Operation basics

l See the status of items

l Change the view
l Open feature panels
l Navigate to other screens
l Control automatic steering, if applicable
l Turn coverage logging on or off, if applicable

Left side of Run screen

Button / Indicator Explanation
Provides information about GPS. If the GPS signal is lost
completely, a warning displays and this button turns red. Tap
GNSS Status to view GNSS status (page 352).

In the Operational view (page 347) of the Run screen, shows an

overhead view of the field, with the vehicle in it.

Overhead view

Trailing view In the Operational view (page 347) of the Run screen, shows a
three-dimensional representation of the field from the driver’s
perspective.

Information configured using the Status items (page 70)

menus.

Opens the zoom and pan controls for the Operational view
(page 347). With the pan function, you can view the field
outside of the normal viewing area.
Zoom / Pan

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 345

Operation basics 18   Operations

Button / Indicator Explanation

To pan around the field, tap one of the four arrows positioned
at the edge field area.

To zoom in and out, tap either plus or minus

Note  – To toggle the zoom feature on or off, tap the field area of the
Run screen.

The fifth level of zoom in the pan view is a summary view

of all your coverage. It adjusts, depending on the size of the
field. It does not include grid lines.

Tip  – If you close the field, create a second field and then show
the summary view, the summary view may be zoomed to show
the area of both fields. To avoid this, reboot the display. The
view will be correct.

Tap to see a listing of all optional features/plugins and their

description.

xFill icon xFill is activated, displays in the top left:

l Blue: Engaged and has been used between 0 - 15 minutes
l Red: Engaged and 5 minutes remain

346 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Operation basics

Right side buttons on Run screen

The following buttons are the standard buttons on the right that are always available.

Item Explanation

If you are at the Run screen and have a field open, tap to close the
field and return to the Field Selection screen. See Close a field (page
Home 355).

Tap to go to the Configuration screen. See Configuration screen

(page 34).
Settings
Tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel. See:
l Feature panels (page 348)
Mapping guidance l Guidance pattern use (page 357)
l Guidance settings (page 56)

Also see:

l Coverage logging (page 381)

l Engage button (page 351)

Operational view
The operational section of the Run screen shows your guidance lines and an on-screen
representation of your vehicle in the field. Hashed grids provide a measure of distance. Each small
square represents 10 feet, and each dark green outline represents 50 feet.

You can change your view from an overhead view to a trailing view. See Main buttons (page 344).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 347

 Operation basics 18   Operations

Feature panels
On the Run screen, you open a feature panel to view controls related to that feature. The feature
buttons display on the right-hand side of the screen.

One feature is always on the Run screen:  opens the Mapping Guidance panel.

Item Explanation

1 Location for feature buttons. Tap to open the feature panel.

2 Feature panel. Contains controls specifically related to the feature.

3 Optional control button. Tap to open additional views related to the

feature.

4 Additional information related to the feature.

5 Area for controls such as the coverage logging and Engage button
when applicable. See:
l Coverage logging (page 381)
l Engage button (page 351)

348 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

18   Operations Operation basics

Feature / plugin buttons

Button Opens the feature panel for...

TrueGuide implement control system. See Using TrueGuide (page

427).

Autopilot automatic steering system. See Autopilot system

operation (page 398).

EZ-Pilot automatic steering system. See EZ-Pilot system operation

(page 401).

EZ-Steer automatic steering system. See EZ-Steer system operation

(page 404).

Field-IQ application control system. See Field-IQ operation (page

385).

FieldLevel II. See Leveling (page 436).

FieldLevel II, tandem. See Tandem scraper controls (page 450) and
Tandem / dual scraper setup (page 307).

GreenSeeker. See GreenSeeker functionality (page 244).

Guidance mapping. See Guidance pattern use (page 357) and Field
feature use (page 356).

ISOBUS Task Controller. See Task Controller operation (page 412).

ISOBUS Virtual Terminal. See Virtual Terminal operation (page 413).

Manual guidance. See Manual guidance operation (page 397).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 349

Operation basics 18   Operations

Button Opens the feature panel for...

Remote Output. See Remote Output setup (page 130).

Row Guidance. See Row Guidance operation (page 419).

Serial Rate Control. See Variable rate controller setup (page 257).

Survey. See Create a survey (page 432).

TrueGuide system. See TrueGuide operation (page 426).

TrueTracker system. See TrueTracker operation (page 423).

Vehicle Sync. See Vehicle Sync (page 292).

WM-Drain. See WM-Drain operation (page 451).

Yield Monitoring. See Yield Monitoring operation (page 470).

350 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

18   Operations Operation basics

Engage button
WARNING – Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause
significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid
possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take
manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

The Engage button displays on the Run screen when you are using an automatic steering system
such as:

l Autopilot system operation (page 398)

l EZ-Pilot system operation (page 401)
l EZ-Steer system operation (page 404)

Indicator / Button Explanation Tap to...

The vehicle is close enough to Engage on the guidance line.

the guidance line to engage on
it.
Ready to Engage (yellow)

The vehicle is engaged on the Stop engaging on the guidance

guidance line. line.

Engaged (green)

The vehicle is not ready to N/A. You cannot tap this button.
engage on the line because the It is an indicator only.
guidance line is too far from the
Not Ready to Engage (red) vehicle.

Automatic steering is not N/A. You cannot tap this button.

allowed due to how it has been It is an indicator only.
set up.
Auto steering not allowed
(red)

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 351

 Operation basics 18   Operations

Coverage button for logging

When you are applying material, the coverage button displays on the Run screen. The coverage
button controls whether or not you are logging the coverage you are applying.

Indicator / Button Explanation

Indicates coverage logging is off. Tap to start logging.

Logging Off
Indicates coverage logging is on. Tap to stop logging.
Logging On

See Coverage logging (page 381).

GNSS status
CAUTION – The GNSS antenna may experience interference if you operate the vehicle within 100 m (300 ft) of
any power line, radar dish, or cell phone tower.

Tap to see status information on GNSS.

If the feature/plugin you are using has a second GNSS receiver, there will be a satellite icon for both
receivers. Tap the other to see status on the second GNSS receiver.

On-screen lightbar for vehicle

The on-screen lightbar indicates where the vehicle is in relation to the guidance line.
l Green indicator lights in center:

l Red LEDs to the left or right: The vehicle has moved off the guidance line

On-screen lightbar for implement

There can be more than one row of lights, depending on the feature/plugin that is being used. The
second row shows where the implement is in relation to the guidance line.
See Implement on-screen lightbar (page 425).

352 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Fields

Fields
The FmX integrated display Data Dictionary organizes all work preformed based on a Client / Farm /
Field / Event structure.

Field creation / selection

1. To change the vehicle or implement, tap Switch next to the item and select the one you want.
2. Tap OK. The Field Selection screen displays.
l For existing client, farm, field or events, select the appropriate choice from each list.
l To create new items, tap New.

Item Explanation

Client Select the client. The Farm list will show only farms
associated with this client.

Farm Select the farm. The Field list will show only fields
associated with this farm.

Field Tap New. Enter the new field name.

Event Select the event.

Event Attributes Tap to add more information for record keeping.

Variety Setup Tap to add and edit information on the variety of

products that can be distributed from the implement,
tap Hybrid Setup .

3. Tap OK to enter the Run screen.

After you create the field, select a swath pattern to use while you drive the field. See Field creation /
selection (page 353).

Event Attributes screen

Category Explanation

Operator Name Name of the vehicle's operator

Operator EPA# Vehicle operator's EPA license number. For spreading

restricted-use or state-restricted pesticides or herbicides.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 353

Fields 18   Operations

Category Explanation

Harvest Year Year the crop will be harvested

Farm Location Country or region where the farm is located

Vehicle Vehicle used in the operation

Implement Implement connected to the vehicle

Application method Method used, such as spraying, seeding, harvesting and so on

Wind speed Average wind speed

Wind gust speed Maximum speed of any wind gusts

Wind direction Average wind direction

Sky conditions Amount of cloud cover

Soil conditions Description of the soil's state

Soil type Description of the soil type

Temperature Current temperature

Relative humidity Percentage of humidity

Crop Crop in the field

Target pests Pests to be eliminated by spraying

Custom 1 Additional information you enter

Custom 2 Additional information you enter

Custom 3 Additional information you enter

Custom 4 Additional information you enter

Material Material being applied

Implement selection

1. At the Home screen, tap . The Configuration Selection screen displays.

2. Next to the existing implement, tap Switch to select to a different implement.

354 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Fields

Vehicle selection

1. At the Home screen, tap . The Configuration Selection screen displays.

2. To change the vehicle currently selected, tap Switch to select to a different vehicle.

Event summary adjustment

When a field is closed, the system saves an HTML summary for the event.
To reduce the time it takes to close a field, you can prevent the system from saving a summary:

1. At the Configuration screen, select System and then tap Setup .

2. At the Display Setup screen, select Map Settings and then tap Setup .
3. At the Mapping screen, select Off from the Save Summaries list.

Close a field
After you finish using a field, tap to close it. The system displays a message asking what you
want to do next. These options are:

Tap... To...
Cancel Return to the currently open field.
Close Close the current field and return to the Home screen.
Open Another Close the current field, and open a new field.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 355

 Field feature use 18   Operations

Field feature use

You can place field features in the field while driving to define on the field points of interest or areas
to avoid. There are three types of field feature:

l Point: A single point in the field, such as a tree

l Line: A straight or curved line in a field, such as a fence
l Area: An area of land, such as a pond
Field feature buttons display on the Guidance Mapping panel at the Run screen.

Add field features

To add a feature to the on-screen map of your field:

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel, which contains the
buttons for field features you defined.
2. Begin to drive the field.
3. When you reach the point in your field where you want to add a feature, tap the appropriate
feature button. If the feature is a line or area feature, the feature will begin. To mark the end of
the line or feature, tap the feature button again.
Note  – You can add a point feature while adding a line or area feature. For example, use a line feature
to draw an overhead telephone wire and at the same time use a point feature to add the telephone poles.

To set up feature buttons, see Field feature mapping settings (page 55).

356 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Guidance pattern use

Guidance pattern use

Guidance patterns enable you to either:

l Manually steer on the guidance lines of the pattern using the on-screen lightbar to guide your
accuracy
l Use an automatic steering system to engage on and drive on the guidance lines of the pattern
The swath measurement is based on the implement width you are using.

Creating patterns
The guidance pattern types available in the display to create are:

l Straight swaths created using an AB line or an A+ line (see Straight guidance pattern (page 361))
l Curved pattern (page 363)
l Circular pivots. See Pivot pattern (page 367).
l Headlands. See Headland pattern (page 364).
l Free form patterns. See FreeForm pattern (page 369).

Access paths
With some guidance patterns, you can add an access path that provides a space such as for a road.
See Access paths (page 372).

Existing patterns
After you have created a guidance pattern, you can choose it from the list and:

l Load it for use. See Load a pattern (page 374).

l Shift it. See Shift a swath (page 378).
l Rename it. See Rename a swath (page 376).
l Delete it. See Delete a swath (page 377).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 357

Guidance pattern use 18   Operations

Guidance mapping controls

When you tap at the Run screen, the Mapping Guidance panel displays with controls for
features and guidance. The following controls may display in the Mapping Guidance panel,
depending on the function you are performing.

Button Tap to...

Done Finish an A+ or an AB line.

Feature buttons Create features in the field, such as boundary, rock, fence and so
on. See Field feature use (page 356).
Load the next master line in the Swaths library with each tap.
Note  – The active master line name will be displayed on the Run screen.
Next

Project a straight line in front of the on-screen vehicle.

Pause recording a path.

Pause

Stop pausing and resume recording the path.

Resume

Record the path you are driving.

Record

Stop recording the path you are driving.

Stop Recording
Set A Set the A point of an AB line.
Set B Set the B point of an AB line.
Skip Skip a swath (page 379).

Open the Swaths Management screen.

Swaths
Use A+ Set the point of an A+ line.

358 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

18   Operations Guidance pattern use

Swaths Management screen

From the Mapping Guidance panel, you can access the Swaths Management screen by tapping

. The tabs on this screen are:

Tab On this tab, you can: See...

Swaths Choose the type of pattern you Straight guidance pattern (page
want to create 361)
Curved pattern (page 363)
Headland pattern (page 364)
Pivot pattern (page 367)

Shift, rename or export an Rename a swath (page 376)

existing pattern Shift a swath (page 378)

Import or delete an existing Import AB Lines or boundaries

pattern (page 373)
Delete a swath (page 377)

Add an access path Access paths (page 372)

Line Features A list of line features you have Field feature use (page 356)
created and can load.

FreeForm Set when the path is recorded FreeForm pattern (page 369)
and whether you want the U-
turn at the end of a path to be
recorded.
Delete all line segments created
in your FreeForm pattern.

Features A list of features you have Field feature use (page 356)
created in the field.

The buttons on the bottom of the Swaths Management screen are:

Buttons Tap to... See...

No AB Prevents the AB guidance lines from

being loaded (for WM Form
activities).

New FreeForm Begin a new FreeForm line and go to FreeForm pattern (page
the Run screen. 369)

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 359

Guidance pattern use 18   Operations

Buttons Tap to... See...

Load Load a new pattern. Load a pattern (page 374)

Close Close the Swaths Management

screen and return to the Run screen.

New Straight Begin a new straight line and go to Straight guidance pattern
the Run screen. (page 361)

Import Open the Import Swaths screen to Import AB Lines or

import AB lines or boundaries. boundaries (page 373)

360 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Guidance pattern use

Straight guidance pattern

There are two ways to create a straight guidance

pattern:

l Create an AB Line: Define the start and end points.

l Create an A+ Line: Define a point on the line and the
heading direction.

AB line creation
To create a straight AB line:

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the

Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap Swaths.

3. At the Swath Management screen, select the AB

pattern from the pattern list.
4. Enter an access path, if required. See Access paths
(page 372).
5. Tap New Straight. The Run screen displays.
6. To create the start point of the line, tap Set A.
7. Drive to the end of the line.
Note  – The end (B) point must be at least 50 meters
(160 feet) from the A point.
8. Tap Set B. The new AB line displays.
9. To extend the line, drive further along it and then tap Set B again.
10. Tap Done to indicate you have finished.
11. The system automatically creates the remaining swaths. If you need to shift or skip a swath,
see:

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 361

 Guidance pattern use 18   Operations

l Shift a swath (page 378)

l Skip a swath (page 379)

A+ line creation
To create a straight A+ line:

1. At the Swath Management screen, select the A+ pattern from the pattern list.
2. Enter an access path, if required. See Access paths (page 372).
3. In the A+ Heading entry box, enter the angle that you want the line to be on or select a previous
AB Line to use its heading.
Note  – The default angle is the same as the previous AB Line heading.
4. Tap New Straight. The Run screen displays.
5. Drive to the start of the line and then tap Set A.
6. Tap Use A+. The new A+ line displays.
7. Tap Done.
8. The system automatically creates the remaining swaths. If you need to shift or skip a swath,
see:
l Shift a swath (page 378)
l Skip a swath (page 379)

362 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

18   Operations Guidance pattern use

Curved pattern

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the

Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap Swaths.

3. At the Swath Management screen, select the Curve

pattern from the pattern list.
4. Enter an access path, if required. See Access paths
(page 372).
5. Tap New Curve. The Run screen displays.
6. Drive to the start point of the curve and then tap
Set A.

7. To stop recording your exact path and create a

straight section of line, tap Record .
8. Drive the curve until you reach the end point and
then tap Set B. The new curve pattern displays
showing all the swaths the system automatically
generated.
9. If you need to shift or skip a swath, see:
l Shift a swath (page 378)
l Skip a swath (page 379)

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 363

 Guidance pattern use 18   Operations

Headland pattern
A headland is a straight AB Line or an A+ line pattern that is confined inside a boundary. This
boundary is called the headland.

Note  – If you want to create a headland based on the A+ line pattern, select the straight line pattern and then
set the A+ heading for the internal line. Then complete the following steps.

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap Swaths.

3. At the Swath Management screen, select the Headlands pattern from the pattern list.In the #
Headlands entry box, enter the width of the headland boundary in swaths. For example, if you
enter 2, the headland will be two swaths wide.
4. Tap New Headland . The Run screen displays.

364 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Guidance pattern use

5. Drive to the start point of the headland and then tap . A red line displays behind the
vehicle to show that the headland is being recorded.
6. Define the inner pattern before you complete the headland. To do so, tap Infill. The Mapping
Guidance panel changes to show the inner pattern buttons.
Note  – After infill lines have been created, they cannot be moved.
7. When you reach the location for the A point, tap Set A.
8. To create an internal AB Line, drive to the location for the B point (at least 50 m (164 ft)) and
then tap Set B.
9. To create an internal A+ line, tap Use A+.
10. Tap Back to HL . The Mapping Guidance panel returns to its original appearance.
11. When you complete the headland circuit, the system will draw a straight line from the vehicle
back to the start point. Drive the vehicle to a position on the headland circuit where a straight
line back to the start will not cut off part of the pattern.
12. Tap Close HL . The new headland displays showing all the swaths that the system has
automatically generated.
13. If you need to shift or skip a swath, see:

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 365

Guidance pattern use 18   Operations

l Shift a swath (page 378)

l Skip a swath (page 379)

366 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Guidance pattern use

Pivot pattern

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the

Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap Swaths.

3. At the Swath Management screen, select the Pivot

pattern from the pattern list.
4. Tap New Pivot.
5. The Run screen displays.
6. Drive to a point on the outermost rut of the pivot
and then tap Set A.
7. Follow the pivot rut around to the end and then
tap Set B. The Enter Distance to Pivot Field Edge
screen displays.
8. Enter the distance or the number of rows from the
current path to the outside of the pivot and then
tap OK. The pivot displays, showing the swaths it generated.
9. If you need to shift or skip a swath, see:
l Shift a swath (page 378)
l Skip a swath (page 379)

Outer edge radius adjustment

The pivot has an outer edge radius that is used to calculate the coverage area. After you create a
pivot, you can adjust this outer edge radius.

1. At the Run screen, tap Swaths. The Swath Management screen displays.
2. Select the pivot to be adjusted from the list of available pivots.
Note  – The default is the AB curve.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 367

Guidance pattern use 18   Operations

3. In the Outer Edge Radius entry box, adjust or enter the value that represents the distance from the
pivot center to the outer edge and tap OK. The Swath Management screen displays.
4. To update the pivot, tap Load . The Run screen displays with the new pivot dimensions.

368 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Guidance pattern use

FreeForm pattern
Using the FreeForm pattern, you can create non-symmetrical guidance paths in fields that have
irregular shapes. FreeForm combines these patterns:

l Straight line guidance segments

l Curved guidance segments
With this combination, you can use the FreeForm pattern to create circular spirals or guidance lines
with curved and straight line segments for irregular-shaped fields as well as rugged topographics.
Unlike the other patterns where the next swath is repeated, you must drive and record all paths.

Create a FreeForm pattern

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap Swaths. The Swath Management screen displays.

3. Select the FreeForm tab and complete the settings.

Setting Explanation

Record Swath l Manually: Use the record button to record the path.
l When Logging: Record the path when you are logging coverage.
Note  – If you have an external remote logging switch that controls
coverage logging, the system records FreeForm curves when the
remote logging switch is enabled).

U-Turn Detection l Auto: Do not record the U-turn at the end of a path.
l None: Do record the U-turn at the end of a path.

Delete All Removes all segments of the FreeForm pattern you have recorded.

4. Tap New FreeForm.

5. To begin recording, you can either:

l Tap .

l Tap (if you have set up to record logging coverage while you are engaged. See
Engage settings for Autopilot system (page 169), Engage settings for EZ-Pilot system (page
193) or Engage settings for EZ-Steer (page 201) and Coverage logging (page 381).
6. To stop recording, you can:

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 369

Guidance pattern use 18   Operations

l Tap if you are recording manually.

l Tap to stop logging coverage (if you have set up to record logging while you are
engaged. See Engage settings for Autopilot system (page 169), Engage settings for EZ-Pilot
system (page 193) or Engage settings for EZ-Steer (page 201) and Coverage logging (page
381).
7. To create a straight line within a FreeForm path:
a. Make sure you are actively recording and the vehicle is moving forward.

b.  Tap . The system projects a straight dashed line from the front of the on-screen
vehicle based on the current heading.

You can immediately engage on this line and the path driven is recorded.

c. To stop recording the path, disengage automatic steering by either tapping to

disengage the automatic steering or moving the steering wheel more than 5 degrees.

370 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

18   Operations Guidance pattern use

Pause recording
You can pause recording and then begin recording again. This is useful when you encounter areas or
objects you are driving around but will not need to drive around on the next line.

1. Tap .
l A pause indicator displays on map.
l A straight dashed line projects from the rear of the moving vehicle based on the current
heading.

l The pause button changes to .

l Your position is saved to a file on the display. You can then close the field and power off
the display. When you open the field again, you will be guided back to your former
position.
2. When you have returned to your desired position (for example, after driving around an

obstacle), tap to stop the pause and snap a straight line from the initial pause location and
the current vehicle position.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 371

 Guidance pattern use 18   Operations

Access paths
An access path is a space between your guidance lines. These paths can be useful if there is road (or
other field feature that breaks the consistent flow of swaths) through the middle of your field.
Note  – You can add access paths on a straight or curved pattern, but not headlands or pivots.

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap Swaths.

3. At the Swath Management screen, tap Access Paths. The Access Path Setup screen displays.
Complete the settings on this screen and tap OK.

Setting Explanation

Swaths between access paths This value must be equal to or higher than the Swaths in first
group setting. The next access path will display this number of
swaths beyond the first access path, and will continue to
repeat after this number of swaths.
The access path will display after this number of swaths
(including the master line).

Path width Width of the access path

Swaths in first group Enter the number of swaths

ABs place in the first group Enter a value in the ABs place in the first group (left to right)
(left to right) entry box. This setting enables you to specify where the
master line displays in the first group (from left to right).

Provide Guidance to Select whether guidance will be based on swaths or access

paths.

372 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Guidance pattern use

Switch to the next pattern

You can switch from one existing line pattern to another. To do so, tap .

Each time you tap , the system changes the line pattern to the next pattern available in the
list on the Swaths Management screen (Swaths tab).
The system switches to the next available pattern and displays the name of the active pattern on
the Mapping Guidance panel.
Note  – FreeForm cannot be actively recording the path for the Next button to be active.

Import AB Lines or boundaries

The FmX integrated display can load field boundaries and AB Lines created by:

l A Remote Data Logger (RDL)

l A Geographic Information System (GIS)
Note  – To load GIS boundaries, files must be in WGS-84 latitudes, longitudes, and heights in decimal degrees.
To import an AB Line or a boundary into the display:
1. Insert the USB drive into an office computer.
The three files that define a line or field (.shp, .shx, and .dbf) must have identical names.
Otherwise, they are not recognized. If you put multiple sets of files in the folder, ensure that
you do not have more than one set of files with each name or your files will be overwritten.
2. Copy the following files to the \AgGPS\AB Lines\ folder on the USB drive:
l <field name>.shp
l <field name>.shx
l <field name>.dbf

3. Power on the display, then tap .

4. Either open an existing field or start a new field.

5. Tap Swaths.

6. Tap Import. The Import Swaths screen displays.

7. Tap the field or AB Line to import from the list of available swaths and then tap OK. The field or
AB Line is imported.
If the AB Line file contains more than one AB Line, all AB Lines in the file are imported.
8. Tap the AB Line that you want to use and tap Load . A warning message displays.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 373

 Guidance pattern use 18   Operations

9. Tap OK. The imported field or AB Line is ready to use.

10. For best results, close the field and then reopen it.

Load a pattern

To load a line/pattern you previously created in a field:

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap Swaths. The Swath Management screen displays.

3. To load a pattern, select it from the list on the left of the screen. The system loads the closest
pattern to you.
4. Tap Load . The Run screen displays, with the pattern loaded.

374 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

18   Operations Guidance pattern use

If you try to load a pattern that is over 100 km (63 miles) away, the following message displays:
Your current position is too far from the field to work in it.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 375

 Guidance pattern use 18   Operations

Rename a swath
Note  – To rename swaths, you must have entered the administration password. You cannot rename line
features or FreeForm curves.

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap Swaths. The Swath Management screen displays.

3. From the list on the left, select the swath to rename.
4. Tap Rename. If prompted, enter the password. The Enter new swath name screen displays.
5. Enter the new name for the swath and tap OK. The Swath Management screen displays again.
6. To return to the Run screen, tap Close.

376 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Guidance pattern use

Delete a swath

Note  – To be able to delete swaths, you must have entered the Administration password.

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap Swaths. The Swath Management screen displays.

3. From the list on the left, select the swath to delete.
4. Tap Delete. If prompted, enter the password. The swath is marked as deleted. The next time you
close the current field, the swath does not show in the list.
Note  – You cannot delete a swath that is currently active.
5. To return to the Run screen, tap Close.

Switch to the next pattern

You can switch from one existing line pattern to another. To do so, tap .

Each time you tap , the system changes the line pattern to the next pattern available in the
list on the Swaths Management screen (Swaths tab).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 377

 Guidance pattern use 18   Operations

The system switches to the next available pattern and displays the name of the active pattern on
the Mapping Guidance panel.
Note  – FreeForm cannot be actively recording the path for the Next button to be active.

Shift a swath
Note  – Shifting a swath is a permanent adjustment. To temporarily change the spacing of swaths, skip a
swath instead. See Skip a swath (page 379).
Note  – You cannot shift line features or FreeForm curves.

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap Swaths. The Swath Management screen displays.

3. Select the swath to shift from the list on the left.
4. Tap Shift . The Enter the Shift Distance screen displays.

5. Enter the values.

378 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Guidance pattern use

Setting Tap to...

Left Shift the line to the left of your view.

Right Shift the line to the right of your view.

Value entry boxes Enter the distance you want to shift the line.

Metric Change to metric values.

Feet & Inches Change to feet and inches.

Decimal Feet Change to decimal feet.

Rows

Calculator Open the calculator.

Note  – If you shift a line, it will shift the original version of the line and remove any skip that you have
applied.
6. Tap OK. The Swath Management screen displays. The newly shifted swath displays in the
swath list on the left of the screen.

Skip a swath
Note  – The Skip position of a swath line is temporary and is not saved permanently. To save such an
adjustment, shift the swath instead. See Shift a swath (page 378).
FmX integrated display uses the original swath that you drove to automatically generate the
position of the other swaths. Occasionally, the on-screen swaths do not accurately indicate where
your swaths are. For example, you may need to skip a swath to drive to the other side of a road.
To temporarily correct the spacing of the automatically generated swaths in a field:

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap Skip. The Enter the Skip Distance screen displays.
3. Complete the settings.

Setting Tap to...

Left Shift the line to the left of your view.

Right Shift the line to the right of your view.

Value entry boxes Enter the distance you want to skip to the next swath.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 379

Guidance pattern use 18   Operations

Setting Tap to...

Metric Change to metric values.

Feet & Inches Change to feet and inches.

Decimal Feet Change to decimal feet.

Rows

Calculator Open the calculator.

The swath line moves the required amount.

4. Tap OK. The Swath Management screen displays. The newly shifted swath displays in the
swath list on the left of the screen.
Note  – The skip occurs based on the direction of the vehicle, not on the A-to-B orientation of the line. For
example, if you select Left, the line shifts to the left of your view.

380 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Coverage logging

Coverage logging
When you are applying material, the coverage button displays on the Run screen. The coverage
button controls whether or not you are logging the coverage you are applying.

Indicator / Button Explanation

Indicates coverage logging is off. Tap to start logging.

Logging Off
Indicates coverage logging is on. Tap to stop logging.
Logging On

When the system logs coverage, it records the area that you have covered when you carry out an
operation (such as applying fertilizer to a field).
If you have chosen to log coverage, the covered area displays on the Run screen as a pale yellow
area that shows:

l Coverage the first time

l Any skips in coverage
l Areas you covered twice or three times
Coverage logs record more than the applied material. See View coverage layers (page 382) and Log
coverage for varieties (page 382).
You can begin logging coverage:

l Manually by tapping

l Automatically if you are using automatic steering and tapping .See Engage settings for
Autopilot system (page 169), Engage settings for EZ-Pilot system (page 193), or Engage settings
for EZ-Steer (page 201).
If you are applying a variety of materials, you can set up coverage to show the varieties. See Log
coverage for varieties (page 382).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 381

 Coverage logging 18   Operations

View coverage layers

1. To see different aspects (or layers) of coverage on the screen, tap on the lower left side of
the screen.
2. Select the layer you want to view.

Layer Explanation

Overlap General coverage and overlap

Height Altitude of GPS receiver

GPS Quality Quality of GPS signal

Cut/Fill Cut or fill (for water management operations)

Variety Different varieties being applied

Applied Rate Rate at which material is being applied

Speed Speed of the vehicle

Average Cross Track Error (XTE) Position of the vehicle in relation to the guidance line

Log coverage for varieties

By default, coverage is displayed on the screen as a pale yellow. However, if you are applying
varieties, you can set up the system to make different varieties visible on the screen.
By logging varieties, you can:

l Change product in a field, so that you can later identify which parts of the field are covered in
which product.
l Plant or apply two or more different products side by side and record the locations in your
field. For example, track the planting of:
l Corn seed in the left side hoppers
l Clover seed in the right side hoppers

382 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Coverage logging

Varieties are assigned to rows on your implement. Specify the number of rows on your implement
when you configure it. For more information, see Edit implement settings (page 155).

Set up variety logging

To log varieties:

1. At the Home screen, tap . The Field Selection screen displays.

2. Tap Hybrid Setup . The Hybrid Setup screen displays. Use this screen to complete the settings for
hybrids.

Setting or Button Explanation

Left-hand list List of varieties.

Add Add a new variety and select a name for it.
Remove Select a variety name in the left-hand list and tap Remove to
delete it.
Edit Select a variety name in the list and tap Edit to change the
settings. The Variety Attributes screen displays.
Enter a name for the variety, choose the color to display for the
variety and optionally complete additional record keeping
information.
Assign Select the variety from the left-hand list and tap Assign . For each
variety, select the row numbers on your implement that will be
applying the variety.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 383

 Coverage logging 18   Operations

Setting or Button Explanation

Clear Tap to clear all current entries.

3. When you have finished with the settings, tap OK.

When you enable coverage logging and set the Mapping Guidance panel list to Variety, this variety
color displays in the guidance window.

Tip  – For quick access to the Hybrid Setup screen from the Run screen, set the Mapping Guidance panel list to
Variety and then tap Attributes.

If you select a different implement or change the settings of the current implement, the variety
assignments are removed.

384 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Field-IQ operation

Field-IQ operation
WARNING – When the implement is down and the master switch is in the On position, the machine is fully
operational. Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety. Failure to do so could result in injury or death.

1. At the Home screen, tap .

2. At the Current Configurations screen, configure the display/vehicle/ implement settings and
then tap OK.
3. At the Field Selection screen, select the required client/farm/field/event settings and then tap
OK.

For setup information, see Field-IQ system setup (page 210).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 385

 Field-IQ operation 18   Operations

Field-IQ panel
To open the Field-IQ panel, tap . The panel displays. Within the panel, you can navigate to many
views:

l Material detail view (page 386)

l Row detail view (page 388)
l Section control view (page 389)

Material detail view

The main view shows a list of materials. Up to six materials are listed. The current target and actual
rates are shown for each material.

Material details, page 1

Tap the material to see the first details view of the material.

386 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Field-IQ operation

Page 1 Buttons Tap to...

Material On Turn the material on or off.
Sections Auto Turn automatic section control on or off.
Target Select if Target 1 or Target 2 is shown, or to select Manual to turn
the Target rate off.
Tap to decrease the Target rate by 1.
Tap to increase the Target rate by 1.

To see the second detailed view of the material.

Rows To go to the Row detail view (page 388).

Material details, page 2

Depending on the material, the following buttons display on the second page of the material details
view.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 387

 Field-IQ operation 18   Operations

Page 2 Buttons Tap to...

Bin Go to the Virtual Bin / Tank Setup screen where you can adjust the
bin settings.
Seed Disc Fill the seed disk.
Arm Pump Enable Field-IQ to control the pump.
Gate Setup Go to the Gate Setup screen.
Density Go to the Density screen where you can enter the density of the
current product.

Return to the previous detailed view.

Rows To go to the Row detail view (page 388).

Row detail view

To see detailed information on the rows, tap Rows.

The color of the row numbers indicate how far off target the rows are applying.

l Green: Rows are applying on target.

l Red: Rows are applying off target.
l Black: Rows have been manually turned off.
l White: Rows have been turned off automatically by the system.

To view more rows, tap the arrow buttons .

To return to the previous view, tap .

388 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

18   Operations Field-IQ operation

Section control view

To open the section control view on the Run screen, tap in the lower left corner of the screen.

The section control view shows the engage status of each row on the implement:

l Green: Engaged
l Gray: Section closed due to overlap
l Red: Not engaged or section manually turned off

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 389

 Field-IQ operation 18   Operations

Field-IQ master switch box functions

Note  – All systems must have a Field-IQ master switch box.

Item Setting Explanation

1 Increment / decrement Increases or decreases the applied amount by a set

switch amount (the amount is set in the Setup screen, Rate
tab).

2 Rate switch Preset Rate 1, preset Rate 2, or Manual rate.

3 LED indicator l Red: Unit is powered but not communicating

with the FmX integrated display.
l Green: Unit is powered and communicating with
the FmX integrated display.
l Yellow: Unit is initializing communications with
the FmX integrated display.

4 Automatic / Manual You can switch from Automatic to Manual mode

section switch while traveling.
l Automatic mode: The FmX integrated display
automatically opens and closes sections when
entering areas of overlap, non-apply zones, or
crossing boundaries.
l Manual mode: The sections are controlled by
the user using the Field-IQ system.

5 Master switch l 5a: Jump start position. The same functions as

in Master On are active, plus the system is
overridden to use a preset control speed (the
speed is set in the Setup screen, Override tab).
l 5b: On position. The sections and rate are ready
to be commanded by the FmX integrated
display.
l 5c: Off position. Sections are closed and rate is
set to zero.

390 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

18   Operations Field-IQ operation

Item Setting Explanation

When you use Lock in Last Position, the valve is
locked and the rate is controlled by an auxiliary
master valve or section.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 391

 Field-IQ operation 18   Operations

Field-IQ 12-section switch box (optional)

Only one section switch box can be used on each system.
Each section switch is automatically assigned to the
corresponding section. The sections are read from left to
right. For example, switch 1 assigns to the section furthest on the left when standing behind the
implement. For more information, see the Hardware tab in Setup screen of Field-IQ.
The section switches have different functions, depending upon the status of the master
Automatic/Manual section control switch on the master switch box.

Automatic section control

When the Automatic/Manual section control switch is in the Automatic position, if the section switch
is in the:

l On/up position: The section(s) assigned to it are commanded automatically by the FmX
integrated display.
l Off/down position: The section(s) assigned to it are commanded to be off.

Manual section control

When the Automatic/Manual section control switch is in the Manual position, if the section switch
is in the:

l On/up position: The section(s) assigned to it are commanded to be on. This overrides the
display and coverage logging is ignored.
l Off/down position: The section(s) assigned to it are commanded to be off. This overrides the
display and coverage logging is ignored.

LED status indicators
The LED indicators on the section switch box are:

l Green: Unit is powered and is communicating with the display.

l Yellow: Unit is initializing communications with the display.
l Red: Unit is powered but not communicating with the display.

Material assignment
To change materials quickly and easily:

1. At the Material Assignment screen, tap the material to change. A list of available materials
displays.

392 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Field-IQ operation

2. Select the material you want from the list and tap OK.

Material assignment
Use the Material Assignment option to quickly and easily change materials. The location name you set
up displays (for example, Hoppers) and the button shows the current material name.
Tap the button to see a list of the same type of materials. To change the material type, select the
required material from the list, and then tap OK.

Enable sections
To enable sections:

1. At the Home screen, tap .

2. At the Configuration screen, tap Field-IQ and then tap Diagnostics.

3. At the Field-IQ Diagnostics screen on the Operations tab, tap the section you want to enable.

Enter values manually

To enter values manually:

1. At the Home screen, tap .

2. At the Configuration screen, tap Field-IQ and then tap Diagnostics.

3. At the Field-IQ Diagnostics screen on the Operations tab, you can enter values manually for:

Setting Explanation

Tank Level Enter a value or tap Refill Tank.

Target Rate Use the buttons to decrease or increase the required

rate for the rate switch.

Speed Use the buttons to decrease or increase speed.

Aggressiveness Check the value for Applied Rate. Increase or decrease

aggressiveness to achieve the rate you want.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 393

 Field-IQ operation 18   Operations

Test optional switch box

To test the optional switch box:

1. At the Home screen, tap .

2. At the Configuration screen, tap Field-IQ and then tap Diagnostics.

3. At the Field-IQ Diagnostics screen on the Operations tab:
a. Flip each switch in the section switch box.
b. The section it is assigned to displays as gray.

Prescriptions
To send target rates to the variable controller, you can define variable rate controller setup data and
load prescription files that define the rates to be applied in different areas of the field. This
information is used to send target rates to the variable rate controller. Applied rates are received
from the controller, and both target and applied rates display on the screen. In addition, you can
log data relating to the variable rate application to the hard drive.
After you create the prescription, store either the three prescription files in ESRI shape-file format or
the single .gdx file in the \AgGPS\Prescriptions\ folder. Then, when you are within the proximity
criteria, the prescription is available to load.
If you use complex contoured prescriptions, loading the prescriptions can take some time. The
display shows progress bars while it loads and converts prescriptions.
You can configure the status sliders on the main navigation screen (the Run screen) to show the
target rate specified in the prescription file, and the applied rates returned from the controller for
the active channel.
When a field is open, a prescription is loaded, and a controller is connected, the target rates (read
from the prescription) and applied rates (received from the controller) can be shown in the status
text items. For more information, see Status items (page 70).
The FmX integrated display can load prescription files created by a Geographic Information System
(GIS). The method you use to create the prescription depends on which GIS package you use.
When you map a new field or select an existing field, you can also select any shapefile (.shp) or
AgInfo GDX (.gdx) prescription file created in AgInfo version 3.5.44.0 or later, that is within these
limits:

For... Prescriptions must...

Boundary Overlap the field boundary

AB Line Overlap the AB Line

Proximity Be within 1 km of the field

If you load a shapefile prescription, select the rate column.

394 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Field-IQ operation

CAUTION – When you select a shapefile prescription, the applied rate will be incorrect if you choose the wrong
column when using a variable rate controller.

Load prescription file

A prescription works only when the Field-IQ rate selection switch is in the Rate 1 position.

Rate Switch Position Increment / Decrement Switch Status

Rate 1 Disabled

Rate 2 Enabled

To load a prescription file:

1. Map a new field or select an existing field. The FmX integrated display lists the prescription files
within the specified limits. If there are many prescriptions on the hard drive, this can take
several seconds, and a progress bar displays.
If any prescription files are within the specified limits, the Select Prescription screen displays.
2. From the Available Prescriptions list, select a prescription file.
Note  – If an AgInfo GDX prescription has an incorrect format, it will not display in the Available
Prescriptions list.
l If you select a shapefile prescription, select the correct prescription rate column.
Note  – When you select a shapefile prescription, if you choose the wrong column when using a
variable rate controller, the applied rate will be incorrect.
l If you select an AgInfo GDX prescription, the Rate Column box does not appear.
3. From the Prescription Scale Factor, select the scale factor for the units used in the prescription file.
4. Set the lead time.
5. From the When off prescription use list, select the target rate for when you are outside the area that
is covered by the prescription file. See Prescriptions (page 394).
6. Tap OK to load the prescription file.

Lead time
Lead-time is the average time required by the controller before it can react to a requested rate
change. Define the lead time in the Select Prescription screen. For example, a value of 5.0 means
that, on average, it takes the controller around five seconds to change from one rate to a new rate.
The direction and speed of the vehicle are combined with the lead time to project a future position
of the vehicle. The target rate at this projected position is sent to the variable rate controller, giving
the controller time to reach the required rate at approximately the same time that the vehicle
arrives at the projected position.
You must choose an appropriate lead time. This depends on the:

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 395

 Field-IQ operation 18   Operations

l Controller type and configuration

l Type of materials being applied
l Nature and specifications of the delivery equipment

Control outside the prescription area

When the vehicle moves outside the area covered by the prescription file, no target rate is available.
There are three options for controlling the output rate:

l Continue to use the last rate being output when the vehicle moves off the prescription
l Use a default rate
l Use a zero rate
Specify the required option in the Select Prescription screen.
You can now select prescriptions even when the vehicle is a great distance away from the field,
which enables you to load a prescription before driving to the field.

396 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

18   Operations Manual guidance operation

Manual guidance operation

When you use the Manual Guidance option, you must steer the vehicle manually while you watch
the virtual lightbar for guidance.

You can tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel and add field features or create guidance
lines. See Field feature use (page 356) and Guidance pattern use (page 357).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 397

 Autopilot system operation 18   Operations

Autopilot system operation

To engage the Autopilot system, you must have:

l Have a field open in the Run screen

l Have an existing pattern you are using
l The vehicle within the distance of the guidance line set in the Engage tab. See Engage settings
for Autopilot system (page 169).
When you are using Autopilot, you use the Engage button to automatically steer on the guidance
line. The Engage button can indicate status and, in some cases, also control the Autopilot system.

Indicator / Button Explanation Tap to...

The vehicle is close enough to Engage on the guidance line.

the guidance line to engage on
it.
Ready to Engage (yellow)

The vehicle is engaged on the Stop engaging on the guidance

guidance line. line.

Engaged (green)

The vehicle is not ready to N/A. You cannot tap this button.
engage on the line because the It is an indicator only.
guidance line is too far from the
Not Ready to Engage (red) vehicle.

Automatic steering is not N/A. You cannot tap this button.

allowed due to how it has been It is an indicator only.
set up.
Auto steering not allowed
(red)

You can also Adjust Autopilot guidance (page 399) settings during operations in the field.

398 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Autopilot system operation

Adjust Autopilot guidance

At the Run screen, tap . The Autopilot panel displays.

Setting Explanation

Nudge The guidance line can move off target due to either:
l GPS position drift after pausing or turning off the system
l GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field
Use the < and > buttons to move the line in a perpendicular direction (left
or right).
To set the increment for this setting, see Steering settings for Autopilot
system (page 169).

Trim Trim replaces Nudge when you are using RTK corrections.

The vehicle can steer offline as a result of uneven drag on the vehicle
from an unbalanced implement or from soil conditions.
Use the < and > buttons to move the vehicle in a perpendicular direction
(left or right) of the line you are currently engaged on.
To set the increment for this setting, see Steering settings for Autopilot
system (page 169).

Online Aggr Aggressiveness is the measure of how strongly the system makes
steering changes.
Use the - and + buttons to adjust how aggressively the vehicle moves to
the guidance line. A setting that is:
l Higher brings the vehicle back online faster, but may cause tight
oscillations about the line
l Lower: Brings the vehicle back online more slowly, but can avoid
overshoot
Note  – The default aggressiveness setting is 100%.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 399

Autopilot system operation 18   Operations

Disengage Autopilot system

The Autopilot t system can be disengaged automatically and manually.

Automatic disengagement
The Autopilot system disengages automatically when:

l The vehicle is outside the allowed distance from the guidance line set up in the Engage tab. See
Engage settings for Autopilot system (page 169).
l The system is paused.
l GPS positions are lost.

Manual disengagement
To manually disengage the system, you can:

l Tap on the screen.

l Turn the steering wheel to override the electric motor.
When you turn the steering wheel manually, the Autopilot system disengages. It is
recommended that you check this setting before you begin using the system in a new
installation. To do so:
a. Engage on a line.
b. Turn the wheel until Autopilot disengages.
To make adjustments to the amount of force required to disengage the system using the
steering wheel, see Automated Deadzone calibration (page 176).

400 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations EZ-Pilot system operation

EZ-Pilot system operation

WARNING – Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause
significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid
possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take
manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

To engage the EZ-Pilot system, you must have:

l Have an open field in the Run screen

l Have an existing pattern you are using
l The vehicle within the engage distance set in the Engage tab. See Engage settings for EZ-Pilot
system (page 193).
The Engage button on the screen can indicate status and, in some cases, also control the EZ-Pilot
system.
When you are using EZ-Pilot, to automatically steer on the guidance line you can:

l Tap (yellow) on the screen

l Press the Engage button on the EZ-Remote joystick
l Use an external foot or rocker switch

Indicator / Button Explanation Tap to...

The vehicle is close enough to Engage on the guidance line.

the guidance line to engage on
it.
Ready to Engage (yellow)

The vehicle is engaged on the Stop engaging on the guidance

guidance line. line.

Engaged (green)

The vehicle is not ready to N/A. You cannot tap this button.
engage on the line because the It is an indicator only.
guidance line is too far from the
Not Ready to Engage (red) vehicle.

Automatic steering is not N/A. You cannot tap this button.

allowed due to how it has been It is an indicator only.
set up.
Auto steering not allowed
(red)

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 401

 EZ-Pilot system operation 18   Operations

You can also Adjust EZ-Pilot guidance (page 403) settings during operations in the field.

Disengage EZ-Pilot system

The EZ-Pilot system can be disengaged automatically and manually.

Automatic disengagement
The EZ-Pilot system disengages automatically when:

l The vehicle is outside the engage distance set up in the Engage tab. See Engage settings for EZ-
Pilot system (page 193).
l The system is paused.
l GPS positions are lost.
l The Minimum Fix Quality setting is set to a high accuracy correction method and the system receives
low accuracy positions (such as no corrections).

Manual disengagement
To manually disengage the system, you can:

l Tap (green) on the screen.

l Press the Engage button on the optional remote control.
l Turn the steering wheel to override the electric motor.
When you turn the steering wheel manually, the EZ-Pilot system disengages. It is
recommended that you check this setting before you begin using the system in a new
installation. To do so:
a. Engage on a line.
b. Turn the wheel until EZ-Pilot disengages.
To make adjustments to the amount of force required to disengage the system using the
steering wheel, see Steering performance calibration (page 196).

402 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations EZ-Pilot system operation

Adjust EZ-Pilot guidance

WARNING – Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause
significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid
possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take
manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

At the Run screen, tap . The EZ-Pilot panel displays.

Setting Explanation

Nudge The guidance line can move off target due to either:
l GPS position drift after pausing or turning off the system
l GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field
Use the < and > buttons to move the line in a perpendicular direction (left
or right).
To set the increment for this setting, see Steering settings for EZ-Pilot
system (page 192).

Trim Trim replaces Nudge when you are using RTK corrections.

The vehicle can steer offline as a result of uneven drag on the vehicle
from an unbalanced implement or from soil conditions.
Use the < and > buttons to move the vehicle in a perpendicular direction
(left or right) of the line you are currently engaged on.
To set the increment for this setting, see Steering settings for
TrueTracker system (page 280).

Online Aggr Aggressiveness is the measure of how strongly the system makes
steering changes.
Use the - and + buttons to adjust how aggressively the vehicle moves to
the guidance line.
A setting that is:
l Higher brings the vehicle back online faster, but may cause tight
oscillations about the line
l Lower: Brings the vehicle back online more slowly, but can avoid
overshoot
Note  – The default aggressiveness setting is 100%.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 403

 EZ-Steer system operation 18   Operations

EZ-Steer system operation

WARNING – Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause
significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid
possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take
manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

To engage the EZ-Steer system, you must have:

l Have a field open in the Run screen

l Have an existing pattern you are using
l The vehicle within the engage distance set in the Engage Options tab. See Engage settings for EZ-
Steer (page 201).
The Engage button on the screen can indicate status and, in some cases, also control the EZ-Steer
system.
When you are using EZ-Steer, to automatically steer on the guidance line you can:

l Tap (yellow) on the screen.

l Press the optional remote engage foot pedal.

Indicator / Button Explanation Tap to...

The vehicle is close enough to Engage on the guidance line.

the guidance line to engage on
it.
Ready to Engage (yellow)

The vehicle is engaged on the Stop engaging on the guidance

guidance line. line.

Engaged (green)

The vehicle is not ready to N/A. You cannot tap this button.
engage on the line because the It is an indicator only.
guidance line is too far from the
Not Ready to Engage (red) vehicle.

Automatic steering is not N/A. You cannot tap this button.

allowed due to how it has been It is an indicator only.
set up.
Auto steering not allowed
(red)

You can also Adjust EZ-Steer guidance (page 406) settings during operations in the field.

404 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

18   Operations EZ-Steer system operation

Disengage EZ-Steer system

The EZ-Steer system can be disengaged automatically and manually.

Automatic disengagement
The EZ-Steer system disengages automatically when:

l The vehicle is outside the engage distance set up in the Engage tab. See Engage settings for EZ-
Steer (page 201).
l The system is paused.
l GPS positions are lost.
l The Minimum Fix Quality setting is set to a high accuracy correction method and the system receives
low accuracy positions (such as no corrections).

Manual disengagement
To manually disengage the system, you can:

l Tap (green) on the screen.

l Press the Engage button on the optional remote control.
l Turn the steering wheel to override the electric motor.
When you turn the steering wheel manually, the EZ-Steer system disengages. It is
recommended that you check this setting before you begin using the system in a new
installation. To do so:
a. Engage on a line.
b. Turn the wheel until EZ-Pilot disengages.
To make adjustments to the amount of force required to disengage the system using the
steering wheel, see Steering performance calibration (page 196).
When the system is not in use, hinge the motor away from the steering wheel and then secure it
with the lock pin.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 405

 EZ-Steer system operation 18   Operations

Adjust EZ-Steer guidance

WARNING – Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause
significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid
possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take
manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

At the Run screen, tap . The EZ-Steer panel displays.

Setting Explanation

Nudge The guidance line can move off target due to either:
l GPS position drift after pausing or turning off the system
l GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field
Use the < and > buttons to move the line in a perpendicular direction (left
or right).
To set the increment for this setting, see Steering settings for EZ-Pilot
system (page 192).

Trim Trim replaces Nudge when you are using RTK corrections.

The vehicle can steer offline as a result of uneven drag on the vehicle
from an unbalanced implement or from soil conditions.
Use the < and > buttons to move the vehicle in a perpendicular direction
(left or right) of the line you are currently engaged on.
To set the increment for this setting, see Steering settings for EZ-Pilot
system (page 192).

Online Aggr Aggressiveness is the measure of how strongly the system makes
steering changes.
Use the - and + buttons to adjust how aggressively the vehicle moves to
the guidance line.
A setting that is:
l Higher brings the vehicle back online faster, but may cause tight
oscillations about the line
l Lower: Brings the vehicle back online more slowly, but can avoid
overshoot
Note  – The default aggressiveness setting is 100%.

406 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations GreenSeeker operation

GreenSeeker operation
The GreenSeeker system requires either of these to be activated for use:

l Field-IQ system
l Serial Rate Control system
Prior to using the GreenSeeker system:

1. Collect or input reference strip data.

2. Calibrate the system with either:
l The boom mounted sensors on the RT200
l The GreenSeeker handheld sensor
3. If you are using the RT200 interface module for variable rate control, set up the application
equipment and rate controller to match the expected delivery rate commands.

Best practice
To ensure best performance from the GreenSeeker variable application system:

l Rinse the boom at the end of every day. Do this to keep the system clean and remove to any
corrosive materials. Doing so will greatly extend the life of your machine.
l Do not use high pressure spray on the sensors when rinsing the machine. Even though all of
the connectors and modules are fully sealed, there is the potential for leakage caused by the
pressurized stream.
l Every time the spray tank is filled, take a soft cloth and wipe the lenses of the sensors. Try to
check sensors at least once a day during full time operation.
l Be more aware of cleaning the sensors directly behind the machine.
l If you do not have ground protection devices on the boom (such as gauge wheels or skids) take
extra care to not run the boom into the ground. Also, be aware of sensor vulnerability to
stationary structures in the field.
l Sensors are usually mounted on the front of the boom and do not have rigid protection.
l Sensors should be re-calibrated after approximately 1000 hours of use due to possible changes
in light output. This is generally done at the factory, or authorized service center.
l Sensors have an optimum operating range of 32" - 48" above the crop canopy. 38" is the
optimum height, and must be measured from the top of the crop to the rectangular LED
window of the sensor.
l Make sure all wiring harness components remain fastened to the boom as to not obstruct the
view of the sensors and are free of any pinch points from boom folding and movement.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 407

 GreenSeeker operation 18   Operations

Variable rate setup

To set up variable rate application on the display:
1. Power up the RT200 interface module and the rate controller (if required).
When the RT200 interface module is first powered on:
a. The module's green power LED will blink three times accompanied by three beeps.
b. The status LED will blink in time with each transmission of sensor data over the CAN bus.
Expect to see a brief green flash, followed by a red flash at the I/M message rate (typically
at 0.5sec). This indicates that data from the left (green flash) and right (red flash) CAN ports
is being transmitted.
2. Activate GreenSeeker for use. See Activate features/plugins for use (page 47).

3. At the Home screen, tap .

4. At the Configuration Selection screen, tap OK.
5. At the Field Selection screen, load the field to be sprayed.

Create a custom table

Historical knowledge about the crop enables growers or crop consultants to determine different
crop input requirements based upon biomass/size of the crop/plant. An example of this type of use
would be variable rate application of:

l Defoliant in cotton
l Desiccant in potatoes
For these cases, the field is scouted (field calibrated) to determine areas of the field that require
different rates of defoliant.
To obtain the NDVI values in representative areas of the field, you can use either:

l The RT200 system

l A GreenSeeker handheld
Using this data, you can create a table with NDVI values corresponding to application rates.
To create a custom table:

1. At the GreenSeeker Calibration screen, tap the Algorithm tab.

2. From the Formula list, select either:
Custom Table: Manually enter NDVI calibration values (go to step 4)

408 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations GreenSeeker operation

Auto Calibration: The system

automatically enters NDVI calibration values from the Calibration
step by transferring the Maximum, Average, and Minimum NDVI values into rows two, three,
and four respectively.
3. Tap the Number Of Rows entry box, enter a value and tap OK.
The number of available NDVI and Rate values are dictated by the value entered in the Number Of
Rows entry box.

Typically the number of rows for the custom table are two more than the number of filed
calibration areas sampled. This allows for starting at zero and ending at .99 NDVI.
4. Tap an NDVI entry box to enter a custom value.
5. Tap OK.
6. Tap a corresponding Rate entry box to enter a custom value.
7. Tap OK.
8. Select the Output tab.
9. From the Material Type list, select either Granular or Liquid.
10. Tap OK.

Calibrate GreenSeeker
In the GreenSeeker panel on the Run screen, the controls displayed depend on what you previously
selected (for example, a crop algorithm or a custom table).
When you first open a new job or event and a crop algorithm has been previously used or selected,
the Calibration Required message displays.
If you want to use a custom table, but see the Calibration Required message, tap Edit . See Create a
custom table (page 408).
Note  – If a custom table has been previously selected, the Calibration Required message will not display.

Calibration steps

1. At the Run screen, tap . The GreenSeeker panel opens.

2. Tap Calibrate.
3. The GreenSeeker panel displays:
l The buttons Ref , Non-Ref and Done
l NDVI bar graph showing the real-time combined average NDVI from the RT200 module
4. Position the vehicle at the reference locations.
5. To record NDVI data from:

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 409

GreenSeeker operation 18   Operations

l The reference strip: Tap Ref , drive the reference strip and then tap Ref again to end
recording.
l The non-reference strip: Tap Non-Ref , drive the nonreference strip and then tap Non-Ref
again to end recording.
Note  – As the NDVI is collected, the data displays. Keep the vehicle moving as you collect the data. If you
stop in one location, this will affect the average values. The Ref and Non-Ref buttons change to a lighter
color when selected or active.
6. Tap Done. At the GreenSeeker Calibration screen on the Calibration panel, values that were
collected are displayed.

Setting Explanation

Maximum Reference: You can override the existing data and enter new
data.

Average Non-Reference or Reference: You can override the existing

data and enter new data.

Minimum Reference: You can override the existing data and enter new
data.

Calibrate Non-Ref or Reference: Tap to collect fresh data. You will not

see the new values until you deselect the button you have
tapped.

Note  – The reference values for Maximum, Average, and Minimum are also available for the Auto
Calibration function on the Algorithm tab.
7. When you are satisfied with the data on the Calibration tab, select the Algorithm tab.
For Formula, select either:
l An existing formula
l Custom Table to create a new algorithm (see Create a custom table (page 408))
Note  – The formula selected for your last job will still be current, so you are often just verifying that the
correct formula is being used.
The values to be entered will change based upon the formula selected. Some values (such as
Nitrogen Use Efficiency) have default values that are formula specific. You can change any value by
tapping the entry box.
Note  – You may need to reference the specific algorithms instruction for more detailed explanation of
the CumGDD F, or similar fields. For example the CumGDD F for the corn v1.3 GrtPlns GDD OKState is
Cumulative Growing Degree Days, Base 50F. For specific algorithm instructions, visit
www.GreenSeeker.com.
8. Tap OK.
9. Go to the Chart tab and enter the settings.

410 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations GreenSeeker operation

Setting Explanation

Limit Enabled:
Disabled:

Max Limit If necessary, enter a value based on rate controller or

application equipment limitations.

Min Limit If necessary, enter a value based on rate controller or

application equipment limitations.

Note  – Maximum and minimum settings will limit the rate commands given to the rate controller.
10. Review the application chart for each job to determine the appropriate nozzle selections
and/or application equipment settings.
11. Tap OK.
12. Tap the Output tab.
13. From the Material Type list, select either Granular or Liquid.
14. Tap OK.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 411

 ISOBUS operation 18   Operations

ISOBUS operation
With ISOBUS, you can use the FmX integrated display to control an ISO-certified implement without
an additional display. An ISO-certified implement has small computers called electronic control units
(ECUs) which send signals to the FmX integrated display. An ISO-certified tractor has a tractor ECU
(TECU) installed on it. ECUs on implements enable you to control the operation:

l With the FmX integrated display, using Task Controller (an optional feature). See Task
Controller operation (page 412).
l With Virtual Terminal, an on-screen window opens so you can directly access the functions
provided by the ECUs. See Virtual Terminal operation (page 413).

Task Controller operation

After you have activated Task Controller, displays on the Run screen.
1. If you are using one of the following models, you must tap the Start or Auto button in the Virtual
Terminal screen before starting section and rate control using Task Controller.
a. Tap to open the Virtual Terminal.
b. Tap the appropriate button (Start or Auto ).

Mode Tap...

Kuhn Moduliner Seed Drill Auto

Kverneland Exacta TL GEOspread Start

Rauch/Kuhn AXIS-H-EMC Start

Rauch/Kuhn AXIS-W Start

Vicon RO-EDW GEOspread Start

2. At the Run screen, tap on the right-hand side to display the Task Controller panel.

3. Tap to begin logging coverage.

4. Tap on the left-hand side to view the current section control.

5. To switch between the two target rates, tap the appropriate target rate button on the
Task Controller panel.
6. To turn section control on and off, tap the Section Control On / Off button.

412 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations ISOBUS operation

l When section control is off, use the Virtual Terminal for section control.
l When section control is on, sections will automatically turn off to limit multiple pass
coverage.

Virtual Terminal operation

After you have activated Virtual Terminal, the button displays on the Run screen.
To access the Virtual Terminal screen:

l From the Diagnostics screen (under Configuration)

l By tapping on the Run screen. (This button displays on the Run screen after you have
activated Virtual Terminal.)
Icon(s) on the left of the screen show the available ECUs. The center area and the buttons on the
right of the screen change depending on information provided by the ECU.
Note  – Virtual Terminal screens and functions vary by platform. For more information, refer to the
equipment manufacturer's operating instructions.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 413

Remote Output operation 18   Operations

Remote Output operation

The FmX integrated display automatically outputs pulses based on the settings in Remote Output
settings (page 131) as well as Line feature settings (page 147). 

414 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

18   Operations Remote Output operation

Distance-based pulse operation

With this option, pulses are output based on a specific distance you set up in Remote Output
settings (page 131). You can use distance-based pulses with straight AB or A+ lines.

Within range limits

When you use remote output with distance-based pulses and you are within the limits of the range
set in the Trigger Limits setting, your screen will show:

l The first dot for the first pulse output at the A point for the current swath
l Dots showing additional previous pulses
l A red X indicating where the system will output the next pulse

The Remote Output panel shows:

Remote Output Panel Explanation

Next Output ID A combination of the next pulse number and the current swath ID.
Current Pass Output The number of pulses that have been output on the current swath.

Total Outputs The number of pulses that have been output in the field currently.

Next Output Distance The distance between the implement and the next point for the
system to output a pulse.

Trigger Limits The maximum number of pulses allowed per swath past the A
point. This is set in Remote Output settings (page 131). You can also

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 415

 Remote Output operation 18   Operations

Remote Output Panel Explanation

change this during operation. See Change trigger limits during

operation (page 417).

Manual Trigger Tap this button to manually output a pulse.

Outside range limits

When the vehicle and implement are outside the range limits:

l There is no red X on the screen.

l On the Remote Output panel, the Next Output ID shows n/a for both the next pulse number
and the current swath ID.

Crossing a line feature operation

Using this option, a pulse is output at any point where the line you are engaged on intersects
another line feature that has the remote output option enabled. See Line feature settings (page
147).
You can use this remote output option with AB/A+ lines as well as pivots and curves.
Your screen will show:

l Dots showing additional previous pulses

l A red X indicating where the system will output the next pulse

416 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

18   Operations Remote Output operation

Note  – The location of the next output may change as accuracy of the calculated position improves.
l A warning when you near the intersecting line, if you have set up warnings (see Remote Output
settings (page 131))

The Remote Output panel shows:

Remote Output Panel Explanation

Next Output ID A combination of the next pulse number and the current swath ID).
(The pulse number increments with each pulse, and is not related to
the swath or vehicle position.)
Current Pass Output The number of pulses that have been output on the current swath.

Total Outputs The number of pulses that have been output in the field currently.

Next Output Distance The distance between the implement and the next point for the
system to output a pulse.

Manual Trigger Tap this button to manually output a pulse.

Change trigger limits during operation

To change the maximum number of pulses per swath during operation, tap the button to the left of
the label Trigger Limits and enter the new number.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 417

 Remote Output operation 18   Operations

Manually output a pulse

To manually output a pulse, tap .

To set the color of the dot that indicates a manual pulse, see Remote Output settings (page 131).

418 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

18   Operations Row Guidance operation

Row Guidance operation

WARNING – Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause
significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid
possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take
manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

With Row Guidance, the information from existing sensors installed on the combine heads are used
to automatically adjust the combine response to changes in the row position.
Row Guidance is used with the Autopilot system to help center the combine on the crop rows when
they are are not aligned with the guidance line used to plant the crop (caused by planter drift or
environmental damage).
Row Guidance enables you to:

l Increase corn yield through reduced ear loss

l Reduce operator fatigue in difficult conditions (such as down corn, curved rows, long passes
and other poor visibility conditions)
l Operate effectively in fields that were planted using other steering systems or in areas where
the planter drifted
You can operate Row Guidance with:

l Straight lines: You can use either A-B or A+ lines.

l FreeForm patterns: When recording and in corn rows, the Row Guidance sensors drive the
firsts pass. After that, the guidance system uses the previously recorded pass but augments it
with sensor input.
l Curves: When operating on a sharp curve, Row Guidance aggressiveness may need to be
increased for performance. See Row Guidance adjustments (page 422).

To open the Row Guidance panel, at the Run screen tap .

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 419

Row Guidance operation 18   Operations

Use row sensors

To use the sensors:

1. Make sure the Autopilot system is engaged.

2. Activate the sensors by tapping on the Row Guidance panel.

When active, the row guidance sensors will feel the number of "strikes" against them. After a
set number of strikes, the Row Guidance will determine the average peak displacement of the
sensors on each side of the row for the strikes and react to this peak displacement on each side
to steer the vehicle until the peak displacements on each sensor are equal.
Note  – Row sensors override the set Autopilot guidance line. When you turn around in headlands with
the sensor turned on, random strikes on stubble cause the system to veer off the set Autopilot guidance
line. It is recommended that you travel through the headlands with Autopilot only to guide to the proper
row. After you enter the unharvested crop, activate the sensors for row guidance.

On the Row Guidance panel, the sensor button/indicator shows the status of the sensors.

Indicator / Button Explanation

Row sensors are on but not active.

(Yellow)

Row sensors are on and active. Tap to turn sensors off.

(Green)

Row guidance sensors are off. Tap to turn row guidance

sensors on and off while the Autopilot system is engaged. The
guidance system will now function as a traditional Autopilot
system
(Gray)

There is an error with the sensors.

420 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Row Guidance operation

Shift or skip guidance line

You may need to skip the guidance line to coordinate with the crop and guidance line if you operate
in a crop that was planted:

l Without automatic steering

l Using WAAS corrections and is being harvested using WAAS guidance
In either case, satellite drift and/or operator guidance can lead to misalignment of the guidance line
with the crop. Depending on conditions, it may be necessary to shift or skip the guidance line to
coordinate with the crop and guidance line. This will be evident when the sensors guide down the
proper row with offline distance is shown to be 0, but the selected guidance line is not centered on
the current swath on the screen.
In this case it is recommended to skip (temporarily move the guidance line) to align with the drifted
crop rows. The Autopilot system must be disengaged to skip.
See Shift a swath (page 378) and Skip a swath (page 379).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 421

Row Guidance operation 18   Operations

Row Guidance adjustments

On the Row Guidance panel, you can adjust guidance using the following controls.

Control Explanation

Nudge Use to correct satellite drift.

Nudge adjustments are available for autonomous, WAAS, Omni,
and RTX Rangepoint corrections. This adjustment will move the
position of the vehicle in the global (cardinal) direction
perpendicular to the path traveled in the user defined increment.
When a correction is made heading South on a guidance line to the
right, the position of the vehicle will be moved to the West. When
heading back North, the correction will still be to the West but left
to the direction of travel.

Trim The vehicle can steer offline as a result of:

l Uneven drag on a vehicle from an unbalanced implement
l Uneven drag on a vehicle from soil conditions
Trim adjustment is available for RTK and RTX Centerpoint
corrections (FS, SS, SC). Trim moves the vehicle perpendicular to the
line with reference to the forward direction (to the right or left of
vehicle forward travel) the amount setup by the user. For example,
while traveling South down a line and the trim is moved 1 inch right
(West), when the vehicle is turned around and driven north the
correction will still be right of the line which is East on the Northern
heading.

Steering Aggressiveness Use the - and + buttons to adjust how aggressively to command the
steering to the guidance line.
Aggressiveness should not be set too high. This can cause the
vehicle steering not to react to commands (the steering wheels
cannot react fast enough to keep up with the steering commands).
Instability in steering will result.

Row Guidance Aggr Use the - and + buttons to adjust how aggressively the vehicle
reacts to the input from the Row Guidance sensors.

422 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations TrueTracker operation

TrueTracker operation
WARNING – Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause
significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid
possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take
manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

When using TrueTracker with the Autopilot system, the implement receives its own separate
guidance and steering to increase accuracy.

TrueTracker controls

To open the TrueTracker panel, tap .

Control Explanation

Nudge The guidance line can move off target due to either:
l GPS position drift after pausing or turning off the system
l GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field
Use the < and > buttons to move the guidance line in a perpendicular
direction (left or right).

Aggr Use the - and + buttons to adjust how aggressively the implement
moves to the guidance line.

Zero Steering Off: Zero Steering is not used.

On: Commands the steering to zero degrees left/right, centering the
steering device on the implement. This option can be turned on in the
field, keeping the coulters pointed straight, or just at the ends of the
field to center the steering.
Note  – Disengaging the TrueTracker system automatically turns off Zero
Steering.

Engage button
How the Engage button works depends on how the TrueTracker system has been set up.
Note  – For settings on Engage, see Engage settings for TrueTracker system (page 279).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 423

TrueTracker operation 18   Operations

l If two-state engage is Off:

l First tap: Engages implement and vehicle steering
l Second tap: Disengages both implement and vehicle steering
l If two-state engage has been set to Implement First:
l First tap: Engages the implement steering
l Second tap: Engages the vehicle steering
l Third tap: Disengages both implement and vehicle steering
l If two-state engage has been set to:
l First tap: Engages the vehicle steering
l Second tap: Engages the implement steering

Color indicators
Color Engage button Explanation
Green Main  Vehicle steering is engaged.

Smaller inner Implement steering is engaged.

Red Main Vehicle steering cannot engage.

Smaller inner Implement steering cannot engage.

Yellow Main Vehicle steering is ready to engage.

Smaller inner Implement steering is ready to engage.

Implement status
GPS status
Tap the second to view status on the implement receiver:
l Implement GPS Status
l Implement Correction Type
l Implement Correction Age
l Latitude
l Longitude
l Altitude

424 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations TrueTracker operation

l Satellites
l HDOP
l VDOP
l Network ID

Text
A number of status text items provide information about the implement. You can set these status
text items to appear permanently at the top of the screen or on a slide-out tab. To set up status
items, see Status items (page 70).

Implement on-screen lightbar

When implement steering is enabled, a second, smaller lightbar displays on the screen below the
main lightbar.

The lower lightbar shows the implement guidance relative to the guidance line. Each LED on the
second lightbar represents 1 inch.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 425

TrueGuide operation 18   Operations

TrueGuide operation
WARNING – Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause
significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid
possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take
manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

TrueGuide uses a second GPS receiver on the implement to enable the Autopilot system to pull the
implement onto the guidance line.

To open the TrueGuide panel, at the Run screen, tap .

Control Explanation

Trim

Aggr Adjust aggressiveness during operation.

Use the - and + buttons to adjust how aggressively the
implement moves to the guidance line.
l To increase the response to move the implement back to
the line, increase aggressiveness.
l To smooth the response to the implement moving offline,
decrease aggressiveness
The recommended settings for default values are:
l For steep slopes (10% - 30%): 150%
l For slow speed applications: 125%
l For normal operation: 100%
l For high speed applications (>8 mph): 33%

TrueGuide engagement On: When the right-hand button displays ON, the Autopilot
system is engaged.
Auto: When the right-hand button displays AUTO, the
TrueGuide system is engaged.
Off: Tap to disengage the TrueGuide system.

426 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations TrueGuide operation

Using TrueGuide
1. At the Run screen on the TrueGuide panel, tap (yellow). The right-hand button changes to
ON and the TrueGuide status changes to Waiting.

The Autopilot system acquires the line before transitioning to the TrueGuide system.
The TrueGuide system status remains at Waiting while the Autopilot system acquires the line.
After the TrueGuide system has taken control, its status changes to ON and the right-hand
button changes to AUTO.
2. To disengage the TrueGuide system at anytime, tap OFF (the left-hand button).
Note  – As soon as the TrueGuide system is disengaged, the Autopilot system immediately begins
providing all guidance.

Note  – To turn on the TrueGuide system when the status is Waiting, tap ON again.

TrueGuide system status indicators

The system status displays on the TrueGuide tab between the Off / On (Auto) buttons.

TrueGuide Status Expanation

Off The TrueGuide system is off.
Disengaged The TrueGuide system is ready, but not engaged.
Waiting The Autopilot system is engaged, and the TrueGuide system is
preparing to engage after a short pause.
On The TrueGuide system has engaged and is on.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 427

 Vehicle Sync operation 18   Operations

Vehicle Sync operation

Vehicle Sync replaces the transfer of data using a USB drive. Instead, data is transferred wirelessly
between vehicles. Real-time, up-to-date information improves operational efficiency and accuracy.
Multiple operators belonging to the same WorkGroup in the same field can transfer location
information on other vehicles and:

l Point/line/area features
l Coverage mapping and implement section switching
l Productivity and operational statistics and conditions
Vehicles using Vehicle Sync can also share data on:

l Yield and moisture

l Tank levels
l Location and speed

Common uses
You can use Vehicle Sync for:

l Same operation: Multiple vehicles and implements in a Vehicle Sync WorkGroup performing

the same tasks (such spraying, planting or harvesting)
l Same field, different operation: Multiple vehicles and implements performing different tasks
(such as a sprayer working with a planter or a harvester working with a grain buggy)
l Observation: A vehicle can see the location and productivity of the WorkGroup, but does not
share coverage, lines or points.

Benefits
Vehicle Sync assists in:

l Planting: Using Field-IQ provides clutch triggering based on coverage sharing, which maximizes
input conservation.
l Spraying: Sharing tank level and as-applied information
l Harvesting: Maintaining yield-to-area integrity within the harvest data, and sharing instant
yield and moisture information

Using Vehicle Sync

Up to six vehicles can join a Vehicle Sync WorkGroup by joining the same channel.

428 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Vehicle Sync operation

Join a WorkGroup
To sync with a specific vehicle, make sure:

l Your vehicle has a clear line of sight with that vehicle.

l You are within a distance of 325 yards (300 meters) from that vehicle.
l At least one vehicle is working in an open field.

Guidance lines with Vehicle Sync

You create guidance lines as normal (with the exception of adaptive curves and Free Form lines that
are not supported by Vehicle Sync).

Naming guidance lines

To avoid any confusion, it is recommended that you take care in naming guidance lines. All guidance
lines are automatically combined together, including lines that vehicles possessed prior to linking. If
guidance lines have the same name prior to linking (for example, if both vehicles have a line called
AB line 1), Vehicle Sync reviews the lines to determine whether they are the same or different:

l If they are exactly the same, they are not duplicated.

l If there is a difference, the lines are pooled and labeled with the tractor from which they have
come (for example, for both Tractor A and Tractor B, AB line 1 will be relabelled in all guidance
line pools as AB Line 1 Tractor A and AB Line 1 Tractor B).
Note  – Vehicle Sync will not shift lines to account for different implement widths. The actual line is
transferred.
If you are performing an operation in which all vehicles have the same swath width and use the
same guidance line, the line on which the other vehicle is engaged becomes dotted, as shown for
H1:

Although you can engage on this line, an alert will

display to inform you that you are engaged on the
same line as another vehicle.

Coverage
Your vehicle coverage is colored yellow on the
screen. When the vehicle sync layer is selected (for
events that have the same
Client/Farm/Field/Event), the coverage associated
with other vehicles will be color coordinated to that
vehicle.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 429

 Vehicle Sync operation 18   Operations

View only layer

When vehicles are not in the same event, a View Only layer is shown for those vehicles that does not
affect section control.

There is also the option to show only the coverage logged by the your vehicle.

Coverage controls the following:

l Tru Count clutches

l Liqui-Block clutches

430 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Vehicle Sync operation

l “Rate as” section

l Header swath width for yield calculation
l Sprayer sections
Note  – The warning Event Memory Low displays when the size of the file in the current event exceeds the
memory capacity of the display. If this warning displays, exit the current field and begin a new event with a
similar name.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 431

 Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Water Management functionality

The functions you can perform with Water Management features include:

l Create a survey (page 432)

l Create / save a design (page 435)
l Leveling (page 436)
l Point and Slope mode (page 437)
l Flat Plane (Laser) and Flat Plane (GPS) modes (page 438)
l Contour mode (page 443)
For dual or tandem operations, there are:

l Dual scraper controls (page 449)

l Tandem scraper controls (page 450)

Create a survey
The steps to create a survey are:

1. Create benchmarks (page 432).

2. Survey the field (page 433).

Create benchmarks
Before you can create a survey, you must set a point at a known location called a benchmark. When
you create a benchmark, the GPS receiver obtains and records location information from the base
station for that specific point in your field.
When you are leveling, you use benchmarks to:

l Return to a point in the field with known coordinates to re-calibrate your exact position. This
may include setting the bucket on the ground or on a solid surface that will not be disturbed
while you perform field leveling.
l Move the design up or down to match the field surface at that point.
The first benchmark you create on a field is the master benchmark and displays as an orange flag
labeled MB . Field coordinates are calculated from this point.
Subsequent benchmarks display as orange flags labeled with their corresponding number .

432 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Water Management functionality

Bechmark steps
1. Place the GPS antenna in a known, repeatable location that will not change throughout the
leveling of a field.

Tip  – Mark this location with flags or some other marker so that you can return to the exact spot.

2. Stop the vehicle.

3. On the WM-Survey tab, tap Bench .
Note  – If FieldLevel II is installed, you can tap Bench on that instead. Both Bench buttons have the same
effect.
A countdown timer runs for 30 seconds and then the system creates the benchmark. To stop
the averaging during the countdown, tap Bench again.
Note  – If you are within the circle around an existing benchmark, a new mark is not created.

Survey the field

After you create the benchmark(s), collect field layout data by conducting a survey.

Define the boundary

Define a boundary to establish the confines of your field. Drive around the boundary while you
record the shape.

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Survey/Design panel.

2. Before driving the boundary, select the reference point you want to use for recording the
boundary.
l Center: Records the boundary based on the location of the antenna.
l Left: Records the boundary offset half of the implement width to the left of the direction of
travel.
l Right: Records the boundary offset half of the implement width to the right of the
direction of travel.
3. Select Boundary from the list.
4. Tap Record .
5. Drive the boundary while recording. The boundary records with a line showing it begins and
ends at the starting point. (The boundary is a complete loop.)
6. After you have driven to the end of the boundary, tap Record again.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 433

 Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Define interior points

To complete a full survey, create guidance lines and then drive over all of the interior of the field
boundary, while the system records interior points.

1. At the Survey/Design panel, select Interior from the list.

2. Tap Record and drive around the interior of the field, gaining enough coverage to produce a
height map. You can change the data logging intensity in the FieldLevel II Survey/Design
settings (Coarse = 25 ft; Medium = 10 ft; Fine = 5 ft).

Define a section (optional)

After you create a boundary, you have the option to create sections that split the entire area into
portions. This enables you to create a design for each section instead of the entire area.
Sections can be useful after you finish working on the area for the day. Define the area that you
completed as a section. When you return to the area, you can level the remaining area to a second
best-fit plane. See Design (page 434).
There are two methods for defining a section.

l Method 1:
l Begin recording the section line outside the boundary.
l Drive through the field to define the section line, then cross outside the boundary again.
l The section is defined.
l Method 2: 
l Record a section line inside the boundary.
l The ends of the line will extend to meet the boundary.

Design
After you have completed the survey, the system can create the design based on the information
gathered by the survey and the settings you enter as part of the design process. FieldLevel II defines
the three-dimensional height for the field and controls how the implement reshapes the ground.
The Autoplane functionality uses the topographic survey of your field to estimate its surface
elevations.
You can accept the AutoPlane calculation and have the system create a best-fit design, or manually
edit settings, including:

l Cut/Fill ratio: Amount of cut dirt that equals one volume of fill dirt.
l South --> North Slope: Angle of the slope from North to South.
l West --> East Slope: Angle of the slope from West to East.

434 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Water Management functionality

l Composite Slope: The true angle of the fall of the design. In other words, the angle of the slope
when the two slope angles are combined.
l Slope Heading: The heading direction of the slope when the East/West and North/South slopes
are combined.

Create / save a design

After you complete the survey, the AutoPlane button displays on the Survey/Design panel.
To create a design for the optimum slope for your field that requires the minimum amount of dirt to
be moved:
1. Tap AutoPlane. The AutoPlane screen displays.
If necessary, you can manually adjust the angle of the slope. However, this may require a
greater amount of dirt to be moved because the original design was the optimum.
2. Complete the settings.
If necessary, you can manually adjust the angle of the slope. However, this may require a
greater amount of dirt to be moved because the original design was the optimum.

Setting Explanation

Cut/Fill Ratio The amount of cut material that equals one volume of fill
material.

Section If you set up sections when you defined the field, you can
select a section from the list.
l None: Levels the entire field.
l Left: Levels only the section to the left of the section
line.
l Right: Levels only the section to the right of the section
line.

Composite Slope The true angle of the fall of the design when the East/West
and North/South slopes are combined.

Slope Heading The heading direction of the slope when the East/West and
North/South slopes are combined.

North -> South Slope The angle of the design slope from North to South.

East -> West Slope The angle of the design slope from East to West.

Height or Cut/Fill Height: Gives the design the theme of a topographic height

map.
Cut/Fill: Gives the design the theme of a cut/fill map. Red

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 435

 Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Setting Explanation
indicates the cut areas. Blue indicates the fill areas. Green
indicates areas that do not need cut or fill.

3. Tap Best Fit .

The system uses the interior points that you collected to calculate the optimum slope of the
field. An arrow displays on the image of the field to show the direction of fall. The Stats table lists
the statistics of the design computation:
l Cut: The volume of material that must be removed for the current design.
l Fill: The volume of material that must be added for the current design.
l Area: The area of the field inside the boundary.
4. Tap OK to close the AutoPlane screen and save the design. The the system saves the design as
the default plane for this field.

Leveling
Before you begin your leveling operation using Field LevelII, you may need to:

l Import designs (page 444)

l Reload a field (page 444)
l Re-bench (page 444)

Getting started with leveling

The FieldLevel II system automatically raises and lowers the blade on the implement to match the
design height anywhere in the field. You will use the color cut/fill map, simple on-screen
adjustments, and automatic blade control to perform leveling.
In addition to the following instructions, depending on where you are in your operation, you may
need to:

l Reload a field (page 444)

l Re-bench (page 444)

1. Open a field as normal.

2. When your leveling model is set to Multiplane design and the FmX integrated display opens the
field, the system:
l Scans the \AgGPS\Designs\.
l Opens any Multiplane .gps control files that are close to your current position and displays
a list of these files in the Select Design screen.
3. Select the design you want to use and tap OK.

436 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Water Management functionality

4. To enter the leveling panel, tap either or , depending on whether you are using a
tandem scraper or dual scraper. See Dual scraper controls (page 449) or Tandem scraper
controls (page 450).
5. Determine which leveling model you want to use:
l Point and Slope mode (page 437)
l Flat Plane (Laser) and Flat Plane (GPS) modes (page 438)
l Define a plane (page 439)
l Contour mode (page 443)

Leveling models
You have different leveling options, depending on the leveling mode that you selected:

l Point and Slope mode

l Flat Plane (Laser) and Flat Plane (GPS) mode
l Contour mode

Point and Slope mode

Slope is the percentage of vertical drop compared to horizontal travel. A positive slope goes
upward, and a negative slope goes downward. For example, if the slope is set to -1%, the slope will
drop 1 ft for every 100 ft horizontally traveled.
When you drive in Point and Slope mode, the Leveling panel displays the following controls.

Button Explanation

Coarse / Fine Coarse: The blade will move by large increments.

Fine: The blade will move by small increments.
Edit Tap to view or change the Slope Adjust increment. This setting
controls the amount the gradient changes each time you
increase or decrease the design slope.
For example, if the leveling gradient is set to -3%, and the slope
adjust is set to 2%, when you decrease the design slope
amount, the leveling gradient decreases to -5%.

Tap to increase the design slope by the Slope Adjust increment.

Tap to decrease the design slope by the Slope Adjust increment.

Bench or Re-Bench Tap to create a benchmark or re-bench.

Set the Design Height equal to the Blade Height.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 437

 Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Button Explanation
Delete Benchmark Tap to remove any benchmark on the field that you have
selected.
You do not need to drive over a benchmark to delete it.
Logging Tap to log coverage. This shows on the map where you have
been, dependent on your implement width. A shape file is
created with cut/fill and height information.
Auto Engages automatic blade height control:
l Starts the slope calculation
l Resets the height
l Resets the cut/fill

Flat Plane (Laser) and Flat Plane (GPS) modes

When driving in Flat Plane mode, these options operate the same:

l Flat Plane (Laser): Use this model when the land has previously been leveled with a laser system
and you want to touch up the field. This model results in a mathematically flat surface (which
means the plane does not follow the curvature of the Earth, but completely flat).
l Flat Plane (GPS): Results in a design with a surface that is curved the same as the surface of the
Earth (an equipotential surface).
Note  – Neither of these models can be used with a laser system. The entire FieldLevel II system only works
with GPS.
The controls on the Leveling panel for these modes are:

Button Explanation

Coarse / Fine Coarse: The blade will move by large increments.

Fine: The blade will move by small increments.

Raises the blade by the fine or coarse increment.

Lowers the blade by the fine or coarse increment.

Design Tap to open the Plane Editor. Here you can edit the design
plane.

Bench or Re-Bench Tap to create a benchmark or re-bench.

Set the Design Height equal to the Blade Height.
Delete Benchmark Removes any benchmark on the field. You do not need to

438 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Water Management functionality

Button Explanation

drive over a benchmark to delete it.

Logging Tap to log coverage. This shows on the map where you have
been, dependent on your implement width. A shape file is
created with cut/fill and height information.
Auto Engages automatic blade height control:
l Starts the slope calculation
l Resets the height
l Resets the cut/fill

Define a plane
You can define a plane in the Plane Editor screen. The controls on the Plane Editor screen enable
you to either:

l Design a field slope and orientation

l Set the design parameters for the tile or surface ditch profile
To define a plane, you can use:

l A single point
l Multiple benchmarks
Use at least one point as a pivot point and extra information based on direction and slope
requirements.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 439

 Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Item Name Explanation

1 Pivot Benchmark The single benchmark where the plane is defined. All
slopes will pivot around this point.

2 Primary The first axis upon which the slope is defined. It has a
Primary Slope and Primary Heading component. The
Primary Slope is defined as a negative number, where
water will fall along the primary axis.

3 Cross The second axis upon which the slope is defined. The
Cross Heading will always be 90° or 270° from the Primary
Heading. The Cross Slope is defined as a negative
number, where water will fall along the cross axis. To
define the plane by a single heading and slope, then you
should set the Cross Slope value to 0.000%

4 Composite When both Primary and Cross slopes are defined, the
Composite Slope direction shows the actual heading
where water will fall. If you have 0.000% slope on the
Cross axis, the Composite Heading will be the same as the
Primary Heading.

Use a single point

To define a plane using a single point:

1. At the FieldLevel II panel, create a benchmark to define the direction of the slope and its
heading.
It can be useful to create the benchmark at the critical point. For example, where the water will
enter or exit the field. This ensures that where the benchmark is, the plane is on grade.
2. Tap Design . The Plane Editor screen displays. Complete the settings and tap OK.

440 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Water Management functionality

Item Explanation

New Plan

Choose Pivot Tap and select the benchmark you want to be on grade.

Primary Slope If you want to define the primary heading by measuring a second
point, see Define a plane (page 439).

Cross Slope

Height Above Pivot Enter the known offset if you are using one.

Primary Heading

Flip Tap to change the direction of the Cross Slope. This changes the Cross
Heading between 90° and 270° from the Primary Heading.

For water to run along the Primary and Cross axis, the slope values must be keyed in as negative
values.
Note  – FieldLevel II searches for a survey on the field. If there is a survey, a Cut/Fill map displays on the new
design plane.

Use multiple benchmarks

You can use multiple benchmarks to define a plane based on your specific requirements. If multiple
benchmarks are created, you can design a plane of best-fit through them.
If you use three benchmarks to design the plane, the cut and fill values will be "0.0" through those
points so the system can create a perfect plane. If you use more than three benchmarks to design
the plane, the cut/fill values will be the residual difference between the plane of best-fit and the
benchmark elevations.
To define a plane using multiple points:

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 441

Water Management functionality 18   Operations

1. At the FieldLevel II panel, create two or more benchmarks to help define the plane. If a primary
heading definition is required you only need two benchmarks. If all the slopes of a field are to
be defined, then you need at least three benchmarks. Select the FieldLevel II plugin and tap
Design . The Plane Editor screen displays.

2. Tap New Plane. The New Plane screen displays.

3. From the Benchmarks list, select the benchmark you want to use for the primary pivot, then tap
Add . The benchmark is copied to the Design Benchmarks list.

4. Repeat the previous step until all the required benchmarks are copied to the Design Benchmarks
list. The Design Benchmarks list contains the benchmarks for the multi-point plane.
5. Set the Primary Slope Heading:
a. Choose the first benchmark to define the heading and then tap the Set> From: button.
Note  – It is recommended that this point is the uphill point of the two points that will be used to
define the primary slope.
b. Select the second point of the primary slope and then tap the Set> To: button.
c. Tap OK. The Plane Editor screen displays.
The selected benchmarks appear in the Benchmarks table on the upper left along with their
associated cut/fill values. The Primary Slope and Cross Slope values reflect the calculated slopes
based on the benchmarks entered in the New Plane screen.
6. To update the slope values:
a. Identify the benchmark to be used as the new pivot.
b. Tap Choose Pivot. The Choose Pivot screen displays.

442 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Water Management functionality

c. Select the benchmark to be used as a the pivot for the new slope from the screen.
d. Tap OK. The Plane Editor screen displays.
7. Select the Primary Slope, Cross Slope, or Height Above Pivot areas to edit the slope values as
required.
Note  – The cut/fill values in the Benchmarks table will update automatically.
8. The plane is now defined. Tap OK. The Run screen displays.
Note  – The FieldLevel II system will search for a survey on the field. If there is a survey, a cut/fill map
displays as the new design plane.

Contour mode
1. At the Run screen, drive the vehicle to the location where you want to start the first levee.
2. Set the master benchmark at this point.
3. Set which side of the vehicle is uphill.
4. Tap Guide and drive the vehicle forward, following the lightbar to keep the vehicle on the same
contour.
a. To move to the next levee, turn the vehicle around and change the Up Hill direction.
b. To step the blade up or down, use the and plus and minus buttons to achieve the required
offset and then follow the lightbar to keep the correct grade.
When you drive in Point and Slope mode, the FieldLevel II panel displays these controls.

Button Explanation

Coarse / Fine Coarse: The blade will move by large increments.

Fine: The blade will move by small increments.

Raises the blade by the fine or coarse increment.

Lowers the blade by the fine or coarse increment.

Up Hill Left Select if you are driving around the contour with the uphill
slope on your left and the downhill slope on your right.
Up Hill Right Select if you are driving around the contour with the uphill
slope on your right and the downhill slope on your left.

Bench or Re-Bench Tap to create a benchmark or re-bench.

Set the Design Height equal to the Blade Height.
Delete Benchmark Removes any benchmark on the field. You do not need to
drive over a benchmark to delete it.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 443

 Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Button Explanation

Logging Tap to log coverage. This shows on the map where you have
been, dependent on your implement width. A shape file is
created with cut/fill and height information.

Guide Tap to get lightbar guidance at the current level.

Import designs
After you finish with your design, you can export a control file (.GPS) for use with the FieldLevel II
system. Copy the design control file into the \AgGPS\Designs\ folder on a USB drive.

Reload a field
When you create a design for a field (for example, a target leveling plane), the design is saved in the
/field/ directory.
The design files are associated with the field. If you close the field and then open it again, the design
reloads with the field.
With RTK GPS, the position of the RTK base station is important to the heights used when the field
was previously open. If the base station is not accurately positioned in the same physical location,
you must reestablish the design over an existing benchmark to re-establish the height.

Re-bench
When you are leveling, you use benchmarks to:

l Return to a point in the field with known coordinates to re-calibrate your exact position. This
may include setting the bucket on the ground or on a solid surface that will not be disturbed
while you perform field leveling.
l Move the design up or down to match the field surface at that point.
Re-benching is designed to accommodate differences with RTK base station setup from the last time
the field was opened.

Manual re-bench
On the Field LevelII panel, if you tap either of the Re-bench buttons when the receiver is within the
circular radius of a benchmark, the receiver is calibrated over the existing benchmark. Re-benching
enables you to synchronize your position with the design you created.
1. Tap Re-Bench . A message displays showing a list of the saved benchmarks within the open field.
The system automatically selects the benchmark closest to you (if multiple benchmarks exist),
but allows you to select the benchmark you want to use.

444 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Water Management functionality

Note  – To ensure the design is properly aligned to the field, return to the exact location of the master
benchmark that you marked on the ground (for example, with flags, see Create benchmarks (page 432)),
and re-bench on the master benchmark.
2. Select the benchmark to re-bench on.
3. Tap OK. A confirmation message displays showing the calculated distance to the selected
benchmark.
Note  – This calculation may be quite exaggerated if the base was moved a considerable distance away
from its previous position.
4. Verify this is the benchmark you want (if multiple benchmarks exist).
5. Tap OK to accept the message. The system begins the standard 30-second averaging process to
re-establish the field relevance to the benchmark you just re-benched on.

Force re-bench
If you open a field that has an existing master benchmark and have chosen to require Force Rebench,
the Create Benchmark button label changes to Re-Bench . The system will not allow you to engage
automatic control until the system has been re-benched. See Relative Heights tab (page 304)
Note  – You must locate the machine exactly over the actual mark on the ground. Do not rely on your relative
position to the master benchmark if the base station was moved.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 445

 Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Blade level indicators

In the operational view of the Run screen, a blade indicator shows the status of the blade related to
the On-Grade Limit.

Indicator Explanation

The blade is above the target height beyond the On-Grade

Limit.

The blade is below the target height beyond the On-Grade

Limit.

The blade is considerably above the target height, more than

double the On-Grade Limit.

The blade is considerably below the target height, more than

double the On-Grade Limit.

The blade is at the correct target height, within the On-Grade

Limit.

When you are using dual or tandem scrapers, you will see two blade indicators on the Run screen.

Additionally, you can tap to open the legend for the operational view of the Run screen and
select either Height or Cut/Fill.

FieldLevel II status items

Status items are text information that:

l Describe factors in leveling models

l Beginning with P are for the primary GPS receiver (for example, P Blade Height)
l Beginning with S for the secondary if you are using dual or tandem scrapers (for example,
S Blade Height)

446 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Water Management functionality

Status items can be set to always display at the top of the screen or on a slide-out tab. See Status
items (page 70).

Status Item Explanation

Altitude Current GPS altitude of the blade.
Blade Height Current height of the blade shown as a relative height or a GPS
height depending on settings selected.
Boot Depth Depth of the boot when installing tiles or the depth of the blade
when cleaning surface ditches (used with the Autoslope leveling
model).
CMR Percent Percentage of data being successfully received from the base GPS
receiver.
Correction Age Time since the last GPS correction was received from the GPS base
station.
Note  – Can also be viewed from the Run screen.

Correction Type Solution type (for example: RTK Fixed, or RTK Float, etc.)
Note  – Can also be viewed from the Run screen.

Cut/fill Difference between the blade height and the target height.
When Cut is displayed, the current ground height is above the
target height, and the height adjustment indicator shows a red
down arrow, which means that the blade needs to moved down to
reach the target height.
When Fill is displayed, the current ground height is below the target
height.
Design Height Originally planned or designed height at the current location.
Design Slope Design slope with respect to the current location along the section
line. Used with Autoslope leveling model.
Distance Traveled Distance traveled since Auto mode was enabled. Used with Point to
Slope leveling model.
East Difference in the East component from the Local Tangent Plane
(LTP).
GPS Status Solution type (for example: RTK Fixed, or RTK Float, and so on).
Note  – Can also be viewed from the Run screen.

H Error Current estimate of the error in the horizontal component.

HDOP Horizontal dilution of position. Horizontal component of PDOP.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 447

Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Status Item Explanation

Heading Current direction the vehicle is heading in
Latitude Latitude as recorded by the GPS receiver
Longitude Longitude as recorded by the GPS receiver.
Network ID Network ID of the GPS receiver, which must be the same as the base
receiver network ID.
North Difference in the North component from the Local Tangent Plane
(LTP).
Offset Relative offset in the vertical component.
Offset X Relative offset in the X axis.
Offset Y Relative offset in the Y axis.
Satellites Amount of satellites in the GPS/GLONASS solution.
Section Line Number Line number selected for design in AutoSlope. This is the current
section line being recorded in the field.
Speed Current speed of the vehicle.
Survey Cut / Fill Cut/fill for the location of the vehicle within a field that has been
processed in AutoPlane.
Target Height Height the blade will attempt to reach. This is the design height ±
the offset. When the blade reaches the target height, the arrows
turn green.
Up Difference in the up component from the Local Tangent Plane (LTP).
VDOP Vertical dilution of precision. Vertical component of PDOP.
Vertical Error Estimate Current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel
GPS receiver.

448 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

18   Operations Water Management functionality

Dual scraper controls

Blade height indicators:

l The left height indicator shows the height of the

left/primary blade.
l The right height indicator shows the height of the
right/secondary blade.

Left plus and minus: Controls the blade height for the

left/primary blade.
Right plus and minus: Controls the blade height for the
right/secondary blade.

: Controls the left/primary automatics

: Controls the right/secondary automatics

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 449

Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Tandem scraper controls

Left plus and minus: Controls the blade height for

the front/primary blade.
Right plus and minus: Controls the blade height for
the rear/secondary blade.

Blade height indicators:

l The left height indicator shows the height of the

front/primary blade.
l The right height indicator shows the height of the
rear/secondary blade.

: Controls the front/primary automatics

: Controls the rear/secondary automatics

450 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Water Management functionality

WM-Drain operation
To use WM-Drain, you use the following to edit the survey and design, and to install tile or perform
ditch cleaning:

l Survey tab (page 452):  Set survey height offset (page 454) and Create a tile / ditch survey line
(page 453)
l Design tab (page 455) and Design screen (page 456): Design a section line (page 460), Clip a
portion of a section line (page 463) and Add a fixed point (page 464)
l Install tab (page 465): Installation/ditch cleaning (page 466)

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 451

 Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Survey tab
The Survey tab is used to create a survey by creating a master benchmark and logging survey points
while driving the area you want to survey.

Item Explanation

1 Survey tab

2 Design tab (page 455)

3 Install tab (page 465)

4 Record Section button

5 Pause Section button

6 Delete Section button

7 Manual Data Point button

8 Type of design: Main

9 Size of design

Create Benchmark: Tap to create a benchmark

Rebench: Tap to rebench

Delete Benchmark: Delete a benchmark

452 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Water Management functionality

Create a tile / ditch survey line

Before creating the survey line, Set survey height offset (page 454). This offset will be applied to the
heights of your surveyed alignment so that you do not need to rebench before installing tile.

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the WM-Drain panel.

2. Go to the Survey tab of the panel.
3. Drive to a point that will be untouched to use as a reference point.

4. Tap to create a master benchmark and flag this point so you can find it again easily.
5. Drive the vehicle to the start of the line where you want to install tile or clean a ditch.
Note  – For the most efficient method, it is recommended that you drive to the high end of the line.
6. From the Type list, select the type of design. The options are Main, Sub main and Lateral.
7. In the Size entry box, enter the size of the design.
8. Tap Record Section to begin recording a section and then drive. To pause recording, tap Pause
Section . (The Record button changes to white when activated.)

If you have created a section you want to remove, tap Delete Section and choose the section
from the list that displays.
Note  – For the most efficient method, it is recommended that the end point is where the tile line is to be
connected to a main or outlet.
9. To add a manual survey point at a distance different from the normal survey distance, tap
Manual Data Point .

10. Tap Record again to stop the recording.

11. If you create a benchmark you want to remove, tap and choose the benchmark from the
list that displays.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 453

 Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Set survey height offset

To set the Survey Height Offset:

1. At the Home screen, tap . The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select WM-Drain and tap Setup .

3. On the tile plow, raise the boot as high as it will raise.
4. Measure the distance from the bottom of the tile boot to the ground.
5. Enter this value into the Survey Height Offset entry box.
Note  – It is recommended that you change the survey point spacing to 1.5m (5 feet). This will then
record the survey points every 1.5M (5 feet) and provide a more accurate profile of the ground surface.
6. Tap OK.

454 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Water Management functionality

Design tab
On the Design tab, you choose a section to design and tap Design . The Design screen (page 456)
opens.

Item Explanation

1 Survey tab (page 452)

2 Design tab

3 Install tab (page 465)

4 Section: Section chosen to design

5 Select Closest button: Tap to choose the closest section

6 Design button: Tap to open the Design screen (page 456)

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 455

 Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Design screen
At the Design screen, you determine the design of the section line you have chosen.

Settings Tab

Item Explanation

1 Section: The section you are currently designing.

2 Rename button: Tap to rename the section.

3 Direction list:
The design screen shows the outlet at the left side of the screen and runs the
design uphill to the right side of the screen. The direction of the profile is
defined by the direction that it was surveyed. If your survey profile is
displayed the other way, switch the option shown in the Direction list to the
other option in the list.
Options are:
l Outlet at Survey Start
l Outlet at Survey End

4 Outlet information: Elevation of outlet depth.

5 Boot Slope information: The current reading for the boot slope from the IMD-
600.

6 Settings tab

7 Edit Line tab

8 Info tab

456 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

18   Operations Water Management functionality

Item Explanation

9 Minimum Depth: The minimum depth for the tile or ditch installation. The system
will not allow the design profile to be any shallower than the minimum depth,
which is shown on the profile as a red line.
Note  – For ditching applications, this depth is set close to the surface

10 Optimal Depth: The depth

to install the tile or ditch. The design will keep this to
the depth when it can. It will move off the optimal depth to be within the
other constraints where it is needed.
Note  – For ditching applications, this depth is set close to the surface.

11 Maximum Depth: The maximum depth for the tile or ditch installation. The
system will not allow the design profile to be any deeper than the maximum
depth, which is shown on the profile as a blue line.

12 Outlet to Optimal: The distance it takes

to change the depth of the design from
the Outlet Depth to the Optimal Depth. The tile plow will level out over a long
distance rather than trying to achieve the depth too quickly at the start of a
run.

13 Minimum Slope: The minimum slope for the tile or ditch installation. The system
will not allow the design to slope to be any less than the minimum slope.

14 Outlet Depth: The depth

at which the design profile will be at the outlet. This
depth can either be entered or measured. To measure the depth:
1. Drop the tile plow into the ground so the boot is at the same height as
the main or outlet.
2. Tap Measure. The outlet depth is entered by the system. Also, another
point is added to the section line if you are within 20 m (65 ft) of the end
of the surveyed section line.
The height of the outlet is shown by a yellow tag.

15 Outlet Elevation: The real or relative elevation of the outlet.

16 Smoothing list: The required

smoothing level (None, Low, Medium, High) to
work out any humping sections in the design. It is recommended you use
either Low or Medium smoothing.

17 Measure Outletbutton: Tap to show the outlet depth and outlet elevation
layers with the current boot depth in relation to the surveyed surface.

18 OK button: Tap to save any changes to the design.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 457

Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Edit Line tab

Item Explanation

1 Section: The section you are currently designing.

2 Rename button: Tap to rename the section.

3 Direction list:
The design screen shows the outlet at the left side of the screen and runs the
design uphill to the right side of the screen. The direction of the profile is
defined by the direction that it was surveyed. If your survey profile is
displayed the other way, switch the option shown in the Direction list to the
other option in the list.
Options are:
l Outlet at Survey Start
l Outlet at Survey End

4 Outlet information: Elevation of outlet depth.

5 Boot Slope information: The current reading for the boot slope from the IMD-
600.

6 Settings tab

7 Edit Line tab

8 Info tab

9 Distance: The distance of the fixed point from the beginning of the line.
Clipping Distance: The distance from the beginning of the line.

10 Design information: Elevation of the designed section at that location.

458 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

18   Operations Water Management functionality

Item Explanation

11 Surface information: Elevation of the surface at that location.

12 Design Tool list: Options: Clip Start, Clip End, Fix Point.

13 Add button: Tap to add a fixed point to the design.

Clip button: Tap to clip the designated portion of the section line.

14 Delete All button: Tap to delete all of the fixed points created.

15 OK button: Tap to save any changes to the design.

Info tab

Item Explanation

1 Section: The section you are currently designing.

2 Rename button: Tap to rename the section.

3 Direction list: The design

screen shows the outlet at the left side of the screen
and runs the design uphill to the right side of the screen. The direction of the
profile is defined by the direction that it was surveyed. If your survey profile is
displayed the other way, switch the option shown in the Direction list to the
other option in the list.
Options are:
l Outlet at Survey Start
l Outlet at Survey End

4 Outlet information: Elevation of outlet depth.

5 Boot Slope information: The current reading for the boot slope from the IMD-

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 459

 Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Item Explanation

600.

6 Settings tab

7 Edit Line tab

8 Info tab

9 Distance: The selected location's distance from the start of the section line.

10 OK button: Tap to save any changes to the design.

Design a section line

After you create survey lines, use design screen to create designs for installing tile or cleaning ditches
along those lines.

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the WM-Drain panel.

2. Go to the Design tab of the panel.
3. From the Section list, select the section line that you want to design and tap Edit Design .
4. If required, tap Select Closest. This enables you to select the line that is closest to you. If there is
more than one line within 10 m of your current position, the Select Closest Section Line screen
displays. The line that is calculated as being closest to you is highlighted. The section line
number and pipe type are shown. Choose the line you want and tap OK. The system displays
the Design screen.
5. At the Design screen, from the Section list choose the section line you want to design.

Setting at Top of Screen Explanation

Section Selection Auto: The nearest section line is automatically selected.

Manual: Manually select a section from the list.

Rename button Tap to rename the section name.

Direction The design screen shows the outlet at the left side of the
screen and runs the design uphill to the right side of the
screen. The direction of the profile is defined by the
direction that it was surveyed. If your survey profile is
displayed the other way, switch the option shown in the
Direction list to the other option in the list.
Options are:
l Outlet at Survey Start
l Outlet at Survey End

460 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

18   Operations Water Management functionality

Note  – The section lines are labeled automatically by the system (beginning at S1) in the sequence they
were surveyed.
6. Edit the design to your requirements.
On the Settingstab, set:

Settings Tab Explanation

Min Depth The minimum depth for the tile or ditch installation. The
system will not allow the design profile to be any shallower
than the minimum depth, which is shown on the profile as
a red line.
Note  – For ditching applications, this depth is set close to the
surface.

Optimal Depth The depth to install the tile or ditch. The design will keep
this to the depth where it can. It will move off the optimal
depth to be within the other constraints where it is needed.
Note  – For ditching applications, this depth is set close to the
surface.

Max Depth The maximum depth for the tile or ditch installation. The
system will not allow the design profile to be any deeper
than the maximum depth (shown as a blue line).

Outlet to Optimal The distance it takes to change the depth of the design
from the Outlet Depth to the Optimal Depth. The tile plow
will level out over a long distance rather than trying to
achieve the depth too quickly at the start of a run.

Min Slope The minimum slope for the tile or ditch installation. The
system will not allow the design to slope to be any less than
the minimum slope.

Outlet Depth The depth at which the design profile will be at the outlet.
This depth can either be entered or measured. To measure
the depth:
a. Drop the tile plow into the ground so the boot is at the
same height as the main or outlet.
b. Tap Measure. The outlet depth is entered by the
system. Also, another point is added to the section line
if you are within 20 m (65 ft) of the end of the surveyed
section line.
The height of the outlet is shown by a yellow tag.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 461

 Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Settings Tab Explanation

Outlet Elevation Elevation of outlet depth.

Smoothing The required smoothing level (None, Low, Medium, High) to

work out any humping sections in the design. It is
recommended you use either Low or Medium smoothing.

Measure Output button Tap to show the outlet depth and outlet elevation layers
with the current boot depth in relation to the surveyed
surface.

Distance Tap the design graph or enter a distance to display the

Design Info (depth, elevation, slope, surface) for that
location.

7. On the Edit Line tab, you have the options to:

a. Indicate fixed points on the line. See Add a fixed point (page 464).
b. Clip and remove sections of the line. See Clip a portion of a section line (page 463).
8. Tap OK.
At the Run screen, you can install the tile or clean the ditch from either the outlet or the top end of
the profile. The section line that you use for installation or cleaning will display as red on the screen
(other section lines are white).

462 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Water Management functionality

Clip a portion of a section line

You can remove a portion of the section line from either the beginning or end of the line (or both).

1. At the Design tab, tap Design to open the Design screen.

2. Go to the Edit Line tab.
3. From the far left-hand list at the bottom of the screen, choose either Clip Start or Clip End
(depending on which end of the line you want to remove).
4. Indicate where you want to clip to by:
a. Touching on the screen
b. Moving the slider
c. Entering a specific distance in the Distance entry box
5. When you have finished indicating the areas to clip, tap Delete All.
6. To save the changes, tap OK.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 463

 Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Add a fixed point

You can add a fixed point to your design. This enables you to avoid:

l An underground structure
l Intersecting a specific depth or existing tile line

1. At the Design tab, tap Design to open the Design screen.

2. Go to the Edit Line tab.
3. From the far left-hand list at the bottom of the screen, choose Fix Point.
4. Indicate where you want the fixed point by:
a. Touching on the screen
b. Moving the slider
c. Entering a specific distance in the Distance entry box
5. Tap Add . The screen will show the design elevation for the fixed point.
6. Enter the elevation that represents the target or obstacle. The system redesigns the section line
to account for the new fixed point. If the slope approaching the point is now too steep, you
have the option to enter more fixed points ahead of the original fixed point to make the
transition better from one slope to the next.

Define boot depth

You can define the boot depth by either of the steps below.

l Option 1: Enter the relative depth above and below the surveyed surface.
l Option 2: Enter a specific elevation in the Outlet Elevation entry box. The system calculates the
other box.

464 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Water Management functionality

Install tab
On the Install tab, you perform installation.

Item Explanation

1 Survey tab (page 452)

2 Design tab (page 455)

3 Install tab

4 Mode:

5 Type of pipe: The type of pipe to install. Options are: Main, Sub-Main, Lateral

6 Height Offset controls

- Decrease height offset

- Increase height offset

7 Choice of Coarse or Fine increments for changing height offset

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 465

 Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Installation/ditch cleaning
Autoslope mode

You can use the Autoslope mode for:

l For tile applications: The system runs on both self-propelled tile machines and pull-type plows
towed behind a tractor.
l For ditching applications: You can use any type of scraper or ditching machine supported by
the WM-Drain system.
Note  – When the system is not running in Autoslope mode, the on-screen or LB25 lightbar will guide to any
existing A-B line. This means you can use manual guidance for surveying in section lines to be tiled at a
consistent spacing.

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the WM-Drain panel.

2. Go to the Install tab of the panel. Use the controls for installation or ditch cleaning.

Control Explanation
Survey Tap to open the Survey screen where you can survey the
section line you will design.
Design Tap to open the Design screen where you can select a
section line and then edit the design.
Note  – A white cross displays on the Run screen to show both the
horizontal and vertical location.

Mode l Autoslope: Creates sloped tile or surface drainage

targeting the optimal depth defined on the Design tab.
l Slope: Creates consistently sloped tile or surface
drainage. From the starting point, the vehicle leves at a
constant slope, regardless of direction.
l Constant Depth: Use to collect a live, rolling survey of
the ground surface. This survey is passed in real time
to the control system, which enables it to run at the
specified depth above or below the ground surface.
The constant depth mode can only be accessed when
you have properly configured manual guidance,
Autopilot or EZ-Pilot.
This mode requires two RTK-enabled receivers are
available and assigned on the system. One of the RTK-
enabled receivers:

466 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

18   Operations Water Management functionality

Control Explanation
l Is not required to be an internal receiver
l Must be assigned to the appropriate guidance
plugin/feature
l Must be mounted in front of the antenna used for
WM-Drain

Pipe Pipe Type: Select the type of pipe to be installed.

Pipe Size: The size of the pipe to be installed.
Recalc When the tile plow encounters a rock, pull the boot up over
the rock and tap Recalc.
This modifies the design to ensure the remaining tile run
stays within the minimum slope requirement and prevents
the pipe from diving down to the original design grade.
Note  – This works only when installing tile in the direction away
from the outlet point.

Height Offset Increase button Raise the tile boot or blade by the blade step increment.

Height Offset Decrease button Lower the tile boot or blade by the blade step increment.

Height Offset Coarse or Fine When you tap Coarse, the increase or decrease button
button moves the blade by the Coarse Blade increment. This
enables you to move the blade by a larger increment.
When you tap Fine, the increase or decrease button moves
the blade by the fine increment.

Pitch Offset Increase Raises the blade pitch relative to the design pitch.

Pitch Offset Decrease Lowers the blade pitch relative to the design pitch.

Coarse (Pitch Offset) When you tap Coarse, the increase or decrease button
moves the blade by the Coarse Pitch increment. This
enables you to move the blade pitch by a larger increment.

Point and slope mode

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the WM-Drain panel.

2. Go to the Install tab of the panel. Use the controls for installation or ditch cleaning.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 467

Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Control Explanation
Survey Tap to open the Survey screen where you can survey the section line
you will design.
Design Tap to open the Design screen where you can select a section line
and then edit the design.
Note  – A white cross displays on the Run screen to show both the
horizontal and vertical location.

Mode l Autoslope: Creates sloped tile or surface drainage targeting the

optimal depth defined on the Design tab.
l Slope: Creates consistently sloped tile or surface drainage. From
the starting point, the vehicle leves at a constant slope,
regardless of direction.
l Constant Depth: Use to collect a live, rolling survey of the
ground surface. This survey is passed in real time to the control
system, which enables it to run at the specified depth above or
below the ground surface.
The constant depth mode can only be accessed when you have
properly configured manual guidance, Autopilot or EZ-Pilot.
Run depth is defined by setting the Height Offset value to the
desired depth. Examples:
l For a consistent depth of 4.0' (1.22 m), adjust the Height
Offset to -4.0' (-1.22m).
l For a consistent height of 6" (0.15 m) above the ground
surface, adjust the Height Offset to 6" (0.15cm).
This mode requires two RTK-enabled receivers are available and
assigned on the system. One of the RTK-enabled receivers:
l Is not required to be an internal receiver
l Must be assigned to the appropriate guidance
plugin/feature
l Must be mounted in front of the antenna used for WM-
Drain

Pipe l Pipe Type: Select the type of pipe to be installed.

l Pipe Size: The size of the pipe to be installed.

Slope Increase Increase the design slope by the Slope Adjust increment.

Slope Decrease Decrease the design slope by the Slope Adjust increment.

468 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

18   Operations Water Management functionality

Control Explanation

Height Offset Increase Raise the tile boot or blade by the Slope Adjust increment.

Height Offset Lower the tile boot or blade by the Slope Adjust increment.
Decrease

Height Offset Increase Raise the boot or blade by the blade step increment.

Height Offset Lower the boot or blade by the blade step increment.
Decrease

Slope Select a defined percentage of vertical drop for a horizontal distance

traveled.

Coarse (Height Offset) When you tap Coarse, the increase or decrease button moves the
blade by the Coarse Blade increment. This enables you to move the
blade by a larger increment.

Pitch Offset Increase Raises the blade pitch relative to the design pitch.

Pitch Offset Decrease Lowers the blade pitch relative to the design pitch.

Coarse (Pitch Offset) When you tap Coarse, the increase or decrease button moves the
blade by the Coarse Pitch increment. This enables you to move the
blade pitch by a larger increment.

Auto Set Automatics to the hydraulic valve. The blade or tile boot will be
driven to the design depth depending on where you are located
relative to the section line.

Logging Tap to log coverage to be able to see on your map where you have
been dependent on your implement width. A shape file will also be
created with cut/fill and height information.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 469

 Yield Monitoring operation 18   Operations

Yield Monitoring operation

Yield Monitoring enables you to track the:
l Loads of grains harvested through the season for a field.
After the harvest is complete, use the Farm Works™ Mapping software to track loads in the
office. See Load tracking (page 472).
l Variety of grains harvested throughout the season for a field that has an associated planting
variety map.
After harvest is complete, use the Farm Works Mapping software to create and view a yield
variety report to see a yield by variety comparison. See Variety tracking (page 471).

Yield Monitoring panel

To access the Yield Monitoring panel, at the Run screen tap .
The panel contains several views that you can navigate between.

Crop summary and details

The initial view shows each crop being harvested and summary information for each one.
Tap a crop/summary section to see more details about the crop.
To change the status items that show for a crop, at the Crop Name view tap Edit Overview.

470 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 18   Operations Yield Monitoring operation

Variety tracking
For a field that has an associated planting variety map, Yield Monitoring enables you to track the
variety of grains harvested throughout the season.

Variety map
When you are planting or seeding and are using version 6.0 or later of the FmX integrated display, a
variety map layer is created within the Field folder if you are using either:

l Field-IQ crop input control system

l Serial Rate Control
When you open the client, farm, and field and create a harvest event, the system automatically
loads the variety map layer into the background on the screen.
Note  – Set up the implement as a harvest operation if you want the variety map layer to display.
After harvest is complete, use the Farm Works Mapping software to create and view a yield variety
report to see a yield by variety comparison.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 471

 Yield Monitoring operation 18   Operations

Load tracking
Yield Monitoring tracks loads of grains harvested through the season for a field. After the harvest is
complete, use the Farm Works™ Mapping software to track loads in the office.
At the Load Details screen, you can view for each load listed:

Item Explanation

Load Name Name you assigned to the load

Recorded Weight The weight of the load

Scale Ticket Weight

Recorded Moisture

Scale Ticket Moisture

472 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 CHAPTER
19
Diagnostics

In this chapter:
This chapter covers diagnostics and
troubleshooting.
System diagnostics 474
Autopilot diagnostics 476
EZ-Pilot diagnostics 479
EZ-Steer diagnostics 480
Field-IQ diagnostics 480
FieldLevel II diagnostics valve test 503
GPS status 503
GreenSeeker diagnostics 504
Row-Guidance diagnostics 505
Vehicle Sync diagnostics 506
Yield Monitoring diagnostics 507

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 473

 System diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

System diagnostics
At the Configuration screen, select System and then tap Diagnostics. Each tab contains specific
information about the system:

l Advanced system diagnostics (page 474)

l CAN Bus data (page 475)
l Network diagnostics (page 475)
l Serial Comms (page 476)

Advanced system diagnostics

1. At the Configuration screen, tap System and then tap Diagnostics.
2. Go to the Advanced tab.
3. Select the Diagnostics Level. This determines how much debugging information is logged in the
program files.

Item Explanation
1 Minimal level of information
6 (default) Medium level of information
9 Highest level of information

4. At Swath Control Points, select whether to hide or show swath control points.
When the guidance line is a curve, it displays on-screen as a series of short straight sections
joined together. Swath control points appear where these line segments meet.

You can also use the System Diagnostics screen to view raw port data. For more information, see
Serial Comms (page 476).

474 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 19   Diagnostics System diagnostics

CAN Bus data

You can view CAN Bus data as the display receives it.
To view the data:

1. At the Configuration screen, select System and then tap Diagnostics.

2. Go to the CAN Bus tab.
3. To view the data from a port, tap View. The port diagnostics screen for that port displays.
4. To capture data, tap the Capture button. Approximately five seconds of serial data is captured
and then displays on the screen. You can review the data or capture another snapshot of data.
5. To close the screen, tap OK.

Configuration data
1. To view display configuration information, tap .
2. The Home screen shows:
l Display firmware information
l Autopilot controller information
l GPS receiver and correction method information
l Vehicle make and model

Network diagnostics
1. At the Configuration screen, tap System and then tap Diagnostics.
2. Go to the Network tab.

The status of various network connections display.

To enable Remote Assistant, select Enabled.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 475

 Autopilot diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Serial Comms
You can view raw serial data as the display receives it. This can be useful for analyzing the GPS signal.
To view the raw serial data:

1. At the Configuration screen, select System and then tap Diagnostics.

2. Go to the Serial Comms tab. This diagnostics screen shows each of the connectors (ports) on the
display harness and the number of data packets that have been sent and received.
3. To view the raw data from a port, tap View.
4. To capture data, tap Capture. Approximately five seconds of serial data is captured and then
displays on the screen. You can review the data or capture another snapshot of data.
5. To close the screen, tap OK.
Note  – Text shown in green is incoming data. Text shown in red is outgoing data.

Autopilot diagnostics
1. At the Configuration screen, select Autopilot.

2. Tap Diagnostics. The Vehicle Controller Setup - Guidance screen displays. From this screen, you
can access information on:
l Guidance
l Steering
l Details
l Fault log
l Warnings

Controls
The following buttons are available on every tab:

l Engage: You can tap to engages or disengage the system. The button also shows the current
engage state. When this button is red, tap it to see the fault that is preventing the automatic
mode.
l View Fault Log : Tap to view faults.
l View Warning : Tap to view warnings.

476 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

19   Diagnostics Autopilot diagnostics

Guidance tab
Section Explanation

Offline distance graph A graph of offline distance over time. Useful for
diagnosing problems with the vehicle coming online and
staying online.

GPS status Current GPS position fix quality and number of satellites

Heading error The difference between vehicle heading and path heading

Roll Current roll value calculated by the system

Direction Current vehicle direction: Forward, backward, or stopped

Cross Track Error Numeric value of the offline distance

On-screen lightbar Visual representation of offline distance

Heading Current vehicle heading calculated by the system

Speed Current vehicle speed calculated by the system

1PPS Shows whether the 1PPS signal from a GPS receiver is

detected

Aggressiveness A slider to adjust the aggressiveness of the steering

system.

Nudge Enter the increment of distance you want for nudging.

Steering tab
Section Explanation

PWM status Shows the current PWM signals being sent to the electro-
hydraulic valve. This is an indication of whether the system is
attempting to turn left or right.

Steering command override Bypasses the normal steering command to the wheels. With
this feature, you can force a certain angle of turn and make
sure that the system responds as expected.

Steering angle Required angle: The angle that the system is trying to attain
Steering angle: Where the system calculates the wheels are
pointing

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 477

 Autopilot diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Section Explanation
Enable

Reset

Details tab
Section Explanation

Diagnostics Vehicle and configuration specific diagnostics. Up to nine

diagnostics can be shown.

Accelerometers Raw voltage and scaled G-force for each of the system’s
accelerometers

Vehicle voltage Input voltage currently being fed into the Autopilot system
from the vehicle’s electrical system

Vehicle voltage Input voltage currently being fed into the Autopilot system
from the vehicle’s electrical system

Autopilot Faults screen

The Autopilot Faults screen lists all faults on the Autopilot controller. To access this screen tap View
Fault Log .

Item Explanation

Active Faults that are currently active

History Faults that have previously occurred

Cancel Tap to close the screen.
Refresh Fault Lists Tap to see the latest faults.
Clear History Tap to clear historical faults.
Close & Clear Faults Tap to clear all faults and close the screen.

Warning screen
When you are viewing the vehicle diagnostics screens, the View Warning button flashes red if there is
an active warning. To view any active warnings, tap the button.

478 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 19   Diagnostics EZ-Pilot diagnostics

EZ-Pilot diagnostics
The EZ-Pilot Diagnostics screen contains the statistics for the IMD-600 and SAM-200 and inertial
information.

1. At the Home screen, tap .

2. At the Configuration screen, tap EZ-Pilot and then tap Diagnostics.

The EZ-Pilot Diagnostics screen displays.

IMD-600 status Explanation

Status Status of the system's connection to the IMD-600

Version Firmware version of the IMD-600

Serial Number Serial number of the IMD-600

SAM-200 status Explanation

Status Status of the system's connection to the SAM-200

Version Firmware version of the SAM-200

Serial Number Serial number of the SAM-600

Temperature Temperature of the SAM-600

Voltage

3. To view faults, tap View Fault Log .

4. To adjust the steering performance of the system, tap Steering Performance. See EZ-Pilot system
calibration (page 195).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 479

 EZ-Steer diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

EZ-Steer diagnostics
1. At the Home screen, tap .

2. At the Configuration screen, tap EZ-Steer and then tap Diagnostics. The EZ-Steer Diagnostics
screen displays the SCM statistics and inertial information.
3. To view faults, tap View Fault Log .
4. To adjust the steering performance of the system, tap Steering Perf . See EZ-Steer system
calibration (page 203).

Field-IQ diagnostics
1. At the Home screen, tap .

2. At the Configuration screen, tap Field-IQ and then tap Diagnostics. The Field-IQ Diagnostics
screen displays.

Operations tab
On this tab, you can:

l Test optional switch box (page 394) if you are using an optional section switch box
l Enter values manually (page 393)
l Enable sections (page 393)

Status Item Explanation

Control Mode Auto or Manual

Rate Switch Mode Manual, Rate 1 or Rate 2

Applied Rate The rate being applied

Current Flow Relation of material being applied to time

Control Speed Speed you are moving

Master Switch Indicates which switches have been assigned to each section.

Tap View Error Log to see all errors listed since the last time the log was cleared.
Tap Section Test to begin a sequence of engaging each section and groups of sections.

480 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

The color coding for the sections are:

Section Number Tab Section Indicator Graphic Section is... Section switch
is...

Not indented Red Not armed Off

Not indented Gray Not armed On

Indented Red Armed Off

Indented Green Armed On

Testing section switches

Testing the switches from the Diagnostic screen is useful because you do not have to open a field or
set a manual speed and manual coverage to make the section switches active.
At the Operation tab:

1. Arm the sections by tapping on the box with the sections you want to turn on.
2. Flip the section switches to test that they are working properly and are in the correct order.

Hardware tab
On this tab, the control modules are listed with the:

l Serial number of the module

l Position on the implement
l Firmware version
l Status of CAN connection
l Tx/Rx number of packets

Row Monitor tab

The status column of this screen indicates:

l Disabled: Sensor is not detected.

l Off: Sensor is detected but is not actively looking for seed.
l On: Sensor is detected and is looking for seed. (The field is open with system planting.)

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 481

Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Field-IQ faults and troubleshooting

Faults
Message That Displays Explanation Possible Causes / Actions

Field-IQ devices not found. One or more Field-IQ Check:

system devices in the
l Implement selection
current implement
configuration are not l Cabling and fuses
present. l Field-IQ Diagnostics to identify
missing modules
l Field-IQ Setup

New Field-IQ devices need The Field-IQ system cannot Check:

configuring. Please go to be used without the master
l Cabling
the Field-IQ Setup. switch box.
l To see if CAN has been dropped.

Check terminators.
The 12-section switch box Field-IQ can operate Check:
has been disconnected. without the 12-section
l Cabling
Sections will be controlled switch box. Section
automatically. switching will depend only l To see if CAN has been dropped.

on existing coverage, field Check terminators.

boundaries and exclusion
zones. To get on-screen
buttons for controlling
sections, cycle power to the
display.

One or more Field-IQ One or more Field-IQ Check:

system devices were system devices have lost
1. Cabling and fuses
disconnected. communication with the
system. 2. Field-IQ system Diagnostics to
identify missing modules
3. Field-IQ System Setup

Rate not achievable For The target application rate Maximum flow/rpm has been set too
current target rate, the cannot be achieved within low for desired speed and rate.
maximum speed is X mph. the configured maximum
RPM at the current speed.
The Field-IQ system is

482 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

Message That Displays Explanation Possible Causes / Actions

limiting the RPM to the

configured maximum.

Target rate may not be At the current speed and Minimum flow/rpm has been set to
achieved for current target target application rate, the high for desired speed and rate.
rate, the minimum speed is required RPM is below the
X\ mph. configured minimum RPM
limit.

The current coverage A "combing" coverage Contact Trimble support.

pattern will degrade system pattern is being generated
performance. because of a mix of on and
off boom sections. This
causes generation of many
coverage polygons,
possibly leading to
degraded system
performance.
Hydraulic motor over The hydraulic motor is not
speed. running at the commanded
or speed.
Hydraulic motor under
speed
Rate control stopped due The hydraulic motor was
to hydraulic motor over stopped due to it not
speed running at commanded
or speed.
Rate control stopped due
to hydraulic motor under
speed

Hydraulic motor stalled No RPM is being reported from

Rate control has been encoder.
disabled. Toggle the master
switch to re-enable rate
control.
Check the hydraulic motor. The hydraulic motor is not Check hydraulic pressure.
It ran too fast (Rawson). running at the commanded
speed
Degraded GPS. The GPS positions are
Automatic section control

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 483

Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Message That Displays Explanation Possible Causes / Actions

has been disabled. uncorrected. Due to
Use switches to control potential inaccuracy of the
sections. positions, the Field-IQ
system will not switch the
boom sections
automatically. You must
control the sections
manually through the
switches.
No GPS. The Field-IQ system is no
Automatic rate and section longer adjusting the
control has been disabled. application rate. You are
Please maintain speed at X prompted to maintain the
mph. current speed. The last
sentence appears only if
the master switch was on
at the time of the warning.

Tank/bin level is getting General system warning

low.
Using jump start speed. The GPS speed has been
Please maintain speed at overridden with the jump
XX mph. start speed. You must drive
at that speed to maintain
the current target
application rate.

A power brown-out has Warning typically appears Check:

occurred - check cabling when system drops under
l Cabling and fuses
and fuses - check power 10 V.
supply l Power supply

Section controller reported Possible causes:

over-current. Controller is drawing too much
Section and rate control current.
have been disabled. There is an electrical short
Toggle the master switch to somewhere.
re-enable control.
Rate and Section Control Number of nozzles has not
Module Not Configured been set.
Please set the number of

484 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

Message That Displays Explanation Possible Causes / Actions

nozzles in the Field-IQ
Setup

Controller Requires Valve Go to the Valve Calibration screen to

Calibration set the valve type.
Sprayer configuration error The valve type, plumbing,
Check the settings on the or auxiliary valve setting is
Valve Calibration screen incorrect.
Flow meter configuration The flow meter calibration
error number has not been set.
Check the flow meter
calibration
Shaft encoder The shaft encoder constant
configuration error has not been set.
Check the Shaft Encoder
Constant in the Flow
Calibration screen
Valve configuration error The valve settings are not
Check the valve calibration valid for the selected valve
type.

Unknown Field-IQ This message shows if the Check firmware versions. Report this
configuration error FmX integrated display fault to Trimble Support.
does not understand the
fault code that was
received from the rate and
section control module.

No flow detected The Field-IQ system Possible causes:

attempted to apply
l Incorrect flow calibration
material, but the flow
sensor failed to detect any l Damaged or disconnected
flow. feedback sensor
l Broken valve wiring

Attention Minimum flow The current target

XX gal/min is applying application rate and speed
require a flow that is less
than the configured
minimum flow limit. The
flow will be at that limit

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 485

Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Message That Displays Explanation Possible Causes / Actions

instead. Therefore, the

actual applied rate will
probably be above the
target rate.

Rate not responding. The flow sensor indicates Verify correct setup on the Valve
that the actual flow is not Calibration screen.
changing as expected. Perform a valve calibration.
Inspect feedback sensor and rate
control valve for damage.

Unstable flow control The rate and section Check the Plumbing setting on the
control module is having Valve Calibration screen
difficulty maintaining the Reduce Field-IQ system
target flow, possibly due to aggressiveness.
an incorrect setup.

Valve controller reported Possible causes:

over-current
l Control valve is drawing too
much current.
l There is an electrical short
somewhere.

Unknown valve error This message shows if the Probably due to incompatible
FmX integrated display firmware versions. Make sure that
does not understand the the correct firmware versions and the
fault code that was rate and section control module are
received from the rate and installed.
section control module. Report this fault to Trimble Support.

Unable to lock valve An error occurred when Probably due to incompatible

position. attempting to lock the firmware. Make sure that the correct
position of the control firmware versions are installed on the
valve. FmX integrated display and the rate
and section control module.

Unable to start flow An error occurred when Probably due to incompatible

attempting to control the firmware. Make sure that the correct
valve. firmware versions are installed on the
FmX integrated displayand the rate
and section control module.

Field-IQ unknown internal This message appears if the Make sure that the correct firmware
error versions are installed on the FmX

486 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

Message That Displays Explanation Possible Causes / Actions

FmX integrated display integrated display and the rate and

does not understand the section control module.
fault code that was Report this fault to Trimble Support.
received from the rate and
section control module.
Probably due to
incompatible firmware
versions.

The second pressure entry The pressure calibration

must differ from the first process requires calibration
Please enter a different at two different pressures.
pressure This message indicates that
you entered the same
pressure twice.
Note  – Zero is a valid
pressure for calibration.

No pressure change has The pressure calibration The pressure in the system must be
been detected Please process requires calibration changed between readings, for
change the system at two different pressures. example, by either:
pressure This message indicates that l Opening or closing a valve
the report from the
pressure sensor did not l Starting or stopping the pump.
change when the second If this message persists after the
reading was taken. pressure is changed, check the
installation and wiring of the pressure
sensor.

Invalid setup for flow Check:

calibration
l Total Nozzles in the Boom tab in
the Field-IQ system setup
l Width in the Hardware tab in
Field-IQ Setup
l Flow meter number

Invalid setup for granular Check:

calibration
l Shaft Encoder Constant
l Width in the Hardware tab in
Field-IQ Setup
The second gate height The gate height calibration

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 487

Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Message That Displays Explanation Possible Causes / Actions

entry must differ from the process requires calibration
first at two different gate
Please enter a different heights. This message
height indicates that you entered
the same gate height twice.

Note  – Zero is a valid gate

height for calibration.

No gate height change has The gate height calibration If this message persists after the gate
been detected process requires calibration is moved, check the installation and
Please change the gate at two different gate wiring of the gate height sensor.
height heights. This message
indicates that the report
from the gate height sensor
did not change when the
second reading was taken.
The gate must be raised or
lowered between readings.
Gate not open The Field-IQ system is Open the gate, or enter a non-zero
Please open the gate attempting to dispense gate height.If the gate is already
material, but the gate open, check the installation and
height sensor indicates that wiring of the gate height sensor.
the gate is closed. Or if the
gate height sensor is
disabled, you did not enter
a non-zero gate height.
The spinner pulses per
revolution setting is invalid
Please check the spinner
sensor setup
The tank/bin is empty The tank/bin level sensor If this is incorrect, check the tank/bin
Please refill tank/bin has reported that the sensor installation and wiring.
tank/bin is empty.

Valve Calibration Not This shows only during The vehicle is moving too slow to
Started. auto valve calibration, begin the automatic valve calibration.
which is not available in Increase the speed of the vehicle and
firmware version 4.0. For start the valve calibration again
safety reasons, when
running an auto valve

488 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

Message That Displays Explanation Possible Causes / Actions

calibration for anhydrous,

the vehicle must be moving
at a speed of at least 2
mph. If the vehicle speed is
above 2 mph, check that
the FmX integrated display
is receiving valid GPS
positions.

Valve Calibration Failed The vehicle is moving too Increase the speed of the vehicle and
slow to continue the start the valve calibration again.
automatic valve calibration.

Please turn off the master The Field-IQ system is in a

switch mode in which material
application is not expected.
It is asking for the master
switch to be turned off to
make the system safe.

NH3 is an irritant and The application type is set

corrosive to the skin, eyes, to Anhydrous
respiratory tract and
mucous membranes and is
dangerous if not handled
properly. May cause severe
burns to the eyes, lungs
and skin. Skin and
respiratory related diseases
could be aggravated by
exposure. It is
recommended that
protective gloves, boots,
slicker and/or pants and
jacket, and chemical-splash
goggles that are impervious
to anhydrous ammonia are
worn at all times.
Application width is The total of the rate
different from the control controller widths in the
width. Hardware tab of the Field-
Please visit Field-IQ setup

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 489

Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Message That Displays Explanation Possible Causes / Actions

to reconfigure settings. IQ Setup must match the
application width in the
Implement Setup. A
difference of about 0.4
inches is tolerated.
Application width is This message could appear
different from the control when you exit the Field-IQ
and section width. Setup.
Do you want the control The total of the rate
and section width to be controller widths in the
automatically adjusted to Hardware tab of the Field-
match the application IQ Setup must match the
width? application width in the
Implement Setup. A
difference of about 0.4
inches is tolerated.

Please select your NH3 unit This messages shows if the

application type is
anhydrous and you
attempt to exit the Field-IQ
Setup without selecting the
Anhydrous Units type ("lbs.
Actual N" or "lbs. NH3") in
the Features tab.
The total number of rows This message may appear
assigned to sections (XX) when you exit the Field-IQ
exceeds the number of Setup.
rows on the implement The total of the numbers in
(XX) the fields in the Sections
Press Continue to exit the tab exceeds the number of
Field-IQ Setup or press Edit rows configured in the
to edit the row Implement Setup.
assignments.
XX implement rows are not This message may appear
assigned to sections when you exit the Field-IQ
Press Continue to exit the Setup.
Field-IQ Setup or press Edit The total of the numbers in
to edit the row the fields in the Sections
assignments. tab exceeds the number of
rows configured in the
Implement Setup.

490 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

Message That Displays Explanation Possible Causes / Actions

The number of nozzles This message could appear

must not be less than the when you exit the Field-IQ
total number of sections. Setup.
The total number of
sections in the Hardware
tab exceeds the Total
Nozzles setting in the Rate
tab. There must be at least
as many nozzles as
sections.

Some devices have not This message shows when

been identified by serial you exit the Field-IQ Setup,
number. if one or more of the serial
number selection fields in
the Hardware tab has no
serial number selected.
None of the expected Field- The rate and/or section
IQ system devices were controllers that are
found on the implement. identified in the current
Do you want to switch to Field-IQ system
another implement configuration were not
configuration? detected on the CAN bus.
None of the configured The rate and/or section
Field IQ devices are controllers that are
connected. identified in the current
Do you want to remove all Field\ IQ configuration
of the missing devices from were not detected on the
the Field IQ hardware CAN bus.
configuration?
Fence nozzle is enabled The If the left fence nozzle is
configured sections exceed enabled in the Sections tab
the maximum that is of the Field IQ Setup, the
supported leftmost section controller
Please reduce the number must not have more than
of sections 11 sections.
If the right fence nozzle is
enabled in the Sections tab
of the Field-IQ Setup, the
rightmost section
controller must not have
more than 11 sections.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 491

Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Message That Displays Explanation Possible Causes / Actions

Cannot flush because the This message appears if

system is not calibrated. you try to use the Manual
Flush button in the
Tank/Bin tab of the Field-IQ
Setup when a rate
controller is not yet
calibrated.
Rate and Section Control When using multiple rate
Module and Rawson controllers for 1 material,
Control Module can not be they must all be of the
present at the same time. same type.
Please disconnect either
device before continuing
setup.

Field-IQ has been disabled When using multiple rate

Rate and Section Control controllers for 1 material,
Module and Rawson they must all be of the
Control Module cannot be same type.
present at the same time.
Field-IQ has been disabled Go to the calibration screen to
One or more of the Field-IQ calibrate a controller.
system devices requires
calibration

Please enter a valid The flow meter constant

flowmeter calibration must be greater than zero.
constant

Weighed NH3 (End) must This appears during

be less than Weighed NH3 anhydrous flow calibration.
(Start).
The process requires you to
enter the weighed amounts
of NH3 at the start and end
of a run. If this warning
appears, it is likely that you
transposed the two
amounts.
No target rate This will appear if you try to
The flush cannot be flush when the current
performed until a target target rate is zero.

492 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

Message That Displays Explanation Possible Causes / Actions

rate has been set
Please select a target rate
The calibration cannot be The granular flow
completed because the calibration requires you to
quantity dispensed is zero. enter the amount that was
Press Edit to edit the dispensed. This message
quantity or Restart to shows if the entered
restart the calibration. amount was zero.
Calibration Failed The granular calibration
The flow calibration was failed because you
cancelled cancelled the calibration or
an error occurred.
Calibration Failed The granular flow Check that the shaft turns during
No flow was detected calibration failed because calibration.
there were no pulses Check the installation and wiring of
reported from the shaft the shaft encoder.
encoder.
Calibration Failed The granular calibration
No material was dispensed failed because you entered
zero for the actual amount
of material dispensed.
The selected target rate This shows during granular
and speed cannot be calibration if the target rate
achieved. and target speed that you
Reduce target speed or entered require the shaft to
target rate. turn faster than the
maximum RPM that is set
in the Limits tab in the flow
calibration screen.
The selected target rate This shows during granular
and speed may not be calibration if the target rate
achieved. and target speed that you
It is recommended that the entered require the shaft to
target speed be increased. turn slower than the
minimum RPM that is set in
the Limits tab in the flow
calibration screen.
If you choose to continue,
the Field-IQ system tries to

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 493

Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Message That Displays Explanation Possible Causes / Actions

run the system below the
minimum RPM limit.
The calibration constant This message shows at the
changed significantly. end of the granular
For best results it is calibration process, if the
recommended that the calibration constant
calibration be repeated. changed by more than
30%.

Motor failed to start This message shows if the

hydraulic motor fails to
start during the Rawson
Control Module Hydraulic
Test.

Motor stopped This message shows if the

unexpectedly hydraulic motor stops
unexpectedly during the
Rawson Control Module
Hydraulic Test.
The number of seeds This message may appear
dispensed did not match during calibration of a
the number of seeds Rawson Control Module in
expected. Do you want to a planter application. If the
adjust the calibration calibration test does not
constant in order to attain dispense the expected
the target rate?
number of seeds, it is likely
Adjusting the calibration that the seed pick up is not
constant will alter the seed operating perfectly. You
spacing.
can adjust the calibration
constant to compensate
for this but the seed
spacing will be inconsistent
where seeds are missed or
doubled up.
Calibration Failed This message shows if the
The motor failed to turn hydraulic motor fails to
turn during calibration of a
Rawson Control Module.
Speed Too Low For safety reasons, the

494 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

Message That Displays Explanation Possible Causes / Actions

The vehicle is moving too Field-IQ system will not
slow for safe anhydrous apply anhydrous in auto
application. Increase the rate control mode at
speed of the vehicle. speeds below 2 mph. Either
increase the speed or
switch to manual mode.

Anhydrous Rate Control troubleshooting

Unable to open valve.
1. Check all for proper valve type in rate control setup.
2. NH3 will not operate unless vehicle is moving over 1.5 MPH.
If settings are correct:

1. Disconnect the tank from the system.

2. Set the system up as a liquid.
3. Check that system has control of the valve when in manual rate. (During this procedure a no
flow detected warning may appear. This is normal as there is no flow going through the system)
4. For FmX integrated display 6.5 and up. System will run in diagnostics. (Only attempt after trying
the previous steps.)
If system will run in diagnostics:

1. Check color of sections in the run screen. If sections are red there is an issue.
a. Check that system is not outside a boundary (open a new field to test)
b. Check that system is not over a previously applied area.
c. Check that system has a "fixed" GPS position.
2. Check that the material has not been disabled in the material detail screen.

Unable to reach target.

1. Check that system control components are sized properly.
2. See if the valve will open any further when set to manual rate. (if not, may be a tank or cooler
limitation)
If system is sized properly for rate:

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 495

 Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

1. Check minimum and maximum flow settings.

2. Check that the flowmeter calibration is close to the number listed on the tag.
If settings check ok:
Check that control valve has been calibrated.
If PWM, check upper PWM limit under advanced parameters. May need to be set to 100%.

Rate fluctuates around target.

1. Check that a drive calibration has been performed.
2. Turn valve on and set rate switch to Manual to lock the valve.
3. If the rate still fluctuates check the flowmeter. (may be a cooler or a tank issue)
If the rate holds in manual, the valve needs to be tuned.

Any Implement Section Control troubleshooting

Section Control does not work.
1. Check that section control has been completely set up.
2. Check that switching type is set up properly. Boom valve Vs. air clutch
3. Check that auxiliary power and auxiliary I/O on the Field-IQ cables are connected. (if present)
If system is set up properly:

1. Run a flow calibration (catch test.) This will force the sections on and confirm that all cabling and
connections are correct.
2. Operate the system in diagnostics. (FmX integrated display only) Arm sections at bottom of the
screen and perform a catch test.
If system works in diagnostics:

1. Check color of sections in the run screen. If sections are red there is an issue.
a. Check that system is not outside a boundary (open a new field to test)
b. Check that system is not over a previously applied area.
c. Check that system has a "fixed" GPS position.
2. If sections are yellow, boom valves should be on but no flow is detected.
3. Check that the material has not been disabled in the material detail screen.

496 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

Section control timing is off.

1. Check that all implement and vehicle measurements are correct. (Do not guess. These
measurements are crucial for an accurate application.)
2. Check that start and end overlaps have not been adjusted to take care of timing issues. (These
settings are only used for intentional overlap!)
If sections are coming on too late or shutting off too late:

1. Check that start and end overlaps are set to the desired intentional overlap.
2. Raise the on latency to allow the section to turn on earlier.
3. Raise the off latency to allow the system to start turning off earlier. Typically these settings are
no more than 5 seconds. If they are higher double check implement measurements.
If sections are coming on too early or shutting off too early:

1. Check that start and end overlaps are set to desired intentional overlap.
2. Lower the on latency if the system is turning on too soon.
3. Lower the off latency if the system is shutting off too soon.
4. If settings are set to 0 and system is still not accurate check implement measurements.

Any Implement Sensor troubleshooting

Erratic sensor readings.
1. Has sensor been calibrated?
2. Check that sensor is specified properly for the system.
3. Make sure the feedback voltage is in the right range. Pressure sensors are 0 to 5 V.

Erratic flowmeter / encoder readings.

1. Check all cabling and connections.
2. Check that the encoder constant is correct.
3. Check that there isn’t a rate control issue by setting the Rate to Manual to lock the valve.
4. Check that the meter is sized properly for the application.
5. Check that there is nothing mechanically wrong with the meter.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 497

 Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Lift switch won't calibrate.

1. Check that the switch is plugged in
2. Check that switch works. Use a volt meter to check continuity on the switch. One way it will be
open the other way it will be a closed circuit.

Switch is functional.
1. Jump the A and B terminals at the module harness to bypass cabling. If this works check all
cabling.
2. If previous test didn’t work set up a new implement. May be a bad module.
3. Check that the OEM harness is not supplying constant power to signal wire.

Planter Rate Control troubleshooting

Unable to turn motor.
1. Check valve type in Rate control set up.
2. Check that hydraulic motor is receiving flow.
3. Check that motor will pass a drive calibration (PWM) only.
4. Perform a hydraulics test (Rawson).
If the motor will run in the calibration screen, check the operation of the system in the Field-IQ
diagnostics screen.

1. Enter a manual speed and turn all sections on.

2. Arm all sections at the bottom of the screen.
3. If equipped with an implement switch make sure it is calibrated and shows the implement in
the running position.
If motor ran in diagnostics screen:

1. Check color of sections in the run screen. If sections are red there is an issue.
a. Check that system is not outside a boundary (open a new field to test)
b. Check that system is not over a previously applied area.
c. Check that system has a "fixed" GPS position
2. Check that the material has not been disabled in the material detail screen.

498 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

Unable to reach target rate.

1. Check that maximum meter RPM has not been set to low. System defaults to 120 RPM
2. Rawson: Check that maximum motor RPM has been set to 300 RPM
3. Check Gear ratio and encoder constant (gear ratio needs to be figured from the encoder to the
meter.)
4. Check info tab in the drive calibration screen. Make sure target rates and speeds are logical. If
they are not this usually represents improper Field-IQ system set up.
If the settings check out okay:

1. Check that the control valve has been calibrated. If PWM, check upper PWM limit under
advanced parameters. May need to be set to 100%.
2. Rawson: Check that the motor will reach 300 RPM in the hydraulic test. If it will and system still
can’t reach rate check that the gear ratio will allow system to reach target rate. Formula on
page.
If the rate fluctuates around the target:

1. Check that a drive calibration has been performed.

2. If population monitoring is on, disable it to see target rate of the motors. If system holds rate it
is a seed monitoring issue.
Drive calibration is performed (PWM):

1. Check that motor(s) have sufficient hydraulic flow.

2. Raise the PWM base frequency to 200Hz. (if PWM valve is a raven set to 120hz)
Rawson:

1. Check that drive is running above 100 RPM. Adjust gear ratio to achieve proper RPM.
2. Isolate the drive from the seed shaft. Make sure the drive operates properly with no load.

No communication with seed sensors.

1. Check that the Auxiliary I/O connector is plugged in.
2. A power cycle must be performed every time a cable is plugged in. The system only looks for
the sensors on boot up. If they are not present it won’t look for them until power is cycled.
3. Check that sensors are compatible with Field-IQ.
If the cables are connected:

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 499

 Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

1. Check for the right harness.

2. CT harness (John Deere) will always have pins 27 and 28 populated. These will be a power and a
ground that provides 8 V to the sensors. DO NOT ASSUME YOUR JD PLANTER HAS A CT
HARNESS IT MAY HAVE BEEN RETROFITTED WITHA PM STYLE HARNESS.
3. PM harness. (Also referred to as a Dickey John or DJ harness. Typically on all planters but JD.)
These harnesses will have pins 24-27 populated. 24 and 25 are 8 V power. 26 and 27 are ground.
If you have the correct harness and have power to the sensor:
Check that all the sensors have 8 V power and 5 volt signal. If not this could represent a bad seed
sensor harness.

Planter Seed Sensor troubleshooting

No communication with seed sensors.
1. Check that the Auxiliary I/O connector is plugged in.
2. A power cycle must be performed every time a cable is plugged in. The system only looks for
the sensors on boot up. If they are not present it won’t look for them until power is cycled.
3. Check that sensors are compatible with Field-IQ.
If the cables are connected:

1. Check for the right harness.

2. CT harness (John Deere) will always have pins 27 and 28 populated. These will be a power and a
ground that provides 8 V to the sensors. DO NOT ASSUME YOUR JD PLANTER HAS A CT
HARNESS IT MAY HAVE BEEN RETROFITTED WITHA PM STYLE HARNESS.
3. PM harness. (Also referred to as a Dickey John or DJ harness. Typically on all planters but JD.)
These harnesses will have pins 24-27 populated. 24 and 25 are 8 V power. 26 and 27 are ground.
If you have the correct harness and have power to the sensor:
Check that all the sensors have 8 V power and 5 volt signal. If not this could represent a bad seed
sensor harness.

Sprayer/Liquid Strip Till Rate Control troubleshooting

Control valve will not open.
1. Check valve type in Rate control set up.
2. Check that hydraulic motor is receiving flow (PWM)(pump servo).

500 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

3. Check that the product pump is on and producing flow (Servo).

For PWM:

1. Check that system will pass a drive calibration.

a. If not check that max flow setting has not been set too high. This setting is dependent of
nozzle size. Refer to a tip chart.
b. If system still will not pass perform the calibration with no tips.
2. Sprayers with a pump arming relay:
Check that the pump arming relay is working by checking that the relay clicks on when the
pump is armed. (there will be 12 V at terminal 85 on the relay)
For Servo:

1. Operate the valve in the drive settings screen.

2. Check that there is manual control of the valve in manual rate control. If there is no control
check cabling.
3. If valve will work in manual, it may need to be calibrated to work in auto. See calibration
procedure.
If the system ran in Diagnostics:

1. Check color of sections in the run screen. If sections are red there is an issue.
a. Check that system is not outside a boundary (open a new field to test)
b. Check that system is not over a previously applied area.
c. Check that system has a "fixed" GPS position.
2. Check that the material has not been disabled in the material detail screen.

Unable to reach target rate.

If unable to reach target:

1. Check that system control components are sized properly.

2. Check that nozzles are sized properly for sprayer.
3. See if the valve will open any further when set to manual rate. (if not may be a pump issue)
If system is sized properly for rate:

1. Check minimum and maximum flow settings.

2. Check that the flowmeter calibration is close to the number listed on the tag.
If settings check ok:
Check that control valve has been calibrated.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 501

 Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

If PWM, check upper PWM limit under advanced parameters. May need to be set to 100%.

Rate fluctuates around target.

1. Check that a drive calibration has been performed.
2. Check that tips/orifices are sized appropriately for the system.
For PWM / Servo systems:

1. You may need to manually tune the valve.

2. Set valve to manual rate. With the rate in manual the valve should be "locked". If the rate still
fluctuates check the pump and the flowmeter.
For Rawson:

1. Check that the drive is running above 100 RPM.

2. Isolate the drive from the pump. Make sure the drive operates properly with no load.

Spreader Rate Control troubleshooting

Unable to turn motor.
1. Check valve type in Rate control set up.
2. Check that hydraulic motor is receiving flow.
3. Check that motor will pass a drive calibration (PWM) only.
4. Perform a hydraulics test (Rawson).
If the motor will run in the calibration screen, check the operation of the system in the Field-IQ
diagnostics screen.

1. Enter a manual speed and turn all sections on.

2. Arm all sections at the bottom of the screen.
3. If equipped with an implement switch make sure it is calibrated and shows the implement in
the running position.
If motor ran in diagnostics screen:

1. Check color of sections in the run screen. If sections are red there is an issue.
a. Check that system is not outside a boundary (open a new field to test)
b. Check that system is not over a previously applied area.
c. Check that system has a "fixed" GPS position
2. Check that the material has not been disabled in the material detail screen.

502 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 19   Diagnostics FieldLevel II diagnostics valve test

Rate fluctuates around target.

1. Check that a drive calibration has been performed.
2. Set the Rate to Manual. With the drive "locked" the drive should be running steady. If the rate
is still fluctuating check the encoder.
If drive calibration is performed, check that motor(s) have sufficient hydraulic flow.
For Rawson:

1. Check that drive is running above 100 RPM. Adjust gate height to achieve proper RPM.
2. Isolate the drive from the shaft if possible (try to minimize the load on the drive.) Make sure the
drive operates properly with little or no load.

FieldLevel II diagnostics valve test

1. At the Home screen, tap .

2. At the Configuration screen, tap FieldLevel II and then tap Diagnostics.

3. You can test valve functionality at any time at this screen without the need for a GPS position
or an active field design open by either tapping:

l Auto: To engage the system (this sets the current elevation as Target Height = 0.0) and tests its
response as height offsets are added or subtracted from the current elevation, based upon the
current coarse offset entered into the system
l Up or Down: To manually stroke the valve to 100% command in the required direction to verify
valve performance and wiring accuracy

GPS status
1. At the Home screen, tap .
2. At the Configuration screen, tap GPS Receiver and then tap Diagnostics. The GPS Status
screen. Use this screen to check that the GPS receiver is outputting the expected data.
To analyze the GPS signal, see Serial Comms (page 476) to view raw serial data.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 503

 GreenSeeker diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

GreenSeeker diagnostics
The GreenSeeker Diagnostics screen reports on the quantity of sensors detected on system and any
error conditions.

1. At the Home screen, tap .

2. At the Configuration screen, tap GreenSeeker and then tap Diagnostics. The GreenSeeker
Diagnostics screen displays.
The hardware and firmware version information at the top of the diagnostics screen indicates the
display and RT200 are communicating.

Incorrect data
The RT200 system monitors the sensors for proper operation, and if a sensor reports incorrect data,
the data is not included in the rate control calculation. Incorrect data can come from mud on the
sensor lenses, sensors viewing concrete, snow, wet asphalt, or other non soil or non plant surface.

Error conditions
Error conditions include sensors disconnected from the CAN bus, or a sensor transmitting invalid
data.
Invalid data could occur if the sensor malfunctions, or more commonly, if it is seeing a target other
than plants and soil.
For example, when setting up the system, the sensors may be pointed into the air or against wet
asphalt. Either of these conditions will likely generate an error code from a sensor.

Error Code Explanation

-1 Red > NIR Red reflectance higher than NIR
-2 BOTH < .01 Both reflectances are below 0.01
-3 RED < .01 Red reflectance below 0.01
-4 NIR < .01 NIR reflectance below 0.01
-5 BOTH > .98 Either reflectance above 0.98
-9 NIR < .015 NIR net reflectance below 0.15

504 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

19   Diagnostics Row-Guidance diagnostics

Row-Guidance diagnostics
1. At the Home screen, tap .

2. At the Configuration screen, tap Row Guidance and then tap Diagnostics.

Item Explanation

Offline Distance

Status Status of the sensor

Enable / Disable Tap to enable or disable sensors

Voltage Voltage for the left and right sensor

Voltage status Status for the left and right sensor

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 505

Vehicle Sync diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Vehicle Sync diagnostics

1. At the Home screen, tap .

2. At the Configuration screen, tap Vehicle Sync and then tap Diagnostics. The Vehicle Sync
Diagnostics screen displays.
3. Check the signal quality for the WiFi connection.
4. View the other vehicles that are on the selected channel.

506 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 19   Diagnostics Yield Monitoring diagnostics

Yield Monitoring diagnostics

1. At the Home screen, tap .

2. At the Configuration screen, tap Yield Monitoring and then tap Diagnostics. The Yield
Monitoring Diagnostics screen displays.

Status tab
The Status tab includes information on the optical and moisture sensors.

Optical Sensor Item Explanation

Noise level Indicates how clean the optical sensor signal is and if the noise level
is too high.
This number should be less than 30% for best performance. If larger
values are seen, check the following:
l Optical sensor interference
l Worn paddles
l Optical sensors protruding too far into the chamber
l Installation in the wrong location (too low on elevator).

Elevator speed Frequency of paddles, typically 15 Hz to 20 Hz

l Unusually low numbers: Indicate the system is not seeing the
paddles
This most likely occurs when running empty. Inspect the
optical sensor installation.
l Unusually high numbers: Typically be accompanied by large
noise levels
Inspect the optical sensor installation.

Percent Dark The duty cycle.

This data can be used to determine if you are close to exceeding the
capacity of the combine.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 507

Yield Monitoring diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Moisture Sensor Item Explanation

Sensor Value Percent of moisture and the raw sensor value

Can be used by support or engineering if troubleshooting is
necessary.

Temperature

Yield Monitor error messages

State 1 - During boot up
Cause Actions
60 Series 1. Ensure that the correct cable is installed.
Moisture unit 2. Ensure the display is communicating with the CAN bus
Head unit (system / diagnostics / serial port / Port A/B). Is there
Armrest unit another value other than zero for CAN messages?
70 Series 3. For 60 Series Combines: Check if Crop Type will change on
Moisture sensor the Greenstar display after Crop Type on the FmX
CC1 unit integrated display has been changed.
Cab unit
4. For 70 Series Combines: Change the Crop Type in the
Corner post command center and make sure it changes on the FmX
YM 2000 integrated display.
Cannot detect YM 2000
5. Raise the head up or down to see if the display will show a
Serial port change for header height.
6. If step 1 and step 2 resolve the issue, log field data.

508 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

19   Diagnostics Yield Monitoring diagnostics

State 2 - During boot up

Cause Actions
Never sees the armrest, header 1. Ensure the display is communicating with the CAN bus
unit, moisture sensor, or reports (system / diagnostics / serial port / Port A/B). Is there
which one is not visible by the another value other than zero for CAN messages?
display.
2. For 60 Series Combines: Make sure Moisture Sensor has
version 1.20C loaded.
3. For 60 Series Combines: Check if Crop Type will change on
the Greenstar display after Crop Type on the FmX
integrated display has been changed.
4. For 70 Series Combines: Change the crop type in the
command center and make sure it changes on the FmX
integrated display.
5. Raise head up or down to see if the display shows a
change for header height.

State 3 - During boot up

Cause Actions

Will show which controller is not 1. Ensure the display is communicating with the CAN bus
visible (armrest, header unit, (system / diagnostics / serial port / Port A/B). Is there
moisture sensor). another value other than zero for CAN messages?
2. For 60 Series Combines: Make sure Moisture Sensor has
version 1.20C loaded.
3. For 60 Series Combines: Check if Crop Type will change on
the Greenstar display after Crop Type on the FmX
integrated display has been changed.
4. For 70 Series Combines: Change the crop type in the
command center and make sure it changes on the FmX
integrated display.
5. Raise head up or down to see if the display shows a
change for header height.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 509

 Yield Monitoring diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

State 4
Cause Actions
Display has lost communication 1. Check cabling.
with the CAN bus.
2. Recycle power (power down the display and the combine
and wait 20 seconds before powering the display and the
combine back up).
3. Make sure other logging devices are not connected to the
CAN bus (disconnect Mobile Processor or GS2 display).

Yield Monitor troubleshooting

The display is not mapping.
1. Make sure the display Header Height setting is lower than John Deere's setting.
2. Ensure that the crop type is the same.
3. The machine must be in normal harvesting operation mode.

The display stops mapping periodically through the field.

Cause: The header could be raising and lowering past the setting for Stop Logging Header Height.
Action: Increase the Header Height setting on the display.

Display yield information does not match John Deere's information.

Cause: Different crop types may be selected.
Action: Verify the crop types match in both displays.

The display shows a major jump or extremely different weight values from
those shown on the John Deere monitor.
Cause: The Stop Head Height setting is lower than what the John Deere monitor shows. The John
Deere monitor could be logging more data than the FmX integrated display logs, therefore showing
a larger value.
Action: Set the Head Height to 100% on the John Deere display.

510 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

19   Diagnostics Yield Monitoring diagnostics

Yield Monitoring warning messages

Warning message Explanation
Unable to calibrate yield monitor. Occurs when tare calibration fails.
Invalid selection. Please select one of the The user clicked on the wrong line in the Yield
calibration types below this item. Monitor Calibration menu.
No Connection. Please check connections. User attempted to calibrate a device that is not
connected.
Failed to detect yield sensor!!! Some setup parameters cannot be edited
because the yield monitor is not connected.
Yield sensor has not uploaded configuration Some setup parameters cannot be edited
into FmX. because they have not been received from the
yield monitor.
Trimble Yield Monitor not found—check cabling Yield monitor not detected.
and fuses—check Yield Monitor Setup.
Trimble Moisture Sensor not found—check Moisture sensor not detected.
cabling and fuses—check Yield Monitor Setup.
One or more Yield Monitor devices were A device has been disconnected.
disconnected.
Moisture out of range. Check the sensor is Bad reading received from moisture sensor.
positioned properly and not being struck by
paddles, and there is no free water or wet soil
on sensor surface.
The label cannot be oriented along the same Invalid selection in IMU sensor orientation
axis as the connectors. setup.
Choose the options that match the Trimble Attempting to perform roll calibration before
Yield Monitor’s mounting orientation. setting a valid orientation.
Would you like to calibrate the roll sensor?
For accurate Roll Offset calibration you must User did not turn the vehicle around for second
turn the vehicle around. step of roll calibration.
Please select one or more loads to use for Attempted to run load calibration with no loads
calibration. Tap the check mark to select a load. selected.
Would you like to apply the calibration to the
current field?

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 511

Yield Monitoring diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Warning message Explanation

Current field is successfully recalibrated.

Unable to recalibrate current field. Calibration was unable to be applied to field,

possibly due to invalid data in field.
The calibration will be cleared. Are you sure you User tapped Reset in a calibration screen.
want to do this?
The yield sensor calibration has been reset. User confirmed yield calibration reset.
The moisture sensor calibration has been reset. User confirmed moisture calibration reset.
The temperature sensor calibration has been User confirmed temperature calibration reset.
reset.
No load information is available. You must There are no loads for the current crop type.
record some data by harvesting some crop
before you can run this calibration.
This load is too small to be used for calibration The load data is not valid for calibration, usually
or contains invalid data. because the load is too small.
Optical sensor is not responding. Optical sensor failed to respond during tare
calibration.
No loads have been recorded. Use the 'New Displayed in load details dialog if there are no
Load' button on the map screen to record a loads for the current crop type.
load.
This load cannot be deleted because it is used Loads that were used for the current yield
in the yield calibration. calibration cannot be deleted.
This load cannot be deleted because it is used Loads that were used for the current moisture
in the moisture calibration. calibration cannot be deleted.
Loads cannot be recorded when there is no Occurs when tapping New Load in the diagnostic
field open. screen if no field is open.
You have chosen to delete some loads. Are you User tapped OK after selecting loads for deletion
sure you want to do this? in Load Details screen
The system is not yet ready to delete fields or The display needs some time to determine
events. whether deletion of the field/event would
remove a load that was used for calibration. Try
again later.
Accepting the new test weight will affect the
current calibration.
The average moisture will be reset to the Manual moisture will cause the average to be

512 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

19   Diagnostics Yield Monitoring diagnostics

Warning message Explanation

manually entered moisture setting. reset.
Do you want to reset average moisture and Requesting confirmation when setting manual
recalculate dry yield? moisture.
Closing this field will cause your current load The user has chosen to close the field before
being recorded to be automatically finished. ending the load.
Would you like to clean out the moisture The display offers to clean out the Trimble
sensor? moisture sensor when shutting down.
Would you like to begin a new load? The Test User tapped New Load and New/End Load
Weight for the new load is XXXXX. Confirmation is enabled in setup.
What would you like to do? End Load, ends the User tapped End Load and New/End Load
current Load. Cancel, continue with the current Confirmation is enabled in setup.
Load. New Load, closes this Load and starts
another Load.
This operation will delete one or more loads User is deleting a client, farm, field or event that
that were used in the most recent yield or contains one or more loads that were used in
moisture calibration. These loads will not be the current calibration.
available for use in any future recalibration.
CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING. Error in communication with Claas yield
Uninitialized. monitor.
CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING. Cannot Error in communication with Claas yield
configure CAN port. monitor.
CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING. Cannot Error in communication with Claas yield
detect the CLAAS CAN bus. monitor.
CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING. Cannot Error in communication with Claas yield
configured Yield Monitoring. monitor.
CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING. Lost CAN Error in communication with Claas yield
communications. monitor.
CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING. Error state. Error in communication with Claas yield
monitor.
CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING. Head The implement width in the display setup must
configuration differs between the FmX and be set to match the width that was set in the
CEBIS. Claas yield monitor.
YIELD MONITOR: CAN bus error (state#XX). John Deere moisture sensor, head unit or
Failed to detect the following device(s):-….. armrest unit not detected. Check port
selection.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 513

Yield Monitoring diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Warning message Explanation

YIELD MONITOR: CAN bus error (state#XX). Unknown error when communicating with John
Deere yield monitor.
YIELD MONITOR: Failed to update crop type!!! Unable to set grain type in John Deere yield
monitor. Probable communication error.
YIELD MONITOR: Configuration Error Lost connection with John Deere yield monitor.
(state#XX). Verify the FmX is connected to the
CAN bus and CAN bus/combine series
configuration.
YIELD MONITOR: Moisture sensor is not Trimble moisture sensor connection error.
connected
YIELD MONITOR: Temperature sensor is Bad reading received from temperature sensor.
reporting values outside of a valid range
YIELD MONITOR: Field changed on YM2000. YM2000 reported a "field" error.
Verify that the Crop type is not inadvertently
changed on YM2000
YIELD MONITOR: Load changed on YM2000. YM2000 reported a "load" error.
Verify that the crop type is not inadvertently
changed on YM2000.
YIELD MONITOR: Cannot Detect YM2000 Serial Lost connection with YM2000 yield monitor.
Port (state#XX) !!!

514 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 CHAPTER
20
Glossary

A
A+ line
A guidance line you define on your field. The A+ line is defined fixing a point, then heading in a direction.
Guidance lines are for use with automated steering.
AB line
A guidance line you define on your field. You set a beginning point (A) and an end point (B). You use
guidance lines for use with automated steering.
Accelerometer
A device that measures non-gravitational acceleration.
Access path
A space between your guidance lines. They can be useful if there is road (or other field feature that breaks
the consistent flow of swaths) through the middle of your field.
Aggressiveness
The measure of how strongly the system makes steering changes.
Autonomous GNSS positioning
Autonomous GNSS positioning uses no corrections. The rover receiver calculates its position using only
the GNSS signals it receives. This method does not have high absolute accuracy, but the relative accuracy
is comparable to the other methods.
RTK GNSS positioning uses the RTK positioning method to achieve centimeter-level accuracy. To use the
RTK method, you must first set up a base station. The base station uses a radio link to broadcast RTK
corrections to one or more rover receivers.

B
Benchmark
A point on the field with GPS coordinates assigned to it.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 515

 C 20   Glossary

Blade height
Current height of the blade shown as a relative height or a GPS height depending on settings
selected.
Boot depth
Depth of the boot when installing tiles or the depth of the blade when cleaning surface ditches.
Boundary
A line indicating the border surrounding a field.

C
CenterPoint™ RTK for radio
Positioning correction service for radio communication systems. Requires access to a base station
located within a eight-mile radius (approximately) from your farm. An RTK base station sends
corrections via a radio transmitter to a mobile receiver attached to your vehicle. Works well for
farms within 8 miles of an established RTK base station or base station network, without line-of-
sight obstructions such hilly terrain or an abundance of trees.
CenterPoint™ RTX™
Positioning correction service for satellite communication systems. Delivers GPS or GNSS enabled
corrections via satellite directly to your receiver. Does not require a base station or cellular data
plan. CenterPoint RTX corrections are provided on as subscription basis.
CenterPoint RTX for cellular
Positioning correction service for cellular communications. Delivers corrections via cellular network
directly to your receiver. Requires a cellular data plan.
CenterPoint™ VRS™
Virtual reference station. Positioning correction service for cellular communication systems. Enables
RTK (Real-Time Kinetic) corrections over a large geographic area where robust cellular data coverage
is available. Provides high accuracy for guidance applications throughout the whole coverage area.
Requires a cellular data plan. Uses a cellular communication modem, such as the DCM-300 or
Ag3000. Relies on CORS.
Clean grain elevator
After grain has been separated from the rest of the plant, the clean grain auger moves the grain
from the separator to the grain bin.
Client
The customer for whom the work is being done.
Composite slope
The true angle of the fall of the design. In other words, the angle of the slope when two slope angles
are combined.
Controller orientation
Correctly associate the outputs of the Autopilot controller sensors with the direction of the vehicle.
Correction age
Time since the last GPS correction was received.

516 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 20   Glossary D

Correction service
A service which provides corrections to create a higher GPS accuracy.
CORS network
Continuously Operating Reference Station. A network of GPS/GNSS reference stations situated
within the coverage area to transmit RTK (Real-Time Kinetic) corrections to the cellular modem. The
distance between the reference stations and the modem on the vehicle does not affect accuracy.
CORS works well in areas with spotty RTK radio tower coverage.
Curved line
A guidance line you define on your field. You begin recording and drive until you are at the end of
the curved line or segment, then stop recording. Guidance lines are for use with automated
steering.
Cut
A point on the field where dirt needs to be removed. A cut occurs when the existing field is higher
than the proposed field surface.
Cut/Fill ratio
Difference between the blade height (1) and the target height (4):
When cut (dirt to be removed) is displayed, the current ground is above the target. The height
indicator arrow turns red and points down, which means that the blade needs to move down
to reach the target height.
When fill (dirt to be replaced) is displayed, the current ground is below the target. The height
indicator arrow turns red and points up, which means that the blade needs to move up to
reach the target height.

D
Data Dictionary
A set of data that contains categories for entry data when you are setting up client, farm, field and
event.
Design height
The height of the land called for in a design.
Design slope
The slope of the land called for in a design.
DGNSS
Differential GNSS positioning. The GNSS receiver uses corrections from WAAS/EGNOS satellites or
from OmniSTAR HP, XP, G2, or VBS satellites. These differential systems use special algorithms to
provide differential corrections that allow the rover receiver to calculate its position more
accurately. Not all corrections services support the use of GLONASS satellites in their solution.
DGPS
Differentially corrected Global Positioning System (GPS).

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 517

 E 20   Glossary

E
EGNOS
European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service. An SBAS operated by the European Space
Agency.
Event
A precision agriculture activity on a particular field. For example: planting seed, applying fertilizer or
lime, or spraying with fungicide, herbicide or insecticide.

F
Farm
A collection of fields.
Field
Settings created in the FmX integrated display to represent an actual field, one or more parts of an
actual field, or a group of two or more fields. Field profiles include guidance lines for steering, pivot
patterns and landmarks.
Fill
A point on the field where dirt must be added. A fill occurs when the existing field is lower than the
proposed field surface.
Fixed axle
The fixed axle varies depending on vehicle type:

l Rear axle on front steering tractor and self-propelled sprayer.

l Front axle on a harvester and 4x4 tractor
l Center of tracks on a tracked tractor

Freeplay
Movement in the steering linkage through which a movement of the steering wheel will cause no
change in wheel angle.
Freeplay offset
A value entered to give the control system a way to account for freeplay during guidance.

G
GDD

518 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 20   Glossary H

Growing Degree Days. A measurement of heat units since planting above a prescribed base
temperature.
GLONASS
A Russian space-based satellite navigation system.
GNSS
Global Navigation Satellite System. A system of GPS US and Russian satellites that provide
information about geo-spatial positioning. A GNSS receiver can determine its longitude, latitude and
altitude. In the future, GNSS will also use Chinese GPS satellites.
GPS
Global Positioning System. A space-based satellite navigation system. A GPS receiver can determine
its position by using GPS satellites.
GPS autonomous positioning
A mode of operation in which a GPS receiver computes position fixes in real time from satellite data
alone, without reference to data supplied by a base station. Autonomous positioning is the least
precise positioning procedure a GPS receiver can perform, yielding position fixes that are precise to
±100 meters.

H
HDOP
The horizontal component of PDOP.
Header height
A sensor that indicates the position of the head.

I
IMD
Inertial Measurement Device.
IMEI
International Mobile Station Equipment Identity. A number to identify mobile equipment. The GSM
network uses this number to identify valid devices. The IMEI number has no relationship to the
subscriber.
Implement steering
A system that actively steers the implement being towed by a vehicle.
IMU
Inertial Measurement Unit. An electronic device that measures and reports on a vehicle's velocity,
orientation, and gravitational forces, using a combination of accelerometers and gyroscopes.
Integrated radio

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 519

 L 20   Glossary

Trimble integrated radios contain a radio antenna integrated with the GNSS receiver or display in a
single unit. These integrated radios receive corrections transmitted by Trimble GNSS RTK base
stations.

L
Logging
Also called coverage logging. Logging records the area that you have covered when you carry out an
operation, for example applying fertilizer to a field.
License
A license enables a software feature, and is valid for an unlimited duration. A license does not need
to be activated, but does need to be assigned to and delivered to a specific display. Assignment and
delivery of a license occurs on the reseller portal.

M
Manual override
Required for platforms that employ a pressure transducer for the manual override function. Change
the default only if the operation of the manual override function is unacceptable
Master benchmark
Before you can create a survey, you must set at least one point at a known location called a
benchmark. When you create a benchmark, the GPS receiver obtains and records location
information from the base station for that specific point in your field. The first benchmark you
create on a field is the master benchmark and displays as an orange flag labeled MB. Field
coordinates are calculated from this point.
Material
A product that is controlled by a PWM valve, Servo valve, or Rawson drive. You can use a planter
(seed), liquid, granular seed and granular fertilizer, all of which have different setup parameters.
Multipath error
An error caused by the interference of the same signal reaching the receiver by two different paths:
once via the direct path, and once via a reflection. A major cause of GPS errors.

NDVI

520 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 20   Glossary O

Normalized Difference Vegetative Index. Commonly used to measure plant health and vigor. NDVI =
(NIR_reflected Red_reflected)/(NIR_reflected + Red_reflected).
NMEA standard
An electrical, hardware and data standard designed by the National Marine Electronics Association
that dictates the content and format of communication between GPS receivers and other devices.
NMEA messages include data that provides location and accuracy, the number of satellites being
used, the dilution of precision and signal strength.
NEU
Nitrogen Use Efficiency. A percentage of nitrogen taken up by the plant. For example, an NUE of 60%
means that 6 lbs. of nitrogen fertilizer is expected to be used by the plant that year for every 10 lbs.
applied. For more information, visit www.nue.okstate.edu.
NRS
Nitrogen Rich Strip. An area for determining the amount of nitrogen being made available to the
plant by the environment (mineralization, etc), and importantly this year's expected maximum yield
potential and response to additional nitrogen.

O
OEM moisture sensor
Moisture sensor installed by the combine manufacturer.
Offset
Difference between design height and target height. By using the offset buttons, you can create a
plane that is parallel to the original design.

P
Parity
When used with a serial port, an extra data bit is sent with each data character to detect errors in
transmission.
PDOP
Position Dilution of Precision. A calculation that takes into account the satellites that can be seen,
how high they are and their bearing. The outcome of the calculation is an estimation of how prone
to error your GPS position is. The lower the value, the more accurate your position. You may wish to
plan your field work for periods of low PDOP. Generally, the more satellites in view, the better
(lower) the PDOP.
Pivot
A guidance pattern you define for your field by recording the outer circular boundary of the pivot
area and then entering a value to compute the rows within the pivot. Guidance patterns are for use
with automated steering.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 521

 R 20   Glossary

R
RangePoint™ RTX™
Positioning service for satellite communication systems. RangePoint RTX works with a built-in GNSS
receiver. Does not require a base station or cellular data plan.
Rate switch for Field-IQ
Used to select Preset Rate 1, Preset Rate 2, or Manual Rate Control.
Real Time Kinematic (RTK)
A navigation technique to improve the information received from satellite-based positioning
systems. Used with GPS, GLONASS and Galileo.
RI
Response Index. An indication of how the crop will respond this season to additional nitrogen.
Roll correction
Compensates for antenna height and static roll caused by minor variations in the navigation
controller and the mounting of the GPS receiver.
Row
The individual row unit which seed comes from on the planter. This can be controlled individually as
a single row section, or as a group with other rows in a multiple row section.
Run screen
The screen where you perform field activities.

S
SBAS
Space Based Augmentation System. A system of Earth-based systems at points surveyed for
location accuracy that measure satellites, signals and factors that can impact the signals. The SBAS
then broadcasts corrections to satellite signals to improve accuracy.
Scintillation
Causes extreme fluctuations in signals that are received. Scintillation can be caused by turbulence
that creates air pockets with different temperatures and densities.
Section
A number of rows or spray nozzles that are controlled by existing shut-off valve, Tru Count air
clutches, or Tru Count LiquiBlock valves. A section can have either a single row/nozzle or multiple
rows/nozzles depending on how the system is set up.
Section Control Module
Controls 12 sections/rows per module with up to 4 modules (48 module sections / rows).
Service

522 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B

 20   Glossary T

A service is a subscription to an application that lasts for a specific amount of time, such as one or
two years. You associate a service with a specific display that can be delivered wirelessly, through a
QR code included in an email or through download to a computer.
Signal Input Module
The signal input module (SIM) can interface with existing equipment inputs to control on-screen
buttons and features.
Singulation
The percentage of time an individual seed is placed for every intended drop.
Slew time
The amount of time that the front wheels take to move from the far left to the far right position and
back.
Slope heading
The heading direction of the slope.
Steering deadzone
The amount of pressure that the system must apply to the hydraulics before the wheels begin to
turn.
Stop bit
A bit sent at the end of every character to enable the detection of the end of the character. Then the
hardware can synchronize again with the character stream.

T
TAP
Tuning parameter for guidance algorithms.
Target height
Height on the target plane that the blade will attempt to reach. This is the design height (6) ± the
offset (5). When the blade reaches the target height, the height indicator arrow turns green.
Terrain compensation
Terrain compensation calculates the difference between the GPS antenna’s location and the desired
position of the vehicle’s center point on the ground, no matter what slope the vehicle is on.
With this information, the system can tell the difference between a bump and a slope and
compensate the position of the vehicle accordingly. When the sensors are mounted on the pitch
axis they are used to compensate the vehicles position when driving up or down a slope/hill.
Additionally when mounted on the yaw axis the sensors are used to compensate for crabbing which
is caused by steering up the slope constantly, to keep the vehicle in a straight line.
Turn radius - implement
How sharp the vehicle can turn with an implement attached. To determine this radius, measure the
diameter of the turn and divide that number by two.
Turn radius - vehicle
How sharp the vehicle can turn without applying the brakes. To determine this radius, measure the
diameter of the turn and divide that number by two.

Version 9.25, Revision B FmX Integrated Display User Guide 523

 V 20   Glossary

V
VDOP
A measurement of the vertical PDOP.
VI
Vegetation Index. A value that is calculated (or derived) from sets of remotely-sensed data used to
quantify plant health, stress, and vigor.
VRA
Variable Rate Application. The rate of fertilizer or other chemical applied, based on information
supplied to a rate controller.

W
Wheelbase
The distance between the front and rear axles. On tracked vehicles, the wheelbase is exactly half the
length of the track.
Working point of implement
The point where the implement contacts the ground when working.

524 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Version 9.25, Revision B